Home

MELSEC-Q Temperature Control Module User's Manual

1. Q64TCRTBWN 2 Internal VV circuit 1 A D y Internal circuit 1 a C5 i us Internal circuit 1 E D Internal circuit e Current 24VDC CT Cooling 4 A n e cm Filter Heatin b 3 CH1 b 9 Internal Controlled e circuit object 1 Na H2A 7 Filter lu 1 CH2 CH2 b 1 E CT1 CT1 CT2 CT2 CT input circuit C CT8 CT8 1 Use the shielded cable Point To use the heater disconnection detection function the CT input channel assignment must be set Since the CT1 is used in the loop of CH1 in the above wiring example set CH1 1 to CT1 CT input channel assignment setting Un G264 288 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS AND THE PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 5 4 3 Heater disconnection detection wiring and setting example for three phase heater The following figure shows a wiring and setting example to detect a three phase heater disconnection by using the heater disconnection detection function Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN ie AJ L Controlled 1 1 ll 1 1 O 3r RK CT1 CT1 CT2
2. Error C1 occurred r q 19 36 Error A2 occurred Y He 1 LI 1 3 B g E e j g 0 t s 2 E s Programming tool E Error history display 2 S Time Module with error Error code 1 AA 19 29 ModuleA ErrorA1 Error history NN 19 33 CPU Error C1 CPU module Module error log 19 34 Module B ErorB1 Time Module with error Error code 19 36 ModuleA EmorA2 19 33 Error C1 19 209 ModuleA EmorA1 19 34 ModuleB Error B1 19 36 ModuleA Error A2 Example of screen display Error History List Displayed Errors Errors 12 12 Error Code Notation DEC HEX No Error Code Year Month Day Time Model Name Start 110 2 a418 cd 03 0 0 0 00011 BBC2 a418 cdj03 a0 c0 0c QJ61BT11N 0020 00010 FDIC 2009 06 24 10 11 06 QJ71LP21 25 0000 00009 112 2009 06 24 10 10 46 92711 21 25 0000 00008 112 2009 06 24 10 10 02 QJ71LP21 25 0000 00007 ocic 2009 06 24 10 08 28 QO3UDCPU 00006 0700 2009 06 24 10 04 40 QO3UDCPU 2 Supported versions The error history collection function can be used in the CPU module and GX Works2 with the following versions Item CPU module Version Universal model QCPU whose first five digits of serial number is 11043 or later GX Works2 Version 1 09K or later Point For detail
3. Target Setting contents channel 2 Address he Default Read Automatic ETROM eating writ decimal cnt Standard d e value Write setting 2 Reference ix contr ilabili hexadecimal cooling e 3 availability sensor control CT Heating Heating 21 15 CH1 Transistor ransistor transistor output flag output flag output flag Transi Heating Heating 22 164 CH2 pun ransistor transistor QUIDEM output flag output flag Pags 90 Heat 0 R x x Section eating 3 4 2 7 23 17 CH3 Transistor ransistor Transistor 7 output flag 6 output flag output flag Heating 24 18 transistor Transistor output flag 6 output flag output flag 25 19 CH1 Set value SV monitor S lue SV 26 1A4 Se value SV Set value SV Se va SV monitor monitor monitor Page 91 Set value SV Set value SV Set value SV 0 R x Section 27 1B CH3 18 monitor monitor monitor 3 4 2 8 280 7 value SV Set is SV Se value SV monitor monitor monitor Page 91 29 1Dy All CHs Cold junction temperature process value 0 R x x Section 3 4 2 9 Page 91 30 1E All CHs MAN mode shift completion flag 0 R x x Section 3 4 2 10 Page 92 31 1Fy All CHs E2PROM s PID constants read write completion flag 0 R x x Section 3 4 2 11 Z TT Page 94 320204 CH1 Input ra
4. 7 7 m 1 E 8 Li 8 5 6 5 Number Name Description RUN LED Indicates the operating status of the Q64TCN ON Operating normally 1 The watchdog timer error has occurred OFF Online module change enabled CPU stop error has occurred when all channels are set to CLEAR on Switch Setting ERR LED Indicates the error status of the Q64TCN ON Hardware fault Including no connection of a cold junction temperature compensation resistor E Flicker Write data error is occurring OFF Operating normally ALM LED Indicates the alert status of the Q64TCN ON Alert is occurring 3 Temperature process value PV came out of temperature measurement range Flicker Loop disconnection was detected Temperature sensor is not connected OFF Alert is not occurring HBA LED Indicates the heater disconnection detection status of the Q64TCTTBWN and Q64TCRTBWN 4 ON Heater disconnection was detected OFF Heater disconnection is not detected 5 Terminal block for 1 Used for temperature sensor input and transistor output 6 Terminal block for Used for current sensor CT input 7 Cold junction temperature Used when cold junction temperature compensation is executed for the Q64TCTTN and compensation resistor Q64TCTTBWN 8 Serial number plate Indicates the serial number of the Q64TCN 272 4 The terminal block layout differs depending on modules to b
5. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ON i 1 1 i 1 OFF E 1 ON i OFF x i rs M ML M MM E i E OFF i T i 1 OFF 1 CHO Self tuning flag T i Un G575 Un G607 1 i f Un G639 Un G671 T T 1 i 1 1 OFF 1 i 1 i 1 OFF 1 P A a ee eee 1 I 1 ON 1 simultaneous i temperature rise parameter calculation flag Un G573 Un G605 Un G637 Un G669 1 OFF 1 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS d When auto tuning is started with the temperature process value PV within the stable judgment width 1 C F after the setting mode is changed to the operation mode Until the temperature process value PV goes outside the stable judgment width 1 C F the data measured after the module is shifted to the operation mode Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 is turned off and on can be used Therefore the simultaneous temperature rise parameter can be calculated with auto tuning Temperature Auto tuning waveform process value PV Maximum gradient Dead time Time Simultaneous Self tuning start m temperature rise i i AT start ON Setting operation mode status i OFF CHO Auto tuning status 4 OFF
6. X20 B PLS MO J Flag 0 for setting value write ON MO N gt LSET MI 4 Flag 1 for setting value write ON M X10 X13 i AF To U H3D KO K J CH1 Unused channel setting Used TO U H7D K1 K J CH3 Unused channel setting Unused TO Ui H9D K1 K1 J CH4 Unused channel setting Unused Mi M2 X10 X13 J i MF MF TO U H20 K2 K J CH1 Input range 2 x CH1 Heating control output cycle TO U H2F K30 K setting 30s CH1 Cooling control output cycle TO U H2D2 K30 K1 setting 30s TO H2D3 K 1 1 Overlap dead band setting 0 3 2 er 1 Cooling method setting Air cooling cooling capacity low SET Y1B J Setting change instruction ON Mi M2 X10 X13 11 Y1B X1B e k Im Y1B 1 Setting change instruction OFF SET M2 J Flag 2 for setting value write ON M2 X10 X13 X1B 1 1 H AF Ar To Ui H22 K200 Ki J CH1 Set value SV setting 200 C RST M1 J Flag 1 for setting value write OFF RST M2 J Flag 2 for setting value write OFF Program that executes the auto tuning and backs up the PID constants in E PROM This program is the same as that of when the module is in the standard control such as auto tuning self tuning and error code read 7 gt Page 307 Section 7 2 1 7 b Program that reads the PID constants from E PROM This program is the same as that of when the module is in the standard control such as auto tunin
7. Device Description X10 Module READY flag X11 Setting operation mode status X12 Write error flag X13 Hardware error flag Q64TCTTN X10 to X1F X14 CH1 Auto tuning status X18 E PROM write completion flag X1B Setting change completion flag X20 Set value write instruction X21 Auto tuning execute instruction X22 Error code reset instruction X23 Operation mode setting instruction 24 E PROM s PID constants read instruction X30 CH1 Set value SV change instruction Y11 Setting operation mode instruction Y12 Error reset instruction Y14 CH1 Auto tuning instruction Q64TCTTN Y10 to Y1F Y18 E2PROM backup instruction Y1B Setting change instruction Y60 to Y6F Error code output QY42P Y60 to Y9F D50 Write data error code D51 CH1 Temperature process value PV MO For writing set value 0 M1 For writing set value 1 M2 For writing set value 2 M10 CH1 Auto tuning completion flag M20 to M23 CHLI Read completion flag M24 to M27 CHLI Write completion flag b Program example Program that changes the setting operation mode CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING This program is the same as that of when the parameter of the intelligent function module is used L3 Page 305 Section 7 2 1 6 f Initial setting program X20 PLS SET M X10 X13 AF TO Ul H3D KO To Ui H5D K1 TO Ul H7D K1 TO U1
8. 15 Target Setting contents channel 2 Address Pe rad Default Read Automatic EPROM eating k wri decimal current Standard g Mix contro Value Write setting te Reference contr ilabili hexadecimal cooling contro a a 5 availability sensor control 4 CT Simult Pago 152 733 2DDy CH1 AT iid System area System area 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 81 selection Simultaneous Page 153 734 2DEy CH1 temperature rise System area System area 0 R x x Section status 3 4 2 82 Page 154 735 2DFy CH1 Setting change rate limiter unit time setting 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 83 Cooli Coolin ai steers 736 2 0 i H CH2 System area band Pc band Pc 30 R W x Section uu 3 4 2 15 setting setting Cooling upper Cooling upper Page 108 737 2 1 CH2 System area limit output limit output 1000 R W x Section limiter limiter 7 3 4 2 19 Cooling control Cooling control Page 112 738 2E24 CH2 System area output cycle output cycle 30 R W x Section setting setting 3 4 2 23 Page 148 Overlap dead Overlap dead 739 2E3y CH2 System area ue pan P 247 0 R W x Section g band setting 34 2 72 Manual reset Page 149 ME Mese eade om NE Gr ese 3 4 setting 3 4 2 73 Process value Process value Process value
9. channel 2 Address Pe rad Default Read Automatic EPROM eating 3 wri decimal dent Standard 7 v value Write setting be Reference ix contri ilabili hexadecimal cooling contro e a 5 availability sensor control CT Heating control Heating control Page 112 Control output 79 4 CH2 evde output cycle output cycle 30 R W x Section 9 setting setting 3 4 2 23 Page 113 80 504 CH2 Primary delay digital filter setting 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 24 Control Control Control Page 114 81 514 CH2 response response response 0 R W x Section parameters parameters parameters 3 4 2 25 AUTO MAN AUTO MAN na 82 52 ene mode shift mode shift mode shift 9 RAN Section 7 3 4 2 26 Page 116 MAN output MAN output MAN output 83 53 CH2 MU Mb sa 0 RIW x Section setting setting setting 3 4 2 27 Setting change rate limiter Setting change rate Page 117 84 544 CH2 limiter temperature rise 0 R W x Section ve 3 4 2 28 Page 118 85 55 CH2 AT bias AT bias AT bias 0 R W Section 3 4 2 29 Forward reverse Page 113 86 56 CH2 1 R W x Section action setting 3 4 2 30 1300 u m TT Upper limit ae o o o g g setting limiter RT Page 120 5 Section O TT 3 4 2 31 Lower limit Lower limit Lower limit 2000 88 5
10. LZ 7 301 b Parameter setting Set the contents of initial settings in the parameter 1 2 3 Open the Parameter window OD Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Q64TCTTN gt Parameter Click Clear value for Gray Cells to set items unnecessary for the mode set on Switch Setting to 0 Set the parameter 0010 Q64TCTIN Parameter Control Mode Standard Control Clear Value for Gray Cells Set the value of unnecessary items for control mode to 0 Item CH1 Basic setting Control basic parameter setting Control detail parameter setting Input range Set value 5V setting Unused channel setting 200 C O Used Proportional band P setting Heating control proportional band setting Ph Cooling proportional band Pc setting Integral time I setting Derivative time D setting Control output cycle setting Heating control output 30s cycle setting Control response parameter Stop Mode Setting PID continuation flag 3 0 95 0 Slow 1 Monitor 0 5 Forward reverse action setting 1 Reverse Action Upper limit setting limiter 400 C Lower limit setting limiter c Setting change rate limiter or Setting change rate limiter Temperature rise Setting change rate limiter Temperature drop 0 0 0 0 Set the temperature conversion system e ipleK Meas erature Range 0 to 1300 2 oup Temperature R oc 1 Unus
11. 3 3 2 Details of input signals 1 Module READY flag Xn0 This flag turns on to indicate that the preparation for the Q64TCN is completed when the module is turned on from off or when the CPU module s reset is released Make sure that this flag is on when reading writing data from in the buffer memory of the Q64TCN from the CPU module The following shows an example of a program In the following example the start I O number of the Q64TCN is set to 10 Write instruction Et am TOP Hi H22 K100 Used as buffer memory read write interlock If the watchdog timer error is detected this flag turns off The Q64TCN stops controlling the temperature and the transistor output turns off The RUN LED turns off and ERR LED turns on 2 Setting operation mode status Xn1 This signal turns on at the operation mode off at the setting mode ON Setting operation mode OFF m bs instruction Yn1 PN Setting operation mode OFF Em status Xn1 i Setting mode at Operation mode Setting mode Mode transition poweren during operation after operation During mode shift processing During mode shift processing Q seme gt Executed by the Q64TCN a Precautions during the mode shifting The mode shifting means the following timings From Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 OFF ON to Setting operation mode status Xn1 ON above figure
12. 377 Appendix 3 5 When GX Configurator TC was used for the initial setting 378 Appendix 3 6 When a sequence program was used for the initial setting 382 Appendix 4 Online Module Change Procedure When Using GX 2 387 Appendix 4 1 Precautions on online module change 387 Appendix 4 2 Online module change 5 388 Appendix 4 3 Operations of when performing an online module change 389 Appendix 4 4 Online module change procedures 390 Appendix 4 5 When parameters were configured using GX Works2 391 Appendix 4 6 When the initial settings were configured using a sequence program 398 Appendix 5 External 5 406 INDEX 409 REVISIONS S oS ncn ae dese fakin dates bat bep poe eda Bis oe A PEG HR Oda 414 WARRANTY ontnemen due istuc uo dunt Gace EE tente cede 415 13 MANUAL PAGE ORGANIZATION In this manual pages are organized and the symbols are used as shown below The following illustration is for explanation purpose only and should not be referred to as an actual documentation is used for Screen names and items 2311 a Setting method 1 fa 1 shows operating procedures XC shows mouse operations is u
13. 60 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Target Setting contents channel E PROM Address he Default Read Automatic ik eating gt write decimal Standard value Write setting Reference current cooling Mix control B availability hexadecimal control 1 2 3 sensor control 4 pas Page 123 60 3C4 CH1 bod i System area System area 0 R W Section detection dead 3 4 2 34 band Page 124 61 30 CH1 Unused channel setting 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 35 Page 125 62 3Ey CH1 E2PROM s PID constants read instruction 0 R W x x Section 3 4 2 36 Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID E 128 63 3F 4 utomatic backup setting after auto tuning 0 RW x Section constants 3 4 2 37 Z TT Page 94 64 40 CH2 Input range 7 RT R W x O Section 5 3 4 2 12 Page 101 Stop mode i 65 41 CH2 Stop mode Stop mode p E 4 RW Section setting setting setting 3 4 2 13 Page 102 Set value SV i 66 42 gi Set value SV Set value SV SV RAN Sion setting setting setting 3 4 2 14 Heating Heating Page 103 Proportional proportional proportional a 67 43 CH2 30 R W x Section 43H band P setting band Ph band Ph 9 34 2 15 setting setting k Page 105 i i Integral time I 68 44 Integral time 1 Integral time 1 g E I 2
14. Heater CH1 1 Operation input d t TN ALM Heater 2 1 Operation input ESO JE ER Heater CH3 L1 Operation input a X amp 1 L2 s OUT1 L3 OUT2 E 14 e CH4 am OUT3 peration inpu ES y Jije 24VDCI 1 NC i CH2 IN1 1 CH1 Input chi A 3 CH2 Input l l CH2 m N11 Cold junction CJ Ne temperature Gi compensation CJ NC resistor ren CH3 input CH3 M 4 CH4 Input Lj CH4 IN3 3 INA 4 5 e ejnpoyy 94 BuisN ueuM uonouni esu snoeuejnuuis uoisseJddns uano xeed pjepuels ZZ 311 4 Switch Setting Configure the output setting at CPU stop error and the control mode selection as follows 312 Switch Setting 0010 Q64TCTIN Output Setting at CPU Stop Error D CLEAR D CLEAR D CLEAR Control Mode Selection 0 Standard Control xi Auto setting at Input Range Change fo Disable Setting Change Rate Limiter 0 Temperature Rise Temperature Drop Batch Setting xl Caution This dialog setting is linked to the Switch Setting of the PLC parameter Default value will be shown in the dialog v if the Switch Setting of the PLC parameter contains an out of range value Ca
15. Device Description X10 Module READY flag X11 Setting operation mode status X12 Write error flag X13 Hardware error flag Q64TCTTN X10 to X1F X14 to X17 CHLI Auto tuning status X18 E2PROM write completion flag X1B Setting change completion flag X20 Set value write instruction X21 Auto tuning execute instruction X22 Error code reset instruction QX42 X20 to X5F X23 Operation mode setting instruction X24 E PROM s PID constants read instruction Y11 Setting operation mode instruction Y12 Error reset instruction Y14 to Y17 Auto tuning instruction Q64TCTTN Y10 to Y1F Y18 E2PROM backup instruction Y1B Setting change instruction Y60 to Y6F Error code output QY42P Y60 to Y9F D50 Error code D51 to D54 Temperature process value PV MO For writing set value 0 M1 For writing set value 1 M2 For writing set value 2 M10 to M13 CHLI Auto tuning completion flag M20 to M23 CHLI Read completion flag M24 to M27 CHLI Write completion flag CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING b Program example where the peak current suppression function is used Program that changes the setting operation mode This program is the same as that of when the module is in the standard control such as auto tuning self tuning and error code read gt Page 305 Section 7 2 1 6 f Initial setting program X20
16. Major Eror AA Moderate Error Assignment Error Assignment Incorrect 396 Before restarting the control check the following items for the Q64TCN If an error occurs refer to TROUBLESHOOTING gt Page 346 CHAPTER 8 and take corrective action If the RUN LED is on If the ERR LED is off If Write error flag Xn2 is off If Hardware error flag Xn3 is off APPENDICES 5 Restarting control 1 Open the System Monitor window again System Monitor p Monitor Status Connection Channel List Qe M d RR Mode C System Monitor Online Module Change _ 2 Double click the changed module name Diagnostics gt Online Module Change Main Base Information List Module Information List Main Base Base Parameter o Network No Master Base Mode Base odel ame Status EP sees ModelName pont LIH acess c En FER TT n B cu Empty l Pomt 0000 Empty 16Point 0020 Empty 16Point 0030 Empty t6Point 0040 Legend O Eror Major Eror Moderate Error Mnortror Assignment Error Assignment Incorrect Module chaning 3 When the window appears click restart the control Module READY flag Xn0 turns Operation r Target Module Module Change Address 0010 Execution Installation Module Name 964
17. Target Setting contents channel 2 Address Pe rad Default Read Automatic EPROM eating A wri decimal Standard value Write setting rite Reference hexadecimal current ae cooling Mix control 2 5 availability sensor control CT 611 263 eus 2 point sensor compensation gain value 0 RW ae 141 H pa O O ection compensation value 3 4 2 61 Page 142 612 264 CH3 2 point sensor compensation offset latch request 0 R W x x Section 3 4 2 62 Page 142 613 265 CH3 2 point sensor compensation offset latch completion 0 R x x Section 3 4 2 63 Page 142 614 266 CH3 2 point sensor compensation gain latch request 0 R W x x Section 3 4 2 64 Page 143 615 267 CH3 2 point sensor compensation gain latch completion 0 R x x Section 3 4 2 65 616 268 to System area 627 2734 Page 117 628 2744 CH3 Setting change rate limiter temperature drop 12 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 28 629 275y to System area d 636 27C AT simultaneous femp r ture tise simultaneous Page 143 637 270 CH3 p System area temperature 0 R x x Section paramean rise parameter 3 4 2 66 calculation flag calculation flag Page 144 Self tuni Self tuni 638 27Ey CH3 Rie System area 0 R W x Section 9 9 3 4 2 67 145 639 27 CH3 Self tuning flag System area Self tuning flag 0 R x x Section 3 4 2 68 2 point sensor compensation offset value measure
18. When the alert set value is positive When the alert set value is negative Temperature process value PV Temperature process value PV A Set value SV Set value sv gt Time gt Time Deviation E Deviation E Temperature process value PV set value 1 Temperature process value PV set value SVY A Alert set value 0 gt Time 0 gt Time Alert set value Alert status Alert status LL Non alert status J Alert status L Non alert status Alert status 1 Depending on the alert mode this value becomes set value SV monitor or set value SV setting Page 191 Section 4 11 2 a 192 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS c Lower limit deviation alert When the deviation E is equal to or less than the alert set value the system is put in an alert status When the alert set value is positive When the alert set value is negative Temperature process value PV Temperature process value PV A A Set value Sv gt Set value sv gt Time gt Time Deviation E Deviation E Temperature process value PV set value SV Temperature process value PV set value SV A Alert set value f i 0 gt Time 0 r r gt Time Alert set value f Alert status Alert status Non alert status Alert status Non alert status Alert status
19. 1 elejelelelelele elelelejelelelelelelele ooo To the next page y U YM 9 y xipueddy X9 ueuM ejnpoyy p xipueddy eouenbes e Buisn e 403 404 From the previous page 4 Modify Value Device Label Buffer Memory Device Label urteizs o Data Type ei Settable Range Execution Result Execution Result Close Device Label Data Type Setting Value U1 G125 0 Bit ON Reflect to Input Column Clear 8 Set the pre recorded data to the buffer memory To back up the data in E PROM turn off and on E PROM backup instruction Yn8 and write the buffer memory data to E PROM Before restarting the control check the following items for the Q64TCN If an error occurs refer to TROUBLESHOOTING gt Page 346 CHAPTER 8 and fix the error If the RUN LED is on If the ERR LED is off If Write error flag Xn2 is off If Hardware error flag Xn3 is off Because the new module is in the default status configure the initial settings using a sequence program after restarting the control Before configuring the initial settings check that the details on the initial setting program are correct Install a user device initial setting request signal wher
20. 2 Buffer memory areas related to auto tuning Auto tuning can be executed when the following data are set Note that other data must be preset to the values used for actual operation since actual control starts on completion of auto tuning When 0 is set to the proportional band P heating proportional band Ph auto tuning is not executed L gt Page 103 Section 3 4 2 15 Buffer memory address Buffer memory area name Reference CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 Page 94 Section 3 4 2 12 Set value SV setting Un G34 Un G66 Un G98 Un G130 Page 102 Section 3 4 2 14 Upper limit output limiter Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 CHLI Lower limit output limiter Un G43 Un G75 Un G107 Un G139 Page 108 Section 3 4 2 19 Heating upper limit output limiter Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 CHO Cooling upper limit output limiter Un G721 Un G737 Un G753 Un G769 CHO Output variation limiter setting Un G44 Un G76 Un G108 Un G140 Page 110 Section 3 4 2 20 Sensor correction value setting Un G45 Un G77 Un G109 Un G141 Page 111 Section 3 4 2 21 Control output cycle setting Un G47 Un G79 Un G111 Un G143 Heating control output cycle setting Un G47 Un G79 Un G111 Un G143 Page 112 Section 3 4 2 23 Cooling control output cycle setting Un G722 Un G738 Un G754 Un G770 Primary delay digital filter setting Un G
21. Lower limit output limiter Un G43 Un G75 Un G107 Un G139 K gt Page 108 Section 3 4 2 19 Point When using this function set the control output cycles for target channels to the same value Even if the following buffer memory area setting is different by each channel an error does not occur CHO Control output cycle setting Un G47 Un G79 Un G111 Un G143 gt Page 112 Section 3 4 2 23 The module operates according to the value of Upper limit output limiter Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 automatically set when this function is used Ex Timing chart of when timing is divided into four timing ON Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 _ ON Setting operation mode status Xn1 E OFF a Peak current suppression control group setting Un G784 Setting change instruction YnB OFF Upper output limiter 0 w 250 25 0 m Change the automatically Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 Se ui calculated result if needed storing Setting change completion flag XnB OFF 15 Executed a sequence program Executed by the Q64TCN 230 2 Examples of dividing timing a Four timing The following table shows two examples CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS Example Channel Group CH1 Group 1 CH2 Group 2 Example 1 CH3 Group 3 CH4 Group 4 CH1 Group 1 CH2 Gr
22. Stop Monitor 360 Item Value Item Value 130410000000000 Value HOLD CLR 0000 CTRL MODE 0003 0000 0000 0000 APPENDICES Appendix 1 Comparison of the Q64TCN with the Q64TCTT Q64TCTTBW Q64TCRT and Q64TCRTBW APPENDICES The Q64TCN has several new functions in addition to the functions of the Q64TCTT Q64TCTTBW Q64TCRT and Q64TCRTBW hereafter abbreviated as the Q64TC This section describes the comparison of functions I O signals and buffer memory between the Q64TCN and Q64TC in accordance with the addition of the new functions Precautions on replacing modules are also explained 1 Comparison of the functions between the Q64TCN and the Q64TC The following table lists the functions supported by the Q64TCN and the Q64TC Enable A Partially enable x Disable Function Q64TC Q64TCN Remarks Control mode selection function x Output Setting at CPU Stop Error Control method selection function x Manual reset function x O Manual control O O Auto tuning function O O Simple two degree of freedom O O Derivative action selection function x O The temperature rise temperature drop batch setting or individual setting Setting change rate limiter setting fu etisn A can be selected on Switch Setting with the Q64TCN Page 187 Section 4 9 Temperature process value PV sc
23. 209 AGCUFaGy d d ed a e gba 37 Adjustment after auto tuning 184 Aircooled edina sputan quas dA 148 252 Alarm code 357 Alarm priorities llle 358 Alett o BER ig ee BS 190 Alert dead band 201 Alert dead band setting 203 Alert dead band setting Un G164 127 Alert mode and the set value SV to be referred 195 Alert with 5 196 Alert with standby second time 197 Algorithm of PID control in process value incomplete derivation issue e US 23 ALM LED ERG EE RET 272 349 Applicable CPU modules and base units 29 Applicable software packages 31 Applicable solderless terminal 38 Applicable wire 5 38 AT Oil ii ma ar ees a Ronin RED a m 118 AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation completion ex 143 AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation error status eus wed cad ia ES ee RD Mea ee ROS 143 Auto refresh s 296 Auto tuning lt 173 Auto setting at input range change 99 100 157 216 292 Backup of the calculated value on completion of auto UNING Pee Hired aa diate ete dm iO s 175 Base unity cai
24. 37 5 34 Serial number 272 Set value SV and the setting change rate limiter setting Sethe ne Dl TOE PM ao a Be EE PEE ACE ea 191 Set value SV setting 37 Setting change completion flag XnB 52 Setting change instruction YnB 56 Setting change rate limiter 292 Setting change rate limiter setting 157 187 Setting manipulated value MV in MAN mode 91 Setting mode after operation 49 Setting mode at 49 Setting of PID continuation flag UnG169 162 Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 52 54 Setting operation mode status Xn1 48 Settings and the procedure before operation 271 Simple two degree of freedom 22 185 Simple two degree of freedom PID control 185 Simultaneous temperature rise 234 Simultaneous temperature rise AT 238 Simultaneous temperature rise AT disable status 143 Simultaneous temperature rise parameter scant enu eroe tts 144 146 237 Simultaneous temperature rise parameter correction 145 Simultaneous temperature rise parameter error status is nt eee Et a hes aede col A 146 Simultaneous temperature rise parameter setting using selfct nilig gt ass
25. jueuuuBissy yng t Automatic setting when changing the input range 1 Temperature Upper limit Lower limit terme cours measurement ia Resolution ee iit i i imi type Fahrenheit Un G64 Un G96 g limiter setting limiter range digit Un G128 Un G55 Un G87 Un G56 Un G88 Un G119 Un G120 Un G151 Un G152 200 to 400 C 1 4 400 200 200 to 200 C 1 21 200 200 200 0 to 400 0 C 0 1 39 4000 2000 0 to 200 C 1 19 200 0 T 0 to 400 1 20 400 0 0 0 to 400 0 C 0 1 45 4000 0 300 to 400 E 1 110 400 300 0 to 700 F 1 109 700 0 0 0 to 700 0 F 0 1 132 7000 0 0 to 1700 C 1 15 1700 0 0 to 3000 oF 1 106 3000 0 0 to 1800 C 1 16 1800 0 0 to 3000 F 1 107 3000 0 0 to 400 C 1 17 400 0 0 0 to 700 0 C 0 1 44 7000 0 E 0 to 1000 C 1 18 1000 0 0 to 1800 F 1 108 1800 0 0 to 1300 C 1 22 1300 0 i 0 to 2300 F 1 111 2300 0 200 to 200 C 1 26 200 200 0 to 400 1 25 400 0 U 0 0 to 600 0 C 0 1 46 6000 0 300 to 400 oF 1 115 400 300 0 to 700 F 1 114 700 0 0 to 400 1 27 400 0 0 0 to 400 0 0 1 47 4000 0 0 to 900 C 1 28 900 0 L 0 0 to 900 0 C 0 1 48 9000 0 0 to 800 oF 1 116 800 0 0 to 1600 oF 1 117 1600 0 0 to 1200 C 1 23 1200 0 PLII 0 to 2300 F 1 112 2300 0 0 to 2300 C 1 24 2300 0 W5Re W26Re 0 to 3000 F 1 113 3000 0 In
26. Even if an alert occurs before performing an online module change the same alert does not necessarily occur when the control is restarted For example if an upper limit alert with standby is set and the alert occurs before performing an online module change the module goes into the standby status and the alert does not occur when the control is restarted after performing the online module change To check the following items it is recommended to perform the online module change on the actual system and verify that the operation of modules not to be changed is not affected The method and configuration to disconnect the connection with external devices are correct Turning off on and off the switch has no influence After the first use of the module base and terminal block the number of mounting removing is limited to 50 times in accordance with JIS B 3502 Exceeding 50 times may cause malfunction APPENDICES Appendix 3 2 Conditions for online module change To perform an online module change a CPU module a MELSECNET H remote I O module the Q64TCN GX Developer and a base unit as listed below are required The Q64TCN with the first version and later supports the online module change 1 CPU module A Process CPU or Redundant CPU is required For the precautions on the multiple CPU system configuration refer to the following QCPU User s Manual Multiple CPU System For the precautions on the redu
27. Point The same processing is performed for an alarm When the storage area for error histories is full data is overwritten starting from Error history No 1 Un G1280 to Un G1284 and error history recording is continued The history before data overwritten is deleted Recorded error histories are cleared to 0 by turning off and on the power supply or by resetting the CPU module and canceling the reset 267 uonounJ J0 SIH JO4J3 G6Z 4 30 Module Error History Collection Function The errors and alarms occurred with the Q64TCN are collected into the CPU module The CPU module keeps the error information collected from the Q64TCN as a module error history in the memory where data is maintained even at the time of the power failure Therefore the information of the errors occurred with the Q64TCN can be kept even if the power is turned off and on or the CPU module is reset and the reset is cancelled 1 Example of the operation of the module error history collection function Error history CPU module and error log intelligent function module are displayed in one screen l Errors that occurred in the entire system base units can be monitored in chronological order Module A Module B CPU 1 19 29 Error A1 occurred 19 34 Error B1 occurred
28. Tools Intelligent function Select a tage inteligent function module Ses pani F utility Start E eer lodule model name Q64TCTT Start ladder logic test Set TEL data utility Utility list ni ameter st Start 70 No Module model name Initial setting Auto refresh Change display color TSU Sea Options Initial setting Auto refresh 55 D oO 2 2 Q Q gt 1 x x NN Initial setting Auto refresh o2 lait inati TEN Initial setting window Auto refresh setting window Oc Qa Initial setting Auto refresh setting Elo a5 Mode information Temperature Control Module Stet 0 No 0 Module information e CES prs SD Module type Temperature Control Module Start 170 No 0090 Q Seling Rem Toling value Module model name Q64TCTT X CH1 input range iw 1 EH input range Module side Module side Transfer PLC side lt E 2 Setting Buffer size Toner diecion Device Oo Tp range LI ae data eror code 1 1 E o o orici parameter seting parameter seting o Ale fonction sening pure CHT temperature process vahie PV 1 1 5 mm ey res ICH2 temperature process valielPV 1 1 gt a CH3 temperature process value PV 1 1 gt CH4 temperature process value PV 1 1 gt a
29. b In the heating cooling control Q64TCTTBWN Internal circuit fy ue eed a 12 1 L2H VU g Internal circuit 2 E 8 L2C Internal MU circuit Current sensor Cooling 24VDC ED CH1 Heating lt CHT Filter Controlled object e tj prar l CH2 z CH2 Filter Connector Conne 2 onnector a CT1 5 CT1 CT2 CT2 CT input circuit C CT8 CT8 1 Use the shielded compensation lead wire 2 Use the shielded cable Point To use the heater disconnection detection function the CT input channel assignment must be set Since the is used in the loop of CH1 in the above wiring example set CH1 1 to CT1 CT input channel assignment setting Un G264 Use the compensation lead wire for the cable of thermocouple If the compensation lead wire is not used and when the cold junction temperature compensation resistor is away from the end tip of thermocouple the ambient temperature difference may lead to a faulty temperature process value PV Reference junction Thermocouple extension wire OK Q64TCTT BW N
30. 266 Product information 115 1 35 Programming 297 Programming 16 Proportional 104 Proportional action P action 25 Proportional band setting 251 Proportional gain 25 104 QOATGN z pese act pene ited a eae cae 16 Q64TCRTBWN 16 407 16 407 Q64TCTTBWN 16 406 64 16 406 OCPU sao iei MO Sele ahha 16 R125 3 270 Ramp 16 Rating plate cou fa Aad eee VL 34 Redundant CPU 16 33 373 Resol ti n 3 5 s Ce a ctn M Rp erat 39 94 99 Resolution of the manipulated value for output with another analog module Un G181 132 Restrictions when changing modules or applying a sequence program 363 Reverse 24 248 REB Limiter o ae dy ee es 204 RUN LED Werte EN 272 348 Sampling 37 41 290 Self t ning zx Saree Coen A Pee bo katate BRS 219 Self tuning disable status 145 Self tuning 146 Sensor correction function selection Un G785 156 Sensor correction value setting
31. Check Item Action Has a write data error occurred Check the error code list gt Page 354 Section 8 6 and take actions described 348 CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING 8 3 3 When the ALM LED turns on or flashes 1 When turning on Check Item Action Is Alert occurrence flag XnC to XnF ON Check Alert definition UnXG5 to Un G8 and take the appropriate corrective action Page 85 Section 3 4 2 3 2 When flashing Check Item Action Has the temperature process value PV exceeded the temperature measurement range set as the input range Change the setting of Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 to a setting in the temperature measurement range to be used LF Page 94 Section 3 4 2 12 Is there a channel where no temperature sensor is connected Set the channel where no temperature sensor is connected to unused in Unused channel setting Un G61 Un G93 Un G125 Un G157 37 Page 124 Section 3 4 2 35 Has a loop disconnection been detected Check for a load disconnection externally operable device failure and sensor disconnection 349 Jo uo sun GAT WIV ueuMw 8 5 Buisn 8 8 4 Checks Using Input Signals This section describes troubleshooting using input signals 8 4 1 When Module READY flag Xn0 does not turn on Check Item Actio
32. Confirmation Online Module Change Status Module Control Change Module Installation Completion Restart LE r StatusiGuidance he controls such as I O FROM TO instruction executions and tomatic refresh For the installed module are restarted lease confirm the parameter setting wiring etc and press completed utton 4 The online module change is complete MELSOFT Application W Online module change completed ZS310M X9 peunBijuoo ueuM xipueddy XH Burs 1 ueuM ejnpoyy p xipueddy 397 Appendix 4 6 When the initial settings were configured using a sequence program 1 Stopping operation New Project Project Type Simple Project Use Label 2 PLC Series QCPU Q mode PLC Q10UDH Language Ladder All Connections ay Connection Transfer Setup Connection1 CCIE Cont NETQT NET 10 H oard Board Board com 1 Transmission Speed 115 2kbps CCIEField CCIE Field Gt Master Local Communication Ethernet Module Module Head Module Adapter Computer QJ72LP25 BR15 Connection Channel List Single Network Coexistence Network Time Out Sec 30 Retry Times 0 les PLC Type Q10UDH emer el W oat CC Unk CCIECont CCIEFild Ethernet C24 N
33. E27PROM backup instruction Yn8 Default setting registration instruction Yn9 Setting change instruction YnB If the buffer memory data to be saved beforehand is not recorded monitor the data in Buffer memory batch and record it D Online gt Monitor gt Buffer memory batch Point If PID continuation flag Un G169 is set to Continue 1 control does not stop even when Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 is turned off Change PID continuation flag Un G169 to Stop 0 and turn off Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 Whether the control has been stopped can be checked by Setting operation mode status Xn1 being off CPU continuation error such as SP UNIT DOWN and UNIT VERIFY ERR is occurring due to an error in the module to be changed the buffer memory data cannot be saved 382 2 Removing a module System Monitor Installed status Bare 7171515193 Bose Modhie MasterPLC gt 9 Main base HH tt EA Powe UnmafQ64T Unmo Unmo Unmo juni ETT funti funti luni c ply no Ni amp p no no no e QUSPHCPU t c E M Parameter status Mode vo Address o 10 20 30 40 System monitor Online module change Powe None Intelli None None None rsu GO6PHCPU gent
34. Heater disconnection compensation function CHO input range selection CHLI set value SV setting CT monitor method switching CHLI proportional band P setting x 0 196 CTLI channel assignment setting integral time 1 setting Unit s CTLI CT selection CHLI derivative time D setting Unit s CTLI reference heater current value CHLI control output period setting Unit s upper setting limiter CHLI control response parameter CHLI lower setting limiter CHLI stop mode setting CHLI forward reverse action setting PID continuation flag CHLI setting change rate limiter x 0 1 min CHLI alert 1 mode setting CHLI sensor compensation value setting x 0 0196 CHLI alert set value 1 CHLI primary delay digital filter setting Unit s CHLI alert 2 mode setting upper output limiter 0 1 CHLI alert set value 2 CHLI lower output limiter x 0 196 Initial setting CHLI alert 3 mode setting output variation limiter x 0 1 adjustment sensitivity dead band setting alert set value 0 1 alert 4 mode setting CHO AT bias CHLI alert set value 4 CHLI auto tuning mode selection Alert dead band setting x 0 196 unused channel setting Transistor output monitor ON delay time setting Alert delay count 10ms CHLI loop disconnection detection judgment time RT Manipulated value resolution switching
35. Un G547 Un G579 Un G611 Un G643 Page 141 Section 3 4 2 61 value compensation value CHLI 2 point sensor compensation offset Un G548 Un G580 Un G612 Un G644 Page 142 Section 3 4 2 62 latch request 2 point sensor compensation gain Un G550 Un G582 Un G614 Un G646 Page 142 Section 3 4 2 64 latch request Cooling method setting Un G719 Page 148 Section 3 4 2 71 Process value PV scaling function Un G725 Un G741 Un G757 Un G773 Page 149 Section 3 4 2 74 enable disable setting CHLI Process value PV scaling lower limit value Un G726 Un G742 Un G758 Un G774 Page 150 Section 3 4 2 75 Process value PV scaling upper Au Un G727 Un G743 Un G759 Un G775 limit value Derivative action selection Un G729 Un G745 Un G761 Un G777 Page 150 Section 3 4 2 77 Simultaneous temperature rise Un G730 Un G746 Un G762 Un G778 Page 151 Section 3 4 2 78 group setting Setting change rate limiter unit time setting Un G735 Un G751 Un G767 Un G783 Page 154 Section 3 4 2 83 i Peak current suppression control group 7 Un G784 Page 155 Section 3 4 2 84 setting Sensor compensation function selection Un G785 Page 156 Section 3 4 2 85 54 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 2 Error reset instruction Yn2 Use this signal to turn off Write error flag Xn2 and to reset Write data error code Un GO For the method to reset an error re
36. Set the temperature conversion system Clear Value for Gray Cells Set the value of unnecessary items for control mode to 0 Temperature Range 0 to 1300 C Temperature Range D to 1 300 C Temperature Range D to 1300 C Temperature Range 0 to 1300 200C 0c O Used 1 Unused oc 1 Unused oc 1 Unused The Q64TC exercises temperature adjustment control automatically by merely setting the PID constants 3 0 3 0 0 0 95 0 0 95 240s 240s 60s 605 305 305 0 Slow 1 Monitor 0 Slow 1 Monitor 0 Stop The Q64TCTT BW allows you to set the temperature measurement ranges which meet the operating temperatures of the above thermocouples 1 Reverse Action 1 Reverse Action 400 C 1300 oc oc 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 2405 605 305 0 Slow 1 Monitor 1 Action 1300 C oc 0 0 3 0 0 0 240s 60s 30s O Slow 1 Monitor 0 0 Ee Set value Item Description CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 2 ThermocoupleK 2 ThermocoupleK 2 ThermocoupleK 2 ThermocoupleK Set the temperature sensor Measured Measured Measured Measured Input range used for the Q64TCN and the Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature measurement range Range Range Range Range 0 to 1300 C 0 to 1300 C 0 to 1300 C 0 to 1300 C Set value SV Setthe target temperature value 200 0 C 0 C 0 C setting of PID control Configure this setting when the channels where the Unused ch
37. ae tee ne 0 RIW x Section setting setting setting 3 4 2 27 Setting change rate limiter Setting change rate Page 117 116 74 CH3 limiter temperature rise 0 R W x Section 49 3 4 2 28 Page 118 117 754 CH3 AT bias AT bias AT bias 0 R W Section 3 4 2 29 Forward reverse Pager119 118 764 CH3 System area reverse action 1 R W x O Section action setting setting 3 4 2 30 1300 imi Upper limit imi TT 119 77 i5 Upper limit pp Upper limit TT RIW setting limiter setting limiter setting limiter 6000 Page 120 RT Section imi Lower limit imi SAA 120 78 CH3 Lower Mo Fen limit 2000 RW setting limiter setting limiter 6 setting limiter 5 RT 121 79 CH3 System area mm Heat Heater b Heater Page 121 disconnection 122 7Ay CH3 disconnection aler disconnection 0 R W x Section alert setting 1 setting alert setting 3 4 2 32 Loop Loop Page 122 di ti di ti 123 7By CH3 Lp DE System area 480 R W x Section detection detection 3 4 2 33 judgment time judgment time loop Loop Page 123 di fi di 124 7 CH3 hem aii System area aie 0 R W Section detection dead detection dead 3 4 2 34 band band B Unused Page 124 3 setting 9 gt 3 4 2 35 E2PROM s PID E7PROM sPID E2PROM sPID Page 125 126 7 CH3 constants read constants read constants read 0 R W x x Section instruction instruction 9 in
38. 137 Aiowaw Jejnq ey S amp a jueuuuBissy yng t 55 CT selection Un G272 to Un G279 C3 Select the current sensor to be connected to each current sensor CT input a Supported modules Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN b Setting range 0 When CTL 12 S36 8 is used 0 0 to 100 0A 1 When CTL 6 P H is used 0 00 to 20 00A 2 When CT ratio setting is used 0 0A to 100 0A c Current sensor CT to be used and buffer memory setting When using a current sensor CT other than CTL 12 S36 8 and CTL 6 P H set the number of second winding turns of the current sensor CT to be connected in CT Ratio setting Un G288 to Un G295 Set the buffer memory area as follows according to the specification of the current sensor CT to be used Current sensor CT to CT Selection CT Ratio setting Un G288 to Un G295 Ne be used Un1G272 to Un G279 gt Page 139 Section 3 4 2 57 CTL 12 S36 8 When CTL 12 936 8 is used Setting not necessary 0 0A to 100 0A 0 The product is discontinued When ETES PEH used Setting not necessar 0 00A to 20 00A 1 d y CTL 6 P Products of URD Co CTL 6 P H When CTL 6 P H is used Setting not E 0 00A to 20 00A 1 LTD CTL 12 836 10 When CT ration setting is used Set 1000 which is the number of second winding u 0 0A to 100 0A 2 turns CTL 12 856 10 When CT ration setting
39. 406 Externalinput 00000000 0 eee eee 16 External 16 Fixed value 16 Forward 24 248 F llscale eel tes was 16 Function extension bit monitor Un G787 157 F nctiotllst acu eeu MEENA elles med ub 43 Function 34 GX Configurator TC 16 31 33 367 GX Developer 16 31 364 373 GX Works2 16 31 363 388 H W LED Information 360 H W switch information 360 Hardware error flag Xn3 49 350 HBATEED arin eat at UNS LI SLAVES 272 Heater disconnection correction function 260 Heater disconnection correction function selection zo Sz are Ra dete iat 129 Heater disconnection detection 259 Heater disconnection detection specifications 38 Heater disconnection output off time current error detection delay count Un G166 128 Heating cooling control 159 Heating cooling control expanded mode 160 161 Heating cooling control normal mode 160 High response mode 134 How to check error 266 How to execute 1 point sensor compensation standard when using GX 2 206 How to execute 1 point sensor compe
40. AT simultaneous iBmp raturerise simultaneous Page 143 669 29D CH4 e System area temperature 0 R x x Section rise parameter 3 4 2 66 calculation flag calculation flag 144 Self t Self t 670 29Ey CH4 aa System area s 0 RIW x Section d M 3 42 67 Page 145 671 29Fy CH4 Self tuning flag System area Self tuning flag 0 R x x Section 3 4 2 68 672 2A0 to System area 688 2B0 689 2B1 Temperature process value PV for input with 0 RW x another analog module Temperature Temperature Temperature process value process process PV for input 2B24 CH2 PV for input PV for input withanather 0 R W x x with another with another analog analog module analog module 7 module Temperature Temperature p Temperature Page 147 process value process value process value Section 691 2B3j CH3 PV for input P PV for input 0 R W x x 3 4 2 69 H PV for inpu with another PV for inpu with another with another analog analog module 6 analog module module Temperature Temperature Temperature process value process iid ue PV for input process va ue 2B4 CH4 PV for input sith anoiier PV for input 0 R W x x with another with another analog analog module 6 analog module module 693 2B5 System area 694 2B6 System area EXT 73 1811 jueuuuBisse oww NOLPIO
41. From Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 ON OFF to Setting operation mode status Xn1 OFF above figure During the mode shifting do not change the set values If the set values are changed during the mode shifting the module operation cannot be guaranteed Use Setting operation mode status Xn1 as an interlock condition for Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 when changing the setting 48 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Point The conditions whether to perform the temperature judgment PID control and alert judgment by the Q64TCN differ among the following timings Setting mode at power ON Operation mode in operation Setting mode after operation For each detail on the temperature judgment PID control and alert judgment refer to the following Temperature judgment _ gt Page 85 Section 3 4 2 3 PID control 7 167 Section 4 3 6 Alert judgment gt Page 199 Section 4 11 5 3 Write error flag Xn2 The write data error occurs in the Q64TCN when the data is set to the buffer memory in the area where data cannot be written or the timing when data cannot be written After a write data error occurs and the error code is stored in Write data error code Un GO this flag turns on A write data error occurs under the following conditions When data is set in the buffer memory of the system area When the setting of the area which can be written only during the setting mo
42. MELSOFT Series GX Works2 J Switched to setting mode Sensor Compensation Execute sensor compensation Monitoring 5 Target Module 0010 Q64TCTTN 1 Target Channel CH1 X 2 Module Current Sta Input Range 2 Thet asured Temperature Range 0 to 1300 C CH4 L 3 Sensor Compensation Function Selection Select the target channel and enter e A point Sensor Compensation p Standard 1 point Sensor Compensation Standar 2 point Sensor Compensation 2 point Sensor Compensatir Only 1 point sensor compensation Q64TCTT Q64TCTTBW Q64TCRT Qt 4 1 nninF Sensnr Camnensation Standard a i To the next page 206 1 Select the module where sensor correction is executed and click 2 Click 3 Click 4 Select the channel where sensor correction is executed under Target Channel 5 Select 1 Sensor Compensation Standard under Sensor Compensation Function Selection CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS From the previous page Set Sensor Compensation Value and click Click m MELSOFT Series GX Works2 Click To back up the correction value in E2PROM click Temperature pl 5 WS not compensated only by Setting r compensation d gain value 10 Click aum cm MELSOFT Series GX Works2 uonounj Josues
43. Page 118 Section 3 4 2 AT bias setting Un G53 Un G85 Un G117 Un G149 29 Upper limit setting limiter Un G55 Un G87 Un G119 Un G151 Page 120 Section 3 4 2 Lower limit setting limiter Un G56 Un G88 Un G120 Un G152 31 Loop disconnection detection dead Page 123 Section 3 4 2 Un G60 Un G92 Un G124 Un G156 band 34 CHLI 2 point sensor compensation offset Page 140 Section 3 4 2 Un G544 Un G576 Un G608 Un G640 value measured value 58 CHLI 2 point sensor compensation offset Page 140 Section 3 4 2 Un G545 Un G577 Un G609 Un G641 value compensation value 59 2 point sensor compensation gain Page 141 Section 3 4 2 Un G546 Un G578 Un G610 Un G642 value measured value 60 2 point sensor compensation gain Page 141 Section 3 4 2 f Un G547 Un G579 Un G611 Un G643 value compensation value 61 Simultaneous temperature rise Page 151 Section 3 4 2 Un G731 Un G747 Un G763 Un G779 gradient data 79 84 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Stored values differ depending on the setting in Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 Setting of Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 gt Page 94 Section 3 4 2 12 Stored value Setting contents Resolution is 1 0 Nothing after decimal point Resolution is 0 1 1 First decimal place 3 CHO Alert definition Un G5 to Un G8 CR Bits corresponding to alerts det
44. System area 239 EF 68 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Target Setting contents channel 2 Address he Default Read Automatic ETROM eating writ decimal nent Standard i cci value Write setting n ix contr ilabili hexadecimal NONE cooling e 3 availability sensor control Alert 1 mode Alert 1 mode Alert 1 mode 240 F Ou CH4 M Mu do 0 R W x setting setting setting 241 F1 eda Alert 2 mode Alert 2 mode Alert 2 mode RW H x setting 9 setting 6 9 setting 9 Page 135 Section Alert 3 mode Alert 3 mode Alert 3 mode 3 42 52 242F2 e ae on 0 RW x ETUR setting setting setting Alert 4 mode Alert 4 mode Alert 4 mode 243 F 34 CH4 M um 0 R W x setting setting setting 244 F4 to System area 255 FF 256 100 CT1 Heater current process value 11 257 1014 CT2 Heater current process value 258 102 CT3 Heater current process value 259 103 CT4 Heater current process value Page 136 n 0 R x x Section 260 1044 CT5 Heater current process value 11 3 42 53 261 105 CT6 Heater current process value 262 106 CT Heater current process value 263 107 CT8 Heater current process value 264 108 CT1 CT input channel pr
45. gt Page 161 Section 4 1 3 2 Available only under the mix control expanded mode For details on the expanded mode refer 5 Page 161 Section 4 1 3 a Performing auto tuning To perform auto tuning turn CHLI Auto tuning instruction Yn4 to Yn7 on from off While auto tuning is in process this signal is on and turns off at the completion of the auto tuning Auto tuning instruction Yn4 to Yn7 OFF Auto tuning status During auto tuning Xn4 to Xn7 Executed in a sequence program Executed by the Q64TCN For details on the auto tuning function refer to the following s Page 173 Section 4 6 b Self tuning This signal turns on when self tuning starts This signal automatically turns off at the completion of the self tuning Set a self tuning option in Self tuning setting Un G574 Un G606 Un G638 Un G670 s Page 144 Section 3 4 2 67 Self tuning can be executed only in the standard control For details on the self tuning function refer to the following L gt Page 219 Section 4 17 50 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 6 E PROM write completion flag Xn8 Turning E PROM backup instruction Yn8 on from off starts the writing of the buffer memory data to the E PROM After the data writing is completed this flag turns on Turning E PROM backup instruction Yn8 off from on also turns off this flag E PROM backup instruction op
46. manipulated value MV T 1 gt 3 Decal rp CH2 manipulated value NV 1 T gt O A CH3 manipulated 1 T gt Tad manipulated value MV T 1 3 Q o 3 zh Q Make text file End setup Cancel Make text file End setup Cancel c E o 3 367 1 Online Monitor Test Select monitor test module dialog box Select monitor test module Select monitor test module Start 1 0 No Module type 0090 Module model name QB4TCTT Module implementation status Start 1 0 No Module model name 0090 064 Monitor T est Select a module to be monitored tested Monitor Test window 0097 Seti iem vale Selina value Vis data arar code Fash ROM seting Deis Curent value Moritoring dria Maka tet fle Step montor Toss The Module model name is displayed as shown below For the Q64TCTTN Q64TCTT For the Q64TCRTN Q64TCRT For the Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCTTBW For the Q64TCRTBWN Q64TCRTBW 368 APPENDICES 2 GX Configurator TC functions The following table shows the functions of GX Configurator TC Function Description Configure the initial settings for each channel to operate the Q64TCN Set the data for items that require an initial setting
47. output limiter output limiter Output variation bise Output actas 108 6C CH3 m Mu variation limiter variation limiter 0 R W x Section 9 setting setting 3 4 2 20 Page 111 109 6Dy CH3 Sensor correction value setting 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 21 Adjustment Adjust t Adjustment J nee 111 dh sensitivity sensitivity i 110 6E4 CH3 sensitivity dead 5 R W x Section dead band dead band band setting M 3 4 2 22 setting setting Heating control Page 112 mew ce Omm mare Cowart ay ew set i setting 9 4 3 3 4 2 23 Page 113 112 70 CH3 Primary delay digital filter setting 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 24 63 1811 jueuuuBisse oww Jeynq NOLT9O L Ve jueuuuBissy yng t Target Setting contents channel 2 Address Pe rad Default Read Automatic EPROM eating 3 wri decimal Standard E trol value Write setting be Reference Ix ntr i ili hexadecimal control cooing coniro T 12 availability sensor control 4 CT Control Control Control Page 114 113 71 CH3 response response response 0 R W x Section parameters parameters parameters 3 4 2 25 Page 115 AUTO MAN AUTO MAN AUTO MAN 114 724 CH3 0 R W x Oo Section mode shift mode shift mode shift 3 4 2 26 Page 116 MAN output MAN output MAN output j 115 73 CH3
48. 11 Click NECS MELSOFT Series GX Works2 d To the next 207 From the previous page i Keyser 12 Click L cise Close 13 Click MELSOFT Series Works2 Exit the sensor compensation setting Are you sure you want to continue 14 To shift from the setting mode to the operation MELSOFT Series GX Works2 Setting mode Do you want to shift to operation mode mode click End By executing 1 point sensor compensation in Sensor Compensation the action after the correction can be checked temporarily To use the compensation value set in Sensor Compensation thereafter set it on Sensor correction value setting in Parameter Doing so holds the compensation value as a parameter For the setting in Parameter refer to the following Page 293 Section 6 3 b How to execute 1 point sensor compensation standard when using the program Follow the instructions below 1 Set 1 point sensor compensation standard 04 in Sensor compensation function selection Un1G785 7 7 Page 156 Section 3 4 2 85 2 Set the correction value in Sensor correction value setting Un G45 Un G77 Un G109 Un G141 Page 111 Section 3 4 2 21 208 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 2 2 point sensor compensation function With this func
49. 308 Program that executes the auto tuning and backs up the PID constants in E 2PROM Y14 Y14 M10 Y18 Y18 M10 Ki K4Y60 12 12 J CH1 Auto tuning instruction ON J CH1 Auto tuning instruction OFF CH1 Auto tuning completion flag ON J E PROM backup instruction ON J E PROM backup instruction OFF 3 CH1 Auto tuning completion flag OFF 1 Read a write data error code to 050 Output data read from a write data error code to Y60 to Y6F 1 Error reset instruction ON 1 Error reset instruction OFF Read CH1 Temperature process X21 X10 X13 X11 tf 1 LAS 1 SET X14 1 RST SET M10 Y18 LAS sET Y18 X18 1 RST RST Program that reads the PID constants from E PROM This program is the same as that of when the parameter of the intelligent function module is used L gt Page 305 Section 7 2 1 6 f Program that reads an error code and the temperature process value PV X10 FROM Ut HO D50 MOV D50 X22 SET Y12 X12 H D50 HO 1 RST X10 X11 1 H FROM U1 H9 D51 Program that changes the set values SV K1 value PV to D51 This program is the same as that of when the parameter of the intelligent function module is used Page 305 Section 7 2 1 6 f CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING 7 2 2 Standard control peak current suppression function simultaneous temperature rise
50. CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 13 Stop mode setting Un G33 Un G65 Un G97 Un G129 Gi Set the mode activated at PID control stop a Setting range and action of Q64TCN The following table lists the relationship O Executed x Not executed Action Mode which can Set value of Stop mode setting Temperature Alert be set Un G33 Un G65 Un G97 Un G129 PID control 3 judgment judgment Stop 0 x x x Monitor 1 x Alert 2 x 1 Means that the Q64TCN checks whether the input temperature is in the temperature measurement range set in the input range However action of the Q64TCN differs depending on the following settings Unused channel setting Un G61 Un G93 Un G125 Un G157 s Page 124 Section 3 4 2 35 e Setting operation mode instruction 1 gt Page 54 Section 3 3 3 1 e PID continuation flag Un G169 s Page 129 Section 3 4 2 43 PID control forced stop instruction YnC to YnF gt Page 56 Section 3 3 3 7 e Output Setting at CPU Stop Error Switch Setting lt gt Page 292 Section 6 2 For details refer to the following e PID Page 167 Section 4 3 6 Temperature judgment gt Page 85 Section 3 4 2 3 Alert judgment 7 gt Page 199 Section 4 11 5 b Default value The default values are set to Monitor 1 in all channels Point Default values are set to Monitor
51. CHLIPID auto correction status b0 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 OFF CHO Simultaneous temperature rise parameter correction status b1 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 OFF Self tuning flag Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 uonouny esr einjejeduie snoeueynwis 6 Simultaneous temperature rise parameter error status b9 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 OFF CHO Self tuning error b10 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 OFF CHDAT simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation completion bO of Un G573 Un G605 Un G637 Un G669 OFF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CHO Auto tuning instruction Yn4 to Yn7 OFF 1 T 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation flag Un G573 Un G605 Un G637 Un G669 CHO Simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation error status b1 of Un G573 Un G605 Un G637 Un G669 OFF ipee ey eee eee ses mene erect tese ee ere 247 4 20 Forward Reverse Action Selection Function Standard Whether PID operation is performed with forward action or reverse action can be selected using this function This function can be used in all the control methods two position control P control PI control PD control and PID con
52. Did the temperature adjustment control start Or did the set value SV change YES Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 turns on Starting ST NO Is the temperature process value PV changed out of the set value SV PID auto correction status bO of Un G575 Un G607 Un1G639 Un G671 turns OFF Is the response erratic sed on the set The module is controlled ba PID constants CHO Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 turns on Vibration ST PID constants are calculated by self tuning Vibration S1 Response failed CHO PID auto correction status b0 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 turns OFF PID constants are calculated and changed by self tuning The setting is changed to PID constants calculated by self tuning CHO PID auto correction status bO of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 turns ON CHO PID auto correction status bO of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 turns ON Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 turns off uonounj DuiunJles Temperature is controlled by the set PID constants Self tuning completion 221 4 Operation with starting ST This section explains the operation of when the temperature control is started or the set value SV is changed starting ST With starting ST the module monitors t
53. Point The standard setting value for Heater disconnection alert setting Un G58 Un G90 Un G122 Un G154 is 80 However the current value may significantly change depending on the characteristics of a heater or how the heater is used Check that there is no problem in the actual system write data error error code 00043 occurs if the current value to be used as a judgment value to detect heater disconnection reference heater current value x Heater disconnection alert setting is within 0 1A under one of the following situations CTLI CT selection Un G272 to Un G279 is set to When CTL 12 S36 8 0 0A to 100 0A is used 0 CTO CT selection Un G272 to Un G279 is set to When CT ratio setting is used 0 0A to 100 0A 2 In addition when CTL 6 P H used 0 00A to 20 00A 1 has been set and the current value to be used as a judgment value to detect heater disconnection reference heater current value x Heater disconnection alert setting is within 0 01A Write data error error code LILILI44 occurs 3 Heater disconnection correction function When heater voltage is dropped heater current is reduced The Q64TCTTBWN and Q64TCRTBWN detect heater disconnection by measuring heater current therefore an accidental alert may occur due to a voltage change caused by a reduced heater voltage The heater disconnection correction function offsets the amount of heater current reduced heat
54. Shielded cable NG gt Cold junction temperature compensation resistor Terminal block Reference junction of the thermocouple B Cold junction temperature compensation resistor Ambient temperature difference 284 3 Q64TCRTN a In the standard control CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS AND THE PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION Q64TCRTN Cl L1 L l y Internal D T circuit f j P L4 v Internal 55 circuit COM 1 24VDC A m CH1 Al B H CHT B Filter ICH1 b y object J H2A Filter Internal 4 H2B circuit 4 ICH2 b 0 4 CT HAM Filter l H4 b 4 Use the shielded cable 285 6 9 b In the heating cooling control Q64TCRTN 1 EY 4 Internal circuit ca Internal circuit 1 f S Internal circuit Internal 7 circuit Heating Cooling 1 A 1 1 GE em A Filter
55. The PID control is performed in the following procedure Read the temperature process value PV Import a signal from the temperature sensor and write it to the temperature process value data storage area as a temperature process value PV Perform PID operation a a a a Perform PID operation using the Set value SV temperature process value PV values in the set value temperature process value data storage area Output the manipulated value MV Convert manipulated value MV obtained by the PID operation to transistor output on time and output it ueis s Cid 9euL Zt 21 3 PID control simple two degree of freedom The Q64TCN operates in simple two degree of freedom In this form of PID control parameters are simplified compared to the two degree of freedom PID control In the simple two degree of freedom the module controls the target subject using not only PID constants but also the control response parameter The parameter can be set to fast normal or slow This setting enables the form of response to the change of the set value SV to change maintaining response to the disturbance in a good condition gt Page 185 Section 4 7 Fast Normal Set value Set value SV SV Slow Response to the change Response to the disturbance of the set value SV The following explains the difference between the one degree of freedom PID contr
56. When channels are divided as following CH1 and CH2 Group 1 CH3 and CH4 Group 2 Temperature process value PV A Matches temperature rise completion time in each group CH1 Set value SV 25 CH2 Set value SV 227 2222 Im CH3 Set value SV Set value SV Temperature rise start Group 1 Group 2 Time arrival point Setting operation OFF i mode instruction Yn1 2 CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise status Un G734 1 and CH2 Simultaneous temperature rise status Un G750 1 L 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 i i arrival point i L 1 T 1 i 1 1 D 1 CH3 Simultaneous temperature rise status Un G766 1 and CH4 Simultaneous temperature rise status Un G782 1 1 They become Simultaneous temperature rise in process 1 when the temperature rise starts however they become Simultaneous temperature rise not in process 0 before the temperature rise starts When the operation mode is changed to the setting mode Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 is turned on and off during simultaneous temperature rise the control is stopped In addition Simultaneous temperature rise status Un G734 Un G750 Un G766 Un G782 changes from Simultaneous temperature rise in process 1 to Simultaneous temperature rise not in process 0 An error does not occur When the simultaneous temperature rise functi
57. control Self tuning X PID control CHO Simultaneous temperature rise gradient data Un G731 Un G747 Un G763 Un G779 and Simultaneous temperature rise dead time Un G732 Un G748 Un G764 Un G780 i p T i value ON CHO Simultaneous temperature rise parameter correction status OFF b1 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 Temperature control start set value SV change or oscillation detected SEES gt Executed by the Q64TCN uonouny esr einjejeduie snosueynwis 6 241 b Condition for the simultaneous temperature rise parameter setting using self tuning The condition is the same as that for the starting ST gt Page 223 Section 4 17 4 a When the self tuning cannot be started up the Q64TCN operates as following with the PID control continued CHO Self tuning disable status b8 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 is turned 1 ON The following shows how the Q64TCN operates when self tuning is not executed CHD Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 Control status ID control CHU Self tuning disable status b8 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 OFF Temperature control start set value SV change or oscillation detected ON c When the simultaneous temperature rise parameter cannot be calculated The simultaneous temperature rise parameter cannot be calculated under the following conditions When the maximum gradient is not determined When the satu
58. in all channels 121 Jang ey Sed jueuuuBissy yng t 33 CHO Loop disconnection detection judgment time Un G59 Un G91 Un G123 Un G155 2 Errors such as disconnection of resistors malfunction of an external controller and errors of the control system due to troubles such as disconnection of the sensor can be detected by the loop disconnection detection function If temperature does not change by 2 C F or more in the Loop disconnection detection judgment time a loop disconnection is detected For details on the loop disconnection detection function refer to the following Page 249 Section 4 21 a Setting range The setting range is 0 to 7200 s Set a value that exceeds the time in which temperature changes by 2 C F b When performing auto tuning For this setting the twice value of that of CHO Integral time I setting Un G36 Un G68 Un G100 Un G132 is automatically set Page 105 Section 3 4 2 16 However when this setting is set to 0 s at the start of the auto tuning Loop disconnection detection judgment time is not stored c Default value The default values are set to 480 s in all channels 122 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 34 CHO Loop disconnection detection dead band Un G60 Un G92 Un G124 Un G156 Glia To prevent an error alarm of Loop disconnection detection set a non alert band temperature band in which the loop di
59. s Page 173 Section 4 6 a Setting range 0 Standard mode 1 High response mode b Default value The default values are set to Standard mode 0 in all channels CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 52 Alert 1 mode setting Un G192 Un G208 Un G224 240 8 Alert 2 mode setting Un G193 Un G209 Un G225 Un G241 GEES Alert 3 mode setting Un G194 Un G210 Un G226 Un G242 GED Alert 4 mode setting Un G195 Un G211 Un G227 Un G243 2 Set the alert mode of alert 1 to 4 For details on the alert function refer to the following Page 190 Section 4 11 a Alert mode and alert set value Any alert set value can be set in each alert mode of alert 1 to 4 selected in this setting Set the alert set value 1 to 4 in the following buffer memory areas Alert set values 1 to 4 respectively correspond to alert modes of alert 1 to 4 Buffer memory address Buffer memory area name Reference CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Alert set value 1 Un G38 Un G70 Un G102 Un G134 Alert set value 2 Un G39 Un G71 Un G103 Un G135 Page 106 Section 3 4 2 18 Alert set value 3 Un G40 Un G72 Un G104 Un G136 Alert set value 4 Un G41 Un G73 Un G105 Un G137 b Setting range The following table lists set values and setting ranges which are available for alert set values set in each alert mode BOR N
60. 1 Depending on the alert mode this value becomes set value SV monitor or set value SV setting gt Page 191 Section 4 11 2 a d Upper lower limit deviation alert When one of the following conditions is satisfied the system is put in an alert status Deviation E 2 Alert set value Deviation E x Alert set value uogound LL Temperature process value PV A ot E Set value SV gt Time Deviation E Temperature process value PV set value SV A Alert set value M gt Time Alert set value 1 9 9 Alert status Non alert status Alert status 1 Depending on the alert mode this value becomes set value SV monitor or set value SV setting 7 gt Page 191 Section 4 11 2 a 193 e Within range alert When the following condition is satisfied the system is put in an alert status Alert set value x Deviation E x Alert set value Temperature process value PV 7 a Set value SV M a PM gt Time Deviation E Temperature process value PV set value SV 1 Alert set value a ES 0 r r n gt Time Alert set value r r Be A Alert status Non alert status Alert status 1 Depending on the alert mode this v
61. 1 Slot Occupy 16 points Title Setting Title Item Description Module Module Type Set Temperature Control Module Selection Module Name Select the module model name to mount Base No Set the base unit where the module is mounted Mount Mounted Slot No Set the slot No where the module is mounted Position Specify start XY The start I O number hexadecimal of the target module is set according to the slot address No An arbitrary start I O number can be also set Title Setting Title Set an arbitrary title 291 JO UOHIPPY 9 6 2 Switch Setting Configure settings such as the output setting at CPU stop error and the control mode selection which are used in each channel 1 Setting method Open the Switch Setting window Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Module name gt Switch Setting Switch Setting 0010 Q64TCTTN Output Setting at CPU Stop Error D CLEAR O CLEAR O CLEAR Control Mode Selection o standard Control Auto setting at Input Range Change Jo Disable Setting Change Rate Limiter O Temperature Rise Temperature Drop Batch Setting m Caution This dialog setting is linked to the Switch Setting of the PLC parameter Default value will be shown in the dialog if the Switch Setting of the PLC parameter contains an out of range value Cancel Item Description Set
62. Base Installed 5 Modules Power Base Module Base ModelName Poe Status Series Model Name Point Base TET Slot Point Address Station No Extension Basel aS ell Extension Base Empty Eme iet 0000 Extension Bases Pont Inteli 16Pont _ 0010 Extension 2 Empty Empty i Pont 0020 Extension Base5 Empty Empty 16Point 0030 Extension Bases loa Empty Extension Base Legend Os Major Eras Moderate Error Minor Eror_ Assignment Error Assignment Incorrect Stop Monitor Print Product Information List System Error History 2 After confirming that an error is displayed on the n Q64TCN select the Q64TCN and click PLC Pide Cormecton ust Detailed Information sree Beem If an error LED is ON on a module other than the ae E E Q64CTN refer to the user s manual for the module and take corrective action DE assignment Error Assirment mncorrzct Stop Monitor Pit Product Infermaton ist Sester Error Close the next page 346 From the previous page l Module s Detailed Information Module Monitoring Model Name Q64TCTTN Address 0010 Mount Position __ Product Information 130410000000000
63. CH2 E PROM s PID constants read LTOP ul HSE Kt Ki instruction Requested a o 2E TOP U1 H7E K1 K CH3 E PROM s PID constants read 5 instruction Requested es Q CH4 PID constants read ul Ki K instruction Requested g L Read bit data from b7 to b0 of E PROM s 2 9 LFROM U1 2 20 K J PID constants read write completion flag to 5 M20 to M27 3 M20 X10 2 Q 4 CH1 E PROM s PID constants read 3 LTOP H3E Ko K instruction Not requested Q S 21 X10 2 5 Q CH2 PID constants read Ul Ko K instruction Not requested gg 32 M22 X10 2 r CH3 E PROM s PID constants read 5 LTOP Ut H7E K instruction Not requested 5 2 M23 X10 2 CH4 E PROM s PID constants read LTOP Ul HOE Ko K instruction Not requested a 3 o c F o n c 2 9 317 318 Program that reads an error code x10 MOV D50 Kaveo J Output a write data error code to Y60 to Y6F X22 5 LSET Yi2 J Error reset instruction ON Y12 Xi2 2 MMA D50 HO RST Yi2 J Error reset instruction OFF I _ 1 7 Program example of when not using the parameter of an intelligent function module a Devices used by a user
64. Input from the temperature sensor Manipulated value for for heating MVh L1H PID heating CHO Manipulated operation MVh value for heating MVh L2H Controlled object Heating Controlled object Un G13 Un G14 Heating transistor output Mantuani Un G15 Un G16 Manipulated value transistor gt anipulate f ling MVi output valine for for cooling TE A ou cooling Manipulated MVc p value for cooling MVc gt L2c Un G704 Un G705 Cooling transistor output Cooling transistor output Set value Un G706 Un G707 P gt i oO Initial setting Set value Output module TO instruction SV setting on the same base unit p Un G34 Un G66 Set value Un G98 Un G130 SV as the Q64TCN or in the same network as the Q64TCN Heating I transistor output 1 Output signals 1 OUT instruction 1 of Heating transistor output flag Um G21 Un G22 Un G23 Un G24 gt v20 Manipulated value gt TB1 L3H ty ya for heating MVh TB2 L4H Eg 1 1 1 1 1 Y22 Manipulated value Y23 for cooling MVc TBA LAC Cooling transistor output OUT instruction of Cooling transistor output flag Un G712 Un G713 Un G714 Un G
65. Install the cables far apart from high frequency circuit cable such as the high voltage cable and inverter load main circuit as much as possible This increases the noises surges and induction Ground the shield line or shielded cable at one end on the programmable controller side However depending on the external noise condition it should be grounded externally To ensure that this product maintains EMC and Low Voltage Directives please refer to the manual included with the CPU module or base unit 280 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS AND THE PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 5 4 2 External wiring 1 Q64TCTTN a In the standard control Q64TCTTN Internal circuit Internal circuit Filter Internal circuit object Filter Filter HB 1 Use the shielded compensation lead wire 2 Use the shielded cable Point Use the compensation lead wire for the cable of thermocouple If the compensation lead wire is not used and when the cold junction temperature compensation resistor is away from the end tip of thermocouple the ambient temperature difference may lead to a faulty temperature process value PV Reference junction Thermocouple extension wire OK Q64TCTT BW N Shielded cable NG lt VU A Cold junction temperature compensation resistor L Terminal block Ambient temperature d
66. PLS MO Flag 0 for setting value write ON _ p I SET M Y Flag 1 for setting value write ON M1 X10 X13 J AF To Ul H3D KO Ki J CH1 Unused channel setting Used TO U H5D KO K J CH2 Unused channel setting Used TO ul H7D KO K J CH3 Unused channel setting Used TO U H9D KO K F CH4 Unused channel setting Used M1 M2 X10 X13 yii ih 1 H AF LAS TO U H20 K2 K J CH1 Input range 2 TO U H40 K2 K J CH2 Input range 2 TO U H60 K2 K CH3 Input range 2 7 To U1 H80 K2 K J CH4 Input range 2 TO ul H2F K20 K J CH1 Control output cycle setting 20s TO Ul H4F K20 K J CH2 Control output cycle setting 20s To Ul H6F K20 K J CH3 Control output cycle setting 20s TO Ut H8F K20 K CH4 Control output cycle setting 20s M1 M2 x10 x13 Yi Peak current suppression control 1 7 group setting AF PAR TO Ut H310 H4321 Ki J Bet Group 1 CH2 Group 2 CH3 Group 3 CH4 Group 4 3 SET 1 Setting change instruction ON M1 M2 X10 X13 yii X1B E 2 AF LAS RST Y1B J Setting change instruction OFF B gt SET M2 Flag 2 for setting value write ON o M2 X10 X13 X1B 1 H AF AF To Ui H22 K200 K Y CH1 Set value SV setting 200 C o TO Ut H42 K250 K1 J CH2 Set value SV setting 250 C m To ui H62 K300 K j CH3 Set value SV setting 300 C 3 a D TO Ut H82 K350 K 1 Set value SV setting 350 C a L RST M1 Flag 1 for setting value write OFF 3 LRST M2
67. Page 149 Section 3 4 2 74 Process value PV scaling lower limit value Process value PV scaling upper limit value Page 150 Section 3 4 2 75 Derivative action selection Page 150 Section 3 4 2 77 Simultaneous temperature rise group setting Page 151 Section 3 4 2 78 Simultaneous temperature rise AT mode selection Setting change rate limiter Unit time setting Page 152 Section 3 4 2 81 Page 154 Section 3 4 2 83 Peak current suppression control group setting Page 155 Section 3 4 2 84 Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants Page 126 Section 3 4 2 37 Cold junction temperature compensation selection Page 133 Section 3 4 2 49 Alert 1 to 4 mode setting Page 135 Section 3 4 2 52 Alert set value 1 to 4 Page 106 Section 3 4 2 18 Alert dead band setting Page 127 Section 3 4 2 38 Number of alert delay Page 127 Section 3 4 2 39 Loop disconnection detection judgment time Page 122 Section 3 4 2 33 Loop disconnection detection dead band Page 123 Section 3 4 2 34 Heater disconnection alert setting Page 121 Section 3 4 2 32 Heater disconnection output off time current error detection delay count Page 128 Section 3 4 2 40 Heater disconnection compensation function selection Page 129 Section 3 4 2 44 AT Bias Page 118 Section 3
68. Section 3 4 2 24 Control Control Control Page 114 145 9114 CH4 response response response 0 R W x Section parameters parameters parameters 3 4 2 25 Page 115 AUTO MAN 146 92 Be AUTO MAN EE heat 0 RIW x Section mode shift mode shift mode shift 3 4 2 26 Page 116 MAN output tput 147 93 CH4 MAN output MAN 0 R W x o Section setting setting setting 3 4 2 27 Setting change rate limiter Setting change rate Page us 148 944 CH4 A 0 R W x Section limiter temperature rise 3 4 2 28 65 Target Setting contents channel 2 Address Pe rad Default Read Automatic EPROM eating k wri decimal current Standard Mix contro Value Write setting te Reference contr ilabili hexadecimal cooling contro e a 5 availability sensor control 4 CT Page 118 149 95 CH4 AT bias AT AT bias 0 R W Section 3 4 2 29 Page 119 150 96 pH r 4 RW x Section action setting e action setting 3 4 2 30 1300 imi Upper limit imi TT wien upperimt uem OD ewy S setting limiter setting limiter setting limiter 6000 Page 120 RT Section L limit Lower limit Li limit 152 98 a basin 2000 RW setting limiter setting limiter 6 setting limiter 5 RT 153 99 CHA System area EX Ll T Heat Heater a x Hea
69. dala Un G731 Un G747 Un G763 Un G779 Page 151 Section 3 4 2 79 CHLI Simultaneous temperature rise dead Un G732 Un G748 Un G764 Un G780 Page 152 Section 3 4 2 80 time These 19 buffer memory areas are set automatically when the input range is changed and Setting change instruction YnB is turned OFF ON OFF during setting mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 OFF 99 e When Auto setting at Input Range Change is set to 0 Disable on Switch Setting 292 Section 6 2 Set values the buffer memory 99 Section 3 4 2 12 d can be out of the setting range When the setting range changes according to the change of the input range the set value before the change can turn out of the range In this case a write data error error code 0004 occurs in the buffer memory area where the value turns out of the setting range Change the input range after setting each buffer memory area with values within the setting range after the input range change f Enablement of setting contents Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction YnB OFF ON OFF during the setting mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 OFF g Precautions Soon after the input range is changed input temperature may be unstable Do not start the control until Temperature conversion completion flag Un G786 becomes First temperature conversion completed 14 100
70. gt oa S 33 32 lt a Setting range The setting range is 0 or 1 to 100 1s to 100s When 0 is set the primary delay digital filter processing is not performed b Default value The default values are set to 0 in all channels 113 25 CHO Control response parameter Un G49 Un G81 Un G113 Un G145 C23 In the simple two degree of freedom PID control select the response speed to the change of the set value SV from the following three levels Slow Normal and Fast For details on the simple two degree of freedom refer to the following Page 185 Section 4 7 a Setting range Setting S Set value Description contents 0 Slo Set Slow when reducing an overshoot and undershoot to the change of the set value SV w However the settling time is the longest of the three settings 1 Normal Normal has features between Slow and Fast 2 Fast Set Fast when speeding up the response to the change of the set value SV However an overshoot and undershoot is the largest of the three settings Temperature process value PV Set value SV 2 gt Change Set value SV 1 gt b Default value The default values are set to Slow 0 in all channels 114 Fast 4 Normal Slow gt Time Set value SV change point CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 26 CHO AUTO MAN mode shift Un G50 Un G82 Un G114 Un G146 C29 Select whether to calculate the m
71. 0 R x x Section 3 4 2 89 History Error code error occurrence time Data t All CH 15 structure is the same as that of History 1 1396 574 1397 5754 to System area 1399 5774 1400 578 0 R x x Section 3 4 2 89 History Error code error occurrence time Data t All CH 2 5 16 structure is the same as that of History 1 1404 57Cy 1405 57Dy to System area 4095 FFF 1 This default value is set after the module is turned off and on or after the CPU module is reset and the reset is cancelled 2 This column indicates whether data can be read from or written to the buffer memory area through sequence programs R Reading enabled W Writing enabled 3 This column indicates whether the setting in the buffer memory area is automatically changed when the input range is changed Enable disable of automatic change can be set on Switch Setting For details refer to Page 216 Section 4 14 4 Whether writing to the E2PROM by turning off and on E2PROM backup instruction Yn8 is enabled is indicated in this column For details refer to gt Page 264 Section 4 28 jueuuuBissy yng t 1811 jueuuuBisse oww NOLPIO Lre 83 3 4 2 Details of the buffer memory This chapter describes details on the buffer memory of the Q64TCN Point For buffer memory areas indicated wit
72. 1 Enable b Enablement of setting contents Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction YnB OFF ON OFF during the setting mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 OFF c Default value The default values are set to Disable 0 in all channels 149 Jejynq ey jo Sed jueuuuBissy yng t 75 Process value PV scaling lower limit value Un G726 Un G742 Un G758 Un G774 Gi Process value PV scaling upper limit value Un G727 Un G743 Un G759 Un G775 QB Set the upper limit value lower limit value of the temperature process value PV scaling function For details on the temperature process value PV scaling function refer to the following Page 188 Section 4 10 a Setting range The setting range is 32000 to 32000 b Enablement of setting contents Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction YnB OFF ON OFF during the setting mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 OFF c Default value The default values are set to 0 in all channels Point P The setting where the lower limit value is not less than the upper limit value does not cause an error The temperature process value PV is scaled according to the formula of Page 188 Section 4 10 1 76 CHLI Process value PV scaling value Un G728 Un1G744 Un G760 Un G776 QB When the temperature process value PV scalin
73. 1317 525 to System area e gt 1319 527 1320 528 Page 158 Error code error occurrence time Data to All CHs History 6 0 R x x Section structure is the same as that of History 1 342 89 1324 52 4 2 89 1325 52Dy to System area m 1327 52Fy 81 JSI yu wu isse Jeynq NOLPIO L Ve jueuuuBissy yng t E2PROM Address Default Read Automatic Target 3 write decimal Setting contents value Write setting Reference hexadecimal 4 12 13 avai ility 1328 530 Page 158 All CHs History 7 Error tode error occurrence time Data 0 R Section structure is the same as that of History 1 342 89 1332 534 4 2 89 1333 535 to System area 1335 537 1336 538 Page 158 All CHs History 8 Error code error occurrence time ata 0 R x structure is the same as that of History 1 342 89 1340 53Cy 42 89 1341 53D to System area 1343 53F yy 1344 5404 Page 158 4 Error code error occurrence time Data to All CHs History 9 0 R x x Section structure is the same as that of History 1 342 89 1348 544 4 2 89 1349 5454 to System area 1351 547 1352 5484 Page 158 History Error code error
74. 16 Click ok 17 To back up the correction value in E27PROM click 18 Click i AE From the previous page V MELSOFT Series GX Works2 W Compensation value registration completed i Close MELSOFT Series GX Works2 Exit the sensor compensation setting Are you sure you want to continue MELSOFT Series GX Works2 Setting mode Do you want to shift to operation mode CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 19 Click 20 Click cose 21 Click 22 To shift from the setting mode to the operation mode click 1 Enter the value using devices such as a thermocouple platinum resistance thermometer and standard DC voltage generator or based on a general resistance value 213 uonouny uonesuedulo2 Josues b How to execute 2 point sensor compensation when using the program Follow the instructions below Setting start v Set the temperature process value PV equivalent to be input for CHL12 point sensor compensation gain value compensation value Un G547 Un G579 Un G611 Un G643 c Page 141 Section 3 4 2 61 Switch the module to the setting mode turn on and then off the setting operation mode instruction Yn1 lt gt Page 54 Section 3 3 3 1 Set Stop mode setting Un G33 Un G65 Un G97 Un G129 to Monitor 1 lt gt Page 101 Section 3 4 2 13 Set 2 poi
75. Appendix 3 1 Precautions on online module change 372 Precautions on an online module change are listed below When an online module change is performed not all set values are inherited by the module after the change After the online module change write the set values in the changed module again When an online module change is performed properly follow the procedure gt Page 377 Appendix 3 4 Not doing so may cause malfunction and failure Before performing an online module change check that the system outside of the programmable controller does not malfunction Prepare methods such as a switch that disconnect individually the external power supply for the module to be changed online and the power supply for external devices to prevent electric shock and malfunction of the module during transportation Record the content to save data of the writable buffer memory 2 gt Page 373 Appendix 3 2 5 beforehand because the buffer memory data may not be saved normally in the event that the module malfunctions Even if pre recorded data are set to the buffer memory in the module that was changed online and control is restarted the following areas are cleared when control is stopped Therefore control cannot be restarted in the same control status Manipulated value MV Un G13 to Un G16 Manipulated value for heating MVh Un G13 to Un G16 Manipulated value for cooling MVc Un G704 to Un1G707
76. CT Page 139 Section 3 4 2 56 375 suuo 104 SuOIIPUOD ze xipueddy 1edoje eq x9 Bulsp ueuM eunpeooug ejnpojy xipueddy Appendix 3 3 Operations when performing an online module change The following table shows the operations of the Q64TCN when an online module change is performed O Executed x Not executed User operation 1 Stop the operation Turn off all the Y signals turned on by the sequence program TTT TTT III 2 Remove the module Start the online module change using GX Developer Operation of the Q64TCN Operation of the CPU module The module is normally operating The operation of the module has stopped The RUN LED turns off XIY refresh FROM TO instructions Device test GX Configurator TC Monitor setting josie parameters ce x Y Click the Cisa button on x x x x x GX Developer to enable t he module to be removed Y Remove the selected module Y 3 Mount a new module Mount a new module The refresh restarts and the module starts up The RUN LED turns on Default operation After mounting the module Module READY flag Xn0 click on GX Developer gt stays off When there are in
77. Production Number Module Information Module Access Possible Status of External Power Supply Fuse Blown Status Status of Address Verify Agree Clear Hold Setting Noise Filter Setting be Input Type Remote Password Setting Status Error Information Error and Solution Latest Error Code Update Error History De Contents The setting of the upper lower limit value output limiter or the Hist upper lower limit setting limiter is invalid ML MINE TN Display Format a m HEX 3 0285 Set the value where the upper limit value is greater than the lower limit value DEC The error history is sequentially displayed from lan old error The latest error is displayed at the bottom line Stop Monitor CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING Click Detailed Information to open the Module s Detailed Information window Check the error description and the corrective action to take under Error and Solution When the error description cannot be confirmed after doing the operation above proceed with the following troubleshooting e Checks using LEDs s 348 Section 8 3 e Checks using input signals 350 Section 8 4 347 eJnpeooJg Bunoouse qnoj z g 8 3 Checks Using LEDs This section describes troubleshooting using LEDs 8 3 1 When the RUN LED flashes or turns off Check Item Action Is the power supply
78. Scan time delay Disconnection is determined v based on the ON OFF status of the contact of the input module CPU module Q64TCN Input module and ON delay output flag Sensor ON OFF status Response delay amp Transistor output External current sensor Heater 1 Setting method Set a value in the following buffer memory area Transistor output monitor ON delay time setting Un G175 L gt Page 130 Section 3 4 2 45 218 4 17 Self tuning Function CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS Standard The Q64TCN constantly monitors the control state When the control system is oscillatory this function allows PID constants to be automatically changed under the following situations such as After the control has been just started When the set value SV is changed When the characteristics of a controlled object fluctuates Unlike the auto tuning function a normal control response waveform is monitored and PID constants are automatically calculated and set This allows an object to be controlled with the most suitable PID constants all the time without disturbance 1 Differences between auto tuning and self tuning The following table lists the differences between auto tuning and self tuning Item Auto tuning Self tuning PID constants calculation The manipulated value MV is turned on off and PID constants are calc
79. Set oS Alert mode Setting range of alert set value os value m lt 0 alert 9 3 1 Upper limit input alert Within the temperature measurement range of the set input range 8 2 Lower limit input alert 3 Page 94 Section 3 4 2 12 3 d Q 3 Upper limit deviation alert full scale to full scale 4 Lower limit deviation alert 3 5 Upper lower limit deviation alert lt 0 to full scale 6 Within range alert 7 Upper limit input alert with standby Within the temperature measurement range of the set input range 8 Lower limit input alert with standby L gt Page 94 Section 3 4 2 12 9 Upper limit deviation alert with standby full scale to full scale 10 Lower limit deviation alert with standby 11 Upper lower limit deviation alert with standby 0 to full scale 12 Upper limit deviation alert with standby second time full scale to full scale 13 Lower limit deviation alert with standby second time Upper lower limit deviation alert with standby second 14 to full scale time 15 Upper limit deviation alert using the set value SV full scale to full scale 16 Lower limit deviation alert using the set value SV 17 Upper lower limit deviation alert using the set value SV to full scale 18 Within range alert using the set value SV 135 Set Alert mode Setting range of alert set value value 49 Upper limit deviation alert
80. Temperature process value PV 0 Set value SV is 200 0 C Cooling starts at 185 0 C Cooling 100 253 2 Dead band Dead band refers to the temperature area where neither heating control output nor cooling control output is performed When the temperature process value PV is stable within this area output is not performed for the slight change in the temperature resulting in energy saving Ex When buffer memory values are set as following CHO Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 38 temperature measurement range 200 0 C to 400 0 C CHO Set value SV setting Un G34 Un G66 Un G98 Un G130 2000 200 0 C Overlap dead band setting Un G723 Un G739 Un G755 Un G771 25 2 5 200 0 C to 215 0 C is the area for dead band Full scale x Overlap setting 400 0 C 200 0 C x 0 025 15 0 C The temperature where cooling operation starts Set value SV 15 0 C 215 0 C As shown below shifting the temperature where cooling operation starts to the higher temperature side of the set value SV produces a dead band area The following is an example of when the module is in P control Manipulated value ifor heating MVh 096 Heating only Manipulated value Cooling only manipulated value for cooling MVc 096 for cooling MVc 0 manipulated value for heating MVh 0 100 i i Heati Cooling starts at 215
81. The default values are set to Reverse action 1 in all channels Ajowaw Jeynq ay Jo Sed jueuuuBissy yng t 119 31 CHO Upper limit setting limiter Un G55 Un G87 Un G119 Un G151 C2 CHO Lower limit setting limiter Un G56 Un G88 Un G120 Un G152 8 Upper lower limit value of the set value SV can be set a Setting range The setting range is identical to the temperature measurement range of the set input range lt gt 94 Section 3 4 2 12 The setting should meet the following conditions CHO Lower limit setting limiter Un G56 Un G88 Un G120 Un1G 152 CHLI Upper limit setting limiter Un G55 Un G87 Un G119 Un G151 If the above conditions are not met a write data error error code LILILI5 occurs CHO Lower limit setting limiter CHO Upper limit setting limiter Un G56 Un G88 Un G120 Un G152 Un G55 Un G87 Un G119 Un G151 Input lower limit i i Input upper limit Set value SV setting range b Setting unit The value to be set differs depending on the stored value in Decimal point position Un G1 to Un G4 gt Page 84 Section 3 4 2 2 No decimal place 0 Set a value in 1 C F or digit unit One decimal place 1 Set a value in 0 1 C F unit tenfold value c Default value A default value differs depending on modules to be used Default value Buffer memory Q64TCTTN Q64TCRTN Q64TCTTBWN Q
82. Un G735 Un G751 Un G767 Un G783 187 uonouny Bumes 1Jejur eje Buas 6 v 4 10 Temperature Process Value PV Scaling Function The temperature process value PV is scaled up or down to the value in a set range and can be stored into the buffer memory using this function For example the range of 100 C to 100 C can be scaled into the value range of 0 to 4000 1 Monitoring the scaling value The temperature process value PV after scaling processing is stored into the following buffer memory area Process value PV scaling value Un G728 Un G744 Un G760 Un G776 s Page 150 Section 3 4 2 76 The calculation method of a scaling value is as follows CHO Process value PV scaling value _ 5 51 x Px Pmin oe Un G728 Un G744 Un G760 Un G776 Bu L Px CHO Temperature process value PV Un G9 Un G10 Un G11 Un G12 PMax A maximum value of Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 Pmin A minimum value of Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 SH A maximum scaling value of process value PV Un G727 Un G743 Un G759 Un G775 SL A minimum scaling value of process value PV Un G726 Un G742 Un G758 Un G774 a Calculation example A calculation example to scale the temperature process value PV into percentage is shown below Set the following buffer memory areas as below CHO Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 38
83. Un G769 EUM c Manual control 7 gt 172 Section 4 5 The following table lists Enable Disable of the setting Enable Disable of the Buffer memory setting in the manual Remarks control CHLI Upper limit output limiter When an output exceeds the upper limit output limiter value the Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un1G 138 manipulated value MV of the manual control is fixed clipped Enable to the upper limit output limiter value that is set When an output CHO Lower limit output limiter falls below the lower limit output limiter value the manipulated Un G43 Un G75 Un G107 Un G139 value MV of the manual control is fixed clipped to the lower limit output limiter value that is set Heating upper limit output limiter Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 CHO Cooling upper limit output limiter Disable Un G721 Un G737 Un G753 Un G769 EM d Default value Ng The following table lists the default value of each buffer memory area S T Buffer memory Default value 59 CHO Upper limit output limiter Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 1000 100 0 Lower limit output limiter Un G43 Un G75 Un G107 Un G139 0 0 0 g Heating upper limit output limiter Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 1000 100 0 5 i CHO Cooling upper limit output limiter Un G721 Un G737 Un G753 Un G769 S 109 20 CHO Output variation limiter setting Un G44 Un G76 Un G108 Un G140 8 Set the limit of an output vari
84. Y60 to Heater gt Object to be controlled Type K thermocouple 0 C to 1300 C Point When the Q64TCTTBWN or the Q64TCRTBWN is used the I O assignment is the same as that of the system configuration shown above Slot 0 Empty 16 points Slot 1 Intelligent 16 points Slot 2 Input 64 points Slot 3 Output 64 points 298 CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING 2 Programming condition This program is designed to read the temperatures measured by the thermocouple K type 0 to 1300 C connected to CH1 An error code can be read and reset The self tuning function automatically sets the PID constants optimal to CH1 3 Wiring example The following figure shows a wiring example Q64TCTTN RUN ALM ERR Heater operation input OUT2 COM our4 CH1 I CH1 IN1 1 IN2 2 7 CH1 Input TE IN2 2 Cold junction CJ NC temperature CJ compensation CJ v NC resistor CJ IN3 3 IN4 4 IN3 3 INA 4 Q64TC TIN uoneunBijuo 5 pyepueis e ejnpoyy eu Buis ueuM peas epoo 1 pue Hurung se yons LZ 7 299 300 4 Switch Setting Configure the output setting at CPU stop error and the control m
85. Yn1 ON OFF For details on the relationship between this flag and the control status refer to the following e PID control 7 167 Section 4 3 6 Temperature judgment gt Page 85 Section 3 4 2 3 Alert judgment gt 199 Section 4 11 5 a Setting range 0 Stop 1 Continue b Default value The default value is set to Stop 0 44 Heater disconnection correction function selection Un G170 QB Set whether to use the heater disconnection correction function or not For details on the heater disconnection correction function refer to the following s Page 260 Section 4 26 3 a Supported modules Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN b Setting range 0 Not use the heater disconnection correction function 1 Use the heater disconnection correction function c Default value The default value is set to Not use the heater disconnection correction function 0 129 Aiowaw Jang ey siiejeq jueuuuBissy yng ye 45 Transistor output monitor ON delay time setting Un G175 8 Set the delay time of the ON delay output flag Set this buffer memory area to perform the heater disconnection detection with an input module For ON delay output flag refer to the following Page 90 Section 3 4 2 7 For details on the ON delay output function refer to the following s Page 218 Section 4 16 a Setting range The setting range is 0 or 1 to
86. and should not be referred to as an actual documentation 4 4 Manual Reset Function cT These icons indicate control modes The position of the stable condition in P control or PD control can be shifted manually using this function that can be used By shifting the proportional band P an offset remaining deviation is manually reset The offset is reset by determining and selling the amount to shift the value of the manipulated value MV in a stable condition from the reference value The reference value is 50 for standard control anc 0 for heating cooling control Point ctive only in contra and PD control This function is inactive wher integral time I is other than Q jaunt setting UnG724 Un G740 Unt ignored even if itis set Note that a write data error error code CIDEI4y occurs if it is outside the setting range 1 Standard control The set value SV is set where the manipulated value MV is 50 Due to this as long as the temperature process value PV and the set value SV is not in equilibrium at 50 of manipulated value an offset remaining deviation generates When an offset generates the proportional band P can be manually shifted by the amount of the offset remaining deviation Ex When using the manus reset function in the following conditions Control method P control CHO Manual reset amount setting Un G724 Un G740 Un G756 Un G772 300 20 The QS4
87. ply 16pt 16pt 16pt 16pt 16pt Status Module system error Module error Module warning Bl Module change 3 Online module change Operation Target module 1 0 address Q64TCTTN Module change execution Module name Installation confirmation r Status Module control restart Change module selection completed Status Guidance Please tum off Y signal of the changed module when you change the intelligent function module Cancel APPENDICES Open the Online module change window Diagnosis gt Online module change Select Online module change in Mode and double click the module to change online to enable a module change If the following error window appears click and perform the operation described on and after Page 384 Appendix 3 6 3 MELSOFT series GX Developer The target module didn t respond The task is advanced to the installation confirmation Check that the RUN LED on the module is off disconnect the external cable and remove the module Point f the terminal block is removed the temperature process value PV may vary within the accuracy range due to the individual differences in the cold junction temperature compensation resistors the Q64TCTTN and Q64TCTTBWN only Remove the module before installation confirmation If the installation confirmation is executed without removing the module the modul
88. shown above Slot 0 Empty 16 points Slot 1 Intelligent 16 points Slot 2 Input 64 points Slot 3 Output 64 points 19N uo Burst ueuw 2 Programming condition This program is designed to read the temperatures measured by the thermocouple K type 0 to 1300 C connected to CH1 An error code can be read and reset 331 3 Wiring example The wiring is the same as that of when the module is in the standard control such as auto tuning self tuning and error code read 7 7 299 Section 7 2 1 3 4 Switch Setting Configure settings on the remote I O station side 1 5 When using the parameter of an intelligent function module Page 334 Section 7 3 7 a e 5 When not using the parameter of an intelligent function module Page 340 Section 7 3 8 a 5 Contents of the initial setting Description Item CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 2 ThermocoupleK 2 ThermocoupleK 2 ThermocoupleK 2 ThermocoupleK Measured Measured Measured Measured Input range Temperature Range 0 to 1300 C Temperature Range 0 to 1300 C Temperature Range 0 to 1300 C Temperature Range 0 to 1300 C Set value SV setting 200 C 0 0 C 0 C Unused channel setting 0 Used 1 Unused 1 Unused 1 Unused Upper limit setting limiter 400 C 1300 C 1300 C 1300 C Lower limit setting limiter 0 C 0 C 0 C 0 C Alert 1 mode setting Aler
89. this function limits the PID operation result manipulated value MV from an integral action so that it does not exceed the valid range of the manipulated value MV This function operates automatically on execution of PID control therefore a setting by the user is unnecessary When the PID operation result exceeds the upper limit output limiter value the Q64TCN operates as follows The RFB function levels the manipulated value MV to the upper limit output limiter value by feeding back the exceeded value to the integral value When the PID operation result is below the lower limit output limiter value the Q64TCN operates as follows The RFB function levels the manipulated value MV to the lower limit output limiter value by feeding back the lacking value to the integral value CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 4 13 sensor Compensation Function Common When a difference occurs between the temperature process value PV and the actual temperature due to reasons such as a measuring condition the difference can be corrected using this function The following two types are available e 1 point sensor compensation standard function Page 205 Section 4 13 1 e 2 point sensor compensation function 2 Page 209 Section 4 13 2 1 1 point sensor compensation standard This function allows the difference to be corrected by the value of the set input range in proportion to the full scale as a difference correction value Ex When bu
90. 0 C eating 0 gt process value PV Set value SV is 200 0 C Cooling 100 i i 254 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 3 Dead band setting in two position control three position control Set the dead band in two position control Three position control can be achieved by setting a dead band area in addition to areas for the manipulated value for heating MVh 100 and the manipulated value for cooling MVc 100 Manipulated value i for heating MVh 0 i Heating only Manipulated value Cooling only i manipulated value for cooling MVc 0 for cooling 0 manipulated value for heating MVh 0 Heating proportional band Ph 0 Cooling proportional band Pc No setting required 100 Heating Integral time I Temperature when 1 No setting required i i cooling starts i Derivative time D No setting required i adi Temperature gt process value PV 0 1 Set value SV Cooling 100 Input range 4 Setting method Set the function in the following buffer memory area e Overlap dead band setting Un G723 Un G739 Un G755 Un1G771 s Page 148 Section 3 4 2 72 uonouny pueg peeqg deuie O 255 4 25 Temperature Conversion Function Using Unused Channels 256 Heating cooling In heating cooling control normal mode and mix control nor
91. 0 Used 1 Unused 1 Unused setting performed and the temperature sensor is not connected are set to be unused Control output cycle setting Heatin Set the pulse cycle ON OFF d 305 0s 30s 30s control output cycle cycle of the transistor output setting Set the method for the cooling Cooling method A seitin control in the heating cooling 0 Air Cooled 0 Air Cooled 0 Air Cooled 0 Air Cooled i control li trol t th N OFF Cooling contro Set the pulse cycle ON 305 08 305 305 output cycle setting cycle of the transistor output Overlap dead band Configure the overlap dead 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 setting band setting 326 CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING c Auto refresh setting Set the device to be automatically refreshed Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Q64TCTTN gt Auto Refresh it 0010 Q64TCTIN Auto_Refresh Display Filler Display All Item CH1 Fransfer to CPU Write data error code D50 Temperature process value PV 051 Manipulated value MV Transistor output Flag Alert definition Manipulated value MV Heating side manipulated value MVh For another analog module output Temperature rise judgment Flag Set value SV monitor The data of the buffer memory is transmitted to the specified device Set value CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Item Description An error code or alarm code is Wr
92. 0 and intelligent function module Input format X Select HEX 0000 0000 Item Setting item Control output HOLD CLEAR setting Set value Output setting Switch 1 H 0 CLEAR CECB ene Other than 0 HOLD Control mode selection Standard control 2 loops Function extension bit specification b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO Set value Control mode Number of control loops 0000 Standard control Standard control 4 loops 0001 Heating cooling control normal mode Heating cooling control 2 loops E 2 Switch 2 00024 Heating cooling control expanded mode Heating cooling control 4 loops zi N Heating cooling control 1 loop 0003 Mix control normal mode o Standard control 2 loops X Heating cooling control 2 loops y 00044 Mix control expanded mode S 2 o g 2 s Y g Fixed to 0 b0 Automatic setting when the input Switch 3 range is changed 0 Invalid 1 Valid b1 Setting change rate limiter setting 0 Temperature rise Temperature drop batch setting 1 Temperature rise Temperature drop individual setting 2 L 40jeunBijuo pue Jadojaneq X9 ueuM Z xipueddy Switch 4 0 Fixed empty Switch 5 0
93. 10 Point When value measured by a temperature sensor exceeds the temperature measurement range the following value is stored When measured value exceeds temperature measurement range Input range upper limit 5 of full scale When measured value falls below temperature measurement range Input range lower limit 596 of full scale 5 CHO Manipulated value MV Un G13 to Un G16 Game CHO Manipulated value for heating MVh Un G13 to Un G16 3 Manipulated value for cooling MVc Un G704 to Un G707 The result of PID operation based on temperature process value PV is stored in these buffer memory areas The area Un G13 to Un G16 are used for heating in the case of the heating cooling control The following table lists the range of value to be stored Store description Store range in control Stored value when control stops Manipulated value MV 50 to 1050 5 to 105 0 50 5 0 Manipulated value for heating MVh 0 to 1050 0 0 to 105 0 50 5 0 Manipulated value for cooling MVc However values are output in the range of 0 to 100 For 0 or less and 100 or more refer to the following For 0 or less 096 For 10096 or more 10096 87 Aiowaw Jejnq ey jo Sed jueuuuBissy yng t 88 a Manipulated value MV and control output cycle Manipulated value MV indicates ON time of Control output cycle setting Un G
94. 4 19 b Default value The default values are set to Do Not Run the ST 0 in all channels Point P This area is enabled only for the following channels channels of the standard control CH1 to CH4 when the standard control is used CH3 and CH4 when mix control normal mode or mix control expanded mode is used CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 68 Self tuning flag Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 8 The execution status of self tuning can be monitored in this buffer memory area For details on the self tuning function refer to the following s Page 219 Section 4 17 b15 to b10 b9 b8 b7 to b2 bi bO 0 0 o o o yY Rs Fixed to 0 Fixed to 0 The following contents are stored in each bit 0 OFF 1 ON Condition on which value turns to 1 Condition on which value turns to 0 Bit Flag name 9 ON OFF This flag is set to 0 OFF when either of the following operation is performed When the operation mode shifts to the setting mode by turning off from on Setting operation PID auto correction This flag is set to 1 ON when PID bO mode instruction Yn1 status constants are corrected by the self tuning When CHO Unused channel setting Un G61 Un G93 Un G125 Un G157 is set to Unused 1 When PID control forced stop instruction YnC to YnF is turned on from off When Self tuning setting Un G574
95. 50 10 to 500ms When 0 is set ON delay output flag is not set to 1 ON b Default value The default value is set to O 46 CT monitor method switching Un G176 8 Set the method for performing the heater current measurement a Supported modules Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN b Setting range 0 ON current OFF current 1 ON current When ON current OFF current 0 is set the present current value of the current sensor CT is measured Selecting ON current 1 fixes the current value of the heater being OFF as the current value of the heater previously being ON c Default value The default value is set to ON current OFF current 0 130 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 47 CHO Manipulated value MV for output with another analog module Un G177 to Un G180 8 CHOManipulated value of heating MVh for output with another analog module Un G177 to Un G180 CHO Manipulated value of cooling MVc for output with another analog module Un G708 to UnG711 The values stored in the following buffer memory areas are converted for other analog modules such as a D A converter module and stored in these buffer memory areas Buffer memory address Buffer memory area name Reference CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CHO Manipulated value MV Un G13 Un G14 Un G15 Un G16 CHO Manipulated value for heating MVh Un G13 Un G14 Un G15 Un G16 Page 87 Section 3 4 2 5 Manipulated value for cooling MVc Un G704 Un G70
96. 6 Monitor Measure Temperature Value PV and M Tener 30c enter the corrected offset value Value PV 2 Gancor forinancakion Fiinctinn Salackion Compennon 7 Set the temperature process value PV to be input Compensation Offset Value 40 Offset Setting under Compensation Offset Value Then click Compensation Gain Value 0 Gain Setting Offset Setting MELSOFT Series GX Works2 iN Execute the Offset Setting Please press after setting the appropriate compensation offset value to the target channel 9 Click 10 Monitor Measure Temperature Value PV and Measure Temperature 70C Value PV Gancor Carmnancastian Functinn Selection enter the corrected gain value 11 Setthe temperature process value PV to be input Umm under Compensation Gain Value Then click Compensation Gain Value 95 Gain Setting ettahle Femnerah ire ranne Gain Setting 12 uonesuedulo2 Josues MELSOFT Series GX Works2 Execute the Gain Setting Please press Yes after setting the appropriate compensation gain value to the target channel To the next page 211 From the previous page MELSOFT Series GX Works2 X MELSOFT Series GX Works2 MELSOFT Series GX Works2 212 Jis ot compensated only by Setting value To the next page 13 Click ok 14 Click Fixthevalue 15 Click ie
97. Action The data written is retained Change the setting to an allowable value for the upper lower limit The setting of the upper lower limit value Set the value where the upper limit 00054 value output limiter or the upper lower When data is written to multiple value is greater than the lower limit limit setting limiter is invalid system areas the address with the value smallest number of the buffer memory area where an error was detected is 5 The data written is ignored The setting cannot be changed until The setting value is being changed After turning off on and off Error reset 00064 1 while Default setting registration peronea instruction Yn2 change the settin H g reg The content of Write data error 9 9 instruction Yn9 was value code Un GO does not change even if another write error occurs The data written is retained E h TNT When data is written to multiple temperatureavithin system areas the address with the ardet smallest number of the buffer etine vauss sensor compensation offset value memory area where an error was 5 measured value is smaller than the detected is stored m 2 point sensor compensation setting 2 point sensor compensation gain 00074 When both the offset value and is invalid value measured value and the 2 gain value are within the input
98. Auto tuning is being executed At the time of when auto tuning is completed self tuning is enabled An error does not occur c The lower limit output limiter value is lower than the manipulated value MV and the manipulated value MV is lower than the upper limit output limiter value when the temperature control is started and the set value SV is changed The starting ST does not start However self tuning is enabled at the time of when a control response becomes oscillatory under the following setting CHO Self tuning setting Un G574 Un G606 Un G638 Un G670 is set to Starting ST and vibration ST 4 225 d The manipulated value MV is not changed from the lower limit output limiter value e f or upper limit output limiter value when the temperature control is started and the set value SV is changed The starting ST does not start However self tuning is enabled at the time of when a control response becomes oscillatory under the following setting CHO Self tuning setting Un G574 Un G606 Un G638 Un G670 is set to Starting ST and vibration ST 4 The temperature process value PV is not within the temperature measurement range Self tuning disable status b8 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 turns 1 ON The value set in CHO Output variation limiter setting Un G44 Un G76 Un G108 Un G140 is not 0 7 gt 110 Section 3 4 2 20 Self tuning disable status b8 of
99. CH3 Auto tuning instruction CH3 Auto tuning instruction Yn7 CH4 Auto tuning instruction CH4 Auto tuning instruction CH4 Auto tuning instruction Yn8 E2PROM backup instruction E2PROM backup instruction E2PROM backup instruction Yn9 Default setting registration instruction Default setting registration instruction Default setting registration instruction YnA N A N A N A YnB Setting change instruction Setting change instruction Setting change instruction YnC CH1 PID control forced stop CH1 PID control forced stop CH1 PID control forced stop instruction instruction instruction vaD CH2 PID control forced stop CH2 PID control forced stop CH2 PID control forced stop instruction instruction instruction RE CH3 PID control forced stop CH3 PID control forced stop CH3 PID control forced stop instruction instruction instruction WE PID control forced stop PID control forced stop CH4 PID control forced stop instruction instruction instruction 1 Available only under the heating cooling control expanded mode For details on the expanded mode refer to L3 Page 161 Section 4 1 3 2 Available only under the mix control expanded mode For details on the expanded mode refer to 3 Page 161 Point The functions of the Q64TCN cannot be guaranteed if any of the unavailable areas is turned on off in a sequence program Section 4 1 3 47 ys jeuDis peuejsueJ
100. CLEAR HOLD Error Section 6 2 Setting of PID continuation flag 129 Stop Continue Stop Continue Un G169 Section 3 4 2 43 Q64TCN Page 354 Section Follow the operation of when an error occurs Write data error 8 6 Q64TCN Depends on the symptom of the hardware Hardware error Error Stops the CPU Stops the operation and turns off Follows the stop operation and Stop error external output mode setting performs external output Stops the Stops the Follows the stop operation and Follows the stop operation and CPU RUN STOP 1 i mode setting performs mode setting performs external output external output Resetting The module is incapable to operate and not performs external output 1 Stop mode setting Un G33 Un G65 Un G97 Un G129 101 Section 3 4 2 13 Important Fully pay attention to the setting of PID continuation flag Un G169 which controls external output By the failure of an output element or internal circuit an abnormal output may occur Construct a circuit to monitor output signals that could cause a serious accident 162 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 4 3 Control Method The following control methods can be applied by setting the proportional band P integral time and derivative time D e Two position control lt 5 Page 163 Section 4 3 1 P control 7 gt Page 165 Section 4 3 2 Pl control 7 gt Page 166
101. Fixed empty 365 1 When a value other than 0 to 4 is set a switch setting error error code 0 occurs In this case the Q64TCN does not operate properly Set the correct value Immediately after the control mode selection is changed a set value discrepancy error error code 001E occurs To clear the set value discrepancy error turn off on and off E2PROM backup instruction Yn8 2 Control in the expanded mode requires an external output module For the system configuration in expanded mode refer to Page 161 Section 4 1 3 366 APPENDICES Appendix 2 2 GX Configurator TC operation When the Q64TCN parameters are configured using GX Configurator TC the display method and contents on windows such as the setting window are different from those on GX Works2 1 Window display method The following table lists the window display method on GX Configurator TC Window name Application Initial setting Parameters such as the input range and set value SV can be set Auto refresh setting Buffer memory data can be transferred to specified devices Monitor test Monitor test can be performed on buffer memory I O signals Window for intelligent function module GX Developer screen parameter setting module selection project sanple_project LD Edit mode MAII Intelligent function module utility C Program FilesWE Inteligent Function module parameter Online Tools Help
102. G576 Un G608 Un G640 CS The measured value of temperature corresponding to the offset value of the 2 point sensor compensation is stored in this buffer memory area The value to be stored differs depending on the stored value in Decimal point position Un G1 to Un G4 Page 84 Section 3 4 2 2 No decimal place 0 stored as it is One decimal place 1 stored after a multiplication by 10 For details on the 2 point sensor compensation function refer to the following s Page 209 Section 4 13 2 a Enablement of the stored value Turn Setting change instruction YnB OFF ON OFF during the setting mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 OFF to enable stored contents 59 2 point sensor compensation offset value compensation value Un G545 Un1G577 Un G609 Un G641 CE Set the temperature of the offset value of the 2 point sensor compensation For details on the 2 point sensor compensation function refer to the following s Page 209 Section 4 13 2 a Setting range The setting range is identical to the temperature measurement range of the set input range gt Page 94 Section 3 4 2 12 b Setting unit The value to be set differs depending on the stored value Decimal point position Un G1 to Un G4 gt Page 84 Section 3 4 2 2 e No decimal place 0 Set a value in 1 C F or digit unit e One decimal place 1 Set a value in 0 1 C F unit tenfo
103. G61 Un G93 Un G125 UnG157 For details on the setting refer to the following gt Page 124 Section 3 4 2 35 The following table shows the relationship between the setting value and control status Control status Set value PID control Temperature judgment Alert judgment The controls are performed 0 Used However it depends on other setting status 1 Unused The controls are not performed Even if the unused channel setting is configured the sampling cycle does not change 0e 060606060000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000090 9 CHAPTER 6 VARIOUS SETTINGS CHAPTER 6 various SETTINGS This chapter describes the setting procedures of the Q64TCN Point After writing the contents of the new module switch setting parameter setting and auto refresh setting into the CPU module reset the CPU module switch STOP RUN STOP RUN or turn off and on the power to enable the setting contents 6 1 Addition of Modules Add the model name of the Q64TCN to use on the project 1 Addition procedure Open the New Module window Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Right click gt New Module New Module Module Selection Module Type Temperature Control Module Module Name 96 z Mount Position Base No X Mounted Slot No 1 a Acknowledge I O Assignment Specify start address 0010
104. G645 Gag When 2 point sensor compensation offset value is stored 1 is stored in this buffer memory area which is Latch completed 1 When 2 point sensor compensation offset latch request Un G548 Un G580 Un G612 Un G644 is set to No request 0 0 is stored in this buffer memory area which is No request 0 7 Page 142 Section 3 4 2 62 For details on the 2 point sensor compensation function refer to the following 57 Page 209 Section 4 13 2 64 2 point sensor compensation gain latch request Un G550 Un G582 Un G614 Un G646 D This is a request for storing temperature process value PV as 2 point sensor compensation gain value to the following buffer memory area CHO 2 point sensor compensation gain value measured value Un G546 Un G578 Un G610 Un G642 gt Page 141 Section 3 4 2 60 For details on the 2 point sensor compensation function refer to the following Page 209 Section 4 13 2 a Setting range 0 No request 1 Latch request b Default value The default values are set to No request 0 in all channels 142 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 65 2 point sensor compensation gain latch completion Un G551 Un G583 Un G615 Un G647 When 2 point sensor compensation gain value is stored 1 is stored in this buffer memory area which is Latch completed 1 When 2 point sensor compensation gain latch request Un G550 Un G582 Un G614 U
105. G8 to Alert 4 b11 of Un G5 to Un G8 turns on according to the set alert mode Up to four values can be set for each channel Set them in the following buffer memory areas Buffer memory area name Buffer memory address CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Alert set value 1 Un G38 Un G70 Un G102 Un G134 CHO Alert set value 2 Un G39 Un G71 Un G103 Un G135 CHO Alert set value 3 Un G40 Un G72 Un G104 Un G136 CHO Alert set value 4 Un G41 Un G73 Un G105 Un G137 Reference Page 106 Section 3 4 2 18 Alert set value 1 to 4 corresponds to each alert mode for alert 1 to 4 200 8 Setting the alert dead band CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS When the temperature process value PV or deviation E is close to the alert set value alert status and non alert status may alternates repeatedly due to inconsistent input Such case can be prevented by setting an alert dead band a Setting method Set a value in Alert dead band setting Un G164 7 5 127 Section 3 4 2 38 Ex When the alert mode is set to Upper limit input alert 1 5 190 Section 4 11 1 When a value other than 0 0 0 is set in Alert dead band setting Un G164 the system is put in the alert status when upper limit input becomes equal to or greater than the alert set value The system is put in the non alert status when the upper limit falls below the alert dead band figure on the right When 0 0 0 is set in Alert dea
106. MELSOFT Series GX Works2 A Change the operation mode for the following module to the setting mode Are you sure you want to continue 0010 064 Caution Control function will be stopped during setting made System that has to keep the temperature will stop and may exposed to unexpected temperature Please check whether the system is not affected by the stop and then execute the sensor compensation Bes MELSOFT Series GX Works2 X LD Switched to setting mode Sensor Compensation Execute sensor compensation Monitoring 5 Target Module 0010 Q64TCTTN 1 Target Channel CH1 vi 2 Module Current Sta Input Range 2 Thetcy3 asured Temperature Range 0 to 1300 C CH4 3 Sensor Compensation Function Selection Select the target channel and enter cor 1 point Sensor Compensation Standart 2 point Sensor Compensatic 1 point Sensor Compensation Standard Pur EE Only 1 point sensor compensation S Q64TCTT Q64TCTTBW Q64TCRT QE 4 1 nnint Sensnr Comnensatinn Standard A 2 the next page 210 Select the module where sensor correction is executed and click Click Click Select the channel where sensor correction is executed under Target Channel Select 2 point Sensor Compensation under Sensor Compensation Function Selection CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS From the previous page MEME
107. Monitor 3 thermocouple 16 CT8 CT input 8 IN4 4 CH4 CH4 Thermocouple MT4 Monitor 4 thermocouple 17 i CT8 CT input 8 IN3 3 CH3 CH3 Thermocouple MT3 Monitor 3 thermocouple 18 NC NC Unused IN4 4 CH4 CH4 Thermocouple MT4 Monitor 4 thermocouple 274 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS AND THE PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION Terminal block for I O he Mix control normal mode Mix control expanded mode Symbol Name Symbol Name Symbol Name 1 OUT1 L1H CH1 Heating output L1H CH1 Heating output L1H CH1 Heating output 2 OUT2 L1C CH1 Cooling output L1C CH1 Cooling output L1C CH1 Cooling output 3 OUT3 L2H CH2 Heating output L3 CH3 Output L3 CH3 Output 4 OUT4 L2C CH2 Cooling output L4 CH4 Output L4 CH4 Output 5 E COM Output common COM Output common COM Output common 6 NC NC Unused NC Unused NC Unused 7 IN1 1 CH1 CH1 Thermocouple CH1 CH1 Thermocouple CH1 CH1 Thermocouple 8 IN2 2 CH2 CH2 Thermocouple MT2 Monitor 2 thermocouple CH2 CH2 Thermocouple 9 IN1 1 CH1 CH1 Thermocouple CH1 CH1 Thermocouple CH1 CH1 Thermocouple 10 IN2 2 CH2 CH2 Thermocouple MT2 Monitor 2 thermocouple CH2 CH2 Thermocouple 11 NC NC Unused NC Unused NC Unused 42 CJ CJ Cold junction temperature CJ Cold junction temperature CJ Cold junction temperature compensation resistor compensation resistor compensation resistor 13 NC NC Unused NC Unused NC Unused 44 CJ C
108. ON time is 70s The transistor output turns on for 70s and off for 30s per 100s Control output cycle Control output cycle Control output cycle 100s 100s i 100s 1 gt gt 4 gt ON Manipulated value Manipulated value Manipulated value MV 70 MV 70 MV 70 70s 70s 70s Transistor OFF output a Setting range The setting range is 1 to 100 1s to 100s b Default value The default values are set to 30 30s in all channels 112 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 24 CHO Primary delay digital filter setting Un G48 Un G80 Un G112 Un G144 Common The temperature process values PV are smoothed and sudden changes are absorbed by using the primary delay digital filter Temperature When the primary delay process value PV digital filter is not set 1 gt Time Temperature When the primary delay process value PV digital filter is set gt Time The time for the temperature process value PV to change by 63 3 can be set by the primary delay digital filter setting filter setting time Primary delay digital filter setting Un G48 Un G80 Un G112 Un G144 Temperature process value PV When the primary delay digital filter is not set 1 gt Time Temperature process value PV E 1 N w When the primary delay oS digital filter is set 7 22 p 28 7 gt Time 8 lt i gt 5 8
109. PID control in process value derivation is an operation method which uses the process value PV for the derivation section in order to perform a PID operation Not using deviation for the derivation section drastic output change due to a derivative action is reduced when deviation varies along with the setting value change 23 1 3 2 The Q64TCN actions The Q64TCN performs PID operations in forward actions and reverse actions 1 Forward action In a forward action the manipulated value MV is increased when the temperature process value PV increases from the set value SV A forward action is used for cooling control Manipulated j value A Temperature Set value Starting temperature 2 Reverse action Manipulated value Temperature Set value Set value gt Starting temperature In a reverse action the manipulated value is increased when the temperature process value PV decreases from the set value SV A reverse action is used for heating control A Manipulated value A Temperature Set value Set value gt Starting temperature 24 A Manipulated value A Temperature Set value lt Starting temperature CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1 3 3 Proportional action P action A proportional action is an action to obtain the manipulated value MV proportional to the deviation difference between the set value SV and the
110. PV scaling PV scaling PV scaling Page 149 741 2E5 CH2 function function function 0 R W x Section enable disable enable disable enable disable 3 4 2 74 setting setting setting 9 Process value Process value Process value PV scalin PV scalin PV scalin 742 2E6 CH2 PM scaling PW scaling 0 R W x lower limit lower limit lower limit value value value 7 9 Page 150 Section Process value Process value Process value 3 4 2 75 PV scalin PV scalin PV scalin 743 2 7 CH2 scaling scaling 0 R W x upper limit upper limit upper limit value value value Process value Process value Process value Page 150 744 2 8 CH2 PV scaling PV scaling PV scaling 0 R x x Section value value value 7 3 4 2 76 EM A Derivative Derivative Page 150 Derivative action i 7TA5 2E9 CH2 un action action 0 R W x Section selection selection selection 3 4 2 77 Simultaneous Page 151 746 2EAy CH2 temperature rise System area System area 0 R W x Section group setting 3 4 2 78 Simultaneous Page 151 747 2EBy CH2 temperature rise System area System area 0 R W O Section gradient data 3 4 2 79 Simultaneous Page 152 748 2ECy CH2 temperature rise System area System area 0 R W Section dead time 3 4 2 80 76 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Target Setting contents channel 2 Addres
111. Q64TCN on the remote I O station Select the following output signals and click Modify Value Turn off the output signals in the CPU module to turn off the following output signals in the Q64TCN Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 E7PROM backup instruction Yn8 Default setting registration instruction Yn9 Setting change instruction YnB This operation stops the operation of the Q64TCN Point if PID continuation flag Un G169 is set to Continue 1 control does not stop even when Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 is turned off Change PID continuation flag Un G169 to Stop 0 and turn off Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 Whether the control has been stopped can be checked by Setting operation mode status Xn1 being off CPU continuation error such as SP UNIT DOWN and UNIT VERIFY ERR is occurring due to an error the module to be changed the buffer memory data cannot be saved 399 eouenbes e Buisn peunBiyuoo sBunies jegu ay ueuM 9p xipueddy XH Burs 1 ueuM ejnpoyy p xipueddy 2 Removing a module New Project Cancel _ PLC Series QCPU Q mode m PLC Type All Connections gy Connection1 Transfer Setup Connection1 L CCIE Cont CC Link Ethernet CCIE Field Board NNET 10 H ard Board Board Board OM 1 Tr
112. Section 3 4 2 compensation gain value Un G578 Un G610 Un G642 60 measured value 2 point sensor Page 141 Section 3 4 2 compensation gain value Un G579 Un G611 Un G643 61 compensation value CHLI 2 point sensor Page 142 Section 3 4 2 Un G580 Un G612 Un G644 compensation offset latch request 62 2 point sensor Page 142 Section 3 4 2 compensation offset latch Un G581 Un G613 Un G645 63 completion 2 point sensor Page 142 Section 3 4 2 Un G582 Un G614 Un G646 compensation gain latch request 64 2 point sensor Page 143 Section 3 4 2 compensation gain latch Un G583 Un G615 Un G647 65 completion Sensor compensation function Page 156 Section 3 4 2 Un G785 selection 85 Temperature conversion Page 156 Section 3 4 2 Un G786 completion flag 86 Temperature conversion Page 147 Section 3 4 2 Un G695 Un G697 setting Un G696 70 257 pesnu uoouny eJnjejeduie SZ y 4 Setting method Set whether using this function in the following buffer memory area Temperature conversion setting Un G695 to Un G697 L gt Page 147 Section 3 4 2 70 Point When heating cooling control expanded mode or mix control expanded mode is selected the setting in CHO Temperature conversion setting Un G695 to Un G697 is ignored 258 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 4 26 Heater Disconn
113. Setting range 0 Select normal auto tuning 1 Simultaneous temperature rise AT b Default value The default values are set to Select normal auto tuning 0 in all channels Point This setting can be used with the setting of Auto tuning mode selection Un G184 to Un G187 7 s Page 134 Section 3 4 2 51 0 If this setting is changed during the auto tuning it is enabled in the next auto tuning 152 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 82 CHO Simultaneous temperature rise status Un G734 Un G750 Un G766 Un G782 The execution state of the simultaneous temperature rise is monitored The following values are stored in this buffer memory area 0 Simultaneous temperature rise not in process 1 Simultaneous temperature rise in process During control by the simultaneous temperature rise function Simultaneous temperature rise in process 1 is stored in this buffer memory area The following figure shows the timing when the value is set to Simultaneous temperature rise not in process 0 In the following CH1 and CH2 are set to group 1 Page 151 Section 3 4 2 78 1 i Temperature is raised 1 based on the simultaneous Temperature is raised based on the PID The temperature rise temperature rise iconstants of each completion times match function for this interval Channel for this interval Temperature A p4 process value PV CH1 Set value SV C
114. Un G154 121 CHO Heating control output cycle setting Un G47 Un G79 Un G111 Un G143 112 CHO Heating proportional band Ph setting Un G35 Un G67 Un G99 Un G131 103 CHO Heating transistor output flag Un G21 to Un G24 De Secs Beet Mes ac wed UE Du ae 90 Heating upper limit output limiter Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 138 108 CHO Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 T UO 94 Integral time I setting Un G36 Un G68 Un G100 132 105 Loop disconnection detection dead band Un G60 Un G92 Un G124 Un G156 123 Loop disconnection detection judgment time Un G59 Un G91 Un G123 Un G155 122 Lower limit output limiter Un G43 Un G75 Un G107 139 108 Lower limit setting limiter Un G56 Un G88 Un G120 6152 120 CHO MAN output setting Un G51 Un G83 Un G115 UniG147 Base deb EROR 116 Manipulated value MV Un G13 to Un G16 ee los AG hes tanta gale 87 Manipulated value MV for output with another analog module Un G177 to Un G180 131 Manipulated value for cooling MVc Un G704 to Un WGrTO0Z cs ceded deat it enit 87 CHLI Manipulated value for heating MVh Un G13 to UniG
115. Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 turns 1 ON 9 AUTO MAN mode shift Un G50 Un G82 Un G114 Un G146 is set to MAN 1 Page 115 Section 3 4 2 26 Self tuning disable status b8 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 turns 1 ON h Other conditions In addition to those described above self tuning is not executed under the following conditions The heating cooling control has been selected for the control mode 7 gt Page 292 Section 6 2 The following buffer memory areas have been set to values other than 0 0 0 Buffer memory address Buffer memory area name Reference CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Setting change rate limiter Setting gt Un G52 Un G84 Un G116 Un G148 change rate limiter temperature rise Page 117 Section 3 4 2 28 Setting change rate limiter Un G564 Un G596 Un G628 Un G660 temperature drop 226 7 Discontinuation of self tuning The following operation during self tuning discontinues the self tuning operation The setting in Self tuning setting Un G574 Un G606 Un G638 Un G670 has been changed to Not performing ST 0 The self tuning operation in process is discontinued and self tuning is not performed anymore after that An error does not occur Whether self tuning is being executed can be checked in Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 Page 50 Section 3 3 2 5 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 8 Conditions
116. Un G606 Un G638 Un G670 is set to Do not Run the ST 0 Simultaneous This flag is set to 1 ON when simultaneous This flag is also set to 0 OFF in the following temperature rise 4 b1 temperature rise parameter is corrected by parameter correction cases self tuning When the self tuning starts by changing the status set value SV When the vibration ST starts by vibration caused by disturbance of the process value PV jueuuuBissy yng t b2 to b7 fixed to 0 Unused Jejnq ey Sed This flag is set to 0 OFF when either of the following operation is performed When the operation mode shifts to the setting mode by turning off from on Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 When Unused channel setting Un G61 Un G93 Un G125 Un G157 is set to Unused 1 When CHO PID control forced stop instruction YnC to YnF is turned on from off When Self tuning setting Un G574 Un G606 Un G638 Un G670 is set to Do not Run the ST 0 This flag is also set to 0 OFF when all disable conditions are released For disable conditions refer to 225 Section 4 17 6 This flag is set to 1 ON when the self b8 Self tuning disable status j tuning cannot be performed 145 Condition on which value turns to 1 Condition on which value turns to 0 Bit Flag name ON OFF Simult
117. Unit s Temperature rise completion range setting Unit CHLI loop disconnection detection dead band deg Temperature rise completion soak time setting CHLI heater disconnection alert setting 96 Pix Unit min Heater disconnection output off time current error detection delay count uoneJedo 1 1 zz xipueddy The initial settings are written in the CPU module Turning the CPU module to RUN automatically writes the setting data into the Q64TCN and the settings become enabled 2 L 4J0jeunBijuo pue X9 Burs 1 ueuM Z xipueddy 369 Function Description Auto refresh setting Set the buffer memory for each channel in the Q64TCN where auto refresh is performed Write data error code CHLI alert definition CHLI temperature process value PV CHLI alert set value 1 CHLI manipulated value MV CHLI alert set value 2 CHLI set value SV setting CHLI alert set value 3 CHLI proportional band P setting CHLI alert set value 4 integral time I setting CTLI heater disconnection alert setting CHLI derivative time D setting CTLI heater current process value CHLI loop disconnection detection judgment time CHLI manipulated value 0 4000 0 12000 0 16000 CHLI transistor output flag CHLI temperature rise judgment flag Values stored in the buffer memory in the Q64TCN where the auto refresh setting is configured
118. are automatically read when the CPU module executes END instruction Monitor test Monitor test the buffer memory and I O signals of the Q64TCN Also the auto tuning function can be executed Write data error code CHO Alert 2 CHLI decimal point position CHLI Alert 3 CHLI temperature process value PV CHLI Alert 4 manipulated value MV CHLI Heater disconnection alert CHLI set value SV setting CHLI Loop disconnection alert CHLI transistor output flag Output off time current error alert ON delay output CHLI alert 1 mode setting Cold junction temperature process value CHLI alert set value 1 X00 Module ready flag CHLI alert 2 mode setting X01 Operation mode status CHLI alert set value 2 X02 Write error flag CHLI alert 3 mode setting X03 Hardware error flag CHLI alert set value 3 X04 CH1 auto tuning status CHLI alert 4 mode setting X05 CH2 auto tuning status CHLI alert set value 4 X06 CH3 auto tuning status Alert dead band setting x 0 196 X07 CH4 auto tuning status Alert delay count 5 loop disconnection detection judgment time X08 EPROM write completion flag Unit s X09 Default value write completion flag CHLI loop disconnection detection dead band E2PROM write failure flag heater disconnection alert setting Heater disconnection output off time current error XOB Setting change c
119. are changed automatically Changing automatically the upper limit output limiter value of each Peak current suppression EN P Page 229 channel and dividing the timing of transistor output can suppress function Section 4 18 the peak current Simultaneous This function allows several loops to reach the set value SV at the Page 234 temperature rise function same time Section 4 19 Forward action reverse Whether to perform PID operations in the forward action or reverse Page 248 action selection function action can be selected Section 4 20 Loop disconnection Page 249 Errors in the control system control loop can be detected O x detection function Section 4 21 Proportional band setting The proportional band P can be individually set for heating or 251 function cooling Section 4 22 When the auto tuning is executed an auto tuning formula is Cooling method setting j Page 252 automatically selected according to the selected cooling method x function Section 4 23 and the operation starts By changing the temperature where the cooling transistor output is Overlap dead band MM SN E Page 253 started whether control stability is prioritized or energy saving is x function du Section 4 24 prioritized can be selected Temperature conversion In heating cooling control normal mode and mix control normal Paae 256 function using unused mode only temperature measuremen
120. as the input Input range upper limit DO of Un G5 to returned to the value within the range Un G8 turns on temperature measurement range Write data error code Un GO is cleared to 0 The following flags and buffer memory bits that turn on when an The temperature process The ALM LED flashes alarm occurs turn off automatically value PV is below the Alert occurrence flag XnC to XnF When the temperature process value 020A temperature measurement turns on PV has returned to the value within range that was set as the input Input range lower limit b1 of UnG5 to the temperature measurement range range Un G8 turns on CHD Alert occurrence flag XnC to XnF The applicable bit lt 5 Page 85 Section 3 4 2 3 of Alert definition Un G5 to Un G8 The ALM LED flashes When Error reset instruction Yn2 is CHO Alert occurrence flag XnC to XnF turned OFF ON OFF after a A loop disconnection has been turns on current error due to a disconnection Loop disconnection detection b13 of or output off is restored Write data Un G5 to Un G8 turns on error code Un G0 is cleared to 0 The HBA LED turns on The following flags and buffer Alert occurrence flag XnC to XnF memory bits that turn on when an o40Ay A heater disconnection has t rs On alarm occurs turn off automatically been detected Heater disconnection
121. auto tuning a Normal completion The Q64TCN operates as follows Turns off CHLI Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 Stores the PID constants in the buffer memory s Page 174 Section 4 6 3 Stores a value in Loop disconnection detection judgment time Un G59 Un G91 Un G123 Un G155 If this was set to 0 s at the start of auto tuning the setting remains unchanged b Abnormal completion The Q64TCN operates as follows Turns off Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 Does not store the PID constants in the buffer memory s Page 174 Section 4 6 3 9 Checking the completion of auto tuning The completion of auto tuning can be checked by the status change from on to off in CHLI Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 183 uonounJ Bulun 10 Adjustment after auto tuning To change the control response toward the PID constants calculated by auto tuning change the setting in the following buffer memory area Control response parameter Un G49 Un G81 Un G113 Un G145 5 Page 114 Section 3 4 2 25 184 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 4 7 Simple Two degree of freedom This is the simplified control form of the two degree of freedom PID control In this form of PID control the Q64TCN controls the target subject using not only PID constants but also the control response parameter The response speed toward the change of the set value SV can be selected from three levels General PID
122. b duae MT3b thermometer b thermometer b CH4 Resi Monitor 4 resi 18 NC NC Unused IN4 b4 CH4 b a MT4 b pA S 278 thermometer b thermometer b CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS AND THE PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION Terminal block for I O Terminal Heating cooling control g Mix control normal mode Mix control expanded mode number Indication expanded mode Symbol Name Symbol Name Symbol Name 1 OUT1 L1H CH1 Heating output L1H CH1 Heating output L1H CH1 Heating output 2 OUT2 L1C CH1 Cooling output L1C CH1 Cooling output L1C CH1 Cooling output 3 OUT3 L2H CH2 Heating output L3 CH3 Output L3 CH3 Output 4 OUT4 L2C CH2 Cooling output L4 CH4 Output L4 CH4 Output 5 Output common COM Output common COM Output common 6 NC NC Unused NC Unused NC Unused 7 N1A1 CH1A CH1 Resistance CH1A CH1 Resistance CH1A CH1 Resistance thermometer A thermometer A thermometer A 8 N2 A2 CH2A CH2 Resistance MT2A Monitor 2 resistance CH2A CH2 Resistance thermometer A thermometer A thermometer A 9 N1 B1 CH1B CH1 Resistance CH1B CH1 Resistance CH1B CH1 Resistance thermometer B thermometer B thermometer B 40 N2 B2 CH2B CH2 Resistance MT2B Monitor 2 resistance CH2B CH2 Resistance thermometer B thermometer B thermometer B 11 IN1 b1 CH1b CH1 Resistance CH1b CH1 Resistance CH1b CH1 Resistance thermometer b thermometer b thermometer b 42 IN2 b2 CH2b CH2 Resistance MT2b Mo
123. band setting Ph 3 0 95 3 0 Cooling side proportional band Pc setting 0 0 0 0 Integral time I setting 2405 2405 Derivative time 0 setting 60s 60s Loop disconnection detection judgment time 4805 4805 Auto tuning execution Auto tuning start Start Start Start Start Auto tuning stop Status Not executed Not executed Not executed Not executed Result of automatic backup of PID constant T Executes auto tuning The time between the start and completion of auto tuning depends on the object to be controlled After auto tuning starts this window can be closed b Devices used by a user Device Description X22 Error code reset instruction X23 Operation mode setting instruction QX42 X20 to X5F X24 E PROM s PID constants read instruction X1010 Module READY flag Sam Q64TCTTN X1010 to X101F Y60 to Y6F Error code output QY42P Y60 to Y9F Y1011 Setting operation mode instruction Y1012 Error reset instruction Q64TCTTN Y1010 to Y101F Y1018 E PROM backup instruction Y101B Setting change instruction D9 Write data storage device using Z P REMTO instruction for E2PROM s PID constants read D10 Read data storage device using Z P REMFR instruction for E PROM s PID constants read D11 Write data storage device using Z P REMTO instruction for E27PROM s PID constants read M300 to M305 CH1 E2PROM s PID constants r
124. channel setting Un G61 Un G93 Un1G 125 Un1G 157 is set to Unused 1 s Page 124 Section 3 4 2 35 Point P The manipulated value MV and manipulated value MV for output with another analog module of when CHLI PID control forced stop instruction YnC to YnF is turned on from off are as follows Buffer memory address Buffer memory area name Stored value Reference CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Manipulated value MV Un G13 Un G14 Un G15 Un G16 50 5 0 Page 87 Section 3 4 2 5 Manipulated value MV for Un G177 Un G178 UnG179 Un G180 0 Page 131 Section 3 4 2 47 output with another analog module CHLI Manipulated value for heating Un G13 Un G14 Un G15 Un G16 50 5 0 Page 87 Section 3 4 2 5 MVh Un G13 to Un G16 Manipulated value of heating MVh for output with another Un G177 Un G178 Un G179 Un G180 0 Page 131 Section 3 4 2 47 analog module Manipulated value for cooling Un G704 Un G705 Un G706 Un G707 50 5 0 Page 87 Section 3 4 2 5 Manipulated value of cooling MVc for output with another Un G708 Un G709 Un G710 Un G711 0 Page 131 Section 3 4 2 47 analog module When CHLI PID control forced stop instruction YnC to YnF is turned off from on the forced stop of PID control is released PID operation resumes with the manipulated value MV which was being output when the PID control was forcibly s
125. control is called one degree of freedom PID control In the one degree of freedom PID control when PID constants to improve response to the change of the set value SV are set response to the disturbance degrades Conversely when PID constants to improve response to the disturbance are set response to the change of the set value SV degrades On the other hand in the two degree of freedom PID control response to the change of the set value SV and response to the disturbance can be compatible with each other Note that required parameter settings increase and PID constants can hardly be auto set by the auto tuning function for complete two degree of freedom PID control Therefore the Q64TCN operates in the simple two degree of freedom PID control for which parameters are simplified The level of response to the change of the set value SV can be selected from the following maintaining the PID constants that improve response to the disturbance Fast Normal Slow Temperature process value PV Fast A 4 P Normal Setvalue SV 2 gt Change Slow Setvalue SV 1 gt Time ulopeaJj jo eeJBep o ejduigS Zy Set value SV change point 1 Setting method Set a value Control response parameter Un G49 Un G81 Un G113 Un G145 s Page 114 Section 3 4 2 25 185 4 8 Derivative Action Selection Function Common An derivative action
126. detection 612 When the current error due to of Un G5 to Un G8 turns on disconnection or output off is restored The HBA LED turns on Alert occurrence flag XnC to A current itor CHO Alert occurrence flag XnC to XnF XnF O5LIA turns on off time has been detected CHLI Output off time current error b14 of Un G5 to Un G8 turns on The applicable bit I 5 Page 85 Section 3 4 2 3 of Alert definition Un G5 to Un G8 357 151 epo 7g Alarm code hexadecimal Cause Operation at alarm occurrence Action 1 The ALM LED turns CHO Alert occurrence flag XnC to XnF 06LIAg Alert 1 has occurred turns on When Error reset instruction Yn2 is Alert 1 b8 of Un G5 to Un G8 turns turned OFF ON OFF after the on temperature process value PV is The ALM LED turns on restored after going into alert status CHLI Alert occurrence flag XnC to XnF Write data error code Un GO is 070A Alert 2 has occurred turns on cleared to 0 CHO Alert 2 b9 of Un G5 to Un G8 turns The following flags and buffer on memory bits that turn on when an The ALM LED turns on alarm occurs turn off automatically Alert occurrence flag XnC to XnF when the temperature process value 08 Alert 3 has occurred turns on PV is restored from alert status Alert 3 610 of Un G5 to Un G8 turns Alert occurrence f
127. es Bee eed aS 373 388 Batch individual setting for temperature rise and temperature drop 187 Buffer memory eee 16 Buffer memory address by control mode 57 Buffer memory address for error history 81 Buffer memory areas related to auto tuning 174 Buffer memory areas related to control method 168 Buffer memory areas that can be saved and restored EUER EC MR 373 Buffer memory areas that can be set only in the setting moder rne Id ACA 54 Buffer memory assignment list 57 Buffer memory data backup 264 Checking the completion of auto tuning 183 CHLI 2 point sensor compensation gain latch completion Un G551 Un G583 Un G615 Un G647 143 2 point sensor compensation gain latch request Un G550 Un G582 Un G614 Un G646 142 2 point sensor compensation gain value compensation value Un G547 Un G579 Un G611 WMN G643 iuret RR Rm e e eed 141 2 point sensor compensation gain value measured value Un G546 Un G578 Un G610 UMG642 Sk ara ine balls ibe ey bes 141 2 point sensor compensation offset latch completion Un G549 Un G581 Un G613 Un G645 Pea Dace dene Acie dodi QE Soh a aad e 142 2 point sensor compensation offset latch request Un G548 Un G580 Un G612 Un G644 142 2 point sensor compensation offset value
128. following objects incorrect PID constants may be determined Controlled objects where a disturbance periodically occurs Controlled objects with strong mutual interference 224 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 6 Conditions where self tuning is not executed This section explains the conditions where self tuning is not executed a The control method is not the PID control method When the control method is one of the methods other than the PID control method two position control P control PI control PD control the following is operated CHO Self tuning disable status b8 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 turns 1 ON When all PID constants of target channels turn to a value other than 0 self tuning is enabled Temperature process value PV 1 D Set value SV Oscillation detected Time Self tuning disabled i Self tuning in execution Proportional band P setting Un G35 Un G67 Un G99 Un G131 Integral time 1 setting X ST T Un G36 Un G68 Un G100 Un G132 _ Setting 0 uds Setting 0 Setting 0 CHO Derivative time D setting m p lt Un G37 Un G69 Un G101 Un G133 Seting 0 A 1 i on ON i z CHO Self tuning disable status OFF S b8 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 ON z CHLI PID auto correction status D NUIT EST 2 60 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un Ge71 _ DSPe previous execution result OFF S b
129. freedom PID control Therefore the Q64TCN operates in the simple two degree of freedom PID control for which parameters are simplified 22 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1 3 About the PID Operation The Q64TCN can perform PID control in process value incomplete derivation 1 3 1 Operation method and formula The PID control in process value incomplete derivation is an operation method which puts a primary delay filter on input from a derivative action and eliminate high frequency noise component in order to perform a PID operation on the deviation E 1 Algorithm of PID control in process value incomplete derivation The algorithm of PID control in process value incomplete derivation is shown below Disturbance D Q64TCN Control response Control object 4 parameters Set value SV Slow 1 Manipulated i Normal value MV 1 Fast 1 1 1 1 1 1 KP TD S 1 7 5 1 1 Temperature Kp Proportional gain Derivative process value PV Ti Integral time S Laplace transform conversion Tp Derivative time 2 Formula The formula used for the Q64TCN is shown below uoneJedo aid eurinoqy e e nuuoj pue uoneJjedo ___ ___ MVn MVn 1 PVn TD Me Sampling period MV Incomplete derivative output PV Temperature process value PV Derivative time 7 Derivative The
130. function This section describes the program example where the peak current suppression function and the simultaneous temperature rise function are used for the control 1 System configuration The following figure shows the system configuration example of when the peak current suppression function and the simultaneous temperature rise function are used for the control QCPU 16 empty points Q64TCTTN X Y10 to X Y1F QX42 X20 to X5F QY42P Y60 to Y9F Heater CH1 Object to be controlled Type K thermocouple 0 C to 1300 C Heater CH4 Object to be controlled Type K thermocouple 0 C to 1300 C Point When the Q64TCTTBWN or the Q64TCRTBWN is used the I O assignment is the same as that of the system configuration shown above Slot 0 Empty 16 points Slot 1 Intelligent 16 points Slot 2 Input 64 points Slot 3 Output 64 points uoneunBijuo 5 pyepueis e ejnpoyy eui BuisN ueuM uomnouni esu eunjejeduie snoeuejnuuis uonounj uoisseJddns xeed piepuejs ZZ 309 2 Programming condition Program example where the peak current suppression function is used 310 This program is designed to suppress the peak current by automatically changing the values of the upper limit output limiter of CH1 to CH4 and dividing the timing of the transistor output into four timing CH
131. has ended abnormally remove the cause If the buffer memory setting was changed during self tuning restore the value to the one prior to change 8 4 7 when E PROM write failure flag XnA is on Check Item Action Has a backup to E2PROM failed Turn off and on E2PROM backup instruction Yn8 and write the setting to the E7PROM If writing fails again a hardware is in failure Please consult your local Mitsubishi system service service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 351 s oq uo SN e s OHI e1ejduuoo jou oyne y ueuM G p9 sjeuBis syoeyD pg 8 4 8 When CHO Alert occurrence flag XnC to XnF is on Check Item Action Check Alert definition Un G5 to Un G8 and take the appropriate corrective action Page 85 Section 3 4 2 3 e Correct the alert set value Page 106 Section 3 4 2 18 Has the temperature process value PV exceeded the alert set value range Check Alert definition Un G5 to Un G8 and take the appropriate Has a disconnection been detected corrective action gt Page 85 Section 3 4 2 3 352 CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING 8 5 Troubleshooting by Symptom This section describes troubleshooting using the wiring resistance values of thermocouples 8 5 1 When the temperature process v
132. is used 2 Configure this setting only when the peak current suppression function is used 6 When using the parameter of an intelligent function module a Devices used by a user Device Description EI X10 Module READY flag i Q64TCTTN X10 to X1F P X12 Write error flag g 2 2 X22 Error code reset instruction S c X23 Operation mode setting instruction QX42 X20 to X5F a SSS et 5 5 24 E PROM s PID constants read instruction 8 Y11 Setting operation mode instruction S amp 12 Error reset instruction ei Q64TCTTN Y10 to Y1F S v Y18 E2PROM backup instruction d Oo Y1B Setting change instruction 2 2 o Y60 to Y6F Error code output QY42P Y60 to Y9F 3 a o o D50 Error code Devices where data is written pi D51 to D54 CHO Temperature process value PV by auto refresh z gt 20 to M23 Read completion flag 29 M24 to M27 CHO Write completion flag A 0 eg 2 c o e 3 o x e 2 2 z 313 b Parameter setting Set the contents of initial settings in the parameter 1 Open the Parameter window Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Q64TCTTN gt Parameter 2 Click Clear value for Gray Cells to set items unnecessary for the mode set on Switch Setting to 0 3 Setthe parameter 0010 Q64TCTTN Parameter Control Mode Standard Contr
133. is used Set 1000 which is the number of second winding u 0 0A to 100 0A 2 turns Current sensors CT whose Other current sensbrs CT When CT ration setting is used Set the number of second winding turns depending number of second wonding 0 0A to 100 0A 2 on the current sensor CT specification turns is 600 to 9999 can be used d Enablement of setting contents Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction YnB OFF ON gt OFF during the setting mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 OFF e Occurrence of write data error In the following case a write data error error code O00444 occurs as when the setting is out of the setting value Write error flag Xn2 turns on and the error code is stored in Write data error code Un GO When the set value of CT ratio setting Un G288 to Un G295 is out of the setting when Setting change instruction YnB is turned OFF ON OFF f Default value The default values are set to When CTL 12 S36 8 is used 0 0 to 100 0A 0 for all terminals 138 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Point When CT ratio setting is used 0 0 to 100 0A 2 is selected the setting of CTO CT ratio setting Un G288 to Un G295 is enabled In advance set CT ratio setting Un G288 to Un G295 corresponding to the sensor to be connected After that select When CT ratio setting is used 0 0 to 100 0A 2 56 Reference heater c
134. la 5s 5s gt lt 5s ie 5s gt CH1 E CH1 Transistor Transistor i output 4 output CH4 7 CH4 Transistor Transistor i output Vo output CH2 im CH2 Transistor Transistor output output CH3 CH3 Transistor Transistor output output i EM Since all the transistor outputs used Setting the transistor outputs to turn on at the same time the peak different ON timings can reduce current becomes high the peak current to that of one transistor output Peak current Peak current Timing can be divided into two to four timing uonouny uoisseJddng Juano yeed grip 229 1 The number of timing divided and upper limit output limiter Set the number of timing to be divided setting in Peak current suppression control group setting Un G784 in the setting mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 off The setting is enabled by turning off on and off Setting change instruction YnB At the time when the setting is enabled the following buffer memory area is automatically set according to the number of timing divided Upper limit output limiter Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 UnG138 s Page 108 Section 3 4 2 19 The following table lists the setting details The no of timing divided CHO Upper limit output limiter Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 2 500 50 0 3 333 33 3 4 250 25 0 The following buffer memory area is set to 0
135. lists setting values of Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 and the corresponding platinum resistance thermometer types Automatic setting when changing the input range Platinum Celsius Input range a g emperature imi imi RSEN p cy Un G32 CHO Upper limit Lower limit measuremen esolution ing limi ing limi thermometer Fahrenheit UniGe4 UniGoe Setting limiter setting limiter range type g F digit Un G128 Un G55 Un G87 Un G56 Un G88 Un G119 Un G120 Un G151 Un G152 7 200 0 to 600 0 C 0 1 6000 2000 Default value Pt100 200 0 to 200 0 C 0 1 8 2000 2000 300 to 1100 oF 1 141 1100 300 300 0 to 300 0 F 0 1 143 3000 3000 200 0 to 500 0 C 0 1 5 5000 2000 200 0 to 200 0 C 0 1 6 2000 2000 JPt100 300 to 900 F 1 140 900 300 300 0 to 300 0 F 0 1 142 3000 3000 Input from other analog modules 0 to 4000 digit 1 201 4000 0 0 to 4000 2 Input from other analog modules 0 to 12000 digit 1 202 12000 0 0 to 12000 Input from other analog modules 0 to 16000 digit 1 203 16000 0 0 to 16000 Input from other analog modules 0 to 20000 digit 1 204 20000 0 0 to 20000 Input from other analog modules 0 to 32000 digit 1 205 32000 0 0 to 32000 1 When the input range is changed the set values in some buffer memory areas are initialized automatically and return to the default value 0 LF P
136. measurement range The temperature measurement range is as follows Input range lower limit 5 of full scale to Input range upper limit 5 of full scale Ex A calculation example when Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 38 temperature measurement range 200 0 to 400 0 C Input range lower limit 5 of full scale 200 400 0 200 0 x 0 05 230 0 Input range upper limit 5 of full scale 400 400 0 200 0 x 0 05 430 0 Therefore the temperature measurement range is 230 0 to 430 0 C The Q64TCN checks whether the input temperature is in temperature measurement range of the input range When the input temperature is out of the temperature measurement range CHLI Input range upper limit bO of Un G5 to Un G8 or Input range lower limit b1 of Un G5 to Un G8 become 1 ON The conditions which the Q64TCN uses to judge whether the measured temperature is within the temperature measurement range differ depending on the following settings e Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 gt Page 54 Section 3 3 3 1 e PID continuation flag Un G169 gt Page 129 Section 3 4 2 43 CHO PID control forced stop instruction YnC to YnF lt s Page 56 Section 3 3 3 7 Stop mode setting Un G33 Un G65 Un G97 Un G129 Page 101 Section 3 4 2 13 Point P The following table lists the conditions whether to perform the temperature judgment Q Executed x Not
137. mode in operation 49 Operation of the simultaneous temperature rise function la 235 Operation on completion of auto tuning 183 Operation with starting ST 222 Operation with vibration ST 224 Outline dimensions 38 Output off time current error detection 263 Output setting at CPU stop error 162 292 Output signal list 47 Output 51 54 Overlap vested os wat 253 Wangs 105 165 170 Parameter setting 293 Partinames sued owe aes dede ona d 272 PD control ck EIER SS 166 170 Peak current 229 Peak current suppression control group setting 784 155 237 PlI contiol Jt ave Ssh WES 105 166 PID action tette etae erm Er ERR AG 28 PID auto correction status 145 PID 16 PID constants range 37 PID continuation flag Un G169 129 PID control z erus bye Eee 166 PONS aiu oen See eee kas bue 364 Procedure for the self tuning control 221 Procedure of auto tuning 176 Process CPU i aks cna Pee Ld esi isrv eh 373 Processing of the error history function
138. occurrence time Data to All CHs 0 R x x Section 10 structure is the same as that of History 1 3 4 2 89 1356 54Cy 4 2 89 1357 54Dy to System area 1359 54F 14 1360 550 158 id All CHs History Error time Data 0 R x Section 11 structure is the same as that of History 1 342 89 1364 554 4 2 89 1365 5554 to System area 1367 557 1368 558 Page 158 All CHs History Error code error occurrence Ame Dele 0 R Section 12 structure is the same as that of History 1 342 89 1372 55Cy 42 89 1373 55Dy to System area 1375 55 1376 560 Page 158 History Error code error occurrence time Data to All CHs 0 R x x Section 13 structure is the same as that of History 1 342 89 1380 564 42 89 1381 565 to System area 1383 567 1384 568 Page 158 i All CHs History Error code error occurrence ime Data 0 R Section 14 structure is the same as that of History 1 342 89 1388 56 42 89 82 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 2 Address Default Read Automatic EBOM i Target i write tiec Setting contents value Write setting vrite Reference hexadecimal 4 12 3 availability 4 1389 56D to System area 1391 56Fy 1392 570 5704 Page 158
139. output can be processed using other analog modules such as an A D converter module or D A converter module in the system 1 Input In general a temperature control module uses the temperature measured through thermocouples or platinum resistance thermometers connected to the module as a temperature process value PV In the Q64TCN the digital input value of current or voltage converted by other analog modules such as an A D converter module in the system can also be used as a temperature process value PV a Setting method Follow the procedure below 1 Seta value within the range of 200 to 299 in Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un1G 128 gt Page 94 Section 3 4 2 12 2 Store the value of another analog module such as an A D converter module into CHO Temperature process value PV for input with another analog module Un G689 to Un G692 Ls Page 147 Section 3 4 2 69 Point f the second procedure above is executed ahead of the first procedure a write data error error code 00044 occurs When this function is used the value in the following buffer memory area is used for the temperature process value PV scaling function CHO Temperature process value PV for input with another analog module Un G689 to Un G692 For details on the temperature process value PV scaling function refer to the following gt Page 190 Section 4 11 2 Output Instead of the transistor output fr
140. provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages
141. refer to the following gt Page 85 Section 3 4 2 3 For details on the alert function refer to the following Page 190 Section 4 11 a Alert mode Set the alert mode of alert 1 to 4 in the following buffer memory areas Alert mode of alert 1 to 4 respectively correspond to alert set value 1 to 4 Buffer memory area Buffer memory address Reference name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Alert 1 mode setting Un G192 Un G208 Un G224 Un G240 Alert 2 mode setting Un G193 Un G209 Un G225 Un G241 Page 135 Section 3 4 2 52 Alert mode setting Un G194 Un G210 Un G226 Un G242 Alert 4 mode setting Un G195 Un G211 Un G227 Un G243 b Setting range The setting range differs depending on the setting of the following buffer memory area each full scale differs Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 s Page 94 Section 3 4 2 12 Also the setting range differs depending on alert mode to be set gt Page 106 Section 3 4 2 18 a Alert mode Setting range of alert set value Remarks No alert Temperature measurement range of Same as with standby the input range Upper limit input alert lower limit input alert Upper limit deviation alert lower limit deviation alert upper limit deviation alert using the set value SV lower limit deviation alert using the set value SV full scale Same as with standby and to full scal
142. the installation confirmation Check that the RUN LED on the module is off disconnect the external cable and remove the module Point f the terminal block is removed the temperature process value PV may vary within the accuracy range due to the individual differences in the cold junction temperature compensation resistors the Q64TCTTN and Q64TCTTBWN only Remove the module before installation confirmation If the installation confirmation is executed without removing the module the module does not start up normally and the RUN LED does not turn on 394 APPENDICES 3 Mounting a new module 1 Mount a new module in the same slot and connect Online Module Change the external cable Operation Target Module Module Change YOAddess DOO 2 After the module is mounted click and i Module Name Q 4TCTIN R Instalation pale nere check that the RUN LED is on Module READY flag Status Module Control Changing Module Xn0 remains off Restart Status Guidance The module can be exchanged Please press the next button after installing a new module 4 Checking operation 1 To check the operation click Cancel to cancel Online Module Change the control start Operation Target Module Module Change Address 0010 _ Execution Installation Module Name Q64TCTTN Confirmation Status Change Module Installation Completion Module Contr
143. the same time the following buffer memory areas related to the input range is initialized to the default value 0 automatically Set the buffer memory areas again if necessary Buffer memory address Loop disconnection detection dead Dori Un G60 Un G92 Un G124 Un G156 Page 123 Section 3 4 2 34 2 point sensor compensation offset Buffer memory area name Reference CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Set value SV setting Un G34 Un G66 Un G98 Un G130 Page 102 Section 3 4 2 14 e CHO Alert set value 1 Un G38 Un G70 Un G102 Un G134 m Alert set value 2 Un G39 Un G71 Un G103 Un G135 B S Page 106 Section 3 4 2 18 Alert set value 3 Un G40 Un G72 Un G104 Un G136 Alert set value 4 Un G41 Un G73 Un G105 Un G137 bias setting Un G53 Un G85 Un G117 149 Page 118 Section 3 4 2 29 Es Pd o oa a 5 33 EE o lt Un G544 Un G576 Un G608 Un G640 Page 140 Section 3 4 2 58 value measured value CHLI 2 point sensor compensation offset Un G545 Un G577 Un G609 Un G641 Page 140 Section 3 4 2 59 value compensation value 2 point sensor compensation gain value Un G546 Un G578 Un G610 Un G642 Page 141 Section 3 4 2 60 measured value 2 point sensor compensation gain value Un G547 Un G579 Un G611 Un G643 Page 141 Section 3 4 2 61 compensation value Simultaneous temperature rise gradient
144. to 53 Up to 26 x Q25PRHCPU Q00UJCPU Up to 16 Up to 8 QOOUCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU Up to 36 Up to 18 QO3UDCPU Q04UDHCPU QO6UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU_ Up to 64 Up to 32 Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU CPU type CPU model High Performance model QCPU suieis g ejqeouddy 2 Up to 24 Up to 12 Universal model QCPU 29 Applicable CPU module No of modules Applicable base unit 2 CPU type CPU model Q64TCTTN Q64TCRTN Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN Main base unit Extension base unit Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU QO6UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU Universal model Programmable QCPU controller CPU Up to 64 Up to 32 Safety CPU QS001CPU N A N A x 3 QO6CCPU V QO6CCPU V B Q12DCCPU V C Controller module Up to 64 Up to 32 O O Applicable x N A 1 Limited within the range of I O points for the CPU module 2 Can be installed to any I O slot of a base unit 3 Connection of an extension base unit is not available with any safety CPU For C Controller modules refer to the C Controller Module User s Manual a Mounting to a MELSECNET H remote I O station The following table lists the network modules and base units applicable to the Q64TCN and the number of mountable Q64TCN Depending on the combinat
145. to PU Write data error code Temperature process value PV Manipulated value MV Transistor output flag Alert definition Manipulated value MV Heating side manipulated value MVh for another analog module output Temperature rise judgment flag Set value SV monitor The data of the buffer memory is transmitted to the specified device 6 5 Auto Tuning For how to execute auto tuning refer to the following L gt Page 176 Section 4 6 5 6 6 Sensor Correction For how to execute sensor correction refer to the following L gt Page 205 Section 4 13 296 CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING This chapter describes the programs of the Q64TCN When applying any of the program examples introduced in this chapter to the actual system verify that the control of the target system has no problem thoroughly 7 1 Programming Procedure Create a program that performs temperature control in the Q64TCN using the following procedure Configure the initial setting using GX Works2 Create a sequence program to configure initial data such as input range and set value SV Configure initial data such as input range and set value SV using GX Works2 Use specific PID constants Create a sequence program to configure the PID constants v v Use specific PID constants Configure the PID constants using GX Works2 Execute the auto tunin
146. to only proportional band P Set 0 to integral time 1 and derivative time D 165 3 PI Control PI control is a control method in which integral elements are added to P control thereby an offset remaining deviation is compensated By setting the integral time 1 properly the temperature process value PV matches with the set value SV a Setting method Among proportional band P integral time 1 and derivative time D set any value to only proportional band P and integral time I Set 0 to derivative time D 4 PD Control PD control is a control method in which the derivative time D is set in addition to PD control The control mechanism is the same as P control a Setting method Among proportional band P integral time 1 and derivative time D set any value to only proportional band P and derivative time D Set 0 to integral time 1 5 PID Control PID control is a control method in which derivative elements are added to PI control thereby the temperature shifts to a stable status in a short period of time even when a drastic change has occurred By setting the derivative time D properly the control subject shifts to a stable status in a short period of time a Setting method Set any value to proportional band P integral time I and derivative time D 166 6 Condition to perform PID control The condition to be able to perform PID control depends on the sett
147. tuning is not performed d Default value The default values are set to AUTO 0 in all channels 115 Ajowaw Jejnq ey S amp a jueuuuBissy yng t 116 27 MAN output setting Un G51 Un G83 Un G115 Un G147 8 This buffer memory area is used for setting the manipulated value MV in the MAN mode a How to shift the mode Shift the mode by the following buffer memory area AUTO MAN mode shift Un G50 Un G82 Un G114 Un G146 s 115 Section 3 4 2 26 b Setting range The setting range is different between the standard control and the heating cooling control 7 Page 159 Section 4 1 In standard control 50 to 1050 5 0 to 105 0 n heating cooling control 1050 to 1050 105 0 to 105 096 c Enablement of setting contents Make sure the corresponding bits of MAN mode shift completion flag UnXG30 has been set to 1 ON and write a value in the MAN output setting A value that is written when MAN mode shift completion flag is OFF will be replaced with the manipulated value MV calculated by PID operation by the system d Default value The default values are set to 0 0 0 in all channels CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 28 CHO Setting change rate limiter Un G52 Un G84 Un G116 148 3 CHO Setting change rate limiter temperature rise Un G52 Un G84 Un G116 Un G148 63 CHO Setting change rate limiter temperature drop Un G564
148. under the Mode c c field and double click the module name to be e changed online Parameter status Mode vo Address o 10 20 30 40 System monitor 0 1 2 3 4 Online module change Powe None Intelli None None rsu QOSPHCPU gent 16pt 16pt 16pt 16pt 16pt Status Module system error Module error Module warning B Module change Close 3 Click to enable a module change Online module change Operation Target module Module change execution 1 0 address Module Q64TCTTN Installation confirmation Status Module control restart Change module selection completed Status Guidance Please tum off Y signal of the changed module when you change the intelligent function module Cancel 4 When the following error window appears click and perform the operation described on and after Page 380 Appendix 3 5 3 MELSOFT series GX Developer The target module didn t respond The task is advanced to the installation confirmation 5 Check that the RUN LED on the module is off disconnect the external cable and remove the module Point f the terminal block is removed the temperature process value PV may vary within the accuracy range due to the individual differences in the cold junction temperature compensation resistors the Q64TCTTN and Q64TCTTBWN only Remove the module before installation confir
149. used by a user Device Description X10 Module READY flag X11 Setting operation mode status X12 Write error flag X13 Hardware error flag Q64TCTTN X10 to X1F X14 CH1 Auto tuning status X18 E PROM write completion flag X1B Setting change completion flag X20 Set value write instruction X21 Auto tuning execute instruction X22 Error code reset instruction QX42 X20 to X5F X23 Operation mode setting instruction X24 E PROM s PID constants read instruction 7 Y11 Setting operation mode instruction Y12 Error reset instruction Y14 CH1 Auto tuning instruction Q64TCTTN Y10 to Y1F Y18 E PROM backup instruction Y1B Setting change instruction Y60 to Y6F Error code output QY42P Y60 to Y9F NN D50 Error code 2g D51 CH1 Temperature process value PV 2 MO For writing set value 0 D o 2 1 For writing set value 1 2 a M2 For writing set value 2 3o M10 CH1 Auto tuning completion flag a 5 2 M20 to M23 CHLI Read completion flag d z M24 to M27 Write completion flag 5 5 Y 89 Sg ga o 0 S5 Q o 3 2 c 8 2 329 330 b Program example Program that changes the setting operation mode This program is the same as that of when the module is in the standard control such as auto tuning self tuning and error code read gt 305 Section 7 2 1 6 f nitial setting program
150. where self tuning does not complete due to errors The following are the conditions where an error occurs in self tuning The setting for the buffer memory areas in the following table was changed during self tuning Buffer memory address Buffer memory area name Reference CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Proportional band P setting Un G35 Un G67 Un G99 Un G131 Page 103 Section 3 4 2 15 Integral time I setting Un G36 Un G68 Un G100 Un G132 Page 105 Section 3 4 2 16 Derivative time D setting Un G37 Un G69 Un G101 Un G133 Page 105 Section 3 4 2 17 Upper limit output limiter Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 Page 108 Section 3 4 2 19 Lower limit output limiter Un G43 Un G75 Un G107 Un G139 CHO Sensor correction value setting Un G45 Un G77 Un G109 Un G141 Page 111 Section 3 4 2 21 CHO Control output cycle setting Un G47 Un G79 Un G111 Un G143 Page 112 Section 3 4 2 23 CHO Primary delay digital filter setting Un G48 Un G80 Un G112 Un G144 Page 113 Section 3 4 2 24 i AUTO MAN mode shift Un G50 Un G82 Un G114 Un G146 Page 115 Section 3 4 2 26 CHO Setting change rate limiter Setting m Un G52 Un G84 Un G116 Un G148 Page 117 Section 3 4 2 28 change rate limiter temperature rise Forward reverse operation setting Un G54 Un G86 Un G118 Un G150 Page 119 Section 3 4 2 30 Unused channel setting Un G61 Un G93 Un G125 Un G157 Page 124 Section 3
151. with Another Analog Module Function 217 4 16 ON Delay Output Function lslssseeseee RR RR n 218 4 17 Self tuning Function 00 0 rr 219 4 18 Peak Current Suppression 229 4 19 Simultaneous Temperature Rise Function 234 4 20 Forward Reverse Action Selection 248 4 21 Loop Disconnection Detection 249 4 22 Proportional Band Setting Function 251 4 23 Cooling Method Setting Function s s s aeaee aaeeea 252 4 24 Overlap Dead Band Function 0 0000 ects 253 4 25 Temperature Conversion Function Using Unused 5 256 4 26 Heater Disconnection Detection Function 259 4 27 Output Off time Current Error Detection Function 263 4 28 Buffer Memory Data Backup Function 264 4 29 Error History Function 2 0 0 00 0 RR rael 266 4 30 Module Error History Collection Function 0 0 00 0c cece eee 268 4 31 Error Clear F nction i ck mee DERE REL ERE EROR UL SEES 269 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS AND THE PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 270 5 1 Handling Precautions 0 0 0 els 270 5 2 Settin
152. with standby using the set value SV full scale to full scale 20 Lower limit deviation alert with standby using the set value SV Upper lower limit deviation alert with standby using the 21 to full scale set value SV 22 Upper limit deviation alert with standby second time using the set value SV full scale to full scale 23 Lower limit deviation alert with standby second time using the set value SV Upper lower limit deviation alert with standby second 24 0 to full scale time using the set value SV c Enablement of setting contents Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction YnB OFF ON OFF during the setting mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 OFF When the set value is out of the range a write data error error code O00044 occurs and the Q64TCN operates with the previous set value Turning Setting change instruction YnB OFF ON OFF after the error occurrence and setting a value within the range operate the Q64TCN with the new set value d Default value The default values are set to 0 in all channels 53 CTO Heater current process value Un G256 to Un G263 C2 The heater current value which Q64TCTTBWN or Q64TCRTBWN detects is stored in this buffer memory area The current values within the range of the current sensor selected in CT selection Un G272 to Un G279 Ls Page 138 Section 3 4 2 55 is stored a Supported mo
153. 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 104 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 16 CHO Integral time I setting Un G36 Un G68 Un G100 Un G132 CS Set integral time I to perform PID control a Setting range The setting range is 0 to 3600 0 to 3600s b In the P control or PD control Set this setting to 0 For details on control methods refer to the following Page 163 Section 4 3 c Default value The default values are set to 240 240s in all channels 17 Derivative time D setting Un G37 Un G69 Un G101 Un G133 QAB Set derivative time D to perform PID control a Setting range The setting range is 0 to 3600 0 to 3600s b In the P control or PI control Set this setting to 0 For details on control methods refer to the following s Page 163 Section 4 3 c Default value The default values are set to 60 60s in all channels Ajowaw Jayng ay Jo Sed jueuuuBissy yng t 105 18 Alert set value 1 Un G38 Un G70 Un G102 Un G134 Q Alert set value 2 Un G39 Un G71 Un G103 Un G135 CR Alert set value 3 Un G40 Un G72 Un G104 Un G136 CR Alert set value 4 Un G41 Un G73 Un G105 Un G137 CR Set temperature values where Alert 1 Un G5 to Un G8 of b8 to Alert 4 Un G5 to Un G8 of b11 turn on according to selected alert mode of alert 1 to 4 For Alert definition Un G5 to Un G8
154. 1 Therefore channels which temperature sensors are not connected to detect sensor input disconnection and the ALM LED blinks When Unused channel setting Un G61 Un G93 Un G125 Un G157 is set to Unused 1 control of the corresponding channel is not performed For channels which temperature sensors are not connected to Unused channel setting Un G61 Un G93 Un G125 Un G157 must be set to Unused 1 101 Ajowaw Jeynq ay jo siiejeq 3 jueuuuBissy yng t 102 14 Set value SV setting Un G34 Un G66 Un G98 Un G130 Gag Set the target temperature value of PID control a Setting range The setting range is identical to the temperature measurement range of the set input range gt Page 94 Section 3 4 2 12 When a value which is out of the setting range is set a write data error error code 0004 and the following situations occur Write error flag Xn2 turns on The error code is stored in Write data error code Un GO b Setting unit The value to be set differs depending on the stored value in Decimal point position Un G1 to Un G4 gt Page 84 Section 3 4 2 2 e No decimal place 0 Set a value in 1 C F or digit unit One decimal place 1 Set a value in 0 1 C F unit tenfold value c Default value The default values are set to 0 in all channels CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 15 CHO Proportional band P set
155. 1 Transistor output CH2 Transistor output CH3 Transistor output CH4 Transistor output Peak current When the peak current suppression control function is not used 20s Since all the transistor outputs used turn on at the same time the peak current becomes high CH1 Transistor output CH2 Transistor output CH3 Transistor output CH4 Transistor output Peak current When the peak current suppression control function is used 20s Setting the transistor outputs to different ON timings can reduce the peak current to that of one transistor output CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING Program example where the simultaneous temperature rise function is used This program is designed to classify the CH1 and CH2 into group 1 and CH3 and CH4 into group 2 so that the channels in each group reach the set values SV simultaneously Temperature process value PV Matches temperature rise completion time in each group Set value SV H gt CH3 Set value SV gt CH2 Set value SV 4 4 CH1 Set value SV _ WILLE Temperature rise start Group 2 Group 1 arrival point arrival point Time 3 Wiring example The following figure shows a wiring example
156. 10 zug eR ae COR dnx ce e dr 87 CHLI Manipulated value of cooling MVc for output with another analog module Un G708 to UnG711 131 Manipulated value of heating MVh for output with another analog module Un G177 to UnG180 131 CHO Manual reset amount setting Un G724 Un G740 Un G756 772 149 Output variation limiter setting Un G44 Un G76 Un G108 140 110 CHO Overlap dead band function Un G723 Un G739 Un G755 771 148 CHO PID control forced stop instruction YnC to YnF ace ee Re 56 410 CHO Primary delay digital filter setting Un G48 Un G80 Un G112 144 113 CHLI Process value PV scaling function enable disable setting Un G725 Un G741 Un1G757 Un G773 E 149 CHLI Process value PV scaling lower limit value Un G726 UnG742 Un G758 UnG774 150 CHO Process value PV scaling upper limit value Un G727 Un G743 Un G759 Un G775 150 Process value PV scaling value Un G728 Un G744 Un G760 Un G776 150 CHO Proportional band P setting Un G35 Un G67 Un G99 131 103 Self tuning flag Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 ace Sate LESS 145 Self tuning setting Un G574 Un G606 Un G638 UNGO O i eau a eh tea weds 144 Sensor correction value s
157. 10UDEH Q20UDEHCPU Multiple CPU system Single CPU system Q50UDEH Q100UDEHCPU Multiple CPU system If installed in a MELSECNET H remote I O station Version 1 62Q or later Version 8 484 or later Version 8 76E or later Version 8 62Q or later Version 8 68W or later Version 8 76E or later Version 1 23Z or later SWOD5C QTCU 40E or earlier versions cannot be used N A N A Version 6 or later SWOD5C QTCU 10B or later 4 For the function available in GX Configurator TC refer to the following Page 369 Appendix 2 2 2 31 suieis S ajqealddy 2 32 Point Depending on the version of GX Configurator TC available systems and CPU modules are different Download the latest version of GX Configurator TC on the MELFANSweb http Awww MitsubishiElectric co jp melfansweb 5 Temperature sensor For usable temperature sensors refer to the following Page 39 Section 3 1 1 6 Current sensor for heater disconnection detection The following table lists current sensors for heater disconnection detection available with the Q64TCTTBWN or Q64TCRTBWN Model name Remarks Manufacturer CTL 12 S36 8 0 0 to 100 0A 1 CTL 12 S36 10 0 0 to 100 0A CTL 12 S56 10 0 0 to 100 0A CTL 6 P 0 00 to 20 00A CTL 6 P H 0 00 to 20 00A U R D Co LTD 1 The CTL 12 S36 8 and CTL 6 P can be used although they ha
158. 15 fixed to 0 Unused Ajowaw Jayng ay Jo Sed jueuuuBissy yng t 157 88 Latest address of error history Un G1279 C2 The latest address of error history is stored For details on the error history function refer to the following gt Page 266 Section 4 29 89 Error history 1 to 16 Un1G1280 to Un G1407 C23 Errors and alarms occurred in the module are recorded up to 16 Ex For the error history 1 Buffer memory address p4s to b8 b7 to bo Un G1280 Error code Un G1281 First two digits of the year Last two digits of the year Un G1282 Month Day Un G1283 Hour Minute Un G1284 Second Day of the week 2 Un G1285 to System area Un G1287 1 For error codes and alarm codes refer to the following gt Page 354 Section 8 6 Page 357 Section 8 7 2 The following table lists the stored value and corresponding each day of the week Stored value Day of the week 0 Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Oo BR Saturday For details on the error history function refer to the following gt Page 266 Section 4 29 158 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS CHAPTER 4 This chapter explains functions of the Q64TCN Point For the functions indicated with the icon the following terms are used unless otherwise specified Proportional band P includ
159. 18 Within range alert using the set value SV 19 Upper limit deviation alert with standby using the set value SV 20 Lower limit deviation alert with standby using the set value SV 2 21 Upper lower limit deviation alert with standby using the set value SV B 22 Upper limit deviation alert with standby second time using the set value SV 23 Lower limit deviation alert with standby second time using the set value SV 24 Upper lower limit deviation alert with standby second time using the set value SV 195 3 Alert with standby Even if the temperature process value PV or deviation E is in a condition to be in an alert status when the module s status is changed from the setting mode to the operation mode Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 OFF ON the alert does not occur The alert function can be disabled until the temperature process value PV or deviation E strays out of the condition to be in an alert status Ex When the alert mode is set to Lower limit deviation alert with standby 10 The alert function is inactive until the deviation E exceeds the alert set value right figure below Lower limit deviation alert gt Page 193 Section Lower limit deviation alert with standby 4 11 2 c Deviation E Deviation Temperature process value PV set value SV 1 Temperature process value PV set value SV 1 A A 0 gt Time 0 gt Time Alert set v
160. 2 Module change execution When the window appears click Installation confirmation to restart Fede e modde utlaion compen the control Module READY flag Xn0 turns on Status Guidance The controls such as 1 0 FROM TO instruction executions and automatic refresh for the installed module are restarted Please confirm the parameter setting and wiring etc and execute Cancel 3 The online module change is complete MELSOFT series GX Developer x Ll Online module change completed Bunjes y JO SEM 91 soyesnByuoy XD GE xipueddy ueuM eunpeooug ejnpojy eujuo xipueddy 381 Appendix 3 6 When a sequence program was used for the initial setting 1 Stopping operation Device test Bit device Device Close vig x Hide hist 2 FORCE FORCE OFF _ Toggle force ide history z Word device buffer memory Device C Buffermemory Module sta zi ues Setting value DEC 16 bit integer cj Set Program Label reference program Execution history Device Setting condition Force OFF Force OFF Force OFF Lo Clear Force OFF Open the Device test window O Online gt Debug gt Device test Turn off the following output signals to stop the operation of the module Setting operation mode instruction Yn1
161. 24 CH2 Decimal point position 84 1 R x x Section CH3 Decimal point position 5 3 4 2 2 4 44 CH4 Decimal point position 5 5y CH1 Alert definition 6 64 CH2 Alert definition Page 85 0 R x x Section 8 8y CH4 Alert definition 9 9 CH1 Temperature process value PV 10 Ay CH2 Temperature process value PV Page 87 0 R x x Section 11 Bu CH3 Temperature process value PV 3 4 2 4 12 Cy CH4 Temperature process value PV Manipulated Manipulated M lated 13 Dy CH1 value for value for heating MVh heating MVh Manipulated Manipulated Manipulated value for 14 Ey CH2 value MV value for heating heating MVh 7 MVh Page 87 Manipulated 0 R x x Section 15 B Manipulated value for Manipulated 3 42 5 value MV heating value MV MVh 8 Manipulated 16 10 pud Manipulated for Manipulated value MV heating value MV MVh 6 Temperature Temperature Temperature 17 114 CH1 rise judgment rise judgmen rise judgment flag flag flag Temperature Temperature Temperature 18 12 CH2 rise judgment rise judgmen rise judgment flag flag flag Page 89 0 R x x Section Temperature Temperature Temperature 3 4 2 6 19 13 CH3 rise judgment rise judgmen rise judgment flag flag 9 flag Temperature Temperature Temperature 20 144 CH4 rise judgment rise judgmen rise judgment flag 9 flag 58 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS
162. 3 1 3 1 Operation method and formula snaa 0000 cece e 23 1 3 2 The Q64TCN actions se 24 1 3 3 Proportional action P action 0 0 00 RA 25 1 3 4 Integral action 1 m 26 1 3 5 Derivative action 27 1 3 6 PID action ss sese dade hand adie debet bns qi baee tegi 28 CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 29 2 4 Applicable Systems epe rir ee erk e esie Del Wei deep RUP RPM 29 2 2 Using the Q64TCN with Redundant CPU 2 00 eee 33 2 3 How to Check the Function Version and Serial 34 2 4 Precautions for System Configuration s ss aaaea daadaa anaana aaa 36 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 37 3 1 Performance Specifications 37 3 1 1 Type of usable temperature sensors temperature measurement range resolution and effect from wiring resistance of 1 39 3 1 2 Sampling cycle and control output cycle 41 3 1 3 Number of parameters to be set 42 3 25 Function Eis o vec ARCUP venta aE 43 3 3 Signals Transferred to from the CPU 46 3 9 1 2 nick sae tia C eR ier
163. 3 Un G779 and Simultaneous temperature rise dead time Un G732 Un G748 Un G764 Un G780 Point This area is enabled only for the following channels channels of the standard control CH1 to CH4 when the standard control is used CH3 and CH4 when mix control normal mode or mix control expanded mode is used For details on the simultaneous temperature rise function refer to the following s Page 234 Section 4 19 143 144 67 Self tuning setting Un G574 Un G606 Un G638 Un G670 8 Perform operation setting of self tuning with this buffer memory area For details on the self tuning function refer to the following s Page 219 Section 4 17 a Setting range 0 Do Not Run the ST 1 Starting ST PID Constants Only 2 Starting ST Simultaneous Temperature Rise Parameter Only 3 Starting ST PID Constants and Simultaneous Temperature Rise Parameter 4 Starting ST and vibration ST PID Constants Only The simultaneous temperature rise parameter 1 can be calculated during the self tuning setting depending on the setting 1 Indicates the values of Simultaneous temperature rise gradient data Un G731 Un G747 Un G763 Un G779 Simultaneous temperature rise dead time Un G732 Un G748 Un G764 Un G780 to be used in the simultaneous temperature rise function For details on the simultaneous temperature rise function refer to the following Page 234 Section
164. 3 3 3 7 Hardware failure has occurred The ERR LED is on Page 348 Section 8 3 2 Temperature process value PV Un G9 to Un G12 has exceeded the temperature measurement range Input range upper limit 60 of Un G5 to Un G8 Input range Page 85 Section 3 4 2 3 lower limit b1 of Un G5 to Un G8 is 1 CHO E2PROM s PID constants read instruction Un G62 Un G94 Un G126 Un G158 is set to Requested 1 CHO Write completion flag b4 to b7 of Un G31 is on Page 92 Section 3 4 2 11 Page 125 Section 3 4 2 36 a When one of the conditions 1 to 5 applies Auto tuning starts when the condition no longer applies b When the condition 7 applies CHLI Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 turns on for a moment Even though the temperature process value PV goes back within the temperature measurement range auto tuning does not start until Auto tuning instruction Yn4 to Yn7 is turned on from off once again c When the condition 8 or 9 applies Even though the internal processing of auto tuning is completed and PID constants are stored Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 does not turn off therefore the auto tuning is not completed uonounJ Buiun 181 7 Conditions where auto tuning ends in fail The conditions are described below a Shift from the operation mode to the setting mode Shifting from the operation mode to the setting mode Setting operation
165. 3 4 2 15 setting setting Cooling upper Cooling upper Page 108 721 2D14 CH1 System area limit output limit output 1000 R W x Section limiter limiter 3 4 2 19 Cooling control Cooling control Page 112 722 202 CH1 System area output cycle output cycle 30 R W x Section EN setting setting 3 4 2 23 OS og Page 148 2 Overlap dead Overlap dead i A 723 2D3 CH1 System area ee 0 R W x Section Q band setting band setting 2 3 3 4 2 72 149 a gt 724 204 CH1 Manual reset amount setting 0 R W x Section 3 2 3 4 2 73 gs Process value PV scaling function enable disable 149 lt 725 2D54 CH1 0 R W x Section 2 setting 3 42 74 e 726 2D64 CH1 Process value PV scaling lower limit value 0 R W x 150 Section z 727 207 CH1 Process value PV scaling upper limit value 0 R W x 3 4 2 75 a Page 150 728 2D84 CH1 Process value PV scaling value 0 R x x Section 3 4 2 76 Page 150 729 2D94 CH1 Derivative action selection 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 77 Simultaneous Page 151 730 2DAy CH1 emperaturerise System area System area 0 R W x Section group setting 3 4 2 78 Simultaneous Page 151 731 2DBy CH1 emperature rise System area System area 0 R W Section gradient data 3 4 2 79 Simultaneous Page 152 732 2DCy CH1 emperature rise System area System area 0 R W Section dead time 3 4 2 80
166. 30 Unused channel setting Un G61 Un G93 Un G125 Un G157 Page 124 Section 3 4 2 35 Cold junction temperature compensation Un G182 Page 133 Section 3 4 2 49 selection c Out of the temperature measurement range If CHO Temperature process value PV Un G9 to Un G12 exceeds the temperature measurement range Input range upper limit 60 of Un G5 to Un G8 or Input range lower limit 61 of Un G5 to Un G8 becomes 1 ON auto tuning ends in fail 7 5 85 Section 3 4 2 3 d Time until the temperature process value PV reaches the set value SV for the first time or a half the hunting cycle of the temperature process value PV If the time below exceeds two hours auto tuning ends in fail Time from the start of auto tuning until Temperature process value PV Un G9 to Un G12 reaches the set value SV for the first time A half the hunting cycle of Temperature process value PV Un G9 to Un G12 Point For the time above not to exceed two hours bring the temperature of the subject close to the set value SV in advance then execute auto tuning 182 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS e Calculated values of PID constants after auto tuning If a calculated value of PID constants after auto tuning exceeds one of the following ranges auto tuning ends in fail CHO Proportional band P setting Un G35 Un G67 Un G99 Un G131 1 to 10000 0 1 to 1000 0 CHO Integral ti
167. 380 2 Mount new module the same slot and connect the external cable When the module is mounted click and check that the RUN LED is on Module READY flag Xn0 remains off To check the operation click Cancel to cancel the control start Click change mode to stop the Online module APPENDICES From the previous page Y 3 Click Close to close the Installed status Base 3 oes System Monitor window MasterPLC gt Unmo Unma unti ng ng QOSPHCPU Parameter status r Mode vo Address 30 C System monitor 3 Online module change Powe None rsu QOSPHCPU ply 16 Status Bl Module system enor Module error Module waring B Module change 4 Before restarting the control check the following items for the Q64TCN If an error occurs refer to TROUBLESHOOTING gt Page 346 CHAPTER 8 and take corrective action If the RUN LED is on If the ERR LED is off If Write error flag Xn2 is off f Hardware error flag Xn3 is off 5 Restarting control 1 Open the Online module change window again Online module change Operation Target module ES Diagnosis gt Online module change 1 0 address Module QB4TCTTN
168. 4 2 29 Auto tuning mode selection Page 134 Section 3 4 2 51 Temperature rise completion range setting Page 128 Section 3 4 2 41 Temperature rise completion soak time setting Transistor output monitor ON delay time setting Page 129 Section 3 4 2 42 Page 130 Section 3 4 2 45 CHAPTER 6 VARIOUS SETTINGS Setting item Reference Resolution of the manipulated value for output with another analog module Page 132 Section 3 4 2 48 CT monitor method switching Page 130 Section 3 4 2 46 CTO CT input channel assignment setting Page 137 Section 3 4 2 54 CTO CT selection Page 138 Section 3 4 2 55 CTO Reference heater current value CTO CT Ratio setting Page 139 Section 3 4 2 56 Page 139 Section 3 4 2 57 4 When using CH2 to CH4 follow the step 3 described earlier 295 Bumes 1ejeurejegd g9 6 4 Auto Refresh Buffer memory data can be transferred to specified devices using this function By using this auto refresh setting reading or writing is not required on a program 1 Setting method Open the Auto_Refresh window 1 Start Auto Refresh on the Project window Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Module name gt Auto Refresh 2 Click the item to set and enter the auto refresh target device 52 0010 Q64TCTTN Auto Refresh ex Display Filter Display All z Item Fransfer
169. 4 2 35 CHO Setting change rate limiter Un G564 Un G596 Un G628 Un G660 Page 117 Section 3 4 2 28 temperature drop Temperature process value PV Un G9 to Un G12 is outside the temperature measurement range Page 85 Section 3 4 2 3 The manipulated value MV does not reach the upper limit output limiter value or lower limit output limiter value before the measurement is completed and necessary measurement data is not obtained After self tuning is started with the starting ST the temperature process value PV that is supposed to rise drops by 1 C F or more After self tuning is started with the starting ST the temperature process value PV that is supposed to drop rises by 1 C F or more When an error occurs in self tuning CH Self tuning error 610 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 turns 1 ON 221 uonounj DuiunJles Lpy 9 Precautions Before starting the temperature control using the Q64TCN power on a controlled object such as a heater If the temperature control is started with a heater powered off PID constants are calculated based on a response that differs from the original characteristics using self tuning Temperature process value PV A Set value SV Response of when a heater is powered on after the Q64TCN starts temperature control Control start oy Pali LX Do not use the self tuning function for controlled object
170. 4 2 42 66 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Target Setting contents channel 2 Address he Default Read Automatic ETROM eating writ decimal Cunent Standard value Write setting E IX contr i ili hexadecimal cooling e 3 availability sensor control id CT Page 129 169 9 All CHs PID continuation flag 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 43 Page 129 170 All CHs Heater disconnection correction function selection 11 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 44 171 ABy to System area 174 AEy Page 130 175 AF 4 All CHs Transistor output monitor ON delay time setting 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 45 Page 130 176 AllCHs CT monitor method switching 11 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 46 Manipulated Manipulated Manipulated value MV for value of value of heating MVh heating MVh 177 1 CH1 output with eating UD MYN 0 R x x for output with for output with another analog another analog another analog module module module Manipulated Manipulated Manipulated value of value of value MV for heat heating MVh 178 B2 CH2 output with eating 0 R x x for output with for output with another analog another analog another analog module module module 7 Page 131 Section anipulate Manipulated P Manipulated 3 42 47 val
171. 40 RAN M Section setting setting setting 3 4 2 16 Derivative ti Derivative ti Derivative time Page 105 69 45y CH2 eriva ime eriva ime 60 RW Section D setting D setting D setting 3 4 2 17 Alert set value 70 46 CH2 Alert set value 1 Set value 17 0 R W Alert set val Alert set value 71474 CH2 Alert set value 2 HOT y 0 R W 106 Section Alert set val Alert set value 72 48 CH2 Alert set value 3 er Ser VERIS 3 7 0 R W 9 4 2 18 Alert set val Alert set value 73 49y CH2 Alert set value 4 SONS USUS 0 R W Heating upper Heating upper Upper limit XR limit output 74 4 CH2 limit output imit outpu 1000 R W x 108 output limiter FM C limiter limiter Section mi 3 4 2 19 limit 75 4By CH2 lower M System area System area 0 R W x output limiter m Output Output Page 110 76 4 CH2 i ia Ion variation limiter variation limiter 0 R W x Section in imiter setting setting setting 7 3 4 2 20 Page 111 77 4Dy CH2 Sensor correction value setting 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 21 j Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment P Page 111 78 2 sensitivity dead 918 5 R W x Section H dead band dead band band setting 47 3 4 2 22 setting setting 61 JSI yu wu isse JONG NOLYT9O L Ve jueuuuBissy yng t Target Setting contents
172. 47 Un G79 Un G111 Un G143 in percentage s Page 112 Section 3 4 2 23 Manipulated value for heating MVh indicates ON time of Heating control output cycle setting Un G47 Un G79 Un G111 Un G143 in percentage s Page 112 Section 3 4 2 23 Manipulated value for cooling MVc indicates ON time of CHO Cooling control output cycle setting Un G722 Un G738 Un G754 Un G770 in percentage gt Page 112 Section 3 4 2 23 Ex When 600 60 0 is stored in CHO Manipulated value MV Un G13 to Un G16 and the value of the buffer memory is set as shown in the following CHO Control output cycle setting Un G47 Un G79 Un G111 Un G143 30s ON time of transistor output Control output cycle setting s x Manipulated value MV 30 x 0 6 18 s ON time of transistor output is 18s Transistor output is pulse of ON for 18s OFF for 12s 18s 60 on T 12s 40 Transistor output OFF CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 6 Temperature rise judgment flag Un G17 to Un G20 This flag is for checking whether the temperature process value PV is in the temperature rise completion range or not The following values are stored in this buffer memory area 0 Out of temperature rise completion range 1 Within temperature rise completion range When the temperature process value PV stays in the temperature rise completion range during the set temperature rise completion soak time 1 is stored in this bu
173. 48 Un G80 Un G112 Un G144 Page 113 Section 3 4 2 24 CHO AUTO MAN mode shift Un G50 Un G82 Un G114 Un G146 Page 115 Section 3 4 2 26 AT bias Un G53 Un G85 Un G117 Un G149 Page 118 Section 3 4 2 29 Forward reverse action setting Un G54 Un G86 Un G118 Un G150 Page 119 Section 3 4 2 30 Auto tuning mode selection Un G184 Un G185 Un G186 Un G187 Page 134 Section 3 4 2 51 3 Storing the calculated value after auto tuning After auto tuning is completed the calculated value is stored into the following buffer memory addresses Buffer memory address Buffer memory area name Reference CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CHLI Proportional band P setting Un G35 Un G67 Un G99 Un G131 Heating proportional band Ph Un G35 Un G67 Un G99 Un G131 setting Page 103 Section 3 4 2 15 Cooling proportional band Pc Un G720 Un G736 Un G752 Un G768 setting Integral time 1 setting Un G36 Un G68 Un G100 Un G132 Page 105 Section 3 4 2 16 Derivative time D setting Un G37 Un G69 Un G101 Un G133 Page 105 Section 3 4 2 17 CHLI Loop disconnection detection Un G59 Un G91 Un G123 Un G155 Page 122 Section 3 4 2 33 judgment time 1 A value twice greater than the one in Integral time 1 setting Un G36 Un G68 Un G100 Un G132 is automatically set However if this setting is O s when auto tuning is in process the loop disconnection detect
174. 5 Un G706 Un G707 Un G177 to Un G180 are used for heating in the heating cooling control The store range differs depending on the resolution set in the following buffer memory area 0 to 4000 0 to 12000 0 to 16000 0 to 20000 e Resolution of the manipulated value for output with another analog module Un G181 gt Page 132 Section 3 4 2 48 For details refer to the following L gt Page 217 Section 4 15 2 Point When the device which performs heating or cooling can receive only the analog input use other analog modules such as D A converter module to convert the digital output to the analog input Ajowaw Jeynq ay Sed jueuuuBissy yng t 131 132 48 Resolution of the manipulated value for output with another analog module Un G181 8 Set the resolution of the following buffer memory areas lt gt Page 87 Section 3 4 2 5 CHO Manipulated value MV Un G13 to Un G16 CHO Manipulated value for heating MVh Un G13 to Un G16 CHO Manipulated value for cooling MVc Un G704 to Un G707 For details refer to the following s Page 217 Section 4 15 2 a Setting range 0 0 to 4000 1 0 to 12000 2 0 to 16000 3 0 to 20000 The manipulated value MV reflecting the resolution is stored in the following buffer memory areas Page 131 Section 3 4 2 47 CHO Manipulated value MV for output with another analog module Un G177 to U
175. 5VDC supplied Check the power supply module Properly mount the module Is the capacity of power supply module enough Has a watchdog timer error occurred Add up the current consumption of the installed CPU module I O module and intelligent function module to check whether power supply capacity is sufficient Reset the CPU module or turn on the power supply again Replace the Q64TCN Is module change enabled during an online module change Refer to the online module change Page 372 Appendix 3 Page 387 Appendix 4 and take corrective action Is the intelligent function module switch setting outside the setting range Set the switch setting value of the intelligent function module to the value within the setting range 8 3 2 When the ERR LED turns on or flashes 1 When turning on Check Item Action Is the intelligent function module switch setting outside the setting range Set the switch setting value of the intelligent function module to the value within the setting range Is the cold junction temperature compensation resistor disconnected or loose The Q64TCTTN and Q64TCTTBWN only Properly connect the cold junction temperature compensation resistor Others A hardware failure occurred in Q64TCN Please consult your local Mitsubishi system service service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 2 When flashing
176. 6 CHO Derivative time D setting Un G37 Un G69 Un G101 Un G133 Page 105 Section 3 4 2 17 CHO Alert set value 1 Un G38 Un G70 Un G102 Un G134 CHO Alert set value 2 Un G39 Un G71 Un G103 Un G135 Page 106 Section 3 4 2 18 CHO Alert set value 3 Un G40 Un G72 Un G104 Un G136 CHO Alert set value 4 Un G41 Un G73 Un G105 Un G137 Upper limit output limiter Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 Page 108 Section 3 4 2 19 Lower limit output limiter Un G43 Un G75 Un G107 Un G139 CHO Output variation limiter setting Un G44 Un G76 Un G108 Un G140 Page 110 Section 3 4 2 20 373 Buffer memory address Buffer memory area name Reference CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Sensor correction value setting Un G45 Un G77 Un G109 Un G141 Page 111 Section 3 4 2 21 Adjustment sensitivity dead band Selling Un G46 Un G78 Un G110 Un G142 Page 111 Section 3 4 2 22 i Control output cycle setting Un G47 Un G79 Un G111 Un G143 Page 112 Section 3 4 2 23 Primary delay digital filter setting Un G48 Un G80 Un G112 Un G144 Page 113 Section 3 4 2 24 CHO Control response parameters Un G49 Un G81 Un G113 Un G145 Page 114 Section 3 4 2 25 AUTO MAN mode shift Un G50 Un G82 Un G114 Un G146 Page 115 Section 3 4 2 26 CHO MAN output setting Un G51 Un G83 Un G115 Un G147 Page 116 Section 3 4 2 27 Sett
177. 64TCRTBWN CHO Upper limit setting limiter Un G55 Un G87 Un G119 1300 6000 Un G151 Lower limit setting limiter Un G56 Un G88 Un G120 0 2000 Un G152 120 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 32 CHO Heater disconnection alert setting Un G58 Un G90 Un G122 Un G154 Common Set the set value in heater disconnection detection and off time current error detection in percentage of the reference heater current value For details on the heater disconnection detection function refer to the following gt Page 259 Section 4 26 For details on the output off time current error detection function refer to the following s Page 263 Section 4 27 a Supported modules Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN b Setting range The setting range is 0 to 100 Ex To generate Heater disconnection alert with the following conditions CTO Reference heater current value Un G280 to Un G287 100 10 0A When Heater current process value Un G256 to Un G263 is 80 8 0A or less set Heater disconnection alert setting Un G58 Un G90 Un G122 Un G154 to 80 96 Heater Reference heater _ Heater current current value process value 100 80 disconnection 100 100 100 x 100 80 alert setting Reference heater current value 100 When 0 is set heater disconnection detection and off time current error detection are not performed c Default value The default values are set to 0
178. 715 Point When the heating cooling control expanded mode is selected heating cooling transistor output of CH3 and CH4 are activated Also when the mix control expanded mode is selected heating cooling transistor output of CH2 is activated These areas are activated only when an expanded mode is selected When a normal mode is selected these areas are used for the system If data is written into these areas when it is used by the system a write data error occurs error code LIL1L12 The following is an example of using an expanded mode A program in which CH3 Heating transistor output flag bO of Un G23 is assigned to Y20 of an output module The start I O number of the Q64TCN is set to 10 in the following program example 4 uonoejes 2 0 Y20 161 4 2 Control Output Setting at CPU Stop Error When a stop error occurs on the CPU module or when CPU s status is changed from RUN to STOP whether to hold or clear the status of transistor output can be selected using this function Configure Output Setting at CPU Stop Error on Switch Setting For details on the setting method refer to the following Page 292 Section 6 2 Processing for each status is describes in the following table Status Processing Reference Output Setting at CPU Stop Page 292
179. 73 Section 4 6 1 Setting method Set the characteristic in Cooling method setting Un G719 s Page 148 Section 3 4 2 71 Point An auto tuning calculation formula to find PID constants is determined based on this setting therefore configure this Setting before executing auto tuning Air Cooled and Water Cooled roughly indicate the level of the cooling ability When a device is too cooled even if it is set to Air Cooled set the module to Water Cooled 14 When a device is not very cooled even if it is set to Water Cooled set the module to Air Cooled 0p In general the ability of water cooling is higher than that of air cooling and cooling may be too strong if the same PID constants as air cooling are used Some time is required until the control becomes stable upon the initial start up disturbance or setting change Therefore in auto tuning PID constants for when the module is set to Water Cooled 14 become larger than those for when the module is set to Air Cooled 0 252 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 4 24 Overlap Dead Band Function In heating cooling control the temperature process value PV significantly changes due to slight heating or cooling control output when the heat produced by a controlled object and natural cooling are being balanced Consequently excessive temperature output may be performed The temperature where the cooling control output starts can be shifted using this function ther
180. 773 3054 CH4 function function function 0 R W x Section enable disable enable disable enable disable 3 4 2 74 setting setting 9 setting Process value Process value Process value PV scalin PV scalin PV scalin 774 306 CH4 PV scaling VI ee 0 R W x lower limit lower limit lower limit value value 69 value Page 150 Section Process value Process value Process value 3 4 2 75 PV scalin PV scalin PV scalin 775 3074 CH4 scaling 5 ane 0 R W x upper limit upper limit upper limit value value 69 value Process value Process value Process value Page 150 776 308 CH4 PV scaling PV scaling PV scaling 0 R x x Section value value value 3 4 2 76 Derivative Derivative Page 150 Derivative action 777 3094 CH4 9 action action 0 R W x Section lecti SE selection 9 9 selection 3 42 77 Simultaneous Simultaneous Page 151 temperature 778 30Ay CH4 temperature rise System area 0 R W x Section tting 3 4 2 78 group setting setting 78 Simult Simultaneous Meenas Page 151 temperature 779 30By CH4 temperature rise System area itsedradie t 0 R W Section gradient data 2 3 4 2 79 data 78 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Target Setting contents channel 2 Address he Default
181. 8 Peak current suppression control group setting Un G784 Eene t amp ola 4 Ia Divided into DR roup roup 3 groups v j 0011 0010 0010 0001 33 3 33 3 33 5 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Example2 0 3 2 1 H Diddadio 99451 jo Groupa Group3 3 groups 0000 0011 0010 0001 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 33 3 33 3 33 3 f CH1 CH2 CH3 gt Whether the transistor output is executed or not can be selected by CH4 Unused channel setting Un G157 3 Page 124 Section 3 4 2 35 232 100 In case of default value applied CH4 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS c Two timing The following table shows two examples Example Channel Group CH1 Group 1 CH2 Group 1 Example 1 CH3 Group 2 CH4 Group 2 CH1 Group 1 CH2 Group 2 Example 2 CH3 Not divided CH4 Not divided The following shows the relationship between groups and the values 96 of CHO Upper limit output limiter Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 Peak current suppression control group setting Un G784 ee evi Divided into 7 GEURE 2 groups k 0010 0010 0001 0001 50 50 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Exampe2 0 0 2 1 Divided into Group 1 ore 0000 0000 0010 0001 2 groups d mm re 2 gt o CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 i i CH1 CH2 la 100 In case of default value applied W
182. 8 58 che setting limiter setting limiter setting limiter RT O 5 89 59 CH2 System area Heat Heater Heater bis E 121 disconnection 90 5 CH2 disconnection disconnection alert 0 R W x Section alert setting alert setting setting T 3 4 2 32 L Hie Heats Page 122 91 5By CH2 detechon System area System area 480 R W x Section 3 4 2 33 judgment time 93 L PE Pagara 92 5 CH2 System area System area 0 R W Section detection dead 3 4 2 34 band UU Unused Page 124 93 5D CH2 Unused channel Unused channel 0 RW Section setting channel setting setting 3 4 2 35 E PROM s PID E2PROM sPID E27PROM s PID Page 125 94 5 CH2 constants read constants read constants read 0 R W x x Section instruction instruction instruction 3 4 2 36 62 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Target Setting contents channel 2 Address he Default Read Automatic ETROM eating writ decimal nent Standard 9 e value Write setting n ix contr ilabili hexadecimal CORTO cooling e 3 availability sensor control 4 CT Aut ti Automatic Automatic dei eR backup setting backup setting Page 126 95 5F 4 CH2 wae E after auto after auto 0 R W x x Section i tuning of PID of PID constants t
183. 8 K1 M216 F Program that executes the auto tuning and backs up the PID constants in E PROM X21 X1010 X1013 X1011 t M E SET 1014 CH1 Auto tuning instruction ON X1014 4 n RST Y1014 J CH1 Auto tuning instruction OFF SET Mio CH1 Auto tuning completion flag ON M10 Y1018 A ME LSET 1018 E PROM backup instruction ON Y1018 1018 3 RST Y1018 7 E PROM backup instruction OFF RST TO 4 CH1 Auto tuning completion flag OFF 344 CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING Program that reads the PID constants from E PROM X24 Xioto 1018 1018 CH1 E PROM s PID constants read iT Yr LMOVP D9 J instruction Requested E SET M300 1 M300 e 1 ZP REMTO Ji K1 K1 H1 H3E D9 K1 M310 M310 M311 E SET M301 M301 M302 M303 M304 AF SET M302 M302 M303 2 p n nce Read E PROM s PID constants read write PAS Z REMFR J1 K2 K1 H1 HIF D10 K1 M312 J Completion flag to D10 SET M303 M312 M313 E jt RST M302 J RST M303 D10 0 e SET M304 J M304 2 CH1 E PROM s PID constants read Mov KO 011 1 instruction Not requested SET M305 M305 _ tH A LZP REMTO Ki Hi H3E Dii Ki M34 Program that reads an error code and the temperature process value PV X1010 i Z REMER Jt Kb ki i Ho D50 Ki ped 1 Rea
184. 96 Un 628 Un 660 temperature drop For details on the function refer to the following Page 187 Section 4 9 b Setting range Set 0 or the value within the range 1 to 1000 0 1 to 100 0 toward the full scale of the set input range When 0 is set the setting is disabled c Default value The default values are set to 0 in all channels 117 29 AT bias setting Un G53 Un G85 Un G117 Un G149 C The point set as the set value SV in the auto tuning can be rearranged by using this buffer memory area The auto tuning function determines each PID constant by performing the two position control toward the set value SV and making a temperature process value PV hunting Set AT bias setting Un G53 Un G85 Un G117 Un G149 when an overshoot caused by the hunting is improper The auto tuning is performed with having the AT point the point rearranged by the setting as its center When the auto tuning is completed the Q64TCN performs a control toward the set value SV to which the value set in the AT bias is added not the set value SV itself For details on the auto tuning function refer to the following 5 Page 173 Section 4 6 Ex When AT bias is set to minus value reverse action Temperature process value PV A Set value SV P AT bias setting Un G53 Un G85 Un G117 Un G149 AT point gt Time a Setting range The setting range is f
185. 97 CHAPTER 7 Point When using the Q64TCTTN and the Q64TCTTBWN which use the thermocouples as the temperature sensors temperature compensation must be executed properly Perform warm up operation about 15 minutes before starting operation 271 uoneJedo e40Jeq eunpeooJg eui pue sBumes Z S 5 3 Part Names The following table shows part names of the Q64TCN as es Ep L 14 1 LUN AM 3 1 GMTETTEWN gt RUN ALM lt 3 1 Bb 4 3 4 eee RUN 3 2 5 ERR 2 gt ERR 4 2 gt ERR e 4 NC en d OUTI 002 7 r e e e v d d e e
186. Auto tuning execution Auto tuning start Auto tuning stop CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING f Program example Program that changes the setting operation mode X23 Y1B Change to the setting mode u A CY11 i the operation mode Program that reads the PID constants from E2PROM X24 X10 Y1B Y18 2 CH1 E PROM s PID constants read TF AF LTOP B KI Ki instruction Requested Read bit data from b7 to b0 of E7PROM s FROM U1 HIF K2M20 K1 PID constants read write completion flag to M20 to M27 Mor i a CH1 E PROM s PID constants read T instruction Not requested Program that reads an error code X10 i MOV D50 KAY60 Output a write data error code to Y60 to Y6F X22 i SET Y12 Error reset instruction ON Y12 x12 H D50 HO RST Y12 Error reset instruction OFF Program that changes the set values SV X30 X10 Change CH1 Set value SV setting TOP 1 H22 K250 K1 Ee to 250 C X30 X10 Return CH1 Set value SV setting 1 TOP Ul H22 K200 K1 to 200 C 5 pyepueis e ejnpoyy eu ueuM peas epoo 10119 pue Hurung se LZ 7 305 306 7 Program example of when not using the parameter of an module a Devices used by a user intelligent function
187. CPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals lt SH 080808ENG 13JZ28 gt Specifications of the hardware CPU modules power supply modules base units extension cables and memory cards system maintenance and inspection troubleshooting and error codes Functions methods and devices for programming 2 Operating manual Manual name lt manual number model code gt Description GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common lt SH 080779ENG 13JU63 gt System configuration parameter settings and online operations common to Simple project and Structured project of GX Works2 GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual lt SH 080373E 13JU41 gt Operating methods of GX Developer such as programming printing monitoring and debugging Memo CONTENTS 10 SAFES PREGAWMIONS ee aime cae ee ret eo ew on rd 1 GONIDIWIGONSIOIIUSEIGORUILIEIDRSODUCIMM 5 6 COMPLIANCE WITH AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES 7 REBEVANTIMAN UAES eee re nU ER mM 8 MANUALPAGE ORGANIZATION rrr T 14 TERMS ee te ene UR C EIE RU ESI EE 16 PAGKINGIBISIN e vr rrr AC Ce ESTE 16 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 17 1 1 sEGatUleSu coo PE e etus utu oS d 19 1 2 The PID Control System iz ise ces ence hi3 ales sale cha peeing RENE NR 21 1 3 About the PID s 2
188. CT2 CT3 CT3 CT4 CT4 CTS CTS CT6 CT6 CT7 CT7 CT8 CT8 To three phase heater used in CH2 loop 9 To single phase heater used in CH3 loop 4 ME To single phase heater used in CH4 loop Unused Three phase heater disconnection detection is executed by measuring the currents of two of the three cables In the above wiring example set CT input channel assignment setting Un G264 to Un G271 as indicated below seyd 1y4 J0 jdwex Dunes pue Bum uonoeuuoosip vS CT input Buffer memory address Set value CT1 Un G264 1 CT2 Un G265 1 CT3 Un G266 2 CT4 Un G267 2 CT5 Un G268 3 CT6 Un G269 4 CT7 Un G270 0 CT8 Un G271 0 289 5 5 Unused Channel Setting 290 When no temperature sensor is connected to a channel the Q64TCN performs upscale processing for the channel Therefore when a temperature sensor is not connected to a channel where no temperature control is performed the module determines that the temperature process value PV has exceeded the temperature measurement range for the input range and the ALM LED blinks Once the unused channel setting is configured no alarm will occur for a channel where a temperature sensor is not connected To prevent faulty alert detection configure the unused channel setting 1 Setting method Set a value unused channel setting Un
189. D conversion module in this area For details refer to the following Page 217 Section 4 15 1 Point If a stored value is out of the set input range the value to be used in control is fixed to the upper limit value or the lower limit value of the input range 70 Temperature conversion setting Un G695 to Un G697 3 In the heating cooling control normal mode or the mix control normal mode only the temperature measurement can be performed using temperature input terminals of unused channels The following table lists the settable buffer memory addresses for each control mode selection Control mode Heating cooling Heating cooling Channel Standard Mix control Mix control control control control normal mode expanded mode normal mode expanded mode CH1 CH2 Un G695 CH3 Un G696 CH4 Un G697 When the combination of the control mode and the buffer memory address is not the setting target in the above list the combination is invalid even if it is set For details on the temperature conversion function using unused channels refer to the following s Page 256 Section 4 25 Ajowaw Jayng ay Seed jueuuuBissy yng t a Setting range 0 Not use 1 Use b Default value The default values are set to Not use 0 in all channels Point
190. ET 10 H Network No 1 Station No 0 CCIEField Ethernet C24 NET 1O H Accessing Other Station No Specification System Image p Multiple CPU Setting ULE Not Specified the next page 398 Create a new project Project gt New Select the CPU module on the remote master station in PLC Type and click o Open the Transfer Setup window Navigation window gt Connection destination gt Connection destination data name Configure the settings to access the CPU module on the remote master station and click x Continued 8 Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor 1 Monitoring Device Device Name v T C Set value Reference Program Reference Modify Value Display Format Open Display Format Save Display Format Buffer Memory M Device 1020 1030 1040 Modify Value Device Label Buffer Memory Device Label Y101B Data Bit 4 Switch ON OFF ON OFF r Settable Range Execution Result Execution Result Device Label Data Type Setting Value Y101B Bit OFF 1019 Bit OFF 1018 Bit OFF Y1011 Bit OFF Reflect to Input Column Clear APPENDICES Open the Device Buffer Memory Batch window D Online gt Monitor gt Device Buffer Memory Batch In Device Name enter and display the name of the CPU module device to be refreshed in the
191. Error Code Update Error History 0285 Contents The setting of the upper lower limit value output limiter or the upper lower limit setting limiter is invalid Error Clear Format uonounj Je9 2 JOU HEX Solution Set the value where the upper limit value is greater than the lower limit value DEC in old error The latest error is displayed at he bottom line me error history is sequentially displayed from Stop Monitor 269 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS AND THE PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION This chapter describes the procedure prior to the Q64TCN operation the name and setting of each part of the Q64TCN and wiring method 5 1 Handling Precautions This section describes the precautions for handling the Q64TCN Do not drop the module case or do not subject it to strong impact Do not remove the PCB of each module from its case Doing so may cause breakdowns Tighten the screws such as module fixing screws within the following ranges Loose screws may cause short circuit failures or malfunctions Screw location Tightening torque range Module fixing screw M3 screw 0 36 to 0 48N m Terminal screw M3 screw 0 42 to 0 58N m Terminal block mounting screw M3 5 screw 0 66 to 0 89N m 1 The module can be easily fixed onto the base unit using the hook at the top of the module However it is recommended to secure the module with the module fixing screw if the modul
192. FF Setting mode ON Operation mode Some buffer memory areas can be set only in the setting mode a Buffer memory areas that can be set only in the setting mode The following settings can be changed only when Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 is off If the settings are changed in the operation mode a write data error error code OOO occurs Buffer memory address Buffer memory area name Reference CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 Page 94 Section 3 4 2 12 Resolution of the manipulated value for Un G181 Page 132 Section 3 4 2 48 output with another analog module CHO Alert 1 mode setting Un G192 Un G208 Un G224 Un G240 Alert 2 mode setting Un G193 Un G209 Un G225 Un G241 Page 135 Section 3 4 2 52 CHO Alert 3 mode setting Un G194 Un G210 Un G226 Un G242 Alert 4 mode setting Un G195 Un G211 Un G227 Un G243 CTO CT selection Un G272 to Un G279 set for each current sensor CT Page 138 Section 3 4 2 55 2 point sensor compensation offset Un G544 Un G576 Un G608 Un G640 Page 140 Section 3 4 2 58 value measured value CHLI 2 point sensor compensation offset 3 Un G545 Un G577 Un G609 Un G641 Page 140 Section 3 4 2 59 value compensation value 2 point sensor compensation gain Un G546 Un G578 Un G610 Un G642 Page 141 Section 3 4 2 60 value measured value CHLI 2 point sensor compensation gain
193. G61 Un G93 Un G125 Un G157 C3 Set this buffer memory area when treating channels that do not control temperature or are not connected with temperature sensors as Unused Setting them as unused channels stops detection of an alert For details on the unused channel setting refer to the following Page 290 Section 5 5 a Setting range 0 Use 1 Unused b Default value The default values are set to Use 0 in all channels c ON of Default setting registration instruction Yn9 7 gt 56 Section 3 3 3 5 When Default setting registration instruction Yn9 is turn on from off CHO Unused channel setting Un G61 Un G93 Un G125 Un G157 is reset to Use 0 Channels that do not control temperature or are not connected to temperature sensors needs to be set as unused channels again after settings of other buffer memory areas and non volatile memories return to the default values Set Unused channel setting Un G61 Un G93 Un G125 Un G157 to Unused 1 again 124 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 36 CHO E2PROM s PID constants read instruction Un G62 Un G94 Un G126 Un G158 9 PID constants are read from an E2PROM and stored in the buffer memory by using this instruction Setting this buffer memory area to Requested 1 stores the value backed up in the E2PROM in the buffer memory a Buffer memory areas to store set value of E PROM The following table lists the buffer memory areas whose se
194. H2 Set value SV jueuuuBissy yng t gt Temperature rise start Group 1 Time ON Setting operation mode OFF Jejnq ay Sed instruction Yn1 CH1 Simultaneous temperature 1 rise status Un G734 0 NN 1 0 CH2 Simultaneous temperature rise status Un G750 i CH1 Temperature rise judgment flag Un G17 and 0 1 CH2 Temperature rise judgment flag Un G18 i gt Executed by the Q64TCN i i 1 i i 1 i i 1 i i 1 I i 1 i i 1 i 1 i i i 1 arrival point i i i i 1 i 1 1 i 1 1 i 1 1 1 i 1 1 i 1 1 Completion of the temperature rise does set Simultaneous temperature rise status Un G734 Un G750 Un G766 Un G782 to Simultaneous temperature rise not in process 0 As in the figure above the temperature rise is performed by the simultaneous temperature rise function to a certain point and Simultaneous temperature rise in process 1 is set during the performance After the point the temperature rise is performed based on the PID constants of each channel and Simultaneous temperature rise not in process 0 is set For details on the simultaneous temperature rise function refer to the following L gt Page 234 Section 4 19 153 154 83 CHLI Setting change rate limiter time unit setting Un G735 Un G751 Un G767 Un G783 CE Set the time unit of setting change rate li
195. H9D M2 X10 X13 Yi tt t AF AF TOP H20 K2 TOP Ut K1 TO Ul H2F K30 UNE E 2 5 1 5 1 2 2 1 21 121 1 12 11 1 1 TO ui H23E K1 i NC RARE ESSERE bal a cs os tees Pe ee es cee PS a PM SET M M2 X10 X13 Yii YIB X1B 11 AF LAS 11 i RST SET M2 X10 X13 X1B AF AF TOP ul H26 K500 TOP Ul H22 K200 TOP Ul H37 K400 TOP Ut H38 KO RST RST 1 Configure this setting only when the self tuning function is used MO M1 M2 CH1 Unused channel CH2 Unused channel CH3 Unused channel CH4 Unused channel CH1 Input range 2 CH1 Alert 1 mode se input alert J Flag 0 for setting value write ON Flag 1 for setting value write ON setting Used setting Unused setting Unused setting Unused ting Upper CH1 Control output cycle setting 30s CH1 Self tuning setting Starting ST calculates only PID constants J Setting change instruction ON Setting change instruction OFF Flag 2 for setting value write ON J CH1 Alert set value 1 500 C CH1 Set value SV setting 200 C CH1 Upper limit setting limiter 400 C CH1 Lower limit setting limiter 0 C Flag 1 for setting value write OFF Flag 2 for setting value write OFF 307 peas epoo 1 pue Burun se LZ 7 uoneunBijuo 5 pyepueis e ejnpoyy eui ueuM
196. HO Heating upper limit output limiter Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 3 Cooling upper limit output limiter Un G721 Un G737 Un G753 Un G769 Heating cooling In the standard control set upper limit value lower limit value for actual output of manipulated value MV calculated by the PID operation to an external device In the heating cooling control set upper limit value of heating cooling for actual output of manipulated value for heating MVh manipulated value for cooling MVc calculated by the PID operation to an external device Additionally Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 are used for heating in the heating cooling control During the auto tuning setting of Heating upper limit output limiter and Cooling upper limit output limiter are disabled a Setting range The following table lists setting range of each buffer memory Buffer memory Setting range Remarks Upper limit output limiter Un G42 Set the values to lower limit output limiter value lt Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 upper limit output limiter value When lower limit output limiter value 2 upper limit output limiter value write data error error code LILIL15 occurs In addition if the setting is out of 50 to 1050 5 0 to 105 0 the setting value a write data error error code Lower limit output limiter Un G43 O00044 occurs When the error occurs the Un G75 Un G107 Un G139 following situations occur Write erro
197. J Flag 2 for setting value write OFF 9 3 e c 5 2 uomnouni esu eunjejeduie snoeuejnuuis uonounj uoisseJddns Juano xeed piepuejs ZZ 319 320 Program that executes the auto tuning and backs up the PID constants in E PROM Lx X10 X13 xi TT 1 SET SET SET SET RST SET RST SET RST PO RST SET t t ME SET RST MOV H0 Program that reads the PID constants from E PROM K1M10 Ll J CH1 Auto tuning instruction ON J CH2 Auto tuning instruction ON J CH3 Auto tuning instruction ON J CH4 Auto tuning instruction ON J CH1 Auto tuning instruction OFF J CH1 Auto tuning completion flag ON J CH2 Auto tuning instruction OFF J CH2 Auto tuning completion flag ON J CH3 Auto tuning instruction OFF CH3 Auto tuning completion flag ON J CH4 Auto tuning instruction OFF J CH4 Auto tuning completion flag ON J E PROM backup instruction ON E PROM backup instruction OFF J CHO Auto tuning completion flag OFF This program is the same as that of when the parameter of the intelligent function module is used Ls Page 317 Section 7 2 2 6 f Program that reads an error code and the temperature process value PV FROM Ut HO D50 MOV D50 SET a E D50 HO La RS
198. J Cold junction temperatur CJ Cold junction temperature CJ Cold junction temperature compensation resistor compensation resistor compensation resistor 15 IN3 3 CH3 CH3 Thermocouple CH3 CH3 Thermocouple CH3 CH3 Thermocouple 16 IN4 4 CH4 CH4 Thermocouple CH4 CH4 Thermocouple CH4 CH4 Thermocouple 17 IN3 3 CH3 CH3 Thermocouple CH3 CH3 Thermocouple CH3 CH3 Thermocouple 18 IN4 4 CH4 CH4 Thermocouple CH4 CH4 Thermocouple CH4 CH4 Thermocouple Point Do not remove the cold junction temperature compensation resistor from the terminal block 275 SOWEN Hed E G 3 For the Q64TCRTN Heating cooling control Heating cooling control Terminal Standard control x 3 Indication normal mode expanded mode number Symbol Name Symbol Name Symbol Name 1 OUT1 L1 CH1 Output L1H CH1 Heating output L1H CH1 Heating output 2 OUT2 L2 CH2 Output L1C CH1 Cooling output L1C CH1 Cooling output 3 OUT3 L3 CH3 Output L2H CH2 Heating output L2H CH2 Heating output 4 OUT4 L4 CH4 Output L2C CH2 Cooling output L2C CH2 Cooling output 5 Output common COM Output common COM Output common 6 NC NC Unused NC Unused NC Unused CH1 Resistance CH1 Resistance CH1 Resistance NEAT thermometer thermometer CRIA hermometer A 8 N2 2 CH2A CH2 Resistance CH2A CH2 Resistance CH2A CH2 Resistance thermometer A thermome
199. Lre jueuuuBissy yng ye Target Setting contents channel 2 Address Pe rad Default Read Automatic EPROM eating A A wri decimal Standard 9 Mi trol value Write setting 3 te ___ Reference hexadecimal cooling ix contro A 5 availability sensor control Temperature 695 2B7 CH2 System area System area conversion 0 R W x setting 4 Temperature 147 conversion 696 2B8 CH3 System area System area 0 RW Section Hs 3 4 2 70 Temperature 697 2B9 CH4 System area eases System area 0 R W x setting 43 698 2BAy to System area 703 2BFy Manipulated Manipulated 704 2C0 CH1 System area value for value for 0 R x x cooling MVc cooling MVc Manipulated Manipulated value for 705 2C1 CH2 System area value for i 0 R x x cooling cooling MVc 7 MVc Page 87 Manipulated Section value for 3 4 2 5 706 2C24 CH3 System area System area 0 R x x cooling MVc 9 Manipulated value for 707 2C3y CH4 System area System area 0 R x x cooling MVc 9 Manipulated Manipulated value of value of 708 2C4 CH1 System area cooling cooling Mvc 0 R x x for output with for output with another analog another analog module module Manipulated Manipulated value of value of li MV cooling MVc 709 2 5 CH2 System area cooling 9 0 R x x for output with for
200. MITSUBISHI Mitsubishi Programmable Controller serie MELSEC Q Temperature Control Module User s Manual Q64TCTTN Q64TCTTBWN esi Q64TCRTN Q64TCRTBWN SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Read these precautions before using this product Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product only For the safety precautions of the programmable controller system refer to the user s manual for the CPU module used In this manual the safety precautions are classified into two levels N CAUTION and N WARNING WARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe injury Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions N CAUTION resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage Under some circumstances failure to observe the precautions given under N CAUTION may lead to serious consequences Observe the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal and system safety Make sure that the end users read this manual and then keep the manual in a safe place for future reference Design Precautions NWARNING Outputs may remain on or off due to a failure of a component such as a transistor in an output circuit Configure an external circuit for mo
201. OFF 163 b Heating cooling control The module operates as follows outside the range of Adjustment sensitivity dead band setting Un G46 Un G78 Un G110 Un G142 A Heating transistor Cooling transistor Condition output status output status The temperature process value PV is below the lower limit of ON OFF the adjustment sensitivity dead band The temperature process value PV is above the upper limit of OFF ON the adjustment sensitivity dead band Temperature process value PV A R Adjustment sensitivity x dead band Set value SV gt gt Time ON Heating output L1H y OFF Cooling output 4 ON L1C OFF c Three position control Three position control can also be performed by setting a dead band For more details refer to the following L gt Page 255 Section 4 24 3 d Setting method Set 0 in the following buffer memory areas Proportional band P setting Un G35 Un G67 Un G99 Un G131 K gt Page 103 Section 3 4 2 15 Heating proportional band Ph setting Un G35 Un G67 Un G99 Un G131 gt Page 103 Section 3 4 2 15 164 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 2 P Control P control is a control method in which the manipulated value MV is determined proportional to the deviation E between the temperature process value PV and set value SV a Standard control The manipulated value is 50 in the foll
202. OFF Toggle force Word device buffer memory Device x Buffer memon Modu v Setting value DEC 16 bit integer v Set Program Label reference program Y Execution history Setting condition Find Force OFF Force OFF Find nest Force OFF Force OFF Clear Open the Device test window O Online gt Debug gt Device test Turn off the following output signals to stop the operation of the module Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 E7PROM backup instruction Yn8 Default setting registration instruction Yn9 Setting change instruction YnB Point P When PID continuation flag Un G169 is set to Continue 1 control does not stop even if Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 is turned off Change PID continuation flag Un G169 to Stop 0 and turn off Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 Whether the control has been stopped can be checked by Setting operation mode status Xn1 being off 378 APPENDICES 2 Removing a module 1 Open the System Monitor window System Monitor Installed status p Base Base Module Mates Diagnostics gt Online module Powe une ed ume hii pig j Pages rero 5 2 Select Online module change
203. OM write failure flag XnA Turning E PROM backup instruction Yn8 on from off starts the writing of the buffer memory data to the E PROM This flag turns on when the writing failed ON E2PROM backup instruction OFF Yn8 During write to E2PROM E2PROM write completion flag OFF Xn8 E2PROM write failure flag OFF XnA During write to 2 Error detection of write to E2PROM Executed in a sequence program eee gt Executed by the Q64TCN For details on the data writing to the E PROM refer to the following s Page 264 Section 4 28 Point After EPPROM backup instruction Yn8 is turned on from off make sure that this flag is off Then turn E2PROM backup instruction Yn8 off from on If E PROM backup instruction Yn8 is turned off from on while this flag is on the Q64TCN operates with the default value since the data in the buffer memory is undefined Likewise if the power supply is turned on from off or the CPU module is released from the reset status while this flag is on the Q64TCN operates with the default value since the data in the buffer memory is undefined 9 Setting change completion flag XnB Turning Setting change instruction YnB on from off during the setting mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 OFF reflects the set contents of each buffer memory to the control After the data is reflected this flag turns on Turning Setting change instruction
204. Q64TCTTBWN RUN ALM ERR HBA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CTS 7 1 2 3 SES 5 HCG s T NC 8 QUIC TIONN w WAR RRR AEN 55 2 Unit mm APPENDICES 3 Q64TCRTN nn ALM Q64TCRTN RUN ERR 7 SAGAS NSNS ANN NS NSE 23 27 4 22 90 Unit mm Appendix 5 External Dimensions 4 Q64TCRTBWN ALM RUN lt a 52 Q64TCRTBWN 90 q Unit mm 407 Memo 408 INDEX 0to9 1 point sensor compensation standard 156 205 2 point sensor compensation 156 2 point sensor compensation function
205. QX42 X20 to X5F EN X24 E PROM s PID constants read instruction Y11 Setting operation mode instruction 8g E c Y12 Error reset instruction ge Q64TCTTN Y10 to Y1F ae Y18 E PROM backup instruction is z i 3 Y1B Setting change instruction e 5 Y60 to Y6F Error code output QY42P Y60 to Y9F 8 050 Error code Devices where data is written S x D51 CH1 Temperature process value PV by auto refresh e J M20 to M23 Read completion flag 8 55 M24 to M27 Write completion flag be 5 Q o 3 2 c 8 2 325 b Parameter setting Set the contents of initial settings in the parameter 1 Open the Parameter window Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Q64TCTTN gt Parameter 2 3 Click Clear value for Gray Cells to set items unnecessary for the mode set on Switch Setting to 0 Set the parameter 0010 Q64TCTTN Parameter Control Mode Mix Control Normal Mode Clear Value for Gray Cells Set the value of unnecessary items for control mode to 0 Input range setting Integral time I setting Derivative time D setting Control output cycle setting Heating control output cycle setting Control response parameter Stop Mode Setting PID continuation flag Control detail parameter setting Forward reverse action setting Upper limit setting limiter Lower limit setting limiter 0c Setting change rate limiter or Setting c
206. Read Automatic ETROM eating i decimal Cunent Standard M v value Write setting write ___ Reference hexadecimal aal cooung CODO 2 availability sensor control Simultaneous Simultaneous Page 152 780 30Cy CH4 temperature rise System area temperature 0 R W O Section dead time rise dead time 3 4 2 80 a page 152 781 30Dy CH4 P System area p 0 R W x Section AT mode rise AT mode 3 4 2 81 selection selection Simultaneous Simultaneous Page 153 782 30E CH4 temperature rise System area temperature 0 R x x Section status rise status 3 4 2 82 Setting change Setting change Setting change Page 154 783 30Fy CH4 rate limiter unit rate limiter unit rate limiter unit 0 R W x Section time setting time setting 99 time setting 3 4 2 83 Peak current 155 suppression 784 310 All CHs System area System area 0 R W x Section control group uu 3 4 2 84 setting Page 156 785 311 AllCHs Sensor compensation function selection 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 85 Page 156 786 3124 All CHs Temperature conversion completion flag 0 R x x Section 3 4 2 86 Page 157 787 3134 All CHs Function extension bit monitor 0 R x x Section 3 42 87 788 3144 to System area 1278 4 1279 4 to Buffer memory for error history C Page 81 Section 3 4 1 2 4095 FFFy 4096 1000 to System area 53247 CFFFy 1 T
207. Rec fre 46 3 3 2 51 48 3 83 Details of output signals 2 0 2 eee ee 54 3 4 Buffer Memory Assignment 57 3 4 1 Q64TCN buffer memory assignment list liliis sisi 57 3 4 2 Details of the buffer memory 84 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 159 4 1 Control Mode Selection Function 0 0 000 ccc ccc tenes 159 4 2 Control Output Setting at CPU Stop Error 20 eee 162 4 3 Control Method Sh eu ae AE 163 4 4 Manual Reset Function 0 0 0 0 0 000 eee eet 170 45 Manual Control EEN VAA eens 172 4 6 Auto Tuning FUNCION ye ieta Rs 173 4 7 Simple Two degree of freedom 185 4 8 Derivative Action Selection Function 0 0 0 0 cece e 186 4 9 Setting Change Rate Limiter Setting Function 187 4 10 Temperature Process Value PV Scaling Function 188 110 Alert Function noe BE es SL ean E Eu REF Yd 190 4 12 RFB Limiter Function 00 cc e m rn 204 4 13 Sensor Compensation Function 00 0 000 cette 205 4 14 Auto setting at Input Range Change 216 4 15 Input output
208. S amp a jueuuuBissy yng t Point If the proportional band P heating proportional band Ph is set to 0 0 0 the auto tuning cannot be performed To perform the auto tuning set proportional band P heating proportional band Ph to other than 0 For details on the auto tuning function refer to the following gt Page 173 Section 4 6 The proportional band P is the variation width of deviation E necessary for manipulated value MV to vary 0 to 100 The following formula shows the relationship between deviation E and manipulated value MV in proportional action MV Kp Kp is proportional gain The following formula shows proportional band this case l Ke When the value of the proportional band P is increased the proportional gain Kp decreases Therefore the manipulated value MV for variation of the deviation E becomes small When the value of proportional band P is decreased the proportional gain Kp increases Therefore the manipulated value MV for variation of the deviation E becomes large The following figure shows the proportional band P in reverse action P 100 Manipulated value Mv Deviation E 100 Manipulated value MV to deviation E Temperature 0 gt process value PV Current temperature Set value process value PV SV lt gt Proportional band P 0606006006 000000000000
209. Section 4 3 3 PD control 7 s Page 166 Section 4 3 4 PID control 7 gt Page 166 Section 4 3 5 For P control and PD control the manual reset function is activated gt Page 170 Section 4 4 1 Two position control Two position control is a control method that uses 096 manipulated value MV and 10096 manipulated value MV Turning on and off the manipulated value MV repeatedly the temperature process value comes close to the set value SV then is kept constant Point By the setting in Adjustment sensitivity dead band setting Un G46 Un G78 Un G110 Un G142 the chattering of transistor output under two position control can be prevented Set a dead band toward the set value SV in CHO Adjustment sensitivity dead band setting Un G46 Un G78 Un G110 Un G142 5 Page 111 Section 3 4 2 22 a Standard control The module operates as follows outside the range of CHO Adjustment sensitivity dead band setting Un G46 Un G78 Un G110 Un G142 pours jonuo Condition Transistor output status The temperature process value PV is below the lower limit of the adjustment sensitivity dead band ON The temperature process value PV is above the upper limit of the adjustment sensitivity dead band OFF Temperature process value PV A X Adjustment sensitivity x dead band Set value SV gt Time Transistor output
210. Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 7 s Page 54 Section 3 3 3 1 e PID continuation flag Un G169 s Page 129 Section 3 4 2 43 CHO PID control forced stop instruction YnC to YnF lt s Page 56 Section 3 3 3 7 Stop mode setting Un G33 Un G65 Un G97 Un1G129 L gt Page 101 Section 3 4 2 13 The following table shows the relationship between each setting above and the execution of alert judgment O Judged x Not judged Setting operation PID CHO PID control Stop mode setting ee e mode instruction continuation forced stop instruction Un G33 Un G65 Un G97 TOM Yn1 flag Un G169 YnC to YnF Un G129 Ed Stop 0 x Power ON Stop 0 Continue OFF ON Monitor 1 x Setting mode 1 Alert 2 Stop 0 Monitor 1 Alert 2 Operation mode Stop 0 Continue Stop 0 operating 1 ON Monitor 1 x Alert 2 Stop 0 x Stop 0 OFF ON Monitor 1 x Alert 2 Setting mode Stop 0 Monitor 1 Alert 2 after operation Stop 0 x Continue 1 ON Monitor 1 x Alert 2 1 For details refer to 3 Page 48 Section 3 3 2 2 uogound Even if the conditions above are satisfied wnen Unused channel setting Un G61 Un G93 Un G125 Un G157 is set to Unused 1 alert judgment is not executed 7 124 Section 3 4 2 35 6 Condition where Alert o
211. T 2 FROM Ut H9 D51 K1 K4Y60 Y12 Y12 K4 Read a write data error code to 050 Output data read from a write data error code to Y60 to Y6F Error reset instruction ON 1 Error reset instruction OFF Read Temperature process value PV to D51 to D54 CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING c Program example where the simultaneous temperature rise function is used Program that changes the setting operation mode This program is the same as that of when the module is the standard control such as auto tuning self tuning and error code read gt 305 Section 7 2 1 6 f Initial setting program X20 4 gt LPLS MO J Flag 0 for setting value write ON MO 2 7 LSET M J Flag 1 for setting value write ON M X10 X13 L 4 Ut H3D KO K 1 CH1 Unused channel setting Used TO Ul H5D KO K J CH2 Unused channel setting Used TO Ut H7D KO K1 J CH3 Unused channel setting Used Tro Ui H9D K J CH4 Unused channel setting Used 1 M2 X10 X13 Y11 L4 T a a TO Ul H20 K2 K CH1 Input range 2 TO ul H40 K2 K CH2 Input range 2 TO Ut H60 K2 Ki CH3 Input range 2 7 TO Ul H80 K2 K Input range 2 TO Ut H2F K20 K CH1 Control outp
212. T H remote I O module A module with function version D or later is required 2 GX Works2 GX Works2 version 1 408 or later is required 3 Base unit When a slim type main base unit Q301SB is used an online module change cannot be performed When an extension base unit Q5L1B that does not require the power supply module is used an online module change cannot be performed for any modules on the base unit 388 APPENDICES Appendix 4 3 Operations of when performing an online module change The following table shows the operations of when performing an online module change O Executed x Not executed Operation of the CPU module Operation of User operation P the Q64TCN XIY refresh REMFR REMTO Device test instructions 1 Stop the operation Turn off all the Y signals turned on by The module is normally Q the sequence program operating Y 2 Remove the module The operation of the module Start the online module change has stopped using GX Works2 The RUN LED turns off Click the button on x x x GX Works2 to enable the module to be removed v Remove the selected module Y 3 Mount a new module Mount a new module The refresh restarts and the module starts up The RUN LED tu
213. TCN shifts the manipulated value MV by which the temperature is stabilized at the set value SV from 50 to 80 onfigu e the fellows Proportional band eee Manual rese Manual reset range 100 0 t Set 1000 to Input range The following table describes the meaning of each icon Icon Meaning Common This icon means that the buffer memory area or function can be used in all control modes Standard This icon means that the buffer memory area or function for temperature control can be used in the standard control The buffer memory area and function can be used in the following control modes and channels CH1 to CH4 in the standard control CH3 and CH4 in the mix control normal mode CH3 and CH4 in the mix control expanded mode Heating cooling This icon means that the buffer memory or function for temperature control can be used in the heating cooling control The buffer memory area and function can be used in the following control modes and channels CH1 and CH2 in the heating cooling control normal mode CH1 to CH4 in the heating cooling control expanded mode CH1 in the mix control normal mode CH1 and CH2 in the mix control expanded mode 15 TERMS Unless otherwise specified this manual uses the following terms Term Description Q64TCTTN The abbreviation for the Q64TCTTN temperature control module The abbreviation for t
214. Temperature measurement range 200 0 C to 400 0 C CHO Process value PV scaling lower limit value Un G726 Un G742 Un G758 Un G774 0 Process value PV scaling upper limit value Un G727 Un G743 Un G759 Un G775 100 Suppose that 3600 360 0 C is stored in Temperature process value PV Un G9 to Un G12 The scaling value can be calculated as follows Process value PV scaling value 100 0 x 3600 2000 Un G728 Un G744 Un G760 Un G776 4000 2000 93 333 93 All decimal places are rounded off to an integer 188 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 2 Setting method Set buffer memory areas in the following procedure 1 Enable or disable the temperature process value PV scaling function in the following buffer memory area CHO Process value PV scaling function enable disable setting Un G725 Un G741 Un G757 Un G773 lt gt Page 149 Section 3 4 2 74 2 Seta scaling upper limit value and lower limit value in the following buffer memory areas Buffer memory address Buffer memory area name Reference CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CHLI Process value PV scaling lower limit value Un G726 Un G742 Un G758 Un G774 Page 150 Section 3 4 2 75 CHLI Process value PV scaling upper limit value Un G727 Un G743 Un G759 Un G775 Point An error does not occur even though the areas above are set as follows Lower limit value gt Upper limit va
215. The following flow shows the online module change procedure Start y Stop th tion When initial settings are set on GX Configurator TC Op Ine operation lt gt Page 378 Appendix 3 5 1 When initial settings are set on a sequence program Y Page 382 Appendix 3 6 1 When initial settings are set on GX Configurator TC pemove he modules qe lt gt Page 379 Appendix 3 5 2 When initial settings are set on a Sequence program Page 383 Appendix 3 6 2 Mount d l When initial settings are set on GX Configurator TC CUNE ANEW MBELE 5 lt Page 380 Appendix 3 5 3 When initial settings are set on a sequence program Page 384 Appendix 3 6 3 When initial settings are set on GX Configurator TC C3 Page 380 Appendix 3 5 4 When initial settings are set on a sequence program 3 Page 384 Appendix 3 6 4 When initial settings are set on GX Configurator TC Page 381 Appendix 3 5 5 When initial settings are set on a sequence program 3 Page 386 Appendix 3 6 5 Check the operation K seinpeooJd eujuQ pe xipueddy 1edoje eq X9 Bulsp ueuM eunpeooug ejnpojy eujuo xipueddy Restart the control 377 Appendix 3 5 When GX Configurator TC was used for the initial setting 1 Stopping operation Device test r Bit device Device Close Y1B Hide history FORCE ON FORCE
216. Un G596 Un G628 Un G660 CE Set the change rate of the set value SV per a set time unit when the set value SV is changed This setting can regulate a rapid change of the manipulated value MV Set a time unit in Setting change rate limiter time unit setting Un G735 Un G751 Un G767 Un G783 gt Page 154 Section 3 4 2 83 Temperature process value PV A Set value SV 2 Setting change rate limiter full scale percentage 0 to 100 Set value SV 1 gt Time Setting change rate limit unit time setting Un G735 Un G751 Un G767 Un G783 a Batch individual setting of temperature rise and temperature drop Setting change rate limiter for the temperature rise and the temperature drop can be set in a batch or individually Select it on Switch Setting For details on the setting method refer to the following s Page 292 Section 6 2 When setting change rate limiter is set individually Un G52 Un G84 Un G116 Un G148 is for the temperature rise The following table lists the buffer memory areas to be referred to Ajowaw Jayng ay Sed jueuuuBissy yng t Batch Indivi Buffer memory address Buffer memory area name dual CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Batch Setting change rate limiter Un 52 Un 84 Un 116 Un 148 Setting change rate limiter Un 52 Un 84 UnM16 Un 148 temperature rise Individual Setting change rate limiter Un 564 Un 5
217. When the data writing to E PROM is completed normally Write completion flag b4 to b7 of Un G31 turns on CHO Write completion flag b4 to b7 of Un G31 turns off when Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants Un G63 Un G95 Un G127 Un G159 is set to Disable 0 from Enable 1 When the data writing to E PROM fails Write failure flag b12 to b15 of Un G31 of the corresponding channel turns on and the Q64TCN operates with PID constants calculated in the previous auto tuning The LED status remains CHO Write failure flag b12 to b15 of Un G31 turns off when the data writing of the corresponding channel is completed normally When the data writing fails perform auto tuning again by turning Auto tuning instruction Yn4 to Yn7 ON OFF ON If the data writing fails even after executing auto tuning again a hardware error can be the reason Consult a local representative or branch about the problem Point P By referring to this flag at the completion of auto tuning whether the automatic data backup is completed normally or not can be checked After confirming that the following flags are on set Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants Un G63 Un G95 Un G127 Un G159 to Disable 0 Write completion flag b4 to b7 of Un G31 when automatic backup is completed normally Write failure flag 612 to b15 of Un G31 when automatic bac
218. When the set value SV is changed When 6000s 1 hour and 40 minutes or longer has passed after the self tuning operation is started When the change rate of the temperature process value PV during self tuning is less than 1 125 C minute When the setting for Output variation limiter setting Un G44 Un G76 Un G108 Un G140 is changed lt gt 110 Section 3 4 2 20 e How to set the simultaneous temperature rise parameter using self tuning Select one of the following setting values Self tuning setting Un G574 Un G606 Un G638 Un G670 gt Page 144 Section 3 4 2 67 Starting ST Only the simultaneous temperature rise parameter is calculated 2 Starting ST PID constants and the simultaneous temperature rise parameter are calculated 3 243 uonouny esr einjejeduie snosueynwis 6 7 Operation when the simultaneous temperature rise parameter is calculated with self tuning and auto tuning a When the simultaneous temperature rise AT is started before the simultaneous temperature rise parameter is calculated with self tuning The simultaneous temperature rise parameter is not calculated neither with self tuning nor auto tuning PID constants are changed Temperature process value PV Auto tuning waveform Maximum gradient Simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation timing by self tuning lt gt Dead time Time Simultaneous S
219. When this setting is set from Not use 0 to Use 1 after completion of the first temperature conversion Temperature conversion completion flag Un G786 is set to First temperature conversion completed 14 Before referring to the temperature process value PV of each channel check Temperature conversion completion flag Un G786 has been set to First temperature conversion completed 14 When the following control mode is selected this setting is invalid Standard control Heating cooling control expanded mode Mix control expanded mode 147 71 Cooling method setting Un G719 Set the method for the cooling control in the heating cooling control Select the suitable cooling method for cooling characteristics of devices The following figure shows the channel assignment of the buffer memory area b15 to bi2 bi1 to b8 bz to b4 b3 to bo CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 For details on the cooling method setting function refer to the following s Page 252 Section 4 23 a Setting range e Air Cooled 14 Water Cooled 2 Linear b Enablement of setting contents Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction YnB OFF ON gt OFF during the setting mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 OFF c Default value The default value is set to Air Cooled 01 72 Overlap dead band function Un G723 Un G739 Un G755 Un G771 6 Configure the overlap dea
220. YnB off from on also turns off this flag ON Setting change instruction OFF YnB Setting change completion flag XnB OFF Executed in a sequence program gt Executed by the Q64TCN This flag can be used as an interlock condition for Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 52 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 10 CHO Alert occurrence flag XnC to XnF When an alert occurs the alert definition is stored in CHO Alert definition Un G5 to Un G8 and this flag turns on For conditions where this flag turns off refer to the following Page 199 Section 4 11 6 The following table lists the particular flag and buffer memory addresses of alert definitions for each channel Alertoccurrence Alert definition buffer memory Channel ON OFF status flag address 7 gt Page 85 Section 3 4 2 3 CH1 XnC Un G5 CH2 XnD OFF Alert does not occur Un G6 CH3 XnE ON Alert occurs Un G7 CH4 XnF Un G8 Ex Time chart for CH1 ON CH1 Alert occurrence flag OEE zii XnC i CH1 Alert definition M Un G5 0 X detected alert definition poss gt Executed by the Q64TCN sjeubis ndu jo sjiejeq peuejsueJ 53 3 3 3 Details of output signals 1 Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 Use this signal to select the setting mode or the operation mode O
221. ag Relationship between Transistor output flag and ON delay output flag is shown in the following ON Transistor output flag Transistor output monitor ON delay time setting Un G175 ON delay output flag Transistor output monitor ON delay time setting Un G175 enables setting considering delay time response scan time delay of actual transistor output gt Page 130 Section 3 4 2 45 By monitoring the ON delay output flag and external output on the program disconnection of external output can be judged For details on the ON delay output function refer to the following C gt Page 218 Section 4 16 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 8 Set value SV monitor Un G25 to Un G28 C3 Set value SV of each time unit set in Setting change rate limiter time unit setting Un G735 Un G751 Un G767 Un G783 is stored in this buffer memory area lt 5 Page 154 Section 3 4 2 83 The set value SV can be monitored in real time 9 Cold junction temperature process value Un G29 The measured temperature of cold junction temperature compensation resistor is stored in this buffer memory area Values to be stored are within to 55 C a Usable modules Q64TCTTN Q64TCTTBWN 10 MAN mode shift completion flag Un G30 C This flag is for checking completion of the mode shift when shifting AUTO auto mode to MAN manual mode The following values are stored in thi
222. age 185 the change of the set value SV can be selected from three levels freedom Section 4 7 The simple two degree of freedom PID control can be realized Derivative action Dynamic performance can be improved by selecting the suitable 186 selection function derivative action for the fixed value action and the ramp action Section 4 8 Change rate setting of the set value SV per set time unit when Setting change rate 2 DD Page 187 M this value is changed The batch setting or individual setting can be O O limiter setting function Section 4 9 selected for the temperature rise and drop Temperature process The temperature process value PV can be converted to the set Page 188 value PV scaling width and this value can be imported into the buffer memory Section 4 10 function The modules goes to the alert status when the temperature Page 190 Alert function process value PV or deviation E meets the condition set in O O d Section 4 11 advance When the deviation E continues for a long time the PID operation 5 result manipulated value MV by the integral action can be Page 204 RFB limiter function prevented from exceeding the effective range of the manipulated Section 4 12 value MV 43 isr uonoun4 Z Enable or disable SM Heating Item Description Standard g Refer
223. age 99 Section 3 4 2 12 d 2 as the Q64TCTTBWN For the following control mode and channel Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 cannot be set to 201 to 205 If these values are set a write data error error code LILILI4 occurs CH3 and CH4 in heating cooling control normal mode CH2 in mix control normal mode 98 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS c Resolution The resolution is applied to the stored values and the set values of particular buffer memory areas as described in the following table Resolution Stored value Set value 1 Value in 1 C F or digit unit is stored Set a value 1 C F or digit unit 0 1 Value in 0 1 C F unit tenfold value is stored Set a value in 0 1 C F unit tenfold value For applicable buffer memory areas refer to the following s Page 84 Section 3 4 2 2 d When Auto setting at Input Range Change is set to 1 Enable on Switch Setting Page 292 Section 6 2 When the input range is changed the following buffer memory areas are set automatically according to selected temperature sensor Set the buffer memory areas again if necessary Buffer memory address Buffer memory area name Reference CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Upper limit setting limiter Un G55 Un G87 Un G119 Un G151 Page 120 Section 3 4 2 31 Lower limit setting limiter Un G56 Un G88 Un G120 Un G152 At
224. aling function The reference set value SV for the deviation alert can be selected from among the following buffer memory areas with the Q64TCN gt Alert function A 190 Section 4 11 CHO Set value SV monitor Un G25 to Un G28 CHO Set value SV setting Un G34 Un G66 Un G98 Un G130 RFB limiter function Errors can be corrected by setting any two points corrected offset value Sensor compensation function A and corrected gain value with the Q64TCN 5 209 Section 4 13 2 Auto setting at input range change x O Input output with another analog x module function ON delay output function O O Self tuning function x O Peak current suppression function x Simultaneous temperature rise x O function 361 M amp alHolv90 gt o Ee 2 e 3 o a o o 2 o A 2 2 5 A O 4 a AR O 4 W o AR O 2 2 a Function Q64TC Q64TCN Remarks Forward action reverse action i selection function Loop disconnection detection functi unction Proportional band setting function x O Cooling method setting function x O Overlap dead band function x O Temperature conversion function using unused channels Heater disconnection detection functi unction Out
225. alue Alert set value Wait operation region Alert status Alert status Non alert status Alert status Non alert status Alert status 1 Depending on the alert mode this value becomes set value SV monitor or set value SV setting 7 5 Page 191 Section 4 11 2 a Point When the system goes into the non alert status even once after an alert judgment started following the setting of the alert mode the alert with standby will be inactive even if the mode is changed to the one with standby a Setting method Select one of the following alert modes Alert mode setting gt Page 200 Section 4 11 7 a Setting value Alert mode name 7 Upper limit input alert with standby 8 Lower limit input alert with standby 9 Upper limit deviation alert with standby 10 Lower limit deviation alert with standby 11 Upper lower limit deviation alert with standby 19 Upper limit deviation alert with standby using the set value SV 20 Lower limit deviation alert with standby using the set value SV 21 Upper lower limit deviation alert with standby using the set value SV 196 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 4 Alert with standby second time A function to deactivate the alert function once again when the set value SV is changed is added to an alert with standby This is called an alert with stand
226. alue PV is abnormal Check Item Action Check the thermocouple wiring resistance value and check whether a difference in the temperatures was caused by the wiring resistance L gt Page 39 Section 3 1 1 Use the sensor compensation function to correct the difference in the Is the thermocouple wiring resistance too high temperatures caused by the wiring resistance 205 Section 4 13 wojduwAs Aq BunoousejqnoJ cg jeuuouge si Ad enjeA sseoouJd eunjejeduie y ueuM Gg 353 8 6 Error Code List When an error occurs in the Q64TCN during data write to the CPU module or data read from the CPU module one of the following error codes is stored in Write data error code Un GO In addition the error occurred is notified to the CPU module Error code hexadecimal Cause Operation at error occurrence Action The operation varies depending on Check that the terminal block or the cold junction temperature compensation resistor is not disconnected or loose 00014 Hardware error Vsus Replace the Q64TCN ONE Please consult your local Mitsubishi System service service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem The data written is retained CRINE een When data is written to multiple ud eoa S O ee re A on and off Error reset instruction nove Data other than 0 is being written to system areas the addre
227. alue becomes set value SV monitor or set value SV setting 7 gt Page 191 Section 4 11 2 a 194 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS f Setting method alert mode and the set value SV to be referred Select one of the two types of set value SV described in Page 191 Section 4 11 2 a by specifying an alert mode When the alert judgment requires the value in Set value SV monitor Un G25 to Un G28 set one of the following values Alert mode setting 7 gt Page 200 Section 4 11 7 a Setting value Alert mode name 3 Upper limit deviation alert 4 Lower limit deviation alert 5 Upper lower deviation alert 6 Within range alert 9 Upper limit deviation alert with standby 10 Lower limit deviation alert with standby 11 Upper lower limit deviation alert with standby 12 Upper limit deviation alert with standby second time 13 Lower limit deviation alert with standby second time 14 Upper lower limit deviation alert with standby second time When the alert judgment requires the value in Set value SV setting Un G34 Un G66 Un G98 Un G130 set one of the following values Alert mode setting 7 gt Page 200 Section 4 11 7 a Setting value Alert mode name 15 Upper limit deviation alert using the set value SV 16 Lower limit deviation alert using the set value SV I 17 Upper lower deviation alert using the set value SV
228. and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 415 Microsoft Windows Windows NT and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Pentium is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation All other company names and product names used in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies SH NA 080989ENG A 416 MELSEC Q Temperature Control Module User s Manual MODEL Q64TCTTN RTN U E MODEL 13JZ60 SH NA 080989ENG A 1107 MEE s MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 S NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPA When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice
229. aneous This flag is set to 1 ON when simultaneous b9 temperature rise temperature rise parameter cannot be parameter error status calculated by self tuning This flag is set to 1 ON when either of the following operation is performed during the self tuning PID constants change This flag is set to 0 OFF when either of the Setting change rate limiter change following operation is performed Output limiter change When the operation mode shifts to the setting Control output cycle change mode by turning off from Setting operation Sensor correction change ace Primary delay digital filter change M i A AUTO to MAN mode shift his beca Ux E 2 Un G61 Un G93 Un G125 Un G157 is set Forward reverse action shift di This flag is also set to 1 ON in the following 1 Unused 1 acn When CHLI PID control forced stop When the temperature process value PV instruction YnC to YnF is turned on from off When Self tuning setting Un G574 is out of the temperature measurement b10 Self tuning error Un G606 Un G638 Un G670 is set to Do Run the ST 0 When required measurement data is not zu 0 obtained because the manipulated value is flag is also set to 0 in the following MV does not reach the upper limit output m E When the self tuning starts by changing the limiter value or the lower limit output e set value SV limiter val
230. anipulated value MV by PID operation or to set it manually by the user a Setting range Setting Sapa Set value Description contents 0 AUTO Activates the AUTO mode The manipulated value MV calculated by PID operation is used to calculate the ON time of the control cycle Activates the MAN mode The manipulated value MV written MAN output setting 1 MAN Un G51 Un G83 Un G115 Un G147 is used to calculate the ON time of the control output cycle b When AUTO mode is shifted to MAN mode The following operation is performed The manipulated value MV calculated by PID operation is transferred to CHO MAN output setting Un G51 Un G83 Un G115 Un G147 For preventing a rapid change of the manipulated value MV When the shift to the MAN mode is completed bits of the corresponding channel of MAN mode shift completion flag Un G30 are set to MAN mode shift completed 1 AUTO MAN mode AUTO mode X MAN mode 1 4 AUTO MAN mode switching y UnG50 Un G82 Un G114 Un G146 AUTO 0 f Man mode shift completion flag MAN mode shift MAN mode shift MAN mode shift Un G30 uncompleted 0 completed 1 uncompleted 0 MAN 1 X AUTO 0 gt Executed by the Q64TCN Point Set the manipulated value MV in MAN mode after confirming completion of the mode shift c When performing auto tuning Set to AUTO 0 If MAN 1 is set the auto
231. anipulated value MV to eliminate the deviation E when there is any The offset caused by a proportional action can be eliminated In an integral action the time from a deviation occurrence until when the manipulated value MV of the integral action becomes equals to that of the proportional action is called integral time and is indicated as The following table describes the difference of actions depending on the value of Ti integral time Condition Integral action Ti is a small value The integral effect gets large and time to eliminate the offset gets short Though the temperature process value PV tends to fluctuate around the set value Ti is a large value The integral effect gets small and time to eliminate the offset gets long The following figure shows an integral action of step responses where the deviation E is a fixed value Deviation E E Time M Manipulated value of the Proportional action Integral action e a Manipulated value of the Integral action Manipulated KP E Manipulated value of the Proportional action value MV Y An integral action is used as a PI action in combination with a proportional action or PID action in combination with a proportional and derivative actions An integral action cannot be used by itself CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1 3 5 Derivative action D action A derivative action adds the ma
232. annel temperature control is not 0 Used 1 Unused 1 Unused 1 Unused setting performed and the temperature sensor is not connected are set to be unused Upper limit setting Set the upper limit of the set Mif 400 C 1300 C 1300 C 1300 C limiter value SV Lower limit setting Set the lower limit of the set nal 0 0 C 0 C 0 C limiter value SV 1 Upper Limit Alert 1 mode setting Set the alert mode 0 Not Warning 0 Not Warning 0 Not Warning Input Alert Set the temperature where Alert 1 b8 of Un G5 t Alert set value 1 inis Un G8 turns on depending on the selected alert mode 336 CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING 9 Display the Q64TCTTN auto refresh setting window and configure the setting as follows X Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Q64TCTTN gt Right click gt Auto Refresh 5 0010 Q64TCTTN Auto Refresh Display Filter Display All m Item Fransfer to CPU Write data error code Temperature process value PV Manipulated value MV Transistor output Flag Alert definition Manipulated value MWV fHeating side manipulated value Mvh For another analog module output Temperature rise judgment Flag Set value SV monitor AT Simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation Flag Self tuning flag Temperature conversion completion flag Process value PV scaling value Simultaneous temperature rise status Cooling side man
233. ansmission Speed 115 2kbps E CCIEField CCIE Field AG Q6TEL Bus Communication Ethernet Remote HeadModile Adepter Computer Type QI72LP25 BR15 E E Connection Channel List Specification Other Station Other Station Single Network SH PLC Direct Coupled Setting i Connection Test TERR ie PLC Remotel O Detail System Image CCIECont CCIEField Ethernet C24 AGTEL C24 a CCIECont CCIEField Ethernet CCUnk C24 NET 10 H Accessing Host Station Multiple CPU Setting Ei 1e To the next page 400 Create a new project XW Project gt New Select QJ72LP25 QJ72BR15 Remotel O in PLC Type and click Open the Transfer Setup window Navigation window gt Connection destination gt Connection destination data name Configure the settings to access the remote I O module and click OK d From the previous page L System Monitor p Monitor Status Connection Channel List Stop Monitor Serial Port NETTO Remote Module ConnectonlRS 2220 Mon Base Pn Gase Ac Main Base Infor Made System Monitor Online Module Change 0000 010 0020 0030 0040 mation List Module Information List Main Base Base Module Power Base Installed Baso Mode Bomer sias Extension Basel mm Base Ee Parameter eel naa Poin
234. appropriate for each of fixed value action and ramp action can be selected and the action characteristic can be improved using this function 1 Action Each type of derivative action operates as shown below CHO Derivative action selection Un G729 Un G745 Un G761 Un G777 Action Measured value derivation 0 Fixed value action Disturbance Ramp action Set value SV This setting effectively prevents the temperature from being affected by disturbance though the performance Deviation derivation 1 mt Temperature to follow the set value ii process value SN PV Fixed value action Ramp action Disturbance Set value SV Temperature process value PV This setting allows the temperature to follow the set value well though the disturbance effect is great 2 Setting method Set a value Derivative action selection Un G729 Un G745 Un1G761 Un G777 For details on the setting refer to the following s Page 150 Section 3 4 2 77 186 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 4 9 Setting Change Rate Limiter Setting Function When the set value SV is changed the change rate in the specified time unit can be set on Setting Change Rate Limiter Setting The user can select whether to set this rate for temperature rise and temperature drop individually or at once 1 Setting method a Batch individual se
235. ase of any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY TORT PRODUCT LIABILITY FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS PRECAUTIONS OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI S USER INSTRUCTION AND OR SAFETY MANUALS TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT Prohibited Application Prohibited Applications include but not limited to the use of the PRODUCT in Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies and or any other cases in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT Railway companies or Public service purposes and or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User Aircraft or Aerospace Medical applications Train equipment transport equipment such as Elevator and Escalator Incineration and Fuel devices Vehicles Manned transportation Equipment for Recreation and Amusement and Safety devices handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals Mining and Drilling and or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property Notwithstanding the above restriction
236. ation 500ms sampling cycle 500ms sampling cycle 2 Control output cycle The control output cycle is the ON OFF cycle of transistor output ON ON OFF ber Control output cycle l Control output cycle Transistor output The manipulated value MV represents the ON time of the control output cycle in percentage 7 gt Page 87 Section 3 4 2 5 Set the control output cycle in the following buffer memory area in the range 1 to 100s Control output cycle setting Un G47 Un G79 Un G111 UnG143 s Page 112 Section 3 4 2 23 In the heating cooling control the following buffer memory areas are used for the manipulated value MV and control output cycle eoueuuoLeg Buffer memory area Buffer memory address name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Manipulated value for Manipulated heating MVh value MV Manipulated value for cooling MVc Reference Data type Un G13 Un G14 Un G15 Un G16 ajoAo yndjno pue Bujdues Page 87 Section 3 4 2 5 Un G704 Un G705 Un G706 Un G707 Heating control output Control output cycle setting cycle Cooling control output cycle setting Un G47 Un G79 Un G111 Un G143 Page 112 Section 3 4 2 23 Un G722 Un G738 Un G754 Un G770 41 3 1 3 Number of parameters to be set The total number of the parameters of the initial setting and of the auto refresh
237. ation window click HW Information a H W LED information The following information is displayed Item Value 0001Condition that results in 0001 RUN Operating normally same as the RUN LED DATA ERR A write data error has occurred CHO RUN PID control is being run CHO ALM1 Alert 1 is on ALM2 00004 off Alert 2 is on CHO ALM3 00019 on Alert 3 is ALM4 Alert 4 is on LBA A loop disconnection has been detected CHO HBA A heater disconnection has been detected the Q64TCTTBWN and Q64TCRTBWN only H W ERR A hardware error has occurred b H W switch information The setting status of the intelligent function module switch setting is displayed Item Intelligent function module switch setting HOLD CLR Switch 1 Output setting at CPU stop error CTRL MODE Switch 2 Control mode selection Switch 3 3 Auto setting at input range change Setting change rate limiter selection Value Refer to 2 292 Section 6 2 H W Information Monitor Status Module E e a Monitoring Product Model Name Q64TCTTBWN Information Display Format C DEC HIW LED Information HIW SW Information H W ERR 0000 CH3 RUN 0000 CH3 ALM1 0000 CH3 ALM2 0000 CH3 ALM3 0000 CH3 ALM4 0000 CH3 LBA 0000 CH3 0000 4 RUN 0000 CH4 ALM1 0000 CH4 ALM2 0000 CH4 ALMS 0000 CH4 ALM4 0000 CH4 LBA 0000 CH4 HBA 0000
238. ation per 1s to regulate a rapid change of the manipulated value MV a Setting range The setting range is 0 or 1 to 1000 0 1 s to 100 0 s When 0 is set an output variation is not regulated Ex When the value of the buffer memory is set as follows CHO Output variation limiter setting Un G44 Un G76 Un G108 Un G140 10 1 0 s If the manipulated value MV rapidly changes by 50 the variation is regulated to 1 s Therefore it takes 50s until the output actually changes by 50 When setting CHO Output variation limiter setting Un G44 Un G76 Un G108 Un G140 to 10 1 0 s Manipulated 100 4 value MV P P increased Y_____ 9 80 ccu pem eue eee Heer by 5095 m 50 I 5096 m v jo 03 ity N 18 4 7 S Er 0 Y p EUM 122 See ee Set value SV b Two position control gt Page 163 Section 4 3 1 The setting is invalid c Manual control gt gt Page 172 Section 4 5 The setting is enabled d Default value The default values are set to 0 in all channels 110 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 21 CHO Sensor correction value setting Un G45 Un G77 Un G109 Un G141 Common Set the correction value when measured temperature and actual temperature are different For details on the sensor compensation function refer to the following gt Page 205 Section 4 13 a Setting range Set the value within t
239. ature rise parameter calculation error status b1 of Un G573 Un G605 Un G637 Un G669 OFF 245 c When Auto tuning instruction Yn4 to Yn7 is turned off and on in the setting mode and the module is shifted to the operation mode After the module is shifted to the operation mode Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 is turned off and on the simultaneous temperature rise parameter and PID constants are changed with auto tuning Temperature process value PV Setting operation mode status Xn1 CHO Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 CHO Auto tuning instruction Yn4 to Yn7 CHLI PID auto correction status b0 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 Simultaneous temperature rise parameter correction status b1 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 Simultaneous temperature rise parameter error status b9 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 CHO Self tuning error b10 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation completion b0 of Un G573 Un G605 Un G637 Un G669 CHO Simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation error status b1 of Un G573 Un G605 Un G637 Un G669 246 Auto tuning waveform Maximum gradient Dead time Simultaneous temperature rise AT start Time
240. b CH1 b Controlled intemal object 1 a EY A H2A 77 Filter 2 ICH2 b 1 Use the shielded cable 286 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS AND THE PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 4 Q64TCRTBWN a In the standard control Q64TCRTBWN m ot L2 circuit i r4 i L 1 L4 Le Internal circuit 9 CHTA Filter CH1 b Controlled VL object 2 Filter al Internal CH2 9 circuit 1 CH2 b CHA A MH Filter CH4 B Connector Connector 4 ilt CT2 CT2 CT input circuit 9 CT8 CT8 NATU BuuiMw tS 1 Use the shielded cable Point To use the heater disconnection detection function the CT input channel assignment must be set Since the CT1 is used in the loop of CH1 in the above wiring example set CH1 1 to CT1 CT input channel assignment setting Un G264 287 b In the heating cooling control
241. backup ee A at ek en 1 instruction Yn8 ON i Write instruction i os i 1 1 E PROM 3 E7PROM write completion flag Xn8 completed 2 Write 1 E 1 i Buffer memory i i nae Read 1 1 1 When the power is 1 i switched from off to i on or at reset 1 1 1 If data write to E7PROM does not complete E PROM write failure flag XnA turns on a Setting change Change the settings for buffer memory areas when E PROM write completion flag Xn8 is off 264 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 3 Data read from 2 Follow the instructions below Turn off and on the power or reset the CPU module and cancel the reset Set E2PROM s PID constants read instruction Un G62 Un G94 Un G126 Un G158 to Requested 1 Page 125 Section 3 4 2 36 Data to be read are the PID constants and loop disconnection detection judgment time for the corresponding channel only 7 gt Page 122 Section 3 4 2 33 uonounj dnyoeg eeg Lowea yng gZr 265 4 29 Error History Function Common The error or alert occurred with the Q64TCN is stored in the buffer memories Un G1280 to Un G1404 as history Up to 16 error history data can be stored 1 Processing of the error history function An error code and error occurrence time are stored starting from Error history No 1 the start address is Un G1280 2 How to check error history The start address of the error histor
242. based on input from an external temperature sensor The modules control temperature by transistor output The Q64TCTTN and Q64TCRTN possess the auto tuning function by which proportional band P integral time 1 and derivative time D for PID operation are automatically set The Q64TCTTN accepts type K J T B S E R N U L PL Il and W5Re W26Re thermocouples The Q64TCRTN accepts type Pt100 and JPt100 platinum resistance thermometers Programmable controller CPU Q64TCTTN Q64TCRTN Buffer memory Temperature process value PV Input from temperature sensor Temperature process CHO value PV Temperature process value PV Un G9 to Un G12 Manipulated Transistor output value MV ON OFF pulse PID operation Manipulated CH value MV Manipulated value MV Un G13 to Un G16 Temperature Set value SV Initial setting Set value Set value SV Ni SV setting Un G34 Un G66 Un G98 Un G130 Device to be controlled To instruction 17 2 The Q64TCTTBWN and Q64TCRTBWN The Q64TCTTBWN and Q64TCRTBWN are Q64TCTTN and Q64TCRTN based modules which possess an additional function to detect heater disconnection using input from external current sensors Programmable controller CPU Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN Buffer memory i Temperature process value PV Input f
243. be Reference Ix ntr i ili hexadecimal control coniro T 12 availability sensor control 4 CT Simultaneous Simultaneous Page 152 764 2 CH3 temperature rise System area temperature 0 R W Section dead time rise dead time 3 4 2 80 Simult Simult 152 765 2FDy CH3 P System area 0 R W x Oo Section AT mode rise AT mode 3 4 2 81 selection selection Simultaneous Simultaneous Page 153 766 2 CH3 temperature rise System area temperature 0 R x x Section status rise status 3 4 2 82 Setting change Setting change Setting change Page 154 767 2 CH3 rate limiter unit rate limiter unit rate limiter unit 0 R W x Section time setting time setting 9 time setting 3 4 2 83 Cooling s Page 103 proportional 768 300 CH4 System area band Pc System area 30 R W x Section 96 3 4 2 15 setting Cooling upper Page 108 769 301 4 CH4 System area limit output System area 1000 R W x Section limiter 3 4 2 19 Cooling control Page 112 770 3024 CH4 System area output cycle System area 30 R W x Section setting 9 3 4 2 23 Overlap dead Page 148 771 3034 CH4 System area g System area 0 R W x Section band setting 3 4 2 72 Manual reset M 149 mum ow emai mn o 99 Seton 9 setting 9 3 3 4 2 73 Process value Process value Process value PV scaling PV scaling PV scaling Page 149
244. by second time When control needs the set value SV change the alert supposed to occur can be avoided when the set value is changed by selecting an alert with standby second time Ex When the temperature process value PV is on the position as below before the set value SV change Temperature process value PV n set value SV change Alert region L Alert set value Set value SV Temperature set value Temperature process value PV SV change After temperature n 2x set value SV change alles MA n Alert set value Set value SV 1 Depending on the alert mode this value becomes set value SV monitor or set value SV setting Page 191 Section 4 11 2 a For a deviation alert when the set value SV is changed the temperature process value PV goes into the alert area therefore the system goes into an alert status To prevent the case above the alert output is put on standby a Setting method x Select one of the following alert modes gt Alert mode setting gt 200 Section 4 11 7 a al Setting value Alert mode name 12 Upper limit deviation alert with standby second time d 13 Lower limit deviation alert with standby second time 14 Upper lower limit deviation alert with standby second time 22 Upper limit deviation alert with standby second time using the set value SV 23 Lower limit dev
245. ccurrence flag XnC to XnF turns off The condition where CHLI Alert occurrence flag turns off differs depending on the setting of the following buffer memory area Stop mode setting Un G33 Un G65 Un G97 Un G129 L gt Page 101 Section 3 4 2 13 Stop mode setting Un1G33 Condition where Alert occurrence flag XnC to XnF turns off Un G65 Un G97 Un G129 Stop 0 When the cause of the alert is resolved or when the system is shifted from the operation mode to the setting mode when Setting operation mode instruction 1 1 is turned off from Alert 2 When the cause of the alert is resolved 199 7 Setting alert modes and alert set values Settings of the alert mode and alert set value are described below a Alert mode Set the alert mode Up to four modes can be set for each channel Set them in the following buffer memory areas Buffer memory address Buffer memory area name Reference CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Alert 1 mode setting Un G192 Un G208 Un G224 Un G240 Alert 2 mode setting Un G193 Un G209 Un G225 Un G241 Page 135 Section 3 4 2 52 Alert mode setting Un G194 Un G210 Un G226 Un G242 Alert 4 mode setting Un G195 Un G211 Un G227 Un G243 Each alert mode for alert 1 to 4 corresponds to alert set value 1 to 4 b Alert set value Set the value where Alert 1 b8 of Un G5 to Un
246. ce as I O signals are given as indicated below in this manual read them according to the module used Ex When 0 is set as the start I O number Yn1 is assigned as follows When the Q64TCTTN or Q64TCRTN is used Y1 When the Q64TCTTBWN or Q64TCRTBWN is used Y11 For the noise immunity dielectric withstand voltage insulation resistance and others of the programmable controller system which uses the Q64TCN refer to the following manual I QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 3 1 1 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Type of usable temperature sensors temperature measurement range resolution and effect from wiring resistance of 1ohm This section describes types of temperature sensors that can be used with the Q64TCN the temperature measurement range the resolution and the effect from wiring resistance of 10 Set the used temperature sensor in the following buffer memory area Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 s Page 94 Section 3 4 2 12 1 Q64TCTTN Q64TCTTBWN The following table lists the types of thermocouples that can be used with the Q64TCTTN and Q64TCTTBWN the temperature measurement range the resolution and the effect from wiring resistance of 10 C F Thermocouple Temperature Effect from wiring Temperature Effect from wiring type measurement Resolution resistance of 12 measurement Re
247. cess value PV lower limit cross alert CHLI Alert 1 manipulated value 0 4000 0 12000 0 16000 manipulated value resolution Change switching CHLI temperature rise judgment flag Temperature rise completion range setting Unit deg Temperature rise completion soak time setting Unit min input range upper setting limiter CHLI lower setting limiter CHLI forward reverse action setting CHLI setting change rate limiter x 0 1 min CHLI sensor compensation value setting x 0 0196 CHO primary delay digital filter setting Unit s upper output limiter 0 1 CHLI lower output limiter x 0 196 output variation limiter x 0 1 adjustment sensitivity dead band setting 0 196 AT bias unused channel setting Transistor output monitor ON delay time setting 10ms MAN mode shift completion flag AUTO MAN mode switching MAN output setting x 0 1 Auto tuning 371 uoneJedo 25 1 zz xipueddy 2 L 410jeunBijuo pue 1edoje eq X9 Burs 1 ueuM Z xipueddy Appendix Online Module Change Procedure When Using GX Developer This appendix describes the online module change procedure using GX Developer Before performing an online module change carefully read the following QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection
248. compensation value Un G545 Un G577 Un G609 1 eR teen tte he 140 2 point sensor compensation offset value measured value Un G544 Un G576 Un G608 UM GO40 7 ce ae ex 140 Adjustment sensitivity dead band setting Un G46 Un G78 Un G110 Un G142 111 163 164 CHO Alert 1 mode setting Un G192 Un G208 Un G224 240 135 CHO Alert 2 mode setting Un G193 Un G209 Un G225 241 135 CHO Alert 3 mode setting Un G194 Un G210 Un G226 242 135 CHO Alert 4 mode setting Un G195 Un G211 Un G227 243 135 CHO Alert definition Un G5 to Un G8 85 Alert occurrence flag XnC to XnF 53 352 CHO Alert set value 1 Un G38 Un G70 Un G102 UMG134 i oe E IMP ee ia 106 CHO Alert set value 2 Un G39 Un G71 Un G103 Un iG195 user er RA ad ERA TAA A ae 106 CHO Alert set value 3 Un G40 Un G72 Un G104 Un G136 va pet a Beha oad aiken 106 CHO Alert set value 4 Un G41 Un G73 Un G105 UnG197 5 2 adie oet RR sind taba wg en 106 CHLI AT bias setting Un G53 Un G85 Un G117 UMG1T49 ods Dim A tee LIEU 118 AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation flag Un G573 Un G605 Un G637 Un G669 Sealed te OM Ern dM eee MN Lats le ARN EOL 143 CHO Auto tuning instruction Yn4 to Yn7 55 Auto
249. cute auto tuning again 350 CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING 8 4 5 When the auto tuning does not complete Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 stays on Does not turn off Check Item Action Are b4 to b7 of the E2PROM s PID constants read write completion flag Un G31 set to 1 ON Set Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants Un G63 Un G95 Un G127 Un G159 to Disable 0 Page 126 Section 3 4 2 37 To back up the setting turn off and on E2PROM backup instruction Yn8 Is E2PROM s PID constants read instruction Un G62 Un G94 Un G126 Un G158 set to Requested 1 Set E2PROM s PID constants read instruction Un G62 Un G94 Un G126 Un G158 to Not requested 0 gt Page 125 Section 3 4 2 36 Has the set value SV been set correctly Is the manipulated value MV still 0 because the set value SV is small Set the set value SV to the desired value 8 4 6 When the self tuning does not start Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 does not turn on Check Item Action Have the self tuning start conditions been met Has self tuning ended abnormally Refer to the Self tuning function section gt 219 Section 4 17 and confirm that all conditions have been met Check the conditions that signify an abnormal end for self tuning Page 227 Section 4 17 8 to see whether it has ended abnormally If it
250. d The setting method is the same as that for the heater disconnection detection function s Page 259 Section 4 26 4 0229 jueunz euim Jo 1ndino ZZY 263 4 28 Buffer Memory Data Backup Function This function allows buffer memory data to be stored in E PROM and backed up The backed up data is transferred from E PROM to the buffer memory when the power is turned off and on or the CPU module is reset and the reset is cancelled Therefore temperature can be controlled without writing data when the power is turned off and on or the CPU module is reset and the reset is cancelled 1 Applicable buffer memory areas Refer to the buffer memory assignment list Page 57 Section 3 4 1 2 Data write to E7PROM This function can be used to back up data directly written in the buffer memory using the PID constants set with the auto tuning function and the programming tool When data is written to E PROM and the power is turned off and on or the CPU module is reset and the reset is cancelled the buffer memory setting value is not required to be set again Point For the function that allows PID constants to be automatically backed up after auto tuning refer to 5 175 Section 4 6 4 To write data to EPROM turn off and on E7PROM backup instruction Yn8 When data write to E7PROM is completed E PROM write completion flag Xn8 turns on Q64TCN CPU module 1
251. d Pags 140 640 280 CH4 g 0 R W Section value 3 4 2 58 641 2814s Gd 2 point sensor compensation offset value RW Bon 140 H ection compensation value 3 4 2 59 2 point sensor compensation gain value measured Page TE 642 2824 CH4 M 0 R W Section value 3 4 2 60 643 283 2 point sensor compensation gain value in 141 H M ection compensation value 3 4 2 61 Page 142 644 2844 CH4 2 point sensor compensation offset latch request 9 0 R W x x Section 3 4 2 62 Page 142 645 285 CH4 2 point sensor compensation offset latch completion 0 R x x Section 3 4 2 63 72 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Target Setting contents channel 2 Address he Default Read Automatic ETROM eating writ decimal Cunent Standard value Write setting E IX contr i ili hexadecimal aul coniro 2 availability sensor control 4 CT Page 142 646 286 CH4 2 point sensor compensation gain latch request 0 R W x x Section 3 4 2 64 Page 143 647 2874 CH4 2 point sensor compensation gain latch completion 0 R x x Section 3 4 2 65 648 288 to System area 659 293 Page 117 660 294 CH4 Setting change rate limiter temperature drop 12 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 28 661 295 to System area 668 29
252. d a write data error code to D50 M224 M225 4 Output data read from a write data error L Tr LMoV K4Y60 J code to Y60 to YGF X22 A SET 1012 Error reset instruction ON Y1012 X1012 L D50 HO 1 RST 1012 Error reset instruction OFF X1010 X1011 4 Read CH1 Temperature process r LZ REMFR J1 K6 Ki H1 H9 D51 K1 M226 1 value PV to D51 MCR NO END uo Burst ueuw 345 CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter describes the causes and corrective actions to take when a problem occurs in the Q64TCN 8 1 Before Troubleshooting Check whether the POWER LED on the power supply module and the MODE LED on the CPU module are on If both are off proceed with CPU module troubleshooting QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 8 2 Troubleshooting Procedure This section describes how to find problem causes and take corrective action Use GX Works2 to find problem causes and take corrective action 1 Procedure Connect GX Works2 to the CPU module to display EES the System Monitor window SerialPort PLC Module Connection USE partus Diagnostics gt System Monitor Main Base Ade 00000010 0020 0039 0040 Slot cu zoucceu Diagnostics Error History Detail Base Information List Module Information List Main Base
253. d band setting For details on the overlap dead band function refer to the following Page 253 Section 4 24 a Setting range Set the value within the following ranges for the full scale of the set input range 7 gt Page 94 Section 3 4 2 12 100 to 1 10 0 to 0 1 Overlap 0 0 0 None e 1 to 100 0 1 to 10 096 Dead band b Default value The default values are set to 0 0 0 in all channels 148 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 73 CHO Manual reset amount setting Un G724 Un G740 Un G756 Un G772 8 Set the amount of the proportional band P to be moved For details on the manual reset function refer to the following L gt Page 170 Section 4 4 a Setting range Set the value within the range of 1000 to 1000 100 0 to 100 0 for the full scale of the set input range Ls Page 94 Section 3 4 2 12 The setting range is the same between the standard control and heating cooling control b Default value The default values are set to 0 0 0 in all channels The default value is the same between the standard control and the heating cooling control 74 CHO Process value PV scaling function enable disable setting Un G725 Un G741 Un G757 Un G773 3 Set enable disable of the temperature process value PV scaling function For details on the temperature process value PV scaling function refer to the following Page 188 Section 4 10 a Setting range 0 Disable
254. d band setting Un1G164 Temperature process value PV A Alert set value gt Time Alert status Non alert status Alert status When a value other than 0 0 0 is set in Alert dead band setting Un1G164 Temperature process value PV Alert set value Alert status A Dead band gt Time L Non alert status status 201 uonounj Haly Lb 202 9 Setting the number of alert delay Set the number of sampling to judge alert occurrence The system is set in the alert status when the temperature process value PV that has reached the alert set value remains in the alert range until the number of sampling becomes equal to or greater than the preset number of alert delays a Setting method Set a value in Number of alert delay Un G165 Page 127 Section 3 4 2 39 Ex When the alert mode is set to Upper limit input alert 1 s 190 Section 4 11 1 When 5 is set as the number of alert delay the system is not put in the alert status if the number of sampling is 4 or less Temperature process value PV A Alert set value Set value SV P gt Time Sampling count 3 times 5 times Alert status Non alert status Alert status 10 Alert dead band setting CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS The following table shows the alert m
255. d by the Q64TCN 222 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS a Conditions for self tuning starting ST Self tuning is executed under the following conditions When the setting mode is shifted to the operation mode Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 is turned off and on the first time after the power is turned off and on or after the CPU module is reset and the reset is cancelled When the setting mode is shifted to the operation mode the second time or later after the power is turned off and on or after the CPU module is reset and the reset is cancelled only when the temperature process value PV has been stable for two minutes or longer before the mode is shifted When the set value SV is changed only when the set value SV after the change is greater than that before the change and when the temperature process value PV before the change has been stable for two minutes or longer Point If the starting ST is started when the temperature process value PV is not stable incorrect PID constants may be determined Execute the starting ST after the temperature process value PV has been stable for two minutes or longer 223 uonounj DuiunJles ZL 7 5 Operation with vibration ST This section explains the operation of when a control response is oscillatory vibration ST With vibration ST PID constants are automatically corrected to settle a vibration when a control response becomes oscillatory due to reasons such a
256. de Setting operation mode status Xn1 OFF is changed during the operation mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 ON Page 48 Section 3 3 2 2 When the data which cannot be set is set e When the setting of the buffer memory is changed during the default setting registration gt Page 56 Section 3 3 3 5 When the current control mode and the control mode backed up in the E PROM are different due to the change of the control mode selection OFF Write error flag 2 j Write data error code OH Error code OH Error reset instruction Yn2 OFF 5 Hense gt Executed by the Q64TCN 4 Hardware error flag Xn3 This flag turns on when hardware error occurs in the Q64TCN 49 sjeubis ndu jo sjiejeq uoJioy peuejsueJ 5 CHO Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 This signal turns on when auto tuning of each channel is set by the user or when the Q64TCN performs self tuning Auto tuning status Heating Channel Standard ae ON OFF status cooling Mix control control control CH1 Xn4 Xn4 Xn4 ON The auto tuning self tuning is being CH2 Xn5 Xn5 Xn5 performed CH3 Xn6 Xn6 1 Xn6 OFF The auto tuning self tuning is not being CH4 Xn7 Xn7 performed or is completed 1 Available only under the heating cooling control expanded mode For details on the expanded mode refer to
257. dialog if the Switch Setting of the PLC parameter contains an out of range value Cancel Set value Item CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Output Setting at CPU Stop Error 0 CLEAR 0 CLEAR 0 CLEAR 0 CLEAR Control Mode Selection 0 Standard Control Auto setti t Input Ri uto setting at Input Range 0 Disable Change Setting Change Rate Limiter 0 Temperature Rise Temperature Drop Batch Setting 4 Write the set parameter to the remote I O module and reset the remote I O module Online gt Write to PLC Press the switch for a while uo Burst ueuw 341 b Devices used by a user Device Description X20 Set value write instruction X21 Auto tuning execute instruction X22 Error code reset instruction QX42 X20 to X5F X23 Operation mode setting instruction X24 E PROM s PID constants read instruction X1010 Module READY flag X1011 Setting operation mode status X1012 Write error flag X1013 Hardware error flag Q64TCTTN X1010 to X101F X1014 CH1 Auto tuning status X1018 E2PROM write completion flag X101B Setting change completion flag Y60 to Y6F Error code output QY42P Y60 to Y9F Y1011 Setting operation mode instruction Y1012 Error reset instruction Y1014 CH1 Auto tuning instruction Q64TCTTN Y1010 to Y101F Y1018 E PROM backup instruction Y101B Set
258. difference 282 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS AND THE PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 2 Q64TCTTBWN a In the standard control Q64TCTTBWN Internal circuit Internal circuit Current sensor CT 24VDC 1 Filter Controlled object Filt Internal circuit 1 1 25 558 Filter Connector Connector CT input circuit 1 Use the shielded compensation lead wire 2 Use the shielded cable Point To use the heater disconnection detection function the CT input channel assignment must be set Since the CT1 is used in the loop of CH1 in the above wiring example set CH1 1 to CT1 CT input channel assignment setting Un G264 Use the compensation lead wire for the cable of thermocouple If the compensation lead wire is not used and when the cold junction temperature compensation resistor is away from the end tip of thermocouple the ambient temperature difference may lead to a faulty temperature process value PV Reference junction Thermocouple extension wire OK Q64TCTT BW N X Shielded cable NG A Cold junction resistor LL Terminal block Ambient temperature difference Bo sha es E ofthe B Cold junction temperature compensation resistor 283 tS 9
259. dule Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN Point To perform the measurement of the heater current the following buffer memory areas need to be set CTO CT input channel assignment setting Un G264 to Un G271 gt Page 137 Section 3 4 2 54 Reference heater current value Un G280 to Un G287 gt Page 139 Section 3 4 2 56 If the both are set to 0 the heater current cannot be measured If either of them is not set the heater current cannot be measured precisely 136 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 54 CTO CT input channel assignment setting Un G264 to Un G271 C22 Set the assignment of each current sensor CT input to the channels a Supported modules Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN b Correspondence between CT input terminal and buffer memory address CT input terminal Buffer memory address CT1 Un G264 CT2 Un G265 CT3 Un G266 CT4 Un G267 CT5 Un G268 CT6 Un G269 CT7 Un G270 CT8 Un G271 c Setting range 0 Unused 1 CH1 2 CH2 3 CH3 4 CHA d Default value The default values are set to Unused 0 for all terminals Point lf a three phase heater is used the same channel should be assigned to two current sensor CT inputs For setting examples refer to the following gt Page 289 Section 5 4 3 In the heating cooling control CH3 and CH4 cannot be assigned to this setting In the mix control CH2 cannot be assigned to this setting
260. e Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before mounting or removing the module Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction A module can be replaced online while power is on on any MELSECNET H remote I O station or the system where a CPU module supporting the online module change function is used Note that there are restrictions on the modules that can be replaced online and each module has its predetermined replacement procedure For details refer to the relevant chapter in this manual After the first use of the product do not mount remove the module to from the base unit and the terminal block to from the module more than 50 times IEC 61131 2 compliant respectively Exceeding the limit of 50 times may cause malfunction Before handling the module touch a grounded metal object to discharge the static electricity from the human body Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction Disposal Precautions NCAUTION When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT 1 Mitsubishi programmable controller the PRODUCT shall be used in conditions i where any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT if any shall not lead to any major or serious accident and ii where the backup and fail safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the PRODUCT for the c
261. e D 0 Manipulated value for heating MVh Manual reset The manipulated value for heating MVh can be moved from 0 to 80 to keep the set value SV stable gt i 0 E C Cooling 096 i j z N H S i Set value SV i 5 2 Manipulated value 1 D for cooling MVc a i T i i i c 1 1 gt i i i 8 i i o i v i Cooling 100 100 1 i lt Manual reset range 100 0 to 100 0 every 0 1 Set 1000 to 1000 14 gt Input range 3 Setting method Set a value in the following buffer memory area Manual reset amount setting Un G724 Un G740 Un G756 Un G772 s Page 149 Section 3 4 2 73 171 4 5 Manual Control Manual control is a form of control for which the user sets the manipulated value MV manually instead of obtaining it automatically by PID control The manipulated value MV is checked every 500ms and is reflected to transistor output 1 Setting method Follow the following procedure for setting 1 Shiftto the MAN manual mode Set MAN 1 in AUTO MAN mode shift Un G50 Un G82 Un G114 Un G146 7 gt Page 115 Section 3 4 2 26 2 Setthe manipulated value MV in CHO MAN output setting Un G51 Un G83 Un G115 UnG147 Page 116 Section 3 4 2 27 1 The setting range differs for standard control and
262. e standby second time Upper lower limit deviation alert within range alert upper lower limit deviation alert using the set value SV within O to full scale range alert using the set value SV Same as with standby and standby second time When a value which is out of the setting range is set a write data error error code O00044 and the following situations occur Write error flag Xn2 turns on The error code is stored in Write data error code UnYGO 106 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS c Setting unit The value to be set differs depending on the stored value Decimal point position Un G1 to Un G4 L gt Page 84 Section 3 4 2 2 e No decimal place 0 Set a value in 1 C F or digit unit One decimal place 1 Set a value in 0 1 C F unit tenfold value d Write data error In the following case a write data error error code O00044 occurs as well as when the setting is out of the setting value Write error flag Xn2 turns on and the error code is stored in Write data error code UnYGO When the set value is other than 0 when No alert 0 is set in the alert mode e Default value The default values are set to 0 in all channels Ajowaw Jeynq ay Jo Sed jueuuuBissy yng t 107 19 CHO Upper limit output limiter Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 8 Lower limit output limiter Un G43 Un G75 Un G107 Un G139 Gana C
263. e the initial settings are configured at any timing in the sequence program After the control is restarted turn on the initial setting request signal and configure the initial settings In a sequence program where the initial settings are configured only for a single scan after restarting the remote I O network data link the initial settings are not configured APPENDICES 5 Restarting control Open the System Monitor window again System Monitor Mode System Monitor Online Change Diagnostics gt Online Module Change p Main Base Operation to Selected Module Fain ze Double click the changed module name noon 0010 002200920080 sot 3 nie oe Rae Bros or Hey beta Base Information List Module Information List Mein Base Parameter NetworkNo Master Um Base Power Base Installed Sots Module Base Model Name Fos status Series Model Name Point Power Power Extension Basel 07225 25 Extension Base2 H Empty o Empty 16Pont 0000 Extension Base Extension Based T Empty Empty 1 0020 Extension Bases Empty Empty 1 Pot 0030 Extension Base6 Empty Empty 16Pont 040 Extension Legend Error Major Enor _ Moderate Error Minor Eror Assignment Error Assignme
264. e chips from entering the module Such foreign matter can cause a fire failure or malfunction A protective film is attached to the top of the module to prevent foreign matter such as wire chips from entering the module during wiring Do not remove the film during wiring Remove it for heat dissipation before system operation Place the cables in a duct or clamp them If not dangling cable may swing or inadvertently be pulled resulting in damage to the module or cables or malfunction due to poor contact When disconnecting the cable from the module do not pull the cable by the cable part For the cable connected to the terminal block loosen the terminal screw Pulling the cable connected to the module may result in malfunction or damage to the module or cable Startup and Maintenance Precautions CAUTION Do not touch any terminal while power is on Doing so will cause electric shock or malfunction Shut off the external power supply all phases used the system before cleaning the module or retightening the terminal screws or module fixing screws Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause the module to fail or malfunction Undertightening can cause drop of the component or wire short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction Do not disassemble or modify the module Doing so may cause failure malfunction injury or a fir
265. e does not start up normally and the RUN LED does not turn on 383 jeu y JO pesn sem urejBoud eouenbes e ueuM 9 xipueddy 1edoje eq x9 Bulsp ueuM eunpeooug ejnpojy eujuo xipueddy 3 Mounting a new module 1 Mount anew module in the same slot and connect Online module change the external cable 2 When the module is mounted click check that the RUN LED is Module READY flag Xn0 remains off 1 To check the operation click Cancel to cancel the control start Online module change 2 Click to stop the Online module change mode 3 Click ese toclosethe System Monitor window 1 To the next page 384 From the previous page J Device test Bit device Device nig FORCE ON FORCE OFF Toggle force Close Hide history Word device buffer memory C Device Buffer memory Module startI 0 10 x Address 93 Hes DEC gt Setting value h DEC 16 bit integer Program Label reference program Execution history Device Setting condition Module start 10 Address 93 0 1 Y1B Force OFF Y19 Force OFF ics gem Clear Y18 Force OFF vii Force OFF APPENDICES Set the data pre recorded in the device test to the buffer memory O Online gt Debug gt Device test To back up the data in E PROM tur
266. e is subject to significant vibration The following table shows the applicable solderless terminal installed to the terminal block For wiring use the cable applicable to the following wire and mount with the applicable tightening torque Use a UL approved solderless terminal and tools recommended by the manufacturer of the solderless terminal The sleeve solderless terminal cannot be used Solderless terminal Wire Applicable Temperature Model name Wire diameter Type Material tightening torque rating R1 25 3 0 42 to 0 58N m 22 to 18 AWG Stranded wire Copper wire 75 C or more While pressing the installation lever located at the bottom of module insert the module fixing tab into the fixing hole in the base unit until it stops Then securely mount the module with the fixing hole as a supporting point Improper mounting may result in malfunction failures or the module dropping Securely fix the module with screws if it is subject to vibration during use For the mounting direction of the module the mounting surface the combination with other devices and the distance from other devices refer to the following QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 270 5 2 CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS AND THE PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION Settings and the Procedure before Operation The following figure shows the procedure before operating the Q64TCN Start Module mou
267. e or two position control PID constants setting Can be set by auto tuning Proportional band P 0 0 to 1000 0 0 Two position control PID constants range Integral time 1 0 to 3600s set 0 for P control and PD control Derivative time D Set value SV setting range 0 to 3600s set 0 for P control and PI control Within the temperature range set in the used thermocouple platinum resistance thermometer to be used Dead band setting range 0 1 to 10 096 37 Specifications D Q64TCTTN Q64TCRTN Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN Output signal ON OFF pulse Rated load voltage 10 to 30VDC Max load current 0 1A point 0 4A common Transistor output Max inrush current 0 4A 10ms Leakage current at OFF 0 1mA or less Max voltage drop at ON 1 0VDC TYP at 0 1A 2 5 0 MAX at 0 1A Response time OFF ON 2ms or less ON OFF 2ms or less Number of accesses to non volatile memory Max 1012 times Insulation method Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply Transformer insulation Between input channels Transformer insulation Dielectric withstand voltage Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VAC for 1 minute Between input channels 500VAC for 1 minute Insulation resistance Current sensor Heater disconnection detection specifications Input accuracy Number of ale
268. e used For respective terminal block layouts refer to the following gt 273 Section 5 3 1 to Page 278 Section 5 3 4 12 The error code and buffer memory address of the detected error can be checked in Write data error code Un GO For details refer to the following Page 84 Section 3 4 2 1 1 For the Q64TCTTN CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS AND THE PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION Heating cooling control Heating cooling control Terminal Standard control normal mode expanded mode number Symbol Name Symbol Name Symbol Name 1 OUT1 L1 CH1 Output L1H CH1 Heating output L1H CH1 Heating output 2 OUT2 L2 CH2 Output L1C CH1 Cooling output L1C CH1 Cooling output 3 OUT3 L3 CH3 Output L2H CH2 Heating output L2H CH2 Heating output 4 OUT4 L4 CH4 Output L2C CH2 Cooling output L2C CH2 Cooling output 5 x je COM Output common COM Output common COM Output common 6 NC NC Unused NC Unused NC Unused 7 IN1 1 CH1 CH1 Thermocouple CH1 CH1 Thermocouple CH1 CH1 Thermocouple 8 IN2 2 CH2 CH2 Thermocouple CH2 CH2 Thermocouple CH2 CH2 Thermocouple 9 IN1 1 CH1 CH1 Thermocouple CH1 CH1 Thermocouple CH1 CH1 Thermocouple 10 IN2 2 CH2 CH2 Thermocouple CH2 CH2 Thermocouple CH2 CH2 Thermocouple 11 NC NC Unused NC Unused NC Unused 42 CJ CJ Cold junction temperature CJ Cold junction temp
269. ead flag M310 M311 Z P REMTO instruction completion result device M312 M313 Z P REMFR instruction completion result device M314 M315 Z P REMTO instruction completion result device W1150 Write data error code Devices where data is written by W1151 CH1 Temperature process value PV auto refresh 338 CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING c Program example Write the program to the CPU module on the master station Program that changes the setting operation mode X23 Y101B i ME 1 11 to the setting mode or the operation mode Program that reads the PID constants from E2PROM X24 Xi010 Y101B 1018 2 CH1 E PROM s PID constants read n t Ar Ar wovP D9 4 Requested Requested SET M300 J M300 B i ZP REMTO i Ki K1 H1 H3E D9 Ki M310 M310 M311 E e A M301 1 M301 M302 M303 M304 E AF AF A SET M302 M302 M303 2 i ye 4 Read E PROM s PID constants read write IF Z REMFR J1 K2 Ki Hi HIF D10 Ki M312 3 Completion flag to D10 SET M303 M312 M313 B If RST M302 1 7 RST M303 D10 0 SET M304 J M304 2 i CH1 E PROM s PID constants read Mov Ko bi instruction Not requested SET M305 M305 E E 3H M LzP REMTO ii K3 K1 H1 H3E D11 Ki M3i4 w 3 Program that reads an error code c o 2 X1010 IMOV Kiteo 4 Output a write data error code
270. ected in each channel become 1 b15 b14 613 612 611 610 b9 b8 b7 to b2 b1 bO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Y V Bit data b15 are fixed to 0 Bit data from b7 to b2 are fixed to O Target bit number Flag name Alert definition Temperature process value PV has exceeded the temperature bO CHO Input range upper limit 1 of the set input range Temperature process value PV has fallen below the temperature b1 CHLI Input range lower limit measurement range of the set input range b2 to b7 fixed to 0 Unused b8 CHO Alert 1 Alert 1 has occurred gt Page 190 Section 4 11 b9 Alert 2 Alert 2 has occurred 7 3 Page 190 Section 4 11 b10 CHD Alert 3 Alert 3 has occurred 7 gt Page 190 Section 4 11 b11 CHO Alert 4 Alert 4 has occurred 7 gt Page 190 Section 4 11 CHLI Heater disconnection b12 Heater disconnection has been detected 7 3 Page 259 Section 4 26 detection CHLI Loop disconnection b13 Loop disconnection has been detected 249 Section 4 21 detection b14 Output off time current Output off time current error has been detected 263 Section error 4 27 b15 fixed to 0 Unused 4 For the temperature measurement range refer to gt Page 86 Section 3 4 2 3 a 85 Aiowaw Jejnq ey jo S amp a jueuuuBissy yng t a Temperature
271. ection 3 4 2 17 CHLI Loop disconnection detection Un G59 Un G91 Un G123 Un G155 Page 122 Section 3 4 2 33 126 b Setting range 0 Disable 1 Enable c Default value The default values are set to Disable 0 in all channels d Precautions When Enable 1 is set do not perform the following operations An incorrect value may be stored in the E PROM Changing the set value of the buffer memory E2PROM back up L gt 264 Section 4 28 e Default setting registration s Page 56 Section 3 3 3 5 Change to Disable 0 during the auto tuning CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 38 Alert dead band setting 164 This setting is for using the alarm function For details on the alert function refer to the following Page 190 Section 4 11 a Setting range Set the value within the range 0 to 100 0 0 to 10 0 of the full scale of the set input range gt Page 94 Section 3 4 2 12 Ex When the value of the buffer memory is set as follows CHO Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 2 temperature measurement range 0 to 1300 C Alert dead band setting Un G164 5 0 5 Full scale x Alert dead band 1300 C 0 C x 0 005 6 5 C The dead band is the alert set value SV 6 5 C b Default value The default value is set to 5 0 5 39 Number of alert delay 165 3 Set the number of sampling for an alert judgment By setting numb
272. ection Detection Function Common When transistor output is on whether a heater is disconnected or not can be checked based on a reference heater current value load current value detected by a current sensor CT using this function A reference heater current value and heater disconnection alert current value are compared When the reference heater current value becomes lower than the heater disconnection alert current value the heater is regarded as disconnected Heater disconnection is detected every 500ms When transistor output is on for 500ms or less heater disconnection is not detected Heater disconnection detection 012 of Un G5 to Un G8 remains 0 OFF lt Page 85 Section 3 4 2 3 The following is the timing output as an alert 500ms x Setting value in Heater disconnection output off time current error detection delay count Un G166 If a heater is disconnected longer than the time described above Alarm code 04L1A 4 is stored in Write data error code UnYGO Page 357 Section 8 7 1 Modules where this function can be used Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN 2 Setting method Follow the instructions below 1 Setthe current sensor CT to be used in CT selection Un G272 to Un G279 gt Page 138 Section 3 4 2 55 2 When using a current sensor CT other than CTL 12 S36 8 and CTL 6 P H manufactured by U R D Co LTD set CT ratio setting Un G288 to Un G295 Page 139 Sec
273. ed 3 0 0 0 240s 60s 30s 0 Slow 1 Monitor 1 Reverse Action 1300 C ac 0 0 0 0 1 Unused 3 0 0 0 2405 605 305 0 Slow 1 Monitor l Reverse Action 300 C 1 Unused The Q64TC exercises temperature adjustment control automatically by merely setting the PID constants proportional 3 0 0 0 2405 605 305 O Slow 1 Monitor The Q64TCTT BW allows you to set the temperature measurement ranges which meet the operating temperatures of the above thermocouples 1 Reverse Action 1300 C ac 0 0 0 0 Set value Item Description CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 2 ThermocoupleK 2 ThermocoupleK 2 ThermocoupleK 2 ThermocoupleK Set the temperature sensor Measured Measured Measured Measured Input range used for the Q64TCN and the Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature measurement range Range 0 to Range 0 to Range 0 to Range 0 to 1300 C 1300 C 1300 C 1300 C Set val V Set the t tt t e va ue SV et the target temperature 200 C 0 oc 0 setting value of PID control Configure this setting when the channels where the Unused channel temperature control is not 0 Used 1 Unused 1 Unused 1 Unused setting performed and the temperature sensor is not connected are set to be unused Control output cycle tting Heati Set th N OFF setting Heating et the pulse cyce ON 305 30s 305 30s control output cycle cycle of the transistor output settin
274. efore whether control stability is prioritized or energy saving is prioritized can be selected 1 Overlap Overlap refers to the temperature area where both of heating control and cooling control are performed In the temperature area where both heating and cooling output overlap both of the output negate each other thus the control gain becomes moderate Consequently the change amount in the temperature process value PV for the output becomes small improving control stability Ex When buffer memory values are set as following CHO Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 38 temperature measurement range 200 0 C to 400 0 C CHO Set value SV setting Un G34 Un G66 Un G98 Un G130 2000 200 0 C Overlap dead band setting Un G723 Un G739 Un G755 UnXG771 25 2 5 185 0 C to 200 0 C is the overlapping area Full scale x Overlap setting 400 0 C 200 0 C x 0 025 15 0 C The temperature where cooling operation starts Set value SV 15 0 C 185 0 C As shown below shifting the temperature where cooling operation starts to the lower temperature side of the set value SV produces an overlapping area The following is an example of when the module is in P control Heating only Cooling only manipulated value for cooling MVc 0 Heating Cooling manipulated value for heating MVh 0 100 uonouny pueg Heating
275. elf tuning start temperature rise AT start ON Setting operation mode status Xn1 OFF CHO Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xnz OFF 5 2 1 Auto tuning instruction Yn4 to Yn7 CHLI PID auto correction status b0 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 OFF CHO Simultaneous temperature rise parameter correction status b1 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 OFF CHO Self tuning flag Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 CHO Simultaneous temperature rise parameter error status b9 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 OFF Sad osa Ea CHO Self tuning error b10 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 OFF CHO AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation completion bO of Un G573 Un G605 Un G637 Un G669 OFF AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation flag ON Un G573 Un G605 Un G637 Un G669 Simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation error status b1 of Un G573 Un G605 Un G637 Un G669 OFF Essere ie essem lee us 244 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS b When the simultaneous temperature rise AT is started after the simultaneous temperature rise parameter is calculated with self tuning The simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculated with self tuning is effective Then PID constants a
276. en the simultaneous temperature rise AT has not been executed ON CHO Auto tuning instruction OFF Yn4 to Yn7 i ON CHO Auto tuning status AL Xn4 to Xn7 orc Y i E Control status pip controi Auto tuning X PID control Simultaneous temperature rise ON i AT disable status OFF Im 02 of Un G573 Un G605 Un G637 Un G669 Executed in a sequence program sues gt Executed by the Q64TCN The Q64TCN turns Simultaneous temperature rise AT disable status b2 of Un G573 Un G605 Un G637 Un G669 to 1 ON With CHO Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 on the module performs the same processing as normal auto tuning 239 uonouny esr einjeJeduie snoeueynwis 6 d When the simultaneous temperature rise parameter cannot be calculated The simultaneous temperature rise parameter cannot be calculated under the following conditions When the maximum gradient is not determined When the saturation time for output is short The Q64TCN turns AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation error status b1 of Un G573 Un G605 Un G637 Un G669 to 1 ON CHO Auto tuning instruction OFF Yn4 to Yn7 CHO Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 OFF D 1 1 n Control status pip control A Auto tuning x PID control Simultaneous temperature rise gradient data Un G731 Un G747 Un G763 Un G779 2 0 n Simul
277. ence CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Control output cycle setting Un G47 Un G79 Un G111 Un G143 Heating control output cycle setting Un G47 Un G79 Un G111 Un G143 Page 112 Section 3 4 2 23 Cooling control output cycle setting Un G722 Un G738 Un G754 Un G770 262 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 4 27 Output Off time Current Error Detection Function Transistor output errors can be detected using this function The current sensor CT for heater disconnection detection is used to check for errors of when transistor output is off A heater current process value and heater disconnection alert current value are compared If the heater current process value is larger than the heater disconnection alert current value an output off time current error occurs Output off time current errors are detected every 500ms When transistor output is off for 500ms or less output off time current errors are not detected Output off time current error b14 of Un G5 to Un G8 stays 0 OFF Ls Page 85 Section 3 4 2 3 The following is the timing output as an alert 500ms x Setting value for Heater disconnection output off time current error detection delay count Un G166 If an output off time current error status lasts longer than the time described above Alarm code 05 is stored in Write data error code UnXGO gt Page 357 Section 8 7 1 Modules where this function can be used Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN 2 Setting metho
278. ence cooling control control If a difference between a temperature process value PV and an actual temperature occurs due to the measurement status the error can be corrected Select a correction method from the following two types Sensor compensation Page 205 1 point sensor compensation standard function The O function Section 4 13 percentage of the full scale of the set input range can be corrected as an error corrected value 2 point compensation function An error is corrected by setting any two points corrected offset value and corrected gain value When the input range is changed the related buffer memory data Auto setting at input Page 216 is changed automatically so that errors outside the setting range O O range change Section 4 14 does not occur Input output with another Data can be input output using another analog module A D 217 analog module function conversion module or D A conversion module system Section 4 15 Setting with considering delay time response scan time delay of Page 218 ON delay output function O O actual transistor output is possible Section 4 16 The Q64TCN monitors the control status constantly If the control System oscillates due to a status soon after the control starts a Page 219 Self tuning function change of the set value SV and property fluctuation of a Section 4 17 controlled object PID constants
279. ening torque range 270 Title settingr ai aana Go atu pos 291 To clear the disconnection detection status 262 To forcibly start up self tuning 228 Transistor output 38 Transistor output monitor ON delay time setting 90 130 Troubleshooting 346 Troubleshooting by symptom 353 Troubleshooting procedure 346 Two position control 103 109 110 163 Pr 364 Type of usable temperature sensors 39 U Unused 51 256 Unused channel 5 290 Upper limit deviation alert 192 Upper lower limit deviation alert 193 V Vibration ST 32442522 EA 144 Watchdog 48 Water 148 252 Weight gwd adie tela a 38 When AUTO mode is shifted to MAN mode 115 When E PROM write failure flag XnA is on 351 When measured value exceeds temperature measurement range 87 When measured value falls below temperature measurement range 87 When the auto tuning does not complete 351 When the auto tuning does start 350 When the self tuning does not start 351 When the temperature proce
280. er disconnection correction preventing disconnection from being detected a Calculation formula for heater disconnection correction Calculate Heater current reference heater current value The largest positive value is the correction value When there is no positive value the value with the smallest gap is the correction value The heater current for each channel is corrected using a correction value When the corrected value is larger than the heater disconnection alert setting value heater disconnection is found Ex When CHO Heater disconnection alert setting Un G58 Un G90 Un G122 Un G154 is 80 and the differences between Heater current and the reference heater current value are the following values CH1 2 CH2 5 CH3 1 CH4 17 The following table lists the result Heater Difference between Difference between Chanel disconnection alert Heater current Correction Heater current and Disconnection setting Un G58 Un G90 and reference heater value reference heater current detected Un G122 Un G154 current value value after correction CH1 2 7 2 5 Not detected CH2 5 0 5 5 Not detected 80 5 CH3 1 6 1 5 Not detected CH4 17 22 17 5 Detected 260 In the table above the correction value is 5 Heater disconnection is detected based on the differences of 7 for CH1 0
281. er of sampling when the temperature process value PV stays within the alert area until the number of sampling exceeds the number of alert delay the alert status will be active For details on the alert function refer to the following 190 Section 4 11 a Setting range The setting range is 0 to 255 times b Default value The default value is set to O times Ajowaw Jeynq ay Jo Sed jueuuuBissy yng t 127 40 Heater disconnection output off time current error detection delay count Un G166 8 Set the limit value for consecutive heater disconnection detections and output off time current error detections so that the errors exceeding the limit value triggers an alert judgment For details on the heater disconnection detection function refer to the following gt Page 259 Section 4 26 For details on the output off time current error detection function refer to the following s Page 263 Section 4 27 a Supported modules Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN b Setting range The setting range is 3 to 255 times c Default value The default value is set to 3 times 41 Temperature rise completion range setting Un G167 Gig Set the vertical range of the temperature rise completion range When the temperature process value PV meets the following conditions the temperature rise is completed Set value SV Temperature rise completion range x Temperature proces
282. eration mode status Xn1 off set Simultaneous temperature rise AT mode selection Un G733 Un G749 Un G765 Un G781 to Auto tuning for simultaneous temperature rise 1 7 gt Page 152 Section 3 4 2 81 2 Turn off and on CHO Auto tuning instruction Yn4 to Yn7 3 Setthe module to the operation mode turn off and on Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 b Operation with the simultaneous temperature rise AT function After the procedure described on 7 gt Page 238 Section 4 19 5 a is executed the Q64TCN operates as following Operation of the Q64TCN CHLI Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 is turned on Then normal auto tuning is performed and the simultaneous temperature rise parameter is calculated The calculated value is stored in the buffer memory when the simultaneous temperature rise parameter is normally 2 calculated In addition AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation completion b0 of Un G573 Un G605 Un G637 Un G669 is turned 1 ON After auto tuning is completed Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 is turned off and the module is shifted to the PID control ON CHO Auto tuning instruction Yn4 to OFF P A ON CHO Auto tuning status sal Xn4 to Xn7 OFF Ix Control status pip control Auto tuning X PID control Simultaneous temperature rise gradient data D Un G731 Un G747 Un G763 UnG779 w
283. erature CJ Cold temperature compensation resistor compensation resistor compensation resistor 13 NC NC Unused NC Unused NC Unused 44 CJ CJ Cold junction temperature CJ Cold junction temperature CJ Cold funcion temperature compensation resistor compensation resistor compensation resistor 15 IN3 3 CH3 CH3 Thermocouple MT3 Monitor 3 thermocouple CH3 CH3 Thermocouple 16 IN4 4 CH4 CH4 Thermocouple MT4 Monitor 4 thermocouple CH4 CH4 Thermocouple 17 IN3 3 CH3 CH3 Thermocouple MT3 Monitor 3 thermocouple CH3 CH3 Thermocouple 18 IN4 4 CH4 CH4 Thermocouple MT4 Monitor 4 thermocouple CH4 CH4 Thermocouple Mix control Mix control Indication normal mode expanded mode number Symbol Name Symbol Name 1 OUT1 L1H CH1 Heating output L1H CH1 Heating output 2 OUT2 1 CH1 Cooling output L1C CH1 Cooling output 3 OUT3 L3 CH3 Output L3 CH3 Output 4 OUT4 L4 CH4 Output L4 Output 5 L COM Output common COM Output common 6 NC NC Unused NC Unused 7 IN1 1 CH1 CH1 Thermocouple CH1 CH1 Thermocouple 8 IN2 2 MT2 Monitor 2 thermocouple CH2 CH2 Thermocouple 9 IN1 1 CH1 CH1 Thermocouple CH1 CH1 Thermocouple 10 IN2 2 MT2 Monitor 2 thermocouple CH2 CH2 Thermocouple 11 NC NC Unused NC Unused 42 CJ CJ Cold junction temperature CJ Cold junction temperature compensation resistor compensation resistor 13 NC NC Unused NC Unused 44 CJ CJ Cold junction temperature CJ Cold junction temperature c
284. es heating proportional band Ph and cooling proportional band Pc Manipulated value MV includes manipulated value for heating MVh and manipulated value for cooling MVc Manipulated value MV for output with another analog module includes manipulated value of heating MVh for output with another analog module and manipulated value of cooling MVc for output with another analog module Transistor output includes heating transistor output and cooling transistor output Upper limit output limiter value includes heating upper limit output limiter value and cooling upper limit output limiter value Control output cycle includes heating control output cycle and cooling control output cycle 4 1 Control Mode Selection Function A control mode can be selected using this function This section explains selectable control modes of the Q64TCN 1 Standard control and heating cooling control There are two types of control modes in the Q64TCN standard control and heating cooling control a Standard control The control method is either one of heating reverse action or cooling forward action When the control method is heating of a heater for example cooling is controlled by simply turning off the heating When the control method is cooling of cold water for example heating is controlled by simply turning off the cooling b Heating cooling control The control method is both heating and cooling To heat up the target subject its hea
285. es ite s able Pants 241 Software 31 Solderless terminal 270 Standard 159 160 Standard 134 Start XY Vus gat le be Sa MES 364 Starting es ead EIE RA 144 Storing the calculated value after auto tuning 174 System 35 Temperature control method 37 Temperature conversion 256 Temperature conversion completion flag Un G786 Lud du S IE uds etit do io b wb 156 Temperature judgment 86 Temperature measurementrange 39 85 Temperature process value PV scaling 188 Ab ce Sox quota es ap AT Saa Ed a tice nd Roe EC 89 128 Temperature rise completion soak time setting mata re A 89 129 Temperature Sensor 16 32 94 Temperature unit 94 Terminal block for CT 272 Terminal block 272 Terminal block mounting screw 270 Terminal Screw solidus rep TERRE AE 270 Temhs s veut eq de dad eA seared Sae quA 16 Thermocouple 95 Thermocouple wiring resistance 353 Three phase heater 289 Three position 255 Tight
286. estrictions apply Details of online Restriction module change Online module change can be performed However only functions supported by the Q64TC can be used Q64TCN gt Q64TC Online module change cannot be performed Q64TC Q64TCN 3 Restrictions when changing modules or applying a sequence program When modules are changed between the Q64TC and Q64TCN and a sequence program is applied the following restrictions apply O Possible x Not possible How to change modules and how to Restriction apply a sequence program Module change Applying a sequence program Q64TC Q64TCN o o Q64TCN Q64TC x x 4 Only functions supported by the Q64TC can be used M amp alHolv90 1790 pue 91790 uee eq AjiqnedwoD p xipueddy gt o o 2 2 3 E o o 2 o A 2 2 gt A zl O 4 a o AR O 4 W o AR O 2 2 a 363 Appendix 2 When Using GX Developer and GX Configurator TC This section describes how to configure the setting using GX Developer and GX Configurator TC 1 Applicable software version For the applicable software versions refer to the following s Page 31 Section 2 1 4 Appendix 2 1 GX Developer operation Configure the setting on the following windows when using GX Developer Window name Application Reference Set the type of a m
287. ether the control has been stopped can be checked by Setting operation mode status Xn1 being off APPENDICES 2 Removing a module 1 Create anew project New Project Project gt New Lema 2 Select QJ72LP25 QJ72BR15 Remotel O in PLC PLC Series QCPU Q mode x PLC Type 3 Open the Transfer Setup window Navigation window gt Connection destination gt Connection destination data name All Connections ay Connection 4 Configure the settings to access the remote I O Transfer Setup Connection1 orem module and click NNET 10 H Board Board COM1 Transmission Speed 115 2kbps CCIEField CCIEField A6 Q6TEL Bus NETQI i rnet Remote Remote Head Module Adapter Computer Type QI72LP25 BR15 3 Connection Channel List m No Specification Other Station Other Station Single Network ixi PLC Direct Coupled Setting Time Out Sec 30 Retry Times 0 PLC Type Remotel O Detail CCIECont CCIEField Ethernet C24 System Image E m CCIECont CC IE Field Ethernet CC Link C24 NET 10 H Accessing Host Station Multiple CPU Setting n 2 J To the next page ZS310M X9 peunBijuoo ueuM xipueddy XH Burs 1 ueuM ejnpoyy p xipueddy 393 From the pre
288. etting Un G45 Un G77 Un G109 141 111 Set value SV monitor Un G25 to Un G28 LX red atac howe E SRL e ER E 91 191 Set value SV setting Un G34 Un G66 Un G98 UniG130 ooo ee i RA REA 102 191 CHLI Setting change rate limiter temperature drop Un G564 Un G596 Un G628 Un G660 117 Setting change rate limiter temperature rise Un G52 UnG84 UnG116 UnG148 117 CHO Setting change rate limiter Un G52 Un G84 Un G116 6148 117 Setting change rate limiter time unit setting Un G735 Un G751 Un G767 UnG783 91 154 Simultaneous temperature rise AT mode selection Un G733 Un G749 Un G765 Un G781 152 Simultaneous temperature rise dead time Un G732 Un G748 Un G764 Un G780 152 Simultaneous temperature rise gradient data Un G731 Un G747 Un G763 Un G779 151 Simultaneous temperature rise group setting Un G730 Un G746 Un G762 Un G778 151 CHO Simultaneous temperature rise status Un G734 Un G750 Un G766 Un G782 153 Stop mode setting Un G33 Un G65 Un G97 UMNG129 eek cd ae ee RAD E 101 CHO Temperature conversion setting Un G695 to UniG697 cic nac ats RES Ra aka E ed 147 CHO Temperature process value PV Un G9 to UMG12 sis Beate meu bate mes Ye ER 87 CHLI Temperature process value PV for inp
289. etwork Parameter Assignment the MNET 10 H Remote Station Network Range Module No 1 Setup common parameters and I O assignments Assignment Method Points start Monitoring Time 200 x 10ms Ec D Start End Dicis 1 Switch Screens BW Setting JON uo ejnpoy au ueuM Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET gt Network Range Assignment gt Switch Screens c XY Setting Network Parameter Assignment the MNET 10 H Remote Station Network Range Module No 1 Setup common parameters and I O assignments Assignment Method Points start Monitoring Time 200 x 10ms Parameter Name start end Total fi Switch Screens XY Setting 333 4 Display the refresh parameter setting window and configure the setting as follows X Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter c Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET gt Refresh Parameters Network Parameter MNET 10H Refresh Parameter Module No 1 Assignment Method Points Start Start End Transient Transmission Error History Status Overwrite C Hold 7 rr e LL E E m OO BENZ E t 1000 10FF 5 Write the set parameter to the CPU module on the master station Then reset the CPU module or turn off and on the power supply of the programmable controller Onl
290. executed Setting opera CHO PID control Stop mode setting tion mode PID continuation forced stop Temperature Un G33 Un G65 instruction flag Un G169 instruction YnC to judgment Un G97 Un G129 Yn1 YnF Stop 0 x Setting mode at Stop 0 Continue OFF ON Monitor 1 power ON 1 Alert 2 Stop 0 Monitor 1 Alert 2 Operation mode Stop 0 Continue Stop 0 x in operation 1 ON Monitor 1 Alert 2 Stop 0 Stop 0 OFF ON Monitor 1 Alert 2 PNE PUE OFF Stop 0 Monitor 1 Alert 2 after operation p 0 itor 1 2 Stop 0 x Continue 1 ON Monitor 1 O Alert 2 td Refer to lt gt Page 48 Section 3 3 2 2 for each timing If Unused channel setting Un G61 Un G93 Un G125 Un G157 is set to Disable 1 temperature judgment is not executed even though the condition above is satisfied 7 Page 124 Section 3 4 2 35 86 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 4 Temperature process value PV Un G9 to Un G12 Gi The detected temperature value where sensor correction is performed is stored in this buffer memory area The value to be stored differs depending on the stored value Decimal point position Un G1 to Un G4 gt Page 84 Section 3 4 2 2 No decimal place 0 stored as it is One decimal place 1 stored after a multiplication by
291. fer to Write error flag Xn2 7 s Page 49 Section 3 3 2 3 3 CHO Auto tuning instruction Yn4 to Yn7 Use this signal to start auto tuning Turning this signal on from off starts auto tuning and turns on Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 After auto tuning is completed Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 turns off Keep this instruction ON during auto tuning and turn it off from on at the completion of the auto tuning If this instruction is turned off from on during auto tuning the auto tuning stops If the auto tuning stops PID constants in the buffer memory do not change Point f proportional band P heating proportional band Ph is set to 0 auto tuning cannot be performed gt Page 103 Section 3 4 2 15 If Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 is turned off from on and the operation status shifts to the setting mode during auto tuning the auto tuning stops After that even if Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 is turned on from off and the operation status shifts back to the operation mode the auto tuning does not resume To resume the auto tuning turn Auto tuning instruction Yn4 to Yn7 off from on and turn it on from off again For details on the auto tuning function refer to the following L gt Page 173 Section 4 6 4 2 backup instruction Yn8 Use this signal to write the buffer memory data to the E PROM Turning this instruction on from off starts the data wr
292. ffer memory area which is within temperature rise completion range 1 Temperature process value PV CHO Temperature rise judgment flag turns to Within temperature Temperature rise rise completion range 1 at this point completion range Set value SV gt Time Temperature rise completion soak time setting Un G168 Set the temperature rise completion range and temperature rise completion soak time in the following buffer memory areas Temperature rise completion range setting Un G167 s Page 128 Section 3 4 2 41 Temperature rise completion soak time setting Un G168 s Page 129 Section 3 4 2 42 Ajowaw Jayng ay Seed jueuuuBissy yng ye 89 90 7 CHO Transistor output flag Un G21 to Un G24 Heating transistor output flag Un G21 to Un G24 7 Cooling transistor output flag Un1G712 to Un G715 2 ON OFF status of transistor output and ON delay output are stored in these flags In the heating cooling control ON OFF status of transistor output ON delay output for heating are stored in Un G21 to Un G24 OFF 0 ON 1 b15 to b9 b8 b7 to b1 bO ojojojojojojo ojojojojojojo iu v Pi X v J Bit data from b15 to Bit data from b7 to b9 are fixed to 0 b1 are fixed to 0 Transistor output flag ON delay output flag a Relationship with ON delay output fl
293. ffer memory values are set as following CHO Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 21 temperature measurement range 200 0 C to 200 0 C CHO Sensor correction value setting Un G45 Un G77 Un G109 Un G141 50 0 500 The difference between the temperature process value PV and the actual temperature is 2 C that can be corrected Full scale X Sensor compensation value setting 100 Temperature process value PV actual temperature 0 _ 400 x 0 500 2 C 100 Temperature process value PV velitw After correction Before correction uonouny uonesuedulo2 Josues gt Input temperature 205 a How to execute 1 point sensor compensation standard when using GX Works2 Set the setting on the Sensor Compensation Function window KO Tool gt Intelligent Function Module Tool gt Temperature Control Module gt Sensor Compensation Function Module Selection Sensor Compensation Function E Module Selection Start XY Address Module Type 0 Q64TCTTN MELSOFT Series GX Works2 Change the operation mode for the following module to the setting mode Are you sure you want to continue 0010 Q64TCTTN Caution Control Function will be stopped during setting mode System that has to keep the temperature will stop and may exposed to unexpected temperature Please check whether the system is not affected by the stop and then execute the sensor compensation
294. for CH2 6 for CH3 and 22 for CH4 When Heater disconnection alert setting is set to 80 disconnection is detected only for CH4 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS Ex When CHO Heater disconnection alert setting Un G58 Un G90 Un G122 Un G154 is 80 and the differences between Heater current and the reference heater current value are the following values CH1 16 CH2 17 CH3 22 CH4 19 The following table lists the result CHO Heater Difference between Difference between AA disconnection alert CHO Heater current Correction CHO Heater current and Disconnection setting Un G58 Un G90 and reference heater value reference heater current detected Un G122 Un G154 current value value after correction CH1 16 0 16 16 Not detected CH2 17 1 17 16 Not detected 80 16 CH3 22 6 22 16 Not detected CH4 19 3 19 16 Not detected In the table above the correction value is 16 Heater disconnection is detected based on the differences of 0 for CH1 1 for CH2 6 for CH3 and 3 for CH4 When Heater disconnection alert setting is set to 80 none of the channels are regarded as disconnected b Restrictions When only one channel is used the heater disconnection correction function does not work To use this function two channels or more need to be used When several channels are used with a heater on for
295. forward action is changed to reverse action CF Page 248 Section 4 20 b When control output is not being performed The Q64TCN detects an error because the temperature rises even when control output is not being performed under the following conditions When input is disconnected When the contact point of an externally operable device was bonded After control output drops to 0 an alert is output if the temperature does not drop by 2 C F or more within the loop disconnection detection judgment time set forward action is changed to reverse action 7 7 Page 248 Section 4 20 3 Setting method Two settings are available for the loop disconnection detection function uonouny uonoejeq uonoeuuoosiq doo a Setting for the unit time to monitor the amount of changes in the temperature process value PV Set the unit time in the following buffer memory area Loop disconnection detection judgment time Un G59 Un G91 Un G123 Un G155 lt s Page 122 Section 3 4 2 33 Point When not using this function set Loop disconnection detection judgment time Un G59 Un G91 Un G123 Un G155 to 0 249 b Setting for the dead band Set the dead band in the following buffer memory area Loop disconnection detection dead band Un G60 Un G92 Un G124 UnG156 5 Page 123 Section 3 4 2 34 Point When the loop disconnection detection dead band is set loop discon
296. from ON to OFF lt gt Page 56 Section 3 3 3 6 Switch the module to the operation mode turn off and on the setting operation mode instruction Yn1 c 54 Section 3 3 3 1 Set 2 point sensor compensation offset latch request Un G548 Un G580 Un G612 Un G644 to No request 0 c Page 142 Section 3 4 2 62 Is the ERR LED off Go back to 1 or 2 Enter a compensation gain value 1 YES End 1 Enter the value using devices such as a thermocouple platinum resistance thermometer and standard DC voltage generator or based on a general resistance value 2 When the latch is completed the temperature process value PV is stored in 2 point sensor compensation offset value measured value Un G544 Un G576 Un G608 Un G640 gt Page 140 Section 3 4 2 58 73 When the latch is completed the temperature process value PV is stored 2 point sensor compensation gain value measured value Un G546 Un G578 Un G610 Un G642 gt 141 Section 3 4 2 60 214 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS Point ifa write data error error code 0007 occurs during 2 point sensor compensation correctly configure the setting for 2 point sensor compensation again The value set for 2 point sensor compensation of when an error occurred is not written in the Q64TCN To use the value set for 2 point sensor compensation even after the power
297. g Execute the auto tuning eunpeooJg L7 Back up the PID constants in E7PROM Back up the PID constants in E7PROM Use _E2PROM s PID constants read instruction to create a sequence program to read the PID constants from E2PROM Y Operation 1 In the standard control the self tuning can be selected if necessary 297 7 2 When Using the Module in a Standard System Configuration This section describes the following program examples Control mode Overview of the program example Reference This is a program example for operations such as the auto tuning self tuning and error code Page 298 read Section 7 2 1 Standard control This is a program example where the peak current suppression function and the simultaneous Page 309 temperature rise function are used for the control Section 7 2 2 Page 323 Heating cooling control This is a program example for the heating cooling control Section 7 2 3 7 2 1 Standard control such as auto tuning self tuning and error code read This section describes the program example for operations such as the auto tuning self tuning and error code read 1 System configuration The following figure shows the system configuration for operations such as the auto tuning self tuning and error code read QCPU 16 empty points Q64TCTTN X Y10 to X Y1F QX42 X20 to X5F QY42P
298. g if the Switch Setting of the PLC parameter contains an out of range value Cancel Item Set value CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Output Setting at CPU Stop Error 0 CLEAR 0 CLEAR 0 CLEAR 0 CLEAR Control Mode Selection 3 Mix Control Normal Mode Auto setting at Input Range Change 0 Disable Setting Change Rate Limiter 0 Temperature Rise Temperature Drop Batch Setting 5 Contents of the initial setting CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING Description Item CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 2 ThermocoupleK 2 ThermocoupleK 2 ThermocoupleK 2 ThermocoupleK Measured Measured Measured Measured Input range Temperature Range 0 to 1300 C Temperature Range 0 to 1300 C Temperature Range 0 to 1300 C Temperature Range 0 to 1300 C Set value SV setting 200 C 0 C 0 C 0 C Unused channel setting 0 Used 0 Used 1 Unused 1 Unused Heating control output cycle 4 30s 0s 30s 30s setting Cooling method setting 0 Air Cooled 0 Air Cooled 0 Air Cooled 0 Air Cooled Cooling control output cycle 30s 0s 30s 30s setting Overlap dead band setting 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 When using the parameter of an intelligent function module a Devices used by a user Device Description X10 Module READY flag Q64TCTTN X10 to X1F X12 Write error flag X22 Error code reset instruction X23 Operation mode setting instruction
299. g Upper limit settin Set the er limit of the set 400 1300 1300 1300 limiter value SV Lower limit setting Set the lower limit of the set M 0 0 C 0 C 0 C limiter value SV 302 CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING ree Set value Item Description CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 1 Starting ST 4 Set the operation of the self PID Constant 0 Do Not Run the 0 Do Not Run the 0 Do Not Run the Self tuning setting tuning ST ST ST Only 1 Upper Limit Alert 1 mode setting Set the alert mode 0 Not Warning 0 Not Warning 0 Not Warning Input Alert Set the temperature where Alert 1 b8 of Un G5 to Alert set value 1 500 C Un G8 turns on depending on the selected alert mode 1 This setting is necessary only when the self tuning function is used c Auto refresh setting Set the device to be automatically refreshed Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Q64TCTTN gt Auto Refresh t 0010 Q64TCTIN Auto_Refresh Display Filter Display All Item Fransfer to CPU H Write data error code 050 Temperature process value PV 051 Manipulated value MV Transistor output Flag Alert definition Manipulated value MV Heating side manipulated value MVh For another analog module output Temperature rise judgment Flag Set value 5 monitor The data of the buffer memory is transmitted to the spec
300. g self tuning and error code read 7 gt Page 305 Section 7 2 1 6 f Program that reads an error code X10 FROM Ut HO D50 K Read a write data error code to D50 MOV D0 kaso 1 Output data read from a write data error code to Y60 to Y6F X22 SET Y12 Y Error reset instruction ON Y12 X12 D50 HO RST Y12 Error reset instruction OFF X10 Xil 4 Read CH1 Temperature process J 1 FROM U1 H9 D51 K value PV to D51 END CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING 7 3 When Using the Module on the Remote I O Net This section describes the program example of when the module is used on a remote I O network Point P For details on the MELSECNET H remote l O network refer to the following manual Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O network 1 System configuration The following figure shows the system configuration example of when the module is used on the remote I O network Remote master station Station No 0 Remote I O station Station No 1 QCPU QJ71LP21 25 X Y00 to X Y1F QX42 X20 to X5F QY42P Y60 to Y9F QJ72LP25 25 16 empty points Q64TCTTN X Y1010 to X Y101F Heater Network No 1 L Object to be controlled Type K thermocouple 0 C to 1300 C Point When the Q64TCTTBWN or the Q64TCRTBWN is used the I O assignment is the same as that of the system configuration
301. g 30s 30s 30s 30s Upper limit setting limiter 400 C 1300 C 1300 C 1300 C Lower limit setting limiter 0 C 0 C 0 C 0 C Self tuning setting 1 Starting ST PID 0 Do Not Run the 0 Do Not Run the 0 Do Not Run the Constant Only ST ST ST Alert 1 mode setting 1 Upper Limit Input Alert 0 Not Warning 0 Not Warning 0 Not Warning Alert set value 1 500 C 0 C 0 C 0 C 1 This setting is necessary only when the self tuning function is used CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING 6 When using the parameter of an intelligent function module a Devices used by a user Device Description X10 Module READY flag Q64TCTTN X10 to X1F X12 Write error flag X22 Error code reset instruction X23 Operation mode setting instruction QX42 X20 to X5F X24 E PROM s PID constants read instruction X30 CH1 Set value SV change instruction Y11 Setting operation mode instruction Y12 Error reset instruction Q64TCTTN Y10 to Y1F Y18 E2PROM backup instruction Y1B Setting change instruction Y60 to Y6F Error code output QY42P Y60 to Y9F D50 Write data error code Devices where data is written by D51 CH1 Temperature process value PV auto refresh M20 to M23 CHLI Read completion flag M24 to M27 CHLI Write completion flag 5 pyepueis e ui ejnpojy eui Buis ueuM pees epoo 10119 pue Burun se yons
302. g channel turns on Read completion flag b0 to b3 of Un G31 turns off when Memory of PID constants read instruction Un G62 Un G94 Un G126 Un G158 is turned off from on When the data reading from E PROM fails Read failure flag b8 to b11 of Un G31 of the corresponding channel turns on and the Q64TCN operates with PID constants before the data reading The LED status remains CHO Read failure flag b8 to b11 of Un G31 turns off when the data reading of the corresponding channel is completed normally When the data reading fails try again by turning Memory of PID constants read instruction Un G62 Un G94 Un G126 Un G158 ON 5 OFF ON 92 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS c ON OFF timing for Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants Un G63 Un G95 Un G127 Un G159 gt Page 126 Section 3 4 2 37 The following figure shows ON OFF timing of this flag for Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants Un G63 Un G95 UnG127 Un G159 For CH1 ON CH1 Auto tuning status Xn4 OFF 7 CH1 Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants Un G63 CH1 Write completion flag OFF b4 of Un G31 ON CH1 Write failure flag OFF a b12 of Un G31 Auto tuning completion Auto tuning completion Write failure Write failure Executed in a sequence program Executed by the Q64TCN
303. g function is enabled the scaled temperature process value PV is stored For details on the temperature process value PV scaling function refer to the following L gt Page 188 Section 4 10 77 CHO Derivative action selection Un G729 Un G745 Un G761 Un G777 CR Select the type of derivative action Dynamic performance can be improved by selecting the suitable derivative action for the fixed value action and the ramp action For details on the derivative action selection function refer to the following Page 186 Section 4 8 a Setting range 0 Measured value derivation 1 Deviation derivation b Enablement of setting contents Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction YnB OFF ON OFF during the setting mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 OFF c Default value All channels are set to Measured value derivation 0 150 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 78 CHO Simultaneous temperature rise group setting Un G730 Un G746 Un G762 Un G778 Set a group to perform the simultaneous temperature rise function for each channel The simultaneous temperature rise function enables channels in the same group to complete the rise of temperature simultaneously When the control mode is the heating cooling control this setting is invalid For details on the simultaneous temperature rise function refer to the following Page 234 Section 4 19 a Setting range of the standard co
304. g manual QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 3 1 The following table lists the performance specifications of the Q64TCN Performance Specifications Specifications Item Q64TCTTN Q64TCRTN Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN Control output Transistor output Number of temperature input points 4 channels module Type of usable temperature sensors the temperature measurement range the resolution and the effect from 5 Page 39 Section 3 1 1 wiring resistance of 10 Ambient temperature Full scale x 0 3 Indication 25 5 Ambient temperature 0 to Full scale x 0 7 55 C Cold junction Temperature process Accuracy temperature value PV 100 C or Within 1 0 C Within 1 0 C w E compensation v accuracy Temperature process mnm an El Within 2 0 C Within 2 0 C 9 ambient value PV 150 to 100 C 3 temperature Temperature process T ss 0 to 55 C Within 3 0 C Within 3 0 C o value PV 200 to 150 C L Sampling cycle 500ms 4 channels constant independently of the number of channels used Control output cycle 1 to 100s 8 Input impedance 1MQ a Input filter 0 to 100s 0 Input filter OFF Sensor correction value setting 50 00 to 50 00 Operation at sensor input disconnection Upscale processing Temperature control method PID ON OFF puls
305. gram that checks the operation status of the remote I O station 343 N x gt x o m Ri 2 AF AF MOVP K2 D3 J CH1 Input range 2 MoVP Ki DA CH1 Alert 1 mode setting Upper input alert KO gt M206 M207 AF K1 gt M208 M209 SET Y101B J Setting change instruction ON KO ZP REMTO M K2 K1 H1 H20 D3 K1 M206 gt 7 K2 Ki H1 D4 Ki M208 1 M1 M2 X1010 10 1 Y101B d 1 H AF Ar RST Y101B 4 Setting change instruction OFF SET M2 J Flag 2 for setting value write ON M2 X1010 X1013 101 F 5 1 H AF AF MOVP 500 D5 J CH1 Alert set value 1 500 C ove K200 D6 J CH1 Set value SV setting 200 C MOVP 400 D7 J CH1 Upper limit setting limiter 400 C MOVP KO D8 J CH1 Lower limit setting limiter 0 C KO gt M210 M211 M K1 gt M212 M213 K2 gt M214 M215 AE K3 M216 M217 d AF RST M1 J Flag 1 for setting value write OFF RST M2 1 Flag 2 for setting value write OFF KO ZP REMTO K3 Ki H1 H26 D5 Ki M210 1 gt 7 Ji K3 Ki H1 H22 D6 Ki M212 K2 9 ZP REMTO U K3 K1 H1 H37 D7 214 K3 2 TZzP REMTO A K3 Ki H1 H38 D
306. gs and the Procedure before Operation 271 5 3 Part Names sedare dec eaten eet Leute et obo s ag i P hone tee leaned 272 5 45 MIFinigucot Mate ae ose ner aue 280 5 411 Wiring precautions easiness abate RS bes D Nb ism tta 280 5 42 External Wiring se ee pA he PRA EROS 281 5 4 3 Heater disconnection detection wiring and setting example for three phase heater 289 5 5 Unused Channel Setting 2 290 CHAPTER 6 VARIOUS SETTINGS 291 6 1 Addition of Mod les i cedere le Ex Ree a Ree ERR RTT RE E Deb 291 62 SWIC Setting du ele od oc onset se od del mado eos c dut one etae Tai Miet 292 06 3 Parameter Setting neci E uM RE deer t rue deese e E XE 293 64 Auto sente Let x ecce Dp d oec p RP Re IR ety RE 296 11 6 5 v Auto TURING i4 sus eek uta ache hace dade d aede ices eae Meet dad 296 6 6 Sensor Correction s osse td pie Redde e ur Rech peer edie a 296 CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING 297 7 14 Programming Procedure 00 00 cece ete es 297 7 2 When Using the Module in a Standard System Configuration 298 7 2 1 Standard control such as auto tuning self tuning and error code read 298 7 2 2 Standard control peak current suppression function simultaneous temperature rise function micas esac ada ned dated dedu ctu OR eut Mer ty yr do cue ae t 309 7 2 3 When pe
307. h Auto tuning instruction Yn4 to Yn7 from off to on v Auto tuninginprogress ses ee Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 turns on Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 turns off and Bv B the calculated values are set to the buffer memory addresses gt Page 174 Section 4 6 3 Auto tuning completion PID constants set Temperature control using PID constants set End 180 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 6 Conditions where auto tuning cannot be executed If one of the following conditions applies auto tuning cannot be executed Conditions to start auto tuning Reference The module is in the setting mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 OFF Page 48 Section 3 3 2 2 In standard control Proportional band P setting Un G35 Un G67 Un G99 Un G131 is set to 0 operating in two position control B 103 Section 3 4 2 15 age Section 3 4 In heating cooling control Heating proportional band Ph setting Un G35 Un G67 Un G99 Un G131 is set to 0 operating in two position control AUTO MAN mode shift Un G50 Un G82 Un G114 Un G146 is set to MAN 1 Page 115 Section 3 4 2 26 Toward the corresponding channel Unused channel setting Un G61 Un G93 Un G125 F Page 124 Section 3 4 2 35 Un G157 is set to Unused 1 PID control forced stop instruction YnC to YnF is turned on Page 56 Section
308. h the icon the following terms are used unless otherwise specified Proportional band P includes heating proportional band Ph and cooling proportional band Pc Manipulated value MV includes manipulated value for heating MVh and manipulated value for cooling MVc Transistor output includes heating transistor output and cooling transistor output Control output cycle includes heating control output cycle and cooling control output cycle 1 Write data error code Un GO CE An error code or alarm code is stored in this buffer memory area For error codes and alarm codes refer to the following Page 354 Section 8 6 Page 357 Section 8 7 2 Decimal point position Un G1 to Un G4 CR According to the setting of Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 the decimal point position applicable in the following buffer memory areas is stored in this buffer memory area Buffer memory address Buffer memory area name Reference CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CHO Temperature process value PV Un G9 Un G10 Un G11 Un G12 Page 87 Section 3 4 2 4 Page 102 Section 3 4 2 CHLI Set value SV setting Un G34 Un G66 Un G98 Un G130 14 CHO Alert set value 1 Un G38 Un G70 Un G102 Un G134 CHO Alert set value 2 Un G39 Un G71 Un G103 Un G135 Page 106 Section 3 4 2 CHO Alert set value 3 Un G40 Un G72 Un G104 Un G136 18 CHO Alert set value 4 Un G41 Un G73 Un G105 Un G137
309. hanne rate limiter Xem 0 CH1 Basic setting upleK Me Range 0 t Set value 5V setting Unused channel setting Control basic parameter setting Proportional band P setting Heating control proportional band setting Ph Cooling proportional band Pc 3 0 95 3 0 240 5 0 5 D Forward Action 1300 C n n 9j Set the temperature conversion system 0 0 95 0 0 Os Os Os O Forward Action oc oc anne l Reverse Action 1300 C oc ane upleK Measure Range D to 13 1 Unused The Q64TC exercises temperature adjustment control automatically by merely setting the PID constants 3 0 0 0 2405 605 305 The Q64TCTT BW allows you to set the temperature measurement ranges which meet the operating temperatures of the above thermocouples 1 Reverse Action 1300 C c nne ae Set value Item Description CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 2 ThermocoupleK 2 ThermocoupleK 2 ThermocoupleK 2 ThermocoupleK Set the temperature sensor Measured Measured Measured Measured Input range used for the Q64TCN and the Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature measurement range Range 0 to Range 0 to Range 0 to Range 0 to 1300 C 1300 C 1300 C 1300 C Set value SV Set the target temperature 200 C 0 C 0 C 0 C setting value of PID control Configure this setting when the channels where the Unused channel temperature control is not 0 Used
310. he Q644TCTTBWN temperature control module with the Q64TCTTBWN disconnection detection function Q64TCRTN The abbreviation for the Q64TCRTN temperature control module The abbreviation for the Q64TCRTBWN temperature control module with the Q64TCRTBWN disconnection detection function Q64TCN A generic term for the Q64TCTTN Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTN and Q64TCRTBWN PID constants A generic term for the proportional band P integral time 1 and derivative time D Temperature sensor A generic term for thermocouples and platinum resistance thermometers Control method Control mode A generic term for two position control P control PI control PD control and PID control A generic term for the standard control heating cooling control normal mode heating cooling control expanded mode mix control normal mode and mix control expanded mode Fixed value action The operating status of when the set value SV is fixed Full scale A full input range For example when the selected input range is 200 0 C to 400 0 C the full scale is 600 0 Ramp action The operating status of when the set value SV is constantly changed Number of loops The number of feedback control systems closed loop control systems that can be configured using one module Under the standard control one loop consists of one input and one output Under the heating cooling control one loop consists of one inpu
311. he alert mode Input alert upper limit input alert lower limit input alert 7 gt Page 190 Section 4 11 1 Deviation alert upper limit deviation alert lower limit deviation alert upper lower limit deviation alert within range alert gt Page 191 Section 4 11 2 1 Input alert With the upper limit input alert when the process value PV is equal to or greater than the alert set value the system is put in an alert status With the lower limit input alert when the process value PV is equal to or less than the alert set value the system is put in an alert status Upper limit input alert Temperature process value PV A Alert set value gt Time Alert status Non alert status Alert status Lower limit input alert Temperature process value PV A Alert set value E CS Alert status gt Time Non alert status Alert status a Setting method Set the alert mode lt gt Page 200 Section 4 11 7 a Upper limit input alert Set the alert mode to Upper limit input alert 1 Lower limit input alert Set the alert mode to Lower limit input alert 2 190 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 2 Deviation alert With the deviation alert when the deviation E between the temperature process value PV and the set value SV meets a particular condition the system is put in an alert statu
312. he manipulated value MV can be moved from 50 to 80 to keep the set value SV stable 1 i 1 i 1 i 1 i 1 AC iesus Set value SV Manual reset range 100 0 to 100 0 every 0 1 Set 1000 to 1000 gt Input range gt CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 2 Heating cooling control The set value SV is set where the manipulated value for heating MVh manipulated value for cooling MVc is 0 Due to this as long as the temperature process value PV and the set value SV is not in equilibrium at 0 of manipulated value for heating MVh manipulated value for cooling MVc an offset remaining deviation generates When an offset generates the heating proportional band Ph cooling proportional band Pc can be manually shifted by the amount of the offset remaining deviation Ex When using the manual reset function in the following conditions Control method P control CHO Manual reset amount setting Un G724 Un G740 Un G756 Un G772 800 80 The Q64TCN shifts the manipulated value for heating MVh by which the temperature is stabilized at the set value SV from 0 to 80 Overlap dead band Heating proportional Cooling proportional band Ph band Pc Percentage to the full scale Percentage to the full scale lt 100 809 ee Ee eee 4 Configure the settings as follows Integral time 1 0 Derivative tim
313. he range 5000 to 5000 50 00 to 50 00 of the full scale of the set input range gt Page 94 Section 3 4 2 12 b Enablement of setting contents When 1 point sensor compensation standard is set in Sensor compensation function selection Un G785 the setting contents is enabled gt Page 156 Section 3 4 2 85 c Default value The default values are set to 0 0 00 in all channels 22 CHO Adjustment sensitivity dead band setting Un G46 Un G78 Un1G110 Un G142 To prevent a chattering in the two position control set the adjustment sensitivity dead band for the set value SV Temperature process value PV A Adjustment Set value SV sensitivity x dead band gt Time ON Transistor output OFF For details on the two position control refer to the following L gt Page 163 Section 4 3 1 a Setting range Set the value within the range 1 to 100 0 1 to 10 0 of the full scale of the set input range gt Page 94 Section 3 4 2 12 Ex When the value of the buffer memory is set as follows CHO Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 UnG 128 38 temperature measurement range 200 0 to 400 0 C CHO Adjustment sensitivity dead band setting Un G46 Un G78 Un G110 Un G142 10 1 0 Full scale x Adjustment sensitivity dead band setting 400 0 C 200 0 C x 0 01 6 0 C The dead band is the set value SV 6 0 C b Default
314. he response waveform of the temperature process value PV of when the temperature control is started or when the set value SV is changed Then PID constants are automatically corrected The following table lists the operations of the module with starting ST Operation with starting ST PID auto correction status b0 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 UnXG671 is turned 0 OFF In addition Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 is turned on 1 2 Temperature is controlled using the PID constants set When a control response is poor PID constants are calculated based on the response waveform and are set in the buffer memory In addition PID auto correction status 60 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 is turned 1 ON When a control response is good PID auto correction status b0 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 remains 0 OFF and PID constants are not changed 4 Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 is turned off Temperature process value PV A Set value SV Control start B Un G639 Un G671 PID constants Before change Only for poor response After change Time Response measurement evaluation i gt Self tuning in execution lt T gt ON CHD Auto tuning status I1 Xn4 to Xn7 OFF ON CHO PID auto correction status i bO of Un G575 Un G607 OFF Only when PID constants were changed p fesse gt Execute
315. he same priority level Higher Lower the lower error addresses are prioritized When a high priority error occurs during a low priority error the error code of the high priority error is written over the error occurrence address Only one error code as dictated by error priority is stored in Write data error code UnYGO For that reason when multiple errors occur the next error code is stored even when the error of the stored error code is corrected Check for errors other than the stored error code in the parameters of other channels 8 7 The following table lists alarm codes Alarm Code List The alarm code is stored in all bits of Write data error code UnYGO b15 to b12 011 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 A iu v A v A v 2 Alarm types Alarm occurrence An error code is CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING H channels 1 to 4H stored to Au when an alarm occurs If the lower 4 bits are 0001 14 to 1001 94 or 1011 Bj to 1111 an error occurs When an error occurs refer to the error code list 354 Section 8 6 Alarm code hexadecimal Cause Operation at alarm occurrence Action 1 The temperature process The ALM LED flashes When Error reset instruction Yn2 is value PV has exceeded the CHO Alert occurrence flag XnC to XnF turned OFF ON OFF after the 010A temperature measurement turns on temperature process value PV has range that was set
316. heating cooling control Standard control 50 to 1050 5 0 to 105 0 Heating cooling control 1050 to 1050 105 0 to 105 0 172 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 4 6 Auto Tuning Function The auto tuning function is designed for the Q64TCN to set the optimum PID constants automatically In auto tuning the PID constants are calculated according to the hunting cycle and amplitude generated by repeated overshoot and undershoot of the manipulated value MV toward the set value SV 1 Auto tuning operation The Q64TCN operates as follows Operation of the Q64TCN 1 Outputs for auto tuning 2 Collects data from the point when the temperature process value PV reaches the set value SV after the first overshoot and undershoot 3 After data collection auto tuning ends when PID constants and loop disconnection detection judgment time are set Temperature process value PV A The first overshoot and undershoot are ignored 3 End of auto tuning Set value SV Temperature process value PV 1 Start of auto tuning b Time 2 Data collection Temperature P Auto tuning in execution control ON Auto tuning instruction Yn4 to Yn7 OFF CHO Auto tuning status Em Xn4 to Xn7 OFF Executed in a sequence program Executed by the Q64TCN The time takes for auto tuning depends on the control subject 173 uonounJ Buiun ony
317. hether the transistor output is executed or CH3 not can be selected by CH3 Unused channel setting Un G125 Unused channel 100 In case of default value applied setting Un G157 CH4 Page 124 Section 3 4 2 35 3 Setting method Set the timing in Peak current suppression control group setting Un G784 For the setting refer to the following s Page 155 Section 3 4 2 84 uonouny uoisseJddng Juano yeed 88 233 4 19 Simultaneous Temperature Rise Function Standard This function allows several loops to reach the set value SV at the same time Simultaneous temperature rise can be performed on up to two groups separately by setting a group for the channels to rise at the same time This function is effective for controlled objects where the temperature rise should complete at the same time Aligning the time for temperature rise completion can perform even temperature control without partial burning or partial heat expansion In addition the channel reaching the set value SV first does not need to be kept warm at the set value SV until the last channel reaches leading to energy saving Ex The simultaneous temperature rise function used and not used in CH1 Temperature process value PV A CH1 Set value SV Useless energy CH2 Set value SV CH3 Set value SV Set value SV I 1 den 1 i i
318. his default value is set after the module is turned off and or after the CPU module is reset and the reset is cancelled 2 This column indicates whether data can be read from or written to the buffer memory area through sequence programs R Reading enabled W Writing enabled 3 This column indicates whether the setting the buffer memory area is automatically changed when the input range is changed Enable disable of automatic change can be set on Switch Setting For details refer to gt Page 216 Section 4 14 4 Whether writing to the EPROM by turning off and on E PROM backup instruction Yn8 is enabled is indicated in this column For details refer to gt Page 264 Section 4 28 5 indicates the Q64TCTTN Q64TCTTBWN RT indicates the Q64TCRTN Q64TCRTBWN 6 Available only when the heating cooling control expanded mode is set on Switch Setting With other models this area is handled as a system area 7 Available only when the mix control expanded mode is set on Switch Setting With other models this area is handled as a system area 8 Available only when the Q64TCTTN Q64TCTTBWN is used With other models this area is handled as a system area 9 Available only in the setting mode To enable the setting contents turn off on and on Setting change instruction YnB when Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 is off during setting mode Note that a write data error error code 79 1811 jueu
319. i gt Arrival point Arrival point Time No simultaneous Simultaneous temperature rise temperature rise No simultaneous temperature rise Simultaneous temperature rise 234 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 1 Operation of the simultaneous temperature rise function The channel with the temperature rise reaching the set value SV last among channels satisfying the condition for start up in the same group is used as a standard when the simultaneous temperature rise function is started up The temperature of other channels rises following the temperature of the standard channel The standard channel is determined based on the simultaneous temperature rise parameter and the deviation E Ex When all channels are selected for Group 1 Temperature process value PV A Matches temperature rise completion time CH1 Set value SV CH2 Set value SV CH3 Set value SV CH4 Set value SV Temperature rise start Arrival point Time ON Setting operation OFF mode instruction Yn1 1 gt 1 Y ow 247 Simultaneous temperature rise status i Un G734 Un G750 0 X 1 0 Un G766 UnG782 i epee gt Executed by the Q64TCN 1 This becomes Simultaneous temperature rise in process 1 when the temperature rise starts however it becomes Simultaneous temperature rise not in process 0 before the temperature rise starts uonouny esr einjeJjeduie snoeue amp jnulls 6 235
320. iation alert with standby second time using the set value SV 24 Upper lower limit deviation alert with standby second time using the set value SV 197 198 If a setting change rate limiter is specified an alert with standby second time is not active even though one of the following alert modes is selected Alert mode setting gt Page 200 Section 4 11 7 a Setting value Alert mode name 12 Upper limit deviation alert with standby second time 13 Lower limit deviation alert with standby second time 14 Upper lower limit deviation alert with standby second time The standby second time is used to prevent alert occurrence when the set value SV is changed If a setting change rate limiter is specified the value Set value SV monitor Un G25 to Un G28 gradually changes following the set value SV when the set value SV is changed Suppose that the standby second time function is activated under such occasion The alert standby would be always active therefore an alert would not be output even when the temperature process value PV is not following the value in Set value SV monitor Un G25 to Un G28 To prevent such cases the standby second time function is deactivated if a setting change rate limiter is used 5 Condition for alert judgment CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS Whether alert occurrence is judged or not depends on the settings of the followings e
321. ich auto tuning is executed and click Module Selection Auto Tuning 0010 Q64TCTTN 2 Click the Auto Tuning Setting tab sv Manipulated value MV Heating side manipulated value Mvh Coolng side manipulated value mvc JD constant 1 Proportional band setting Heating control proportional band setting Ph Cooing side proportional band Pc setting Integral time 1 setting Derivative time D setting Loop disconnection detection judgment time fauto tuning execution Auto tuning start Auto tuning stop Status To the next page 176 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS From the previous page 4 Configure the auto tuning setting Auto Tuning oc oc Loop disconnection detection judgment time 4805 4802 Auto tuning mode selection Standard Mode Standard Mode Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants OFF OFF OFF Auto Tuning Loop disconnection detection judgment time s 4805 Auto turing mode selection zs TZ standard Mode Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants bre OFF MELSOFT Series GX Works2 To the next page uonounJ 9p 177 From the previous page Uu Auto Tuning Set value SV setting AT bias Loop disconnection detection judgment time uto turing mode selection SHINE Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants FT Series GX Works2 A
322. ide manipulated value Mvh 5 0 5 0 Cooling side manipulated value 0 0 0 0 PID constant PID constant current value Proportional band P setting Heating control proportional band setting Ph 3 0 3 0 95 Cooling side proportional band Pc setting 0 0 0 0 Integral time I setting 2405 2405 2405 Derivative time setting 60s 60s 605 Loop disconnection detection judgment time 4805 4805 4805 Auto tuning execution Executes auto tuning Auto tuning start Start J Start Auto tuning stop Ske Stop j 7 Status Not executed Not executed Not executed Not executed Result of automatic backup of PID constant The time between the start and completion of auto tuning depends the object to be controlled After auto tuning starts this window can be closed f Program example where the peak current suppression function or the simultaneous temperature rise function is used Program that changes the setting operation mode M This program is the same as that of when the module is the standard control such as auto tuning self N as tuning and error code read gt 305 Section 7 2 1 6 0 9s S F 5 2 Program that reads the PID constants from E PROM oF Sz imam X24 X10 Y1B YI CH1 E PROM s PID constants read Er 1 f AF AF TOP ul K instruction Requested 2 5
323. ifference Be uM of the B Cold junction temperature compensation resistor 281 BuuiMw tS r S b In the heating cooling control Q64TCTTN q L1H es Internal circuit k EY L1C i Internal circuit 72 L2H Internal circuit 12 EY Jt av L2C 6 Internal circuit 24VDC Heating Cooling Controlled si i Ne 1 Fitter 1 Internal circuit 1 x CH2 CH2 Filter 1 Use the shielded compensation lead wire 2 Use the shielded cable Point Use the compensation lead wire for the cable of thermocouple If the compensation lead wire is not used and when the cold junction temperature compensation resistor is away from the end tip of thermocouple the ambient temperature difference may lead to a faulty temperature process value PV Reference junction Thermocouple extension wire OK Q64TCTT BW N Shielded cable NG mi Fs A Cold junction temperature compensation resistor Terminal block B A Reference junction of the thermocouple B Cold junction temperature compensation resistor Ambient temperature
324. ified device Set value Item Description CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 An error code or alarm code is Write data error code D50 stored The detected temperature value where sensor correction D51 was performed is stored Temperature process value PV uoneunBijuo 5 pyepueis e ejnpoyy ueuM peas epoo 10119 pue se yons pjepuels LZ 303 304 d Writing parameter of an intelligent function module Write the set parameter to the CPU module Then reset the CPU module or turn off and on the power supply of the programmable controller Online gt Write to PLC or Power OFF ON e Performing auto tuning Set the Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants to ON and perform the auto tuning D Tool gt Intelligent Function Module Tool gt Temperature Control Module gt Auto Tuning Q64TCTTN gt Auto Tuning _ PID control operation status Process value PV Set value SV Manipulated value MV Heating side manipulated value Mvh Cooling side manipulated value PID constant current value Proportional band P setting Heating control proportional band setting Ph Cooling side proportional band Pc setting Integral time I setting Derivative time D setting Loop disconnection detection judgment time
325. in Un G36 Un G68 Un G100 Un G132 qt settingto setting to 3600 s 3600 s Section i i 4 is ignored rg 0 3 4 2 16 oM Fix the Fix the Page 105 CHO Derivative The setting i 1 to 1 to 1 time D settin Un G37 Un G69 Un G101 Un G133 setting to 3600 s settingto 3600 s Section i i is i 3 g 0 3 4 2 17 Upper limit ve UnG42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 output limiter 50 to 1050 5 0 to 105 0 Lower limit DA Un G43 Un G75 Un G107 UnG139 output limiter Page 108 Heating The setting Hope upper limit output Un G42 UnG74 UnG106 Un G138 is ignored 3 42 19 limiter zu 0 to 1050 0 0 to 105 0 CHLI Cooling upper limit output Un G721 Un G737 Un G753 Un G769 limiter CHLI Output The setting Page 110 variation limiter Un G44 Un G76 Un G108 UnG140 4 1 to 1000 0 1 s to 100 0 s Section setting i ignored 3 4 2 20 Configure the setting in the range fi 1t Adjustment ioo e Page 111 sensitivity dead Un G46 UnG78 UnG110 UnG142 i630 0 The setting is ignored Section band setting VES 3 4 2 22 toward the full scale of the set input range 168 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS Buffer memory address Setting range Buffer Two memory area P PD PI PID Reference CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 position name control control control control control Control outp
326. indicates the management information of the product The serial number displayed on the product information list of a programming tool indicates the function information of the product The function information of the product is updated when a new function is added 35 JequinN ees pue uois19A uonoun J 94 YOSUD oi MOH EZ 2 4 Precautions for System Configuration 36 The Q64TCN measures temperature based on the temperature of the terminal block Therefore depending on the system configuration temperature distribution of the terminal block can be uneven due to the effect of heat generated from modules and the measured temperature may differ from actual temperature especially when two or more Q64TCN modules are mounted next to each other or the Q64TCN is mounted next to the power supply module or CPU module In this case the difference between measured value and actual temperature can be reduced by the following methods 1 Using the sensor compensation function The measured temperature can be corrected to the actual temperature by this function For details on the sensor compensation function refer to the following s Page 205 Section 4 13 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS This chapter describes the performance specifications of the Q64TCN I O signals transferred to from the CPU module and the specifications of the buffer memory For the general specifications of the Q64TCN refer to the followin
327. ine gt Write to PLC uu or Power OFF ON 7 Program example of when using the parameter of an intelligent function module a Setting on remote I O station side 1 Createa project on GX Works2 Select QCPU Q mode for PLC Series and select QJ72LP25 QJ72BR15 Remotel O for PLC Type XX Project gt New New Project Cancel PLC Series ocru Q mode q3721P25 Q726R15 Remotel O 334 CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING 2 Add the Q64TCTTN to the project on GX Works2 Project window Intelligent Function Module gt Right click gt New Module New Module Module Selection Module Type Temperature Control Module X Module Name Q64TCTTN Mount Position BaseNo X Mounted Slot 1 Acknowledge I O Assignment IV Specify start address 0010 1 Slot Occupy 16 points Title Setting Title Cancel 3 Display the Q64TCTTN Switch Setting window and configure the setting as follows D Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Q64TCTTN gt Switch Setting Switch Setting 0010 Q64TCTIN Output Setting at CPU Stop Error 7 O CLEAR O CLEAR O CLEAR Control Mode Selection 0 Standard Control v Auto setting at Input Range Change Jo Disable x Setting Change Rate Limiter 0 Temperature Rise Temperature Drop Batch Setting v Caution This dialog setting is linked to the Switch Setting of
328. ing 250 C 5 TO Ul H62 K300 K CH3 Set value SV setting 300 C TO Ul H82 K350 K1 CH4 Set value SV setting 350 C RST M Flag 1 for setting value write OFF a r n o RST M2 Flag 2 for setting value write OFF o c 2 o 321 Program that executes the auto tuning and backs up the PID constants in E PROM This program is the same as that of when the peak current suppression function is used 7 gt Page 319 Section 7 2 2 7 b Program that reads the PID constants from E2PROM This program is the same as that of when the parameter of the intelligent function module is used gt Page 317 Section 7 2 2 6 f Program that reads an error code This program is the same as that of when the peak current suppression function is used gt Page 319 Section 7 2 2 7 b 322 CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING 7 2 3 When performing the heating cooling control This section describes the program example to perform the heating cooling control 1 System configuration The following figure shows the system configuration example to perform the heating cooling control QCPU 16 empty points Q64TCTTN X Y10 to X Y1F QX42 X20 to X5F QY42P Y60 to Y9F Cooling equipment 7 Heater gt Object to be controlled Type K thermocouple 0 c to 1300 C Point When the Q64TCTTBWN or the Q64TCRTBWN is used the I O assign
329. ing Heating control proportional band setting Ph 3 0 3 0 Cooling side proportional band Pc setting 3 0 3 0 Integral time I setting 2405 2405 05 Derivative time 0 setting 60s 60s 0s Loop disconnection detection judgment time Os Os Os Auto tuning execution Executes auto tuning Auto tuning start Start Start Start Start Auto tuning stop Ske Stop Stor Status Not executed Not executed Not executed Not executed Result of automatic backup of PID constant The time between the start and completion of auto tuning depends on the object to be controlled After auto tuning starts this window can be closed f Program example Program that changes the setting operation mode This program is the same as that of when the module is in the standard control such as auto tuning self tuning and error code read 7 Page 305 Section 7 2 1 6 f Program that reads the PID constants from E2PROM This program is the same as that of when the module is in the standard control such as auto tuning self tuning and error code read 7 Page 305 Section 7 2 1 6 f Program that reads an error code This program is the same as that of when the peak current suppression function or the simultaneous temperature rise function is used 7 gt Page 317 Section 7 2 2 6 f 328 CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING 7 Program example of when not using the parameter of an intelligent function module a Devices
330. ing change rate limiter Setting Un G52 Un G84 Un G116 Un G148 Page 117 Section 3 4 2 28 change rate limiter temperature rise AT bias Un G53 Un G85 Un G117 Un G149 Page 118 Section 3 4 2 29 Forward reverse action setting Un G54 Un G86 Un G118 Un G150 Page 119 Section 3 4 2 30 Upper limit setting limiter Un G55 Un G87 Un G119 Un G151 Page 120 Section 3 4 2 31 Lower limit setting limiter Un G56 Un G88 Un G120 Un G152 Heater disconnection alert setting Un G58 Un G90 Un G122 Un G154 Page 121 Section 3 4 2 32 CHLI Loop disconnection detection Un G59 Un G91 Un G123 Un G155 Page 122 Section 3 4 2 33 judgment time CHLI Loop disconnection detection dead bad Un G60 Un G92 Un G124 Un G156 Page 123 Section 3 4 2 34 Unused channel setting Un G61 Un G93 Un G125 Un G157 Page 124 Section 3 4 2 35 2 SELLE PROMSEID constantsiread Un G62 Un G94 Un G126 Un G158 Page 125 Section 3 4 2 36 instruction CHO Automatic backup setting after auto 1 Un G63 Un G95 Un G127 Un G159 Page 126 Section 3 4 2 37 tuning of PID constants Alert dead band setting Un G164 Page 127 Section 3 4 2 38 Number of alert delay Un G165 Page 127 Section 3 4 2 39 Heater disconnection output off j Un G166 Page 128 Section 3 4 2 40 time current error detection delay count CHO Temperature rise completion range Un G167 Page 128 Section 3 4 2 41 setting Tempera
331. ing cooling control Mix control Channel control Normal mode Expanded mode Normal mode Expanded mode Heating cooling Heating cooling Heating cooling CH1 Standard control Heating cooling control control control control Heating cooling Heating cooling x CH2 Standard control Heating cooling control control control Heating cooling CH3 Standard control 1 2 Standard control Standard control control Heating cooling CH4 Standard control LU 2 Standard control Standard control control 1 Only temperature measurement using a temperature input terminal can be performed gt Page 256 Section 4 25 2 Heating cooling control is performed using an output module the system lt _ Page 161 Section 4 1 3 160 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 3 Expanded mode In the heating cooling control expanded mode or the mix control expanded mode the number of loops for heating cooling control can be expanded using an output module and others in the system To use an expanded mode construct a system such as the one shown below CPU module Q64TCN 4 channels A Input from the temperature sensor Buffer memory Temperature l CH1 4 process Temperature 34 CH2 value PV process value PV Un G9 Un G10 4 cH3 Un G11 Un G12 4 34 Heating Cooling Heating Cooling Manipulated value CH4 control control control control
332. ings of the followings CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 L gt Page 54 Section 3 3 3 1 e PID continuation flag Un G169 gt Page 129 Section 3 4 2 43 PID control forced stop instruction YnC to YnF lt s Page 56 Section 3 3 3 7 Stop mode setting Un G33 Un G65 UnG97 Un G129 5 Page 101 Section 3 4 2 13 The following table shows the relationship between the status of PID control and each of the settings above O Performed x Not performed Setting operation mode instruction PID continuation CHO PID control forced stop Stop mode setting Un1G33 Un G65 Control status of M flag Un G169 instruction Yn1 g Un G97 Un G129 PID control YnC to YnF Setting mode Stop 0 Continue 1 OFF ON Stop 0 Monitor 1 Alert 2 x power ON Operation mode OFF Stop 0 Monitor 1 Alert 2 O Stop 0 Continue 1 operating ON Stop 0 Monitor 1 Alert 2 x Stop 0 OFF ON Stop 0 Monitor 1 Alert 2 x pong moge OFF Stop 0 Monitor 1 Alert 2 after operation Continue 1 1 ON Stop 0 Monitor 1 Alert 2 x 1 Here this is the generic term for two position control P control PI control PD control and PID control 2 For the timing of each refer to 7 gt Page 48 Section 3 3 2 2 Even though the conditions above are met PID control is not performed when Unused
333. ion 30 Mix control expanded mode 160 161 Mix control normal mode 160 Model name 364 Module error 268 Module fixing screw 270 Module READY flag 0 48 350 Module selection 291 Module s detailed information 359 Monitoring the scaling value 188 Mount 5 291 Multiple CPU system 31 New module 291 Number of accesses to non volatile memory 38 Number of alert 202 Number of alert delay Un G165 127 Number of loops 16 Number of mountable modules 29 Number of parameters 42 Number of temperature input points 37 Offsets od dure V odd usos BAG E edd 25 Offset remaining deviation 170 171 ON delay 218 ON delay output 90 218 Online module change 31 363 372 387 412 Online module change procedure of using GX Works2 To rr 387 Online module change procedure using GX Developer Da dead e dante quud dr 372 Operation at sensor input disconnection 37 Operation method and formula 23 Operation
334. ion judgment time is not stored 174 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 4 Backup of the calculated value on completion of auto tuning By setting the following buffer memory area to Enable 1 at the start of auto tuning the calculated value Ls Page 174 Section 4 6 3 is automatically backed up into EPROM on completion of auto tuning CHO Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants Un G63 Un G95 Un G127 Un G159 gt Page 126 Section 3 4 2 37 To read the calculated value Page 174 Section 4 6 3 from E PROM to the buffer memory set the following buffer memory area to Requested 1 CHO E2PROM s PID constants read instruction Un G62 Un G94 Un G126 Un G158 gt 125 Section 3 4 2 36 Point To use the PID constants stored in the buffer memory also after the power is turned off follow the methods below Use the initial setting of GX Works2 3 Page 293 Section 6 3 Keep the PID constants in E PROM and transfer them when the power is turned on from off or when the CPU module is released from the reset status gt Page 264 Section 4 28 Write the value directly into the buffer memory through a sequence program uonounJ Buiun 175 5 Procedure of auto tuning a GX Works2 Start from Auto Tuning Tool gt Intelligent Function Module Tool gt Temperature Control Module gt Auto Tuning 1 Select the module by wh
335. ion Nu mode selection 9 RAN 5 o 3 42 51 selection alo tint Auto tuning 187 BB CH4 uto tuning moda uto tuning 0 RW mode selection mode selection selection 188 BC4 to System area 191 BFy 192 0 CH1 Alert 1 mode setting 0 R W x 193 C1 CH1 Alert 2 mode setting 0 R W x Fage 135 Section 194 C24 CH1 Alert 3 mode setting 0 R W x 3 4 2 52 195 C3y CH1 Alert 4 mode setting 0 R W x 196 C44 to System area 207 CFy Alert 1 mode Alert 1 mode Alert 1 mode 208 D0 CH2 4 08 0 R W x setting setting setting 9 209 D14 Gus Alert 2 mode Alert 2 mode Alert 2 mode P RNN x setting 9 setting 9 setting 7 9 o Page 135 Section Alert 3 mode Alert 3 mode Alert 3 mode 3 4 2 52 210 D24 CH2 a 4g 0 R W 42 52 setting setting setting Alert 4 mode Alert 4 mode Alert 4 mode 211 03 CH2 a We ps 0 RW x setting setting setting 212 D4y to System area 223 DFy Alert 1 mode Alert 1 mode Alert 1 mode 224 E04 CH3 MEA Mx 0 R W x setting setting setting 225 E1 M Alert 2 mode Alert 2 mode Alert 2 mode 0 H x setting 9 setting 69 setting 9 135 Alert 3 mod Alert 3 mod m Alert 3 mode ert 3 mode ert 3 mode 226 E24 CH3 mE M 0 R W x 3 4 2 52 setting setting setting Alert 4 mode Alert 4 mode Alert 4 mode 227 E3y CH3 NC No Sd 0 R W x setting setting setting 228 4 to
336. ion with other modules or the number of mounted modules power supply capacity may be insufficient Select the power supply capacity according to the module to be used If the power supply capacity is insufficient change the combination of the modules No of modules Applicable base unit Applicable howork modulo Q64TCTTN Q64TCTTBWN Q Main base unit of Extension base unit Q64TCRTN 64TCRTBWN remote I O station of remote I O station QJ72LP25 25 QJ72LP25G owes E QJ72LP25GE O QJ72BR15 O Applicable x N A 1 Limited within the range of I O points for the network module 2 Can be installed to any I O slot of a base unit The Basic model QCPU or C Controller module cannot configure the MELSECNET remote I O net 30 CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 For multiple CPU system The function version of the first released Q64TCN is C and the Q64TCN supports multiple CPU systems When using the Q64TCN in a multiple CPU system refer to the following manual 1 QCPU User s Manual Multiple CPU System a Intelligent function module parameters Write intelligent function module parameters to only the control CPU of the Q64TCN 3 For online module change The function version of the first released Q64TCN is C and the Q64TCN supports online module change For details refer to the following For GX Developer gt 372 Appendix e For GX Works2 Page 387 Append
337. ipulated value Poche The data of the buffer memory is transmitted to the specified device Set value Item Description CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 An error code alarm code is Write data error code W1150 stored Detected temperature value where Sensor Compensation is W1151 performed is stored Temperature process value PV 6 write the set parameter to the remote I O module and reset the remote I O module Online gt Write to PLC Press the switch for a while uo Burst ueuw 337 7 Perform auto tuning Set the Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants to ON and perform the auto tuning Tool gt Intelligent Function Module Tool gt Temperature Control Module gt Auto Tuning gt Q64TCTTN gt Auto Tuning Monitor Status Executes auto tuning Mode Monitoring 1 Settini i ig Mode Change Mode i Target Module 0010 064 Senge Mode Son Deni Error Code HEX Auto Tuning Execution Auto Tuning Setting Item CH1 Process value PV oc Set value SV 200C Manipulated value MV Heating side manipulated value Mvh 5 0 5 0 Cooling side manipulated value 0 0 0 0 PID constant PID constant current value Proportional band P setting Heating control proportional
338. is turned off and on or the CPU module is reset and the reset is cancelled back up the value with the following method Turn off and on E2PROM backup instruction Yn8 Page 55 Section 3 3 3 4 uonouny Josues eir 215 4 14 Auto setting at Input Range Change When the input range is changed using this function automatically changes related buffer memory data to prevent an error outside the setting range Set the function on the Switch Setting window For details on the setting method refer to the following L gt Page 292 Section 6 2 The following is the setting timing Reflects an output signal and buffer After buffer memory values set automatically at the end memory values when the processing of the processing by 500ms are changed turn on and starts by 500ms then off the setting change instruction YnB Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 Before change X After change ON Setting change instruction YnB OFF fs Buffer memory set automaticall ry y User setting Setting change completion flag XnB OFF Sampling period 500ms 500ms 500ms Reflect Reflect Executed in a sequence program Executed by the Q64TCN 1 Buffer memory automatically set Refer to gt Page 99 Section 3 4 2 12 d 216 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 4 15 Input output with Another Analog Module Function Input and
339. ite data error code D50 stored The detected temperature Temperature value where sensor correction D51 process value PV is performed is stored d Writing parameter of an intelligent function module Write the set parameter to the CPU module Then reset the CPU module or turn off and on the power supply of the programmable controller Online gt Write to PLC mni or Power OFF ON Buiooo Buneeu eui Buiuuoued ueuM EZ 5 pyepueis e ejnpoyy ueuM 327 e Performing auto tuning Set the Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants to ON and perform the auto tuning Tool gt Intelligent Function Module Tool gt Temperature Control Module gt Auto Tuning gt Q64TCTTN gt Auto Tuning r Monitor Status Executes auto tuning r Made J Monitoring start Monitor Setting Mode Start Monitor Target Module 0010 Q64TCTTN 9 Change Stop Monitor r Error Code HEX 7 Detail Displa Error Clear Auto Tuning Execution Auto Tuning Setting _ Item CHL CH3 pont operation status Process value PV suc Set value 5V 200C oc Manipulated value MV Heating side manipulated value Mvh 5 0 5 0 Cooling side manipulated value 5 0 5 0 PID constant PID constant current value Proportional band P sett
340. ite failure flag XNA is 351 8 4 8 When CHD Alert occurrence flag XnC to XnF is 352 8 5 Troubleshooting by Symptom 0 cece n 353 8 5 1 When the temperature process value PV is abnormal 353 8 67 Eror Code Gl Mt beetle t uL FG ale tue ld ar Oo RE 354 8 7 Alam Code List leva ete pe dee WS 357 8 8 Check the Q64TCN Status eve sce hsec pene aa Pewee nee lend 359 APPENDICES 361 Appendix 1 Comparison of the Q64TCN with the Q64TCTT Q64TCTTBW Q64TCRT and QO4TGCRTIBW zi aiana E veal ied b em oe e 361 Appendix 1 1 Compatibility between the Q64TC and 64 363 Appendix 2 When Using GX Developer and GX 364 Appendix 2 1 GX Developer operation 364 Appendix 2 2 GX Configurator TC operation 367 Appendix Online Module Change Procedure When Using GX 372 Appendix 3 1 Precautions on online module change 372 Appendix 3 2 Conditions for online module 373 Appendix 3 3 Operations when performing an online module 376 Appendix 3 4 Online module change procedures
341. itial setting parameters the module starts to operate based on the initial setting parameters at this point Check the operation before the control starts 4 Check the operation y Click the _ button on GX Developer to turn off the online mode v On Device test on GX Developer or on Monitor Test on GX O x Configurator test the operation of v the module The module operates based on the test operation Operation check is completed Y 5 Restart the control i Module ready flag Xn0 turns on Restart the online module change using GX Developer Click the gt The module operates based on Execution button to restart the control the initial setting sequence program started when Module READY flag Xn0 is started A 2 376 An access to Intelligent function module device ULINGLI is included The intelligent function module operates according to the previous setting when the user does not perform any operation APPENDICES Appendix 3 4 Online module change procedures This section describes two online module change procedures configuring the initial settings using GX Configurator TC and configuring the initial settings using a sequence program 1 System configuration The following system configuration is used to explain the online module change procedure Q64TCTTN X Y10 to X Y1F 16 empty points 2 Procedure
342. iting to the E7PROM For the buffer memory areas whose data is to be backed up refer to the following L gt Page 57 Section 3 4 1 a When data writing to the E PROM has completed normally E PROM write completion flag Xn8 turns on sjeuBis yndjno jo sjed eee 3INPOW peuejsueJ b When data writing to the EPROM has not completed normally E PROM write failure flag XnA turns on When E PROM write failure flag XnA turns on turn E2PROM write failure flag XnA on from off to write the data to the E2PROM again c Timings when this instruction cannot be received In the following timings this instruction cannot be received 1 While PID constants are written after auto tuning 2 While PID constants are read from the E7PROM 3 While a setting error is occurring 4 While a setting is being changed by Setting change instruction YnB For 1 to 3 above turn this instruction on from off after each condition is resolved For 4 the data writing to the E2PROM automatically starts after the condition is resolved For details on the data writing to the E2PROM refer to gt Page 264 Section 4 28 55 56 5 Default setting registration instruction Yn9 Use this signal to set data in the buffer memory back to the default value Turning this instruction on from off starts the writing of the default value of the Q64TCN to the buffer memory After the data writing is comp
343. ix 4 4 Applicable software packages The following table lists relation between the system including the Q64TCN and software package A programming tool required to use the Q64TCN Item Software version GX Works2 GX Developer GX Configurator TC Q00J Q00 Q01CPU Single CPU system Multiple CPU system Q02 Q02H Q06H Q12H Q25HCPU Single CPU system Multiple CPU system Version 1 62Q or later Version 7 or later Version 8 or later Version 1 10L or later SWOD5C QTCU 40E or earlier versions cannot be used Version 4 or later Version 6 or later SWOD5C QTCU or later Q02PH Q06PHCPU Single CPU system Multiple CPU system Single CPU system Version 8 68W or later Version 1 13P or later SWOD5C QTCU 40E or earlier versions cannot be used Q12PH Q25PHCPU N A Version 7 10L or later Multiple CPU system Version 1 14Q or later Q12PRH Q25PRHCPU Redundant system Version 8 45X or later SWOD5C QTCU 40E or earlier versions cannot be used Single CPU system Q00UJ Q00U Q01UCPU Version 8 76E or later Multiple CPU system Q02U Q03UD Q04UDH Q06UDHCP U Single CPU system Multiple CPU system Q10UDH Q20UDHCPU Single CPU system Multiple CPU system Q13UDH Q26UDHCPU Single CPU system Multiple CPU system QO3UDE Q04UDEH Q06UDEH Q13 Single CPU system UDEH Q26UDEHCPU Multiple CPU system Single CPU system Q
344. kup fails If auto tuning is executed under Enable 1 although PID constants are stored after auto tuning is complete Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 does not turn off For details on the auto tuning function refer to the following Page 173 Section 4 6 93 Jejnq ey S amp a jueuuuBissy yng t 94 12 Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 C Select the set value according to temperature sensor temperature measurement range output temperature unit Celsius C Fahrenheit F digit and resolution 1 0 1 which are used with the Q64TCN 1 In the case of input from other analog modules such as an A D converter module also set these values Ex When the Q64TCTTN or QG4TCTTBWN is used and the following thermocouple is selected Thermocouple type R Temperature measurement range 0 to 1700 C Resolution 1 Set 1 in CHO Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un1G 128 When using the Q64TCTTN or Q64TCTTBWN refer to s Page 95 Section 3 4 2 12 a When using the Q64TCRTN or Q64TCRTBWN refer to gt Page 98 Section 3 4 2 12 b a Setting range of the Q64TCTTN Q64TCTTBWN The following table lists set values of Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 and the corresponding thermocouple types The relationship between temperature unit and setting values is as follows CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Setting of CHO In
345. l Module User s Manual SH 080121 for the Q64TCTT Q64TCTTBW Q64TCRT and Q64TCRTBW buffer memory addresses are written in hexadecimal In this manual the addresses are written in decimal using Intelligent function module device Un GD SH 080121 Temperature process value PV buffer memory address 9 to Cp SH 081000ENG CHLI Temperature process value PV Un G9 to Un G12 Although differently expressed the buffer memory areas have the same address as long as they are used for the same functions COMPLIANCE WITH EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES 1 Method of ensuring compliance To ensure that Mitsubishi programmable controllers maintain EMC and Low Voltage Directives when incorporated into other machinery or equipment certain measures may be necessary Please refer to the manual included with the CPU module or base unit The CE mark on the side of the programmable controller indicates compliance with EMC and Low Voltage Directives 2 Additional measures To ensure that this product maintains EMC and Low Voltage Directives please refer to the manual included with the CPU module or base unit RELEVANT MANUALS 1 CPU module user s manual Manual name manual number model code Description QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection SH 080483ENG 13JR73 QnUCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals lt SH 080807ENG 13JZ27 gt Qn H QnPH QnPRH
346. l action integral action and derivative action The following figure shows a PID action of step responses where the deviation E is a fixed value Deviation E ti Manipulated value MV x Time PID action S 77 Sc 77 Pl action Laction EE ee EE 222 5 P action 227 D action f r Time CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION This chapter describes the system configuration of the Q64TCN 2 1 Applicable Systems This section describes applicable systems 1 Applicable CPU modules and base units and number of mountable modules The following table lists CPU modules and base units applicable to the Q64TCN and the number of mountable Q64TCN Depending on the combination with other modules or the number of mounted modules power supply capacity may be insufficient Select the power supply capacity according to the module to be used If the power supply capacity is insufficient change the combination of the modules Applicable CPU module No of modules Applicable base unit Q64TCTTN Q64TCTTBWN Main base Extension Q64TCRTN Q64TCRTBWN unit base unit Q00JCPU Up to 16 Up to 8 Basic model QO0CPU o QCPU Up to 24 Up to 12 Q01CPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU QO6HCPU Up to 64 Up to 32 Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU QO6PHCPU Process CPU GiZPHOPU Up to 64 Up to 32 O O Q25PHCPU Programmable Q12PRHCPU controller CPU Redundant CPU Up
347. lag XnC to on XnF The ALM LED turns on The applicable bit gt Page 85 Alert occurrence flag XnC to XnF Section 3 4 2 3 of CHD Alert O9LIA Alert 4 has occurred turns on definition Un G5 to Un G8 CHLI Alert 4 b11 of Un G5 to Un G8 turns on 1 represents the number of the channel 14 to 44 where the alarm occurred The error code is always given priority over the alarm code for being stored in Write data error code Un GO For that reason when an alarm occurs during an error the alarm code is not stored in Write data error code Un GO Further when an error occurs during an alarm the error code is written over the alarm code in Write data error code UnXGO Alarm priorities are as follows Priority High 01DAy 020A 030A O4EIA4 OS0A 4 Low 06 070Ap 08 09 When an alarm occurs if its priority is the same as or higher than that of alarms already occurred the new alarm code is written over Write data error code Un GO 358 CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING 8 8 Check the Q64TCN Status The error code and hardware status can be checked by selecting Module s Detailed Information of the Q64TCN in the system monitor of the programming tool 1 Operating the programming tool From Diagnostics System Monitor gt Main Base select Q64TCN Detailed Information 2 Module s Detailed Information a Checking the function ver
348. ld value c Enablement of setting contents Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction YnB OFF ON OFF during the setting mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 OFF d Default value The default values are set to 0 in all channels 140 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 60 2 point sensor compensation gain value measured value Un G546 Un G578 Un G610 Un G642 QB The measured value of temperature corresponding to the gain value of the 2 point sensor compensation is stored in this buffer memory area The value to be stored differs depending on the stored value Decimal point position Un G1 to Un G4 Page 84 Section 3 4 2 2 No decimal place 0 stored as it is One decimal place 1 stored after a multiplication by 10 For details on the 2 point sensor compensation function refer to the following s Page 209 Section 4 13 2 a Enablement of the stored value Turn Setting change instruction YnB OFF ON OFF during the setting mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 OFF to enable stored contents 61 2 point sensor compensation gain value compensation value Un G547 Un G579 Un G611 Un G643 CD Set temperature of gain value of the 2 point sensor compensation For details on the 2 point sensor compensation function refer to the following Ls Page 209 Section 4 13 2 a Setting range The setting range is identical to the temperatu
349. leted Default value write completion flag Xn9 turns on a When Setting operation mode status Xn1 is on in operation mode Turning this instruction on from off does not set data back to the default value Turn on this instruction when Setting operation mode status Xn1 is off in the setting mode 6 Setting change instruction YnB Use this instruction to confirm the set value of the buffer memory the buffer memory areas that can be set only in the setting mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 OFF lt s Page 54 Section 3 3 3 1 a Reflection of set value Even though the set values are written into the buffer memory they cannot be reflected to the Q64TCN s operation immediately To confirm the set values turn this instruction OFF ON OFF after the set values are written into the buffer memory Doing so lets the Q64TCN operate according to the setting in each buffer memory area 7 CHO PID control forced stop instruction YnC to YnF Use this signal to temporarily stop PID control forcibly a Mode when PID control stops The mode depends on the setting of Stop mode setting Un G33 Un G65 Un G97 Un G129 For details on Stop mode setting Un G33 Un G65 Un G97 Un G129 refer to the following gt Page 101 Section 3 4 2 13 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 4 Buffer Memory Assignment This section describes the Q64TCN buffer memory assignment 3 4 1 Q64TCN buffer memory assign
350. lists the Q64TCN functions CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Enable Disable Enable or disable D Heating Item Description Standard g Reference cooling control control The control mode can be selected from the following modes Standard control Control mode selection Heating cooling control normal mode 159 function Heating cooling control expanded mode Section 4 1 Mix control normal mode Mix control expanded mode Whether to clear or hold the transistor output status when a CPU Output setting at CPU 162 stop error occurs or when a CPU module is turned from RUN to O O stop error Section 4 2 STOP can be selected The following control methods can be used with the settings of proportional band P integral time 1 and derivative time D Two position control Page 163 Control method P control O O Section 4 3 PI control PD control PID control The stable status position in the P control or PD control can be Page 170 Manual reset function O O moved manually Section 4 4 The manipulated value MV can be set manually by users without Page 172 Manual control automatic calculation by the PID control Section 4 5 173 Auto tuning function The Q64TCN sets the optimal PID constants automatically O O Section 4 6 In addition to the PID control the response speed responding to Simple two degree of P
351. lue The scaling is processed according to the calculation method described on lt _ gt Page 188 Section 4 10 1 Ifa value outside the temperature measurement range is measured the value set as a upper limit or lower limit is stored into the following buffer memory area Process value PV scaling value Un G728 Un G744 Un G760 Un G776 gt Page 150 Section 3 4 2 76 Values on other analog modules in the system such as an A D converter module can be scaled to a set range For that processing set 200s value in Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 s 94 Section 3 4 2 12 To input a value from other analog modules such as an A D converter module store the input value into the following buffer memory area Temperature process value PV for input with another analog module Un G689 to Un G692 gt 147 Section 3 4 2 69 To scale an input value from other analog modules such as an A D converter module apply the buffer memory area above to the description in this section uonoun J Ad enjeA sseooug eumejeduie OL v 189 4 11 Alert Function Common When the process value PV or deviation E reaches the value set in advance the system is set in an alert status Use this function to activate danger signals of devices or safety devices The alert function is classified into input alerts and deviation alerts depending on the setting of t
352. m area E 563 2334 Page 117 564 2344 CH1 Setting change rate limiter temperature drop 12 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 28 565 2354 to System area 572 23 rae 573 23Dy CH1 B System area System area 0 R x x Section parameter 3 4 2 66 calculation flag Page 144 Self tuni 574 23Ey CH1 E System area System area 0 R W x Section 9 3 4 2 67 70 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Target Setting contents channel 2 Address he Default Read Automatic ETROM eating writ decimal nent Standard 9 e value Write setting ix contr ilabili hexadecimal cooling e 3 availability sensor control 4 CT Page 145 575 23 CH1 Self tuning flag System area System area 0 R x x Section 3 4 2 68 2 point sensor compensation offset value measured Page 140 576 2404 CH2 9 0 R W Section value 3 4 2 58 2 point sensor compensation offset value 140 577 241 CH2 0 R W Section compensation value 3 4 2 59 141 2 point sensor compensation gain value measured i 578 242 CH2 9 0 R W Section value 3 4 2 60 141 2 point sensor compensation gain value 579 243 CH2 9 0 R W Section compensation value 3 4 2 61 Page 142 580 2444 CH2 2 point sensor compensati
353. m the previous page 4 8 Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor 1 Monitoring p Device Device Name T C Set Value Reference Program C Buffer Memory Modul jr y Hi 171010 1020 1030 71040 Device 392 Modify Value Device Label Buffer Memory Device Label 1 Data Bit ON Switch ON OFF Settable Range Execution Result lt lt Execution Result Device Label Data Type Setting Value Y101B Bit OFF Y1019 Bit OFF Y1018 Bit OFF Y1011 Bit OFF Reflect to Input Column Clear 5 Open the Device Buffer Memory Batch window O Online gt Monitor gt Device Buffer Memory Batch In Device Name enter and display the name of the CPU module device to be refreshed in the Q64TCN on the remote I O station Select the following output signals and click Modify Value Turn off the output signals in the CPU module to turn off the following output signals in the Q64TCN Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 E27PROM backup instruction Yn8 Default setting registration instruction Yn9 Setting change instruction YnB This operation stops the operation of the Q64TCN Point If PID continuation flag Un G169 is set to Continue 1 control does not stop even when Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 is turned off Change PID continuation flag Un G169 to Stop 0 and turn off Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 Wh
354. mal mode only temperature measurement can be performed by using unused temperature input terminals When this function is used temperature control and alert judgment are not performed 1 Temperature input terminals that can be used Temperature input terminals that can be used for this function differ depending on the control mode Use the terminals indicating 20 Monitor CH2 Monitor CH3 and MTALI Monitor in the following table Terminal symbol Terminal Q64TCTTN Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTN Q64TCRTBWN No Heating cooling MIX Conical Heating cooling normal mode normal mode normal mode normal mode 1 L1H L1H L1H L1H 2 L1C L1C L1C L1C 3 L2H L3 L2H L3 4 L2C L4 L2C L4 5 COM COM COM COM 6 Unused Unused Unused Unused 7 CH1 CH1 CH1A CH1A 8 CH2 MT2 CH2A MT2A 9 CH1 CH1 CH1B CH1B 10 CH2 MT2 CH2 B MT2B 11 Unused Unused CH1 b CH1 b 12 CJ CJ CH2 b MT2b 13 Unused Unused MT3A CH3 A 14 CJ CJ MT4A CH4A 15 MT3 CH3 MT3B CH3 B 16 MT4 CH4 MT4B CH4 B 17 MT3 CH3 MT3b CH3 b 18 MT4 CH4 MT4b CH4 b q1 For the Q64TCTTBWN and Q64TCRTBWN the terminals in the table above are those on a terminal block for I O 2 Current consumption of when this function is used Current consumption differs depending on whether the temperature conversion function is used or not 3 Buffer memory areas that can be
355. mation If the installation confirmation is executed without removing the module the module does not start up normally and the RUN LED does not turn on Dunes Jeniui y JO Sem 91 soyesnByuoy XD UUM GE xipueddy 1edoje eq Bulsp ueuM eunpeooug ejnpojy uuo xipueddy 379 3 Mounting a new module Online module change r Operation Target module MOsddess 010 Module name Module change execution T Installation confirmation Status Module control restart E Changing module Status Guidance The module can be exchanged Please press the Execute button after installing a new module 4 Checking operation Online module change r Operation Target module 1 0 address Module name 64 Module change execution Installation confirmation r Status Module control restart R 3 Change module installation completion r Status Guidance The controls such as 1 0 FROM TO instruction executions and automatic refresh for the installed module are restarted Please confirm the parameter setting and wiring etc and execute MELSOFT series GX Developer O The online module change mode is stopped D Even if the stop is executed the online module change mode on the PLC side is not cancelled Please execute the online module change and restart the control of the module again the next
356. me I setting Un G36 Un G68 Un G100 Un G132 1 to 3600 1s to 3600s CHO Derivative time D setting Un G37 Un G69 Un G101 Un G133 0 to 3600 0s to 3600s Point If auto tuning ends in fail due to the calculated value of PID constants as described above the system configuration needs to be reconsidered such as selecting proper heater capacity f Change of the upper limit setting limiter or lower limit setting limiter and the set value SV If the set value SV goes out of the setting range due to the change in one of the following buffer memory areas auto tuning ends in fail CHO Upper limit setting limiter Un G55 Un G87 Un G119 Un G151 CHO Lower limit setting limiter Un G56 Un G88 Un G120 Un G152 g Other conditions In addition to the conditions described up until here if any of the following conditions applies auto tuning ends in fail CHO PID control forced stop instruction YnC to YnF has been turned on from off 7 s Page 56 Section 3 3 3 7 Hardware failure has occurred n standard control Proportional band P setting Un G35 Un G67 Un G99 UnG131 has been set to 0 has been set to two position control 7 s Page 103 Section 3 4 2 15 n heating cooling control Heating proportional band Ph setting Un G35 Un G67 UnG99 Un G131 has been set to 0 has been set to two position control 7 gt Page 103 Section 3 4 2 15 8 Operation on completion of
357. ment is the same as that of the system configuration shown above Slot 0 Empty 16 points Slot 1 Intelligent 16 points Slot 2 Input 64 points Slot 3 Output 64 points 2 Program conditions This program is designed to perform the heating cooling control by using the temperature input of CH1 Buiooo Buneeu eui Buiuuoued ueuM EZZ 5 pyepueis e ejnpoyy eui Buis ueuM 323 324 3 Wiring example The following figure shows a wiring example Q64TCTTN RUN Heater operation f input L1H L1C CH1 Input 4 Switch Setting Cooling equipment i operation input i COM 24VDCl Cold junction CJ temperature compensation CJ resistor Configure the output setting at CPU stop error and the control mode selection as follows Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Q64TCTTN gt Switch Setting Switch Setting 0010 Q64TCTIN Output Setting at CPU Stop Error O CLEAR O CLEAR D CLEAR Control Mode Selection Control Normal Mode Auto setting at Input Range Change o bisable Setting Change Rate Limiter o Temperature Rise Temperature Drop Batch Setting Caution This dialog setting is linked to the Switch Setting of the PLC parameter Default value will be shown in the dialo
358. ment list This section lists the Q64TCN buffer memory areas For details on the buffer memory refer to 7 gt Page 84 Section 3 4 2 Point Do not write data in the system area or the write protect area in a sequence program in the buffer memory Doing so may cause malfunction 1 Buffer memory address by control mode This section describes the buffer memory assignments by control mode For details on the control mode refer to gt gt 159 Section 4 1 Point Depending on the control mode some channels cannot be used for control The channels which cannot be used for control are the following For heating cooling control normal mode CH3 CH4 For mix control normal mode CH2 The channels which cannot be used for control can be used only for temperature measurement For details refer to s Page 256 Section 4 25 jueuuuBissy yng t 181 jueuuuBisse oww Jeynq NOLYT9O Lre 57 Enable x Disable Target Setting contents channel 2 Address or va Default Read Automatic EPROM eating i decimal Current Standard 7 Mi m value Write setting write Reference 5 in IX contr i ili hexadecimal Control Moog ia id 2 3 availability sensor control i CT Page 84 0 04 All CHs Write data error code 0 R x x Section 3 4 2 1 1 10 CH1 Decimal point position 2
359. miter For details on the setting change rate limiter time unit setting function refer to the following L gt Page 187 Section 4 9 a Setting range 0 Not use time unit setting 1to 3600 1 to 3600s b Enablement of setting contents Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction YnB OFF ON OFF during the setting mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 OFF c Default value The default values are set to 0 Not use time unit setting in all channels When 0 is set the Q64TCN operation is the same as the case when 60 a variation per minute is set CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 84 Peak current suppression control group setting Un G784 Set the target channels for the peak current suppression function and the gap of the control output cycle between channels b15 to b12 b11 b8 b7 to b4 b3 to bO CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 For details on the peak current suppression function refer to the following L gt Page 229 Section 4 18 a Setting range Not divide 1 Group 1 2 Group 2 Group 4 Group 4 b Enablement of setting contents Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction YnB OFF ON OFF during the setting mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 OFF c Default value The default value is set to Not divide 0p Point The upper limit output limiter value is automatically set since the di
360. mode instruction Yn1 is turned off from on ends auto tuning in fail Note that an exception is when PID continuation flag Un G169 is set to Continue 1 5 129 Section 3 4 2 43 b Setting change of the buffer memory during the execution of auto tuning If a setting in the following buffer memory areas is changed during the execution of auto tuning the processing ends in fail Buffer memory address Buffer memory area name Reference CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Set value SV setting Un G34 Un G66 Un G98 Un G130 Page 102 Section 3 4 2 14 Upper limit output limiter Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 CHLI Lower limit output limiter Un G43 Un G75 Un G107 Un G139 Page 108 Section 3 4 2 19 Cooling upper limit output limiter Un G721 Un G737 Un G753 Un G769 CHO Sensor correction value setting Un G45 Un G77 Un G109 Un G141 Page 111 Section 3 4 2 21 Control output cycle setting Un G47 Un G79 Un G111 Un G143 Page 112 Section 3 4 2 23 Cooling control output cycle setting Un G722 Un G738 Un G754 Un G770 Primary delay digital filter setting Un G48 Un G80 Un G112 Un G144 Page 113 Section 3 4 2 24 AUTO MAN mode shift Un G50 Un G82 Un G114 Un G146 Page 115 Section 3 4 2 26 AT bias Un G53 Un G85 Un G117 Un G149 Page 118 Section 3 4 2 29 Forward reverse action setting Un G54 Un G86 Un G118 Un G150 Page 119 Section 3 4 2
361. n Has a watchdog timer error occurred Reset the CPU module or turn on the power supply again Replace the Q64TCN Has an error occurred in the programmable controller Refer to the user s manual of the used CPU module and take corrective action 8 4 2 When Write error flag Xn2 is on Check Item Action Has a write data error occurred Check the error code list 354 Section 8 6 and take actions described 8 4 3 When Hardware error flag Xn3 is on Check Item Action Is the cold junction temperature compensation resistor disconnected or loose The Q64TCTTN and Q64TCTTBWN only Properly connect the cold junction temperature compensation resistor Others A hardware failure occurred in the Q64TCN Please consult your local Mitsubishi system service service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 8 4 4 When the auto tuning does not start Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 does not turn on Check Item Action Have the auto tuning start conditions been met Refer to the Auto tuning function section 173 Section 4 6 and confirm that all conditions have been met Has auto tuning ended abnormally Check the conditions that signify an abnormal end for auto tuning Page 182 Section 4 6 7 to see whether it has ended abnormally If it has ended abnormally remove the cause Then exe
362. n completion flag Process value PV scaling value Simultaneous temperature rise status Cooling side manipulated value Cooling side transistor output flag Cooling side manipulated value For another analog module output The data of the buffer memory is transmitted to the specified device ELA Set value Item Description CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Ai d de i Write data error code ode a d d D50 stored The detected temperature Temperature value where sensor correction 051 D52 D53 D54 process value PV was performed is stored d Writing parameter of an intelligent function module 316 Write the set parameter to the CPU module Then reset the CPU module or turn off and on the power supply of the programmable controller Online gt Write to PLC mui or Power OFF gt ON CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING e Performing auto tuning Set the Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants to ON and perform the auto tuning Tool gt Intelligent Function Module Tool gt Temperature Control Module gt Auto Tuning gt Q64TCTTN gt Auto Tuning Monitor Status Executes auto tuning Mode Monitoring x Start Monitor Setting Mode Change Mode Target Module 0010 Q64TCTTN EDULE Error Code HEX CH1 PID control operation status Process value PV auc Set value 5V 200 250 Manipulated value MV Heating s
363. n G180 Manipulated value of heating MVh for output with another analog module Un G177 to Un G180 CHO Manipulated value of cooling MVc for output with another analog module Un G708 to Un G7 11 b Enablement of setting contents Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction YnB OFF ON OFF during the setting mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 OFF c Default value The default value is set to 0 to 4000 0 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 49 Cold junction temperature compensation selection Un G182 C2 Select whether to perform the cold junction temperature compensation using a standard terminal block or not to perform the cold junction temperature compensation a Supported modules e Q64TCTTN Q64TCTTBWN b Setting range 0 Use Standard Terminal Block 1 This setting cannot be used 2 Not used the cold junction temperature compensation c Default value The default value is set to Use Standard Terminal Block 0 50 Control switching monitor Un G183 8 The setting contents of the control mode selection set on Switch Setting are stored in this buffer memory area The control mode in operation can be confirmed The stored values and the contents are shown as below 0 Standard control 1 Heating cooling control normal mode 2 Heating cooling control expanded mode 3 Mix control normal mode 4 Mix control expanded mode Select the control mode on Swi
364. n G646 is set to No request 0 0 is stored in this buffer memory area which is No request 0 142 Section 3 4 2 64 For details on the 2 point sensor compensation function refer to the following L gt Page 209 Section 4 13 2 66 CHO AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation flag Un G573 Un G605 Un G637 Un G669 The status when simultaneous temperature rise AT auto tuning calculates simultaneous temperature rise parameter is stored in this buffer memory area 0 OFF 1 ON b15 to b3 b2 b1 bO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 01 00 v Fi Bit data from b15 to b3 are fixed to 0 Bit Flag name Description bo AT simultaneous temperature rise This flag is set to 1 ON when the simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation completion parameter is calculated by simultaneous temperature rise AT AT simult t This flag is set to 1 ON when the simultaneous temperature rise simultaneous temperature rise b1 parameter calculation error status parameter cannot be calculated by simultaneous temperature rise AT b2 Simultaneous temperature rise AT This flag is set to 1 ON when the simultaneous temperature rise disable status AT cannot be performed b3 to b15 fixed to 0 Unused Ajowaw Jayng ay Seed jueuuuBissy yng ye 4 Indicates the values of Simultaneous temperature rise gradient data Un G731 Un G747 Un G76
365. n off and on E PROM backup instruction Yn8 and write the buffer memory data to E PROM Before restarting the control check the following items of the Q64TCN If an error occurs refer to TROUBLESHOOTING gt 346 CHAPTER 8 and take corrective action If the RUN LED is on If the ERR LED is off If Write error flag Xn2 is off If Hardware error flag Xn3 is off Because the new module is in the default status configure the initial settings using a sequence program after restarting the control Before configuring the initial settings check that the details on the initial setting program are correct In a standard system configuration When Module READY flag Xn0 in the Q64TCN turns on use a sequence program where the initial settings are configured When the control is restarted Module READY flag Xn0 turns on and the initial settings are configured In a sequence program where the initial settings are configured only for a single scan after RUN the initial settings are not configured When using the remote I O network Install a user device initial setting request signal where the initial settings are configured at any timing in the sequence program After the control is restarted turn on the initial setting request signal and configure the initial settings In a sequence program where the initial settings are configured only for a single scan after restarting the remote I O network da
366. ncel X Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Q64TCTTN gt Switch Setting Item Set value CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Output Setting at CPU Stop Error 0 CLEAR 0 CLEAR 0 CLEAR 0 CLEAR Control Mode Selection 0 Standard Control Auto setting at Input Range Change 0 Disable Setting Change Rate Limiter 0 Temperature Rise Temperature Drop Batch Setting CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING 5 Contents of the initial setting Description Item CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 2 ThermocoupleK 2 ThermocoupleK 2 ThermocoupleK 2 ThermocoupleK Measured Measured Measured Measured Input range Temperature Range Temperature Range Temperature Range Temperature Range 0 to 1300 C 0 to 1300 C 0 to 1300 C 0 to 1300 C Set value SV setting 200 C 250 C 300 C 350 C Unused channel setting 0 Used 0 Used 0 Used 0 Used Control output cycle setting 20s 20s 20s 20s Simultaneous temperature 1 Group 1 1 Group 1 2 Group 2 2 Group 2 rise group setting Peak current suppression 2 1 Group 1 2 Group 2 3 Group 3 4 Group 4 control group setting 1 AT for 1 AT for 1 AT for 1 AT for Simultaneous temperature lection Simultaneous Simultaneous Simultaneous Simultaneous uc tL Temperature Rise Temperature Rise Temperature Rise Temperature Rise 1 Configure this setting only when the simultaneous temperature rise function
367. ndant system configuration refer to the following QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System 2 MELSECNET H remote I O module A module with function version D or later is required 3 GX Developer GX Developer version 7 10L or later is required To perform an online change on a remote I O station GX Developer version 8 17T or later is required 4 Base unit When a slim type main base unit Q301SB is used an online module change cannot be performed When an extension base unit Q5L1B that does not require the power supply module is used an online module change cannot be performed for modules on all the base units connected 5 Buffer memory areas that can be saved and restored The following table lists the buffer memory areas that can be saved and restored Buffer memory address suuo 104 suonipuo ze xipueddy 1edoje eq ueuM eunpeooug ejnpojy eujuo xipueddy Buffer memory area name Reference CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 Page 94 Section 3 4 2 12 Stop mode setting Un G33 Un G65 Un G97 Un G129 Page 101 Section 3 4 2 13 Set value SV setting Un G34 Un G66 Un G98 Un G130 Page 102 Section 3 4 2 14 CHO Proportional band P setting Un G35 Un G67 Un G99 Un G131 Page 103 Section 3 4 2 15 CHLI Integral time I setting Un G36 Un G68 Un G100 Un G132 Page 105 Section 3 4 2 1
368. nditions where auto tuning cannot be executed 181 Conditions where auto tuning ends in fail 182 Conditions where self tuning does not complete due to Gl TOIS a Nemes ada aestate ED Senis dran aus 227 Conditions where self tuning is not executed 225 Connection terminal 38 Control 16 163 Control mode 16 159 Control mode selection 292 Control 1 37 Control output cycle 37 41 Control output setting at CPU stop error 162 Control switching monitor Un G183 133 Cooling method setting 252 Cooling method setting Un G719 148 CT monitor method switching Un G176 130 CT 139 172 536 410 Bega eae 32 CTL 12 836 8 ote eh ee eee Sane a ER 32 12 55610 eat Eee 32 CTLz26 P e neu edie Mat bebe b WE 32 CTLE 6 P 2H s x Ls ee ee 32 CTO CT input channel assignment setting Un G264 to Um G271 ee Poet RE S eee 136 137 CTO CT ratio setting Un G288 to Un G295 138 139 CTO CT selection Un G272 to Un G279 138 CTO Heater current process value Un G256 to 263 5 2 iue E EPA a Rade eee 136 CTO Reference heater current value Un G280 to UNG 287 za ee dome 136 139 Current sensor fo
369. nection does not occur even if the temperature does not change by 2 C F or more with the set value SV 100 or 0 of control output 250 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 4 22 Proportional Band Setting Function Proportional band P values can be set for heating and cooling separately using this function Different gradients can be set by using different proportional band P values in a heating and cooling area Heating proportional Cooling proportional Manipulated value x band Pc for heating MVh 4 band Ph Y 100 A Manipulated value for heating MVh 100 Only cooling Heating proportional band Pc C an be narrowed Manipulated value 096 for heating MVh 0 Manipulated value Set value SV for cooling MVc 0 Cooling Manipulated value for cooling MVc 100 100 Manipulated value for cooling MVc 1 Setting method a For heating Set the value in Heating proportional band Ph setting Un G35 Un G67 Un G99 Un G131 gt 103 Section 3 4 2 15 b For cooling Set the value in Cooling proportional band Pc setting Un G720 Un G736 Un G752 Un G768 lt Page 103 Section 3 4 2 15 uonouny Bues pueg jeuomiodoud ZZY 251 4 23 Cooling Method Setting Function An auto tuning calculation formula is automatically selected according to the selected cooling method during auto tuning and the operation is started
370. ng 0 setting 0 setting 3 4 2 17 Alert set value Alert set 134 86 CH4 Alert set value 1 g j 0 R W Alert set value Alert set 135 87 CH4 Alert set value 2 2 2 0 R W 106 Section Alert set value Alert set 136 88 CHA Alert set value 3 0 R W 3 4 2 18 Alert set value Alert set 137 89 CHA Alert set value 4 teen eee 0 R W T iii Heating upper 138 8Ay CH4 pper amik limit output pper imu 1000 R W x 108 output limiter Mv output limiter d limiter Section m pu 3 4 2 19 139 8By CH4 Lowerlimit Systemiareg 0 R W x o output limiter output limiter Lar ene Output Output Page 110 hz 140 8C CH4 variation variation limiter variation limiter 0 R W x Section limiter setting RE setting setting 3 4 2 20 ci z Page 111 2 141 8 CH4 Sensor correction value setting 0 R W x Section 3 3 4 2 21 9 gt 35 Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment m gu Page 111 35 142 8E CH4 sensitivity deag Cs Sensi 5 R W x Section 23 H y dead band dead band 5 band setting M i 3 4 2 22 v setting setting E ES Control gucu Heating control Page 112 3 143 8Fy CH4 ro n Pur output cycle ro hs PH 30 RIW x Section 8 cycle settin 5 cycle settin 9 setting 9 3 3 4 2 23 Page 113 144 901 CH4 Primary delay digital filter setting 0 R W x
371. ng GX Works2 1 Stopping operation 1 Create anew project New Project Project Type X Project gt New Simple Project m Use Label 2 Selectthe CPU module on the remote master station PLC Series QCPU Q mode x in PLC Type and click Lox PLC Type Q10UDH Language Ladder E 3 Open the Transfer Setup window KO Navigation window gt Connection destination gt Connection destination data name All Connections a Connection1 4 Configure the settings to access the CPU module Transfer Setup Connection1 on the remote master station and click Q Series Bus NET IOH ard ord Transmission Speed 115 2Kbps OK CCIE Field CCIE Field CC IE Field AGIQSTEL Bus Master Local Communication Ethernet Head Module Adapter Computer Q372LP25 BR15 EX Connection Channel List a a Time Out Sec 30 Retry Times 0 fae CCIEField Ethernet NET 10 H System Image No Specification Network No T Station No 0 dca st CCIECon CCIEField Ethernet CC Link C24 NET 10 H Accessing Other Station Multiple CPU Setting g g Target PLC Not Specified D EROS ZS310M X9 peunBijuoo ueuM gp xipueddy XH Burs 1 ueuM ejnpoyy p xipueddy To the next page 391 Fro
372. ng on this instruction at the next start up can omits the auto tuning This instruction is enabled in the setting mode or operation mode gt Page 54 Section 3 3 3 1 However it is disabled when Auto tuning instruction Yn4 to is ON Page 173 Section 4 6 125 37 CHO Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants Un G63 Un G95 Un G127 Un G159 CED The set value to be stored in the buffer memory is automatically backed up to the E2PROM by using this function By reading the set value that is backed up when the power is turned on from off or the CPU module is released from the reset status another auto tuning can be omitted For details on the auto tuning function refer to the following Page 173 Section 4 6 a Buffer memory areas whose set value is backed up to the E PROM The following table lists the buffer memory areas whose setting is backed up Buffer memory address judgment time Buffer memory area name Reference CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Proportional band P setting Un G35 Un G67 Un G99 Un G131 Heating proportional band Ph Un G35 Un G67 Un G99 Un G131 setting Page 103 Section 3 4 2 15 Cooling proportional band Pc Un G720 Un G736 Un G752 Un G768 setting Integral time 1 setting Un G36 Un G68 Un G100 Un G132 Page 105 Section 3 4 2 16 CHO Derivative time D setting Un G37 Un G69 Un G101 Un G133 Page 105 S
373. nge 7 RT RIW x Section 5 3 4 2 12 Page 101 33 214 CH1 Stop mode setting 1 R W x Section 3 4 2 13 Page 102 34 224 CH1 Set value SV setting 0 R W Section 3 4 2 14 Proportional d dus 35 23 CH1 30 R W Secti 234 band P setting band Ph band Ph o d 3 4 2 15 setting setting Page 105 36 24 CH1 Integral time 1 setting 240 R W x Section 3 4 2 16 Page 105 37 25y CH1 Derivative time D setting 60 R W x Section 3 4 2 17 38 26 CH1 Alert set value 1 0 R W 39 27 CH1 Alert set value 2 0 R W 106 Section 40 28 CH1 Alert set value 3 0 R W 3 4 2 18 41 29 CH1 Alert set value 4 0 R W 99 JSI yu wu isse oww Jeynq NOLPIO Lre jueuuuBissy yng ye Target Setting contents channel 2 Address Pe rad Default Read Automatic EPROM eating A wri decimal current Standard g Mix contro Value Write setting te Reference ix contr ilabili hexadecimal Pentel cooling contro e a 5 availability sensor control 4 CT Mes Heating upper Heating upper Upper limit o 0 42 2 CH1 limit output 2 imit outpu limit output 1000 R W x 108 limiter limiter Section L limit 3 4 2 19 43 2By CH1 wae uL System area System area 0 R W x output limiter Page 110 44 2Cy CH1 Outpu
374. nipulated value MV in a stable condition from the reference value The reference value is 50 for standard control and 0 for heating cooling control Point This function can be active only in P control and PD control This function is inactive when integral time 1 is other than 0 Manual reset amount setting Un G724 Un G740 Un G756 Un G772 is ignored even if it is set Note that a write data error error code 00041 occurs if it is outside the setting range 1 Standard control The set value SV is set where the manipulated value MV is 50 Due to this as long as the temperature process value PV and the set value SV is not in equilibrium at 5096 of manipulated value an offset remaining deviation generates When an offset generates the proportional band P can be manually shifted by the amount of the offset remaining deviation When using the manual reset function in the following conditions Control method P control CHO Manual reset amount setting Un G724 UnG740 Un G756 Un G772 300 30 The Q64TCN shifts the manipulated value MV by which the temperature is stabilized at the set value SV from 5096 to 8096 Manipulated value MV Percentage to the full scale 4 Proportional band P Manual reset 4 Configure the settings as follows Integral time 1 0 Derivative time D 0 Cowie usd cem cee See Ed T
375. nipulated value MV proportional to the rate of change to eliminate the deviation E when it occurs A derivative action can prevent the control target from changing significantly due to disturbance In an integral action the time from a deviation occurrence until when the manipulated value MV of the derivative action becomes equals to that of the proportional action is called derivative time and is indicated as TD The following table describes the difference of actions depending on the value of TD derivative time Condition Derivative action is a small value The derivative effect gets small The derivative effect gets large is a large value Though the temperature process value PV tends to fluctuate around the set value in short cycles The following figure shows a derivative action of step responses where the deviation E is a fixed value Deviation E E f Time Manipulated value MV Mr oe Manipulated value of the Proportional action A derivative action is used as a PD action combination with a proportional action or PID action in combination with Time uonoe q eaAneAueq G E uoneJedo aid eurinoqy e a proportional and integral actions A derivative action cannot be used by itself 27 1 3 6 28 PID action A PID action performs control using the manipulated value MV calculated by merging the proportiona
376. nitor 2 resistance CH2b CH2 Resistance thermometer b thermometer b thermometer b 43 N3 A3 CH3A CH3 Resistance CH3A CH3 Resistance CH3A CH3 Resistance thermometer A thermometer A thermometer A 44 N4 A4 CHA A CH4 Resistance CHA A CH4 Resistance CHA A CH4 Resistance thermometer A thermometer A thermometer A 45 N3 B3 CH3B CH3 Resistance CH3B CH3 Resistance CH3B CH3 Resistance thermometer B thermometer B thermometer B CH4 Resistance CH4 Resistance CH4 Resistance 1 ee CHEB thermometer B CHIB thermometer B CHIB thermometer B 17 IN3 b3 CH3 b CH3 Resistance CH3 b CH3 Resistance CH3 b CH3 Resistance thermometer b thermometer b thermometer b 48 INA b4 CHA b CH4 Resistance CHA b CH4 Resistance CHA b CH4 Resistance thermometer b thermometer b thermometer b 279 SOWEN Hed E G 5 4 Wiring This section describes the wiring precautions and module connection examples 5 4 1 Wiring precautions External wiring that is less susceptible to noise is required as a condition of enabling a highly reliable system and making full use of the capabilities of the Q64TCN The following figure shows the wiring precautions Use separate cables with the AC control circuit and the Q64TCN s external input signals to avoid the influence of AC side surges and induction Do not bunch the cables with the main circuit cable high voltage cable or load cables from other than the programmable controller or install them close to each other
377. nitoring output signals that could cause a serious accident Do not write any data to the system area and write protect area R of the buffer memory in the intelligent function module Also do not use any use prohibited signal as an input or output signal from the intelligent function module to the programmable controller CPU Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system NCAUTION Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables Keep a distance of 100mm or more between them Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise Installation Precautions NCAUTION Use the programmable controller an environment that meets the general specifications in the user s manual for the CPU module used Failure to do so may result in electric shock fire malfunction or damage to or deterioration of the product To mount the module while pressing the module mounting lever located in the lower part of the module fully insert the module fixing projection s into the hole s in the base unit and press the module until it snaps into place Incorrect mounting may cause malfunction failure or drop of the module When using the programmable controller in an environment of frequent vibrations fix the module with a screw Tighten the screw within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause drop of the screw short circuit o
378. nsation standard when using the program 208 How to execute 2 point sensor compensation when using GX Works2 210 How to execute 2 point sensor compensation when using the 214 411 VO assignment 364 VO occupied points 38 Indication accuracy 37 Ae atk ad 190 Input filler i 2 ea bed Se iones DEDI re RETE 37 Input impedance 37 Input range a ott oes 94 Input 5 0 5 46 Inputsighals ze ways 48 Input output with another analog module 217 Insulation 0 38 Insulation resistance 38 Integral action l action 26 Intelligent function module switch setting 365 Internal current consumption 38 Latest address of error history Un G1279 158 FING AM 6 24 2 2s eU eye Abd pude 148 252 Loop disconnection detection 249 Lower limit deviation alert 193 MAN mode shift completion flag Un G30 91 116 Manipulated value MV and control output cycle 88 Manual control 109 110 172 Manual reset function 163 170 MELSECNET H remote I O module 373 388 MELSECNET H remote I O stat
379. nstants Available control mode The standard control and heating cooling control The standard control only 219 uonounj DuiunJles Lp 2 Starting ST and vibration ST Two types of self tuning are available depending on the state of the control system starting ST self tuning and vibration ST Starting ST Self tuning is performed immediately after the control is started or when the set value SV is changed Vibration ST Self tuning is performed when the control system in a stable state has become oscillatory due to reasons such as disturbance Temperature process value PV A Starting ST Vibration ST i a How to set starting ST Select one of the following four setting values for Self tuning setting Un G574 Un G606 Un G638 Un G670 gt 144 Section 3 4 2 67 Starting ST PID constants Only 1 Starting ST Simultaneous Temperature Rise Parameter Only 2 Starting ST PID Constants and Simultaneous Temperature Rise Parameter 3 Starting ST and plus Vibration PID Constants Only 4 b How to set vibration ST Set the following in Self tuning setting Un G574 Un G606 Un G638 Un G670 gt Page 144 Section 3 4 2 67 Starting ST plus Vibration PID Constants Only 4 220 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 3 Procedure for the self tuning control The following is the flow chart for the control Self tuning start
380. nt Incorrect Module Changing Online Module Change restart the control Module READY flag Xn0 turns Operation p Target Module Module Change Address 0010 Execution Module Name Q64TCTTN on Installation Confirmation Status Module Control s Module Installation Completion Restart Status Guidance he controls such as I O FROM TO instruction executions and tomatic refresh For the installed module are restarted lease confirm the parameter setting wiring etc and press completed utton The online module change is complete MELSOFT Application e 02 Online module change completed weJBoid eouenbes e Buisn sBunies jegu ay ueuM 9p xipueddy XH ejnpoyy p xipueddy 405 Appendix 5 1 Q64TCTTN External Dimensions 90 22 2 Q64TCTTBWN 98 90 22 406 Q64TCTTN RUN ERR ALM z e o oeo ojo 2 eo m Dx s s s e x s 274 Unit mm E
381. nt sensor compensation gain latch request Un G550 Un G582 Un G614 Un G646 to Latch request 1 c Page 142 Section 3 4 2 64 Set Sensor compensation function selection Un G785 to 2 point sensor compensation function 1H lt gt Page 156 Section 3 4 2 85 Check that 2 point sensor compensation gain latch completion Un G551 Un G583 Un G615 Un G647 is Latch completed 1 3 K Page 143 Section 3 4 2 65 Enter a compensation offset value Set 2 point sensor compensation gain latch request Un G550 Un G582 Un G614 Un G646 to No request 0 lt gt Page 142 Section 3 4 2 64 Set the temperature process value PV equivalent to be input for 2 point sensor compensation offset value compensation value Un G545 Un G577 Un G609 Un G641 gt Page 140 Section 3 4 2 59 Switch the setting change instruction YnB from OFF to ON Set 2 point sensor compensation offset lt gt Page 56 Section 3 3 3 6 latch request Un G548 Un G580 Un G612 Un G644 to Latch request 1 c Page 142 Section 3 4 2 62 Check that the setting change completion flag XnB is ON lt 52 Section 3 3 2 9 Check that 2 point sensor compensation offset latch completion Un G549 Un G581 Un G613 Un G645 is Latch completed 1 2 c Page 142 Section 3 4 2 63 Switch the setting change instruction YnB
382. nting Mount the Q64TCN in a slot Wiring Wire external devices to the Q64TCN lt gt Page 280 Section 5 4 Switch setting Configure settings using GX Works2 lt gt Page 292 Section 6 2 Configure the initial setting NO and the auto refresh setting using GX Works2 Configure the initial setting Initial setting Configure the initial setting using GX Works2 L gt Page 293 Section 6 3 Configure the initial setting Initial setting Create a sequence program for writing initial values using the FROM TO instructions gt Page 297 CHAPTER 7 Configure the auto refresh setting Auto refresh setting Configure the auto refresh setting using GX Works2 2 Page 296 Section 6 4 Execution of auto tuning Configure auto tuning to set PID constants lt gt Page 176 Section 4 6 5 a Programming Create and check a program without using the FROM TO instructions lt gt Page 297 CHAPTER 7 Warmup operation when the Q64TCTTN or the Q64TCTTBWIN is used Configure warmup operation about 15 minutes before starting operation Operation v Execution of auto tuning Configure auto tuning to set PID constants Page 180 Section 4 6 5 b Programming Create and check a program without using the FROM TO instructions c Page 2
383. ntrol 0 No simultaneous temperature rise 1 Group 1 selection 2 Group 2 selection b Setting range of the mix control 0 No simultaneous temperature rise 1 Simultaneous temperature rise The setting range in the mix control does not include group selection because the mix control has only two channels for the standard control c Enablement of setting contents Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction YnB OFF ON gt OFF during the setting mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 OFF d Default value The default values are set to No simultaneous temperature rise 0 in all channels 79 CHO Simultaneous temperature rise gradient data Un G731 Un G747 Un G763 Un G779 Set Simultaneous temperature rise gradient data temperature rising per minute For details on the simultaneous temperature rise function refer to the following gt Page 234 Section 4 19 a Setting range The setting range is 0 to the upper limit of the temperature measurement range of the set input range b Setting unit The value to be set differs depending on the stored value Decimal point position Un G1 to Un G4 lt Page 84 Section 3 4 2 2 No decimal place 0 Set a value in 1 C F or digit unit One decimal place 1 Set a value in 0 1 C F unit tenfold value c Default value The default values are set to 0 in all channels Point This set
384. ntrol function and the gap of the 1 Group 1 2 Group 2 3 Group 3 4 Group 4 group setting control output cycle between channels Simultaneous 1 AT for 1 AT for 1 AT for 1 AT for Set the mode of the auto 3 temperature rise AT iud Simultaneous Simultaneous Simultaneous Simultaneous uning mode selection 1 9 Temperature Rise Temperature Rise Temperature Rise Temperature Rise 1 2 Configure this setting only when the simultaneous temperature rise function is used Configure this setting only when the peak current suppression function is used 315 uonouni esu eunjejeduie snoeuej nuuis uonounj uoisseJddns xeed ZZ 5 pyepueis e ejnpojy eui Buis ueuM c Auto refresh setting Set the device to be automatically refreshed De Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Q64TCTTN gt Auto Refresh 0010 Q64TCTTN Auto Refresh Display Filter Display All Item E Fransfer to PU Write data error code D50 Temperature process value PV 051 Manipulated value MV Transistor output flag Alert definition Manipulated value MV Heating side manipulated value MVh for another analog module output Temperature rise judgment flag Set value 5V monitor AT Simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation flag Self tuning Flag Temperature conversio
385. nts Un G63 Un G95 Un G127 Un G159 Page 126 Section 3 4 2 37 a Correspondence between each bit and flag The following table lists flags that correspond to bits of this buffer memory area Bit e Bit en Flag description Flag description bO CH1 Read completion flag b8 CH1 Read failure flag b1 CH2 Read completion flag b9 CH2 Read failure flag b2 CH3 Read completion flag b10 CH3 Read failure flag b3 CH4 Read completion flag b11 CH4 Read failure flag b4 CH1 Write completion flag b12 CH1 Write failure flag b5 CH2 Write completion flag b13 CH2 Write failure flag b6 CH3 Write completion flag b14 CH3 Write failure flag b7 CH4 Write completion flag b15 CH4 Write failure flag b ON OFF timing for CHO E PROW s PID constants read instruction Un G62 Un G94 Un G126 Un G158 gt Page 125 Section 3 4 2 36 The following figure shows the ON OFF timing of this flag for CHO E PROM s PID constants read instruction Un G62 Un G94 Un G126 Un G158 For CH1 CH1 E2PROM s PID constants read instruction Un G62 CH1 Read completion flag bO of Un G31 ON 0 XI OFF X39 X XxX X x2 ON CH1 Read failure flag OFF FA b8 of Un G31 Read completion Read failure Read completion Zoe gt Executed by the Q64TCN When the data reading from E PROM is completed normally Read completion flag bO to b3 of Un G31 of the correspondin
386. number Indication modes Indication normal mode Symbol Name Symbol Name Symbol Name 1 NC NC Unused OUT1 L1 CH1 Output L1H CH1 Heating output 2 CT1 CT input 1 OUT2 L2 CH2 Output L1C CH1 Cooling output CT1 3 CT1 CT input 1 OUT3 L3 CH3 Output L2H CH2 Heating output 4 CT2 CT input 2 OUTA L4 CH4 Output L2C CH2 Cooling output CT2 5 CT2 CT input 2 NI COM Output common COM Output common 6 CT3 CT input 3 NC NC Unused NC Unused CT3 i i 7 CT3 CT input 3 IN1 A1 CH1A Oht Resistance CH1 A Resistance thermometer A thermometer A CH2 Resi CH2 Resi 8 CT4 CT input 4 IN2 A2 CH2 A pisange CH2 A oa thermometer A thermometer A CT4 CH1 Resi CH1 Resi 9 CT4 CT input 4 IN1 B1 B e CH1 amies thermometer B thermometer B CH2 Resi CH2 Resi 10 CT5 CT input 5 IN2 B2 CH2B ies CH2B d thermometer B thermometer B CT5 CH1 Resi CH1 Resi 11 CT5 CT input 5 IN1 b1 CH1b sags CH1b ONE thermometer b thermometer b CH2 Resi CH2 Resi 12 CT6 CT input 6 IN2 b2 CH2b uiid CH2b d thermometer b thermometer b CT6 CH3 Resi Monitor 3 resi 13 CT6 CT input 6 IN3 A3 CH3 A nee MT3 A thermometer thermometer 44 CT7 CT input 7 INA A4 CHA A CH4 Resistance MT4 A Monitor 4 resistance thermometer A thermometer A CT7 45 CT7 CT input 7 IN3 B3 CH3B CH3 Resistance MT3B Monitor 3 resistance thermometer B thermometer B CH4 Resi Monitor 4 resi 16 CT8 CT input 8 IN4 B4 B ub MT4 Popes se thermometer B thermometer B CT8 CH3 Resi Monitor 3 resi 17 CT8 CT input 8 IN3 b3 CH3
387. ocess setting 265 109 CT2 CT input channel process setting 266 10A4 CT3 CT input channel process setting 267 10By CT4 CT input channel process setting Page 137 0 R W x Section 268 10C CT5 CT input channel process setting 3 4 2 54 269 10Dy CT6 CT input channel process setting 270 10E CT input channel process setting 271 10F 4 CT8 CT input channel process setting 272 1104 CT1 CT selection 11 273 111 CT2 CT selection 11 274 1124 CT3 CT selection 11 275 113 CT4 CT selection 11 Page 138 0 R W x Section 276 114 CT5 CT selection 3 4 2 55 277 1154 CT6 CT selection 11 278 116 CT CT selection 11 279 117 CT8 CT selection 11 280 118 CT1 Reference heater current value 281 119 CT2 Reference heater current value 1 282 11 CT3 Reference heater current value 283 11By CT4 Reference heater current value 1 Page 139 0 R W x Section 284 11Cy CT5 Reference heater current value 3 4 2 56 285 11Dy CT6 Reference heater current value 286 11 CT7 Reference heater current value 287 11F y CT8 Reference heater current value 69 JSI yu wu isse Jeynq NOLT9O L Ve jueuuuBissy yng t Target Setting contents channel 2 Address Pe rad Default Read Automatic EPROM f eating wri decimal Standard i 9 value Write setting te ___ Refe
388. ode selection as follows X Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Q64TCTTN gt Switch Setting Switch Setting 0010 Q64TCTIN Output Setting at CPU Stop Error Control Mode Selection O CLEAR D CLEAR D CLEAR D Standard Control Auto setting at Input Range Change O Disable Setting Change Rate Limiter Caution 0 Temperature Rise Temperature Drop Batch Setting This dialog setting is linked to the Switch Setting of the PLC parameter Default value will be shown in the dialog if the Switch Setting of the PLC parameter contains an out of range value Input range Temperature Range 0 to 1300 C Temperature Range 0 to 1300 C Temperature Range 0 to 1300 C Cancel Set value Item CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Output Setting at CPU Stop 0 CLEAR 0 CLEAR 0 CLEAR 0 CLEAR Error Control Mode Selection 0 Standard Control Auto setti t Input uto setting at Input Range Be Disable Change Setting Change Rate Limiter 0 Temperature Rise Temperature Drop Batch Setting 5 Contents of the initial setting Description Item CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 2 Thermocouple K 2 Thermocouple K 2 Thermocouple 2 Thermocouple K Measured Measured Measured Measured Temperature Range 0 to 1300 C Set value SV setting 200 C 0 C 0 C 0 C Unused channel setting 0 Used 1 Unused 1 Unused 1 Unused Control output cycle settin
389. odes and validity availability of related settings Active Yes O Inactive No Alert with Alert dead band Number of alert Alert with standby second setting delay standby i AR C gt Page 201 Page 202 196 Section 4 11 8 Section 4 11 9 Section 4 11 3 157 Section 4 11 4 Upper limit input alert Page Input i Section m d i S o i alert Lower limit input alert Page 190 Section a en o Upper limit deviation alert L Page 192 Section 4 11 2 b Upper limit deviation alert using the set value SV Page 192 Section 4 11 2 b Lower limit deviation alert Page 193 Section 4 11 2 Lower limit deviation alert using the set value SV Page 193 Deviation Section 4 11 2 c alert Upper lower limit deviation alert L gt Page 193 Section 4 11 2 d Upper lower limit deviation alert using the set value SV Page 193 Section 4 11 2 9 Within range alert gt 194 u u Section 4 11 2 e Within range alert using the set value SV gt Page 194 Section 4 11 2 e 203 uogound LL 4 1 2 RFB Limiter Function 204 The RFB reset feed back function operates when deviation E continues for a long period of time In such occasion
390. odule change carefully read the following QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Appendix 4 1 Precautions on online module change This section lists precautions on an online module change When an online module change is performed not all set values are inherited by the module after the change After the online module change write the set values in the changed module again When an online module change is performed properly follow the instructions Not doing so may cause malfunction and failure Before performing an online module change check that the system outside of the programmable controller does not malfunction Prepare methods such as a switch that disconnect individually the external power supply for the module to be changed online and the power supply for external devices to prevent electric shock and malfunction of the module during transportation e Record the content to save data of the writable buffer memory 57 Section 3 4 beforehand because the buffer memory data may not be saved normally in the event that the module malfunctions Even if pre recorded data are set to the buffer memory in the module that was changed online and control is restarted the following areas are cleared when control is stopped Therefore control cannot be restarted in the same control status Manipulated value MV Un G13 to Un G16 CHLI Manipulated value for heating MVh UnG13
391. odule to be connected and the range of I O assignment 1 0 signal Page 364 Appendix 2 1 1 i A Intelligent function module j Configure the switch setting of the intelligent function module Page 365 Appendix 2 1 2 switch setting 1 I O assignment Configure the setting on I O assignment in PLC Parameter Parameter gt PLC Parameter gt I O assignment Q parameter setting PLC name PLC system PLC file PLC RAs 1 PLC RAS 2 Device Program Boot file SFC 1 0 assignment 140 Assignment Sere Points n PCT Switch setting 16points QE4TCTTN 16points Detailed setting Assigning the 120 address is not necessary as the CPU does it automatically Leaving this setting blank will not cause an error to occur Item Description Type Select Intelli Model name Enter the model name of the module For the Q64TCTTN or Q64TCRTN Select 16points Points For the Q64TCTTBWN or Q64TCRTBWN Use two slots Select Empty and 16points for the first slot Select Intelli and 16points for the second slot Start XY Enter an arbitrary start I O number of the Q64TCN 364 APPENDICES 2 Intelligent function module switch setting Click the Switch setting button in PLC Parameter for the setting X 5 Parameter gt PLC Parameter gt I O assignment gt Click Swiich setina Switch setting for 1
392. ol Clear Value for Gray Cells Set the value of unnecessary items for control mode to D Item setting setting Input range Set value 5V setting Unused channel setting Control basic parameter setting Proportional band P setting Heating control proportional band setting Ph Cooling proportional band Pc Integral time I setting Derivative time D setting 60s Control output cycle setting Heating control output 20s cycle setting Control response parameter Stop Mode Setting PID continuation flag Control detail parameter Forward reverse action setting Upper limit setting limiter Lower limit setting limiter oc Setting change rate limiter or Setting change rate limiter Temperature rise Basic setting Thermocouple sured Temperature Range 0 to 1300 C 200 C 0 Used 3 0 0 0 2405 O Slow 1 Monitor D Stop above thermocouples 1 Reverse Action 1300 C 0 0 95 Set the temperature conversion system 2 Thermocouplek M ed Temperature Range 0 to 1300 250C O Used 3 0 0 0 2405 60s 20s O Slow 1 Monitor 1 Reverse Action 1300 C oc 0 0 95 Temperature Range 0 to 1300 C 300 C 0 Used 3 0 95 20s O Slow 1 Monitor 1 Reverse Action 1300 C oc 0 0 350 C O Used 3 0 0 0 2405 605 205 O Slow 1 Monitor 1 Reverse Action 1300 C c 0 0 95 Temperature Range 0 to 1300 C The Q64TC exercises
393. ol Restart Status Guidance The controls such as FROM TO instruction executions and automatic refresh for the installed module are restarted lease confirm the parameter setting wiring etc and press completed tton Cancel 2 Click to stop the Online module MELSOFT Application 2 The online module change is stopped cha nge mode W Even if the stop is executed the online module change mode on the PLC side is not canceled Please execute the online module change and restart the control of the module again the next page ZS310M X9 peunBijuoo ueuM gp xipueddy XH Burs 1 ueuM ejnpoyy p xipueddy 395 System Monitor p Monitor Status From the previous page i Connection Channel List Click Close to close the System Stop Meriter Serial Pore NETLOG Remote Module ConnectionRS 2320 e Monitor window Mode System Monitor Online Module Change Main Base LI E Base Module T Base Base Model Name P Series Name Power PU Q 5 00 Parameter 1 0 Point Type Pont Address Power Empy Empty Empty i Poi 0000 16 0020 16Point 0030 16Point 0040 Network Master Station No PLC
394. ol two degree of freedom PID control and simple two degree of freedom PID control a One degree of freedom PID control and two degree of freedom PID control General PID control is called one degree of freedom PID control In the one degree of freedom PID control when PID constants to improve response to the change of the set value SV are set response to the disturbance degrades Conversely when PID constants to improve response to the disturbance are set response to the change of the set value SV degrades In the two degree of freedom PID control a manipulated value MV is determined considering the set value SV or variations In this form of PID control response to the change of the set value SV and response to the disturbance can be compatible with each other b Two degree of freedom PID control and simple two degree of freedom PID control The following figure is a block diagram of the two degree of freedom PID control Added function for two degree of freedom PID control Object to be controlled Disturbance D Set value SV gt G Manipulated s value MV Temperature process value PV By setting D and y above properly optimum control can be achieved Note that required parameter settings increase and PID constants can hardly be auto set by the auto tuning function for complete two degree of
395. om the temperature control module analog output values from other analog modules such as a D A converter module can be used as the manipulated value MV a Setting method Follow the procedure below for the standard control 1 Setavalue in Resolution of the manipulated value for output with another analog module Un1G181 gt 132 Section 3 4 2 48 2 Store the value in CHO Manipulated value MV for output with another analog module Un1G177 to Un G180 into the buffer memory in other analog module such as a D A converter module Page 131 Section 3 4 2 47 uonounJ Bojeuy 1eujouy uiv SL Poi oint When the manipulated value MV is 5 0 to 0 0 0 is stored in Manipulated value MV for output with another analog module When the manipulated value MV is 100 096 to 105 096 4000 12000 16000 20000 is stored in Manipulated value MV for output with another analog module The manipulated value MV in a percentage value is stored into Manipulated value MV for output with another analog module digital output value in real time 217 4 16 on Delay Output Function This function allows the user to set the delay response scan time delay of transistor output By setting a delay and monitoring the ON delay output flag and external output on the program disconnection of external output can be judged The following figure is an example using the ON delay flag
396. ompensation resistor compensation resistor 15 IN3 3 CH3 CH3 Thermocouple CH3 CH3 Thermocouple 16 IN4 4 CH4 CH4 Thermocouple CH4 CH4 Thermocouple 17 IN3 3 CH3 CH3 Thermocouple CH3 CH3 Thermocouple 18 IN4 4 CH4 CH4 Thermocouple CH4 CH4 Thermocouple 273 SOWEN Hed E G 2 For the Q64TCTTBWN Terminal block for CT Terminal block for I O Terminal Common to the all Heating cooling control number Indication control modes Indication Srandardicontrol normal mode Symbol Name Symbol Name Symbol Name 1 NC NC Unused OUT1 L1 CH1 Output L1H CH1 Heating output 2 CT1 CT input 1 OUT2 L2 CH2 Output L1C CH1 Cooling output 3 CT1 CT input 1 OUT3 L3 CH3 Output L2H CH2 Heating output 4 CT2 CT input 2 OUT4 L4 CH4 Output L2C CH2 Cooling output 5 Ems CT2 CT input 2 COM Output common COM Output common 6 CT3 CT input 3 NC NC Unused NC Unused 7 CT3 CT input 3 IN1 1 CH1 CH1 Thermocouple CH1 CH1 Thermocouple 8 CT4 CT input 4 IN2 2 CH2 CH2 Thermocouple CH2 CH2 Thermocouple 9 um CT4 CT input 4 IN1 1 CH1 CH1 Thermocouple CH1 CH1 Thermocouple 10 CT5 CT input 5 IN2 2 CH2 CH2 Thermocouple CH2 CH2 Thermocouple 11 CT5 CT input 5 NC NC Unused NC Unused a gy MD 13 CT6 CT input 6 NC NC Unused NC Unused Wa e come en Tuc mele 15 CT7 CT input 7 IN3 3 CH3 CH3 Thermocouple MT3
397. ompletion flag aaeain ePi E i y cou Heater disconnection compensation function CH1 alert flag selection XOD CH2 alert flag CT monitor method switching XOE CH3 alert flag CTLI heater current process value XOF CH4 alert flag CTLI channel assignment setting Y01 Operation mode command CTLI CT selection YO2 Error reset command CTLI reference heater current value 370 APPENDICES Function Description Monitor test Y04 CH1 auto tuning start command Y05 CH2 auto tuning start command Y06 CH3 auto tuning start command Y07 CH4 auto tuning start command Y08 2 backup start command e YO9 Default setting registration start command YOB Setting change command YOC CH1 forced PID control stop command YOD CH2 forced PID control stop command YOE CH3 forced PID control stop command YOF CH4 forced PID control stop command proportional band P setting x 0 1 integral time 1 setting Unit s CHLI derivative time D setting Unit s CHLI PID constants read command from EEPROM CHO EEPROM PID constant read completion flag CHO EEPROM PID constant read abnormal completion flag CHLI control output period setting Unit s CHLI control response parameter CHLI stop mode setting PID continuation flag CHLI alert definition Temperature process value PV upper limit cross alert Temperature pro
398. on flag XnA E PROM write failure flag E PROM write failure flag E PROM write failure flag XnB Setting change completion flag Setting change completion flag Setting change completion flag XnC CH1 Alert occurrence flag CH1 Alert occurrence flag CH1 Alert occurrence flag XnD CH2 Alert occurrence flag CH2 Alert occurrence flag CH2 Alert occurrence flag XnE CH3 Alert occurrence flag CH3 Alert occurrence flag CH3 Alert occurrence flag XnF Alert occurrence flag CHA Alert occurrence flag CHA Alert occurrence flag 1 Available only under the heating cooling control expanded mode For details on the expanded mode refer to gt Page 161 Section 4 1 3 2 Available only under the mix control expanded mode For details on the expanded mode refer to Page 161 46 Section 4 1 3 2 Output signal list CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Output signal signal direction CPU module Q64TCN Device No Standard control Heating cooling control Mix control YnO N A N A N A Yn1 Setting operation mode instruction Setting operation mode instruction Setting operation mode instruction Yn2 Error reset instruction Error reset instruction Error reset instruction Yn3 N A N A N A Yn4 CH1 Auto tuning instruction CH1 Auto tuning instruction CH1 Auto tuning instruction Yn5 2 Auto tuning instruction 2 Auto tuning instruction CH2 Auto tuning instruction Yn6 CH3 Auto tuning instruction
399. on is executed the setting change rate limiter cannot be used LF Page 117 Section 3 4 2 28 236 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 2 Conditions for the simultaneous temperature rise function The simultaneous temperature rise function is executed when all the following conditions are satisfied When the control is started or the set value SV is changed When the set value SV is larger than the temperature process value PV When the standard control is selected on Switch Setting not executed in the heating cooling control Page 292 Section 6 2 When the simultaneous temperature rise parameter has been determined or has been set and is not 0 the default value When the following buffer memory area setting is less than 10096 reaching time may vary Upper limit output limiter Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 s Page 108 Section 3 4 2 19 3 Setting method dividing channels into groups Set the groups in the following buffer memory area Simultaneous temperature rise group setting Un G730 Un G746 Un G762 Un G778 s Page 151 Section 3 4 2 78 4 Simultaneous temperature rise parameter The simultaneous temperature rise parameter is classified into the following two buffer memory values Buffer memory address Buffer memory area name Reference CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Simultaneous temperature rise Un G731 Un G747 Un G763 Un G779 Page 151 Section 3 4 2 79 gradient data Simul
400. on module the I O points must also be the same in addition to the I O assignment setting 30 Section 42 2 The chapter of the current page is shown The section of the current page is shown Point Pshows notes that requires attention When an intelligent module is connected I O assignment can be omitted by selecting connected modules from Intelligent Function Module in the Project window Remark shows useful information 73 1 The mouse operation example is provided below MELSOFT Series GX Works2 Unset Project PRG MAIN i Project Edit Find Replace Compile View Online Debug Diagno Menu bar XX Online gt Write to PLC Select Online on the menu bar and then select Write to PLC A window selected in the view selection area is displayed W Project window 5 gt Parameter lt gt PLC Parameter Select Project from the view selection area to open the Project window In the Project window expand Parameter and select PLC Parameter Parameter Intelligent Function Module Global Device Comment E Program Setting E POU 5 5 Program MAIN 8 3 Local Device Comment Device Memory Device Initial Value View selection area v Unlabeled 14 Pages describing buffer memory areas and functions are organized as shown below The following illustration is for explanation purpose only
401. on offset latch request 0 R W x x Section 3 4 2 62 Page 142 581 245 CH2 2 point sensor compensation offset latch completion 0 R x x Section 3 4 2 63 Page 142 582 2464 CH2 2 point sensor compensation gain latch request 0 R W x x Section 3 4 2 64 Page 143 583 2474 CH2 2 point sensor compensation gain latch completion 0 R x x Section 3 4 2 65 584 2484 to System area mE 595 2534 Page 117 596 2544 CH2 Setting change rate limiter temperature drop 12 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 28 597 2554 to System area 604 25 o page 605 25D4 CH2 p System area System area 0 R x x Section parameter 3 4 2 66 calculation flag Self tunin Fage 144 606 25E CH2 9 System area System area 0 R W x Section 9 3 4 2 67 Page 145 607 25 CH2 Self tuning flag System area System area 0 R x x Section 3 4 2 68 2 point sensor compensation offset value measured 140 608 260 CH3 0 R W Section value 3 4 2 58 2 point sensor compensation offset value Page 140 609 261 CH3 9 0 R W Section compensation value 3 4 2 59 Page 141 2 point sensor compensation gain value measured 610 2621 CH3 9 0 R W Section value 3 4 2 60 71 18 oww Jeynq N LY9O Lre jueuuuBissy yng ye
402. one channel and heaters off for other channels the heater disconnection correction function does not function Therefore disconnection may be detected even if there is no disconnection The heater disconnection alert correction value is 2096 at maximum When Heater disconnection alert setting is set to 80 as shown in the two examples on gt Page 260 Section 4 26 3 a the conditions for disconnection detection are satisfied even if correction is performed by 2096 with a voltage drop by 4096 or more Consequently disconnection is detected c Setting method Set Heater disconnection correction function selection Un G170 to Use the heater disconnection correction function 1 Page 129 Section 3 4 2 44 261 4 uonoejeq uonoeuuoosiq Jeje9eH OZ P 4 To clear the disconnection detection status Disconnection detection is disabled by restoring the disconnection status and turning Heater disconnection detection 612 of Un G5 to Un G8 from 1 ON to 0 OFF L gt Page 85 Section 3 4 2 3 Under the following setting however Heater disconnection detection b12 of Un G5 to Un G8 does not change from 1 ON to 0 OFF unless a heater turns on CT monitor method switching Un G176 is set to ON Current 1 The timing when a heater turns on differs depending on the setting for the following buffer memory areas Buffer memory address Buffer memory area name Refer
403. ont 0000 Extension Bases Extension Based 02 Empty Empty 16Pont 0020 Extension Base Empty Empty 1 Pot 0030 Extension Bases O4 Empty Empty 1 0040 Extension Base Power Base Installed Supply Type S Modules Base Module Model Name Status Seres Model Name Legend Error Major Enor A Moderate Error Minor Err Assignment Error Assignment Incorrect Module Changing Predaccinformein use system Emar 4 Open the Device Buffer Memory Batch window Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor 1 Monitoring Device Pep Online gt Monitor gt Device Buffer Memory Buffer Memory Module Start 10 HEX Address Batch ea ere Se See eee 5 Display and select the pre recorded device and click Address Modify Value 0 5 o o ooor o olele ga Eoooooocooocooco o MIS o o o o 8 8 S o nlololo oloooooo ooosooosooom
404. ontrol output cycle setting Heating control output cycle setting Page 112 Section 3 4 2 23 Control response parameter Page 114 Section 3 4 2 25 Stop Mode Setting PID continuation flag Page 101 Section 3 4 2 13 Page 129 Section 3 4 2 43 Forward reverse action setting Page 119 Section 3 4 2 30 Upper limit setting limiter Lower limit setting limiter Page 120 Section 3 4 2 31 Setting change rate limiter or Setting change rate limiter Temperature rise Setting change rate limiter Temperature drop Page 117 Section 3 4 2 28 Sensor correction value setting Page 111 Section 3 4 2 21 Primary delay digital filter setting Page 113 Section 3 4 2 24 Upper limit output limiter Heating upper limit output limiter Lower limit output limiter Page 108 Section 3 4 2 19 Output variation limiter Page 110 Section 3 4 2 20 Adjustment sensitivity dead band setting Page 111 Section 3 4 2 22 Self tuning setting Page 144 Section 3 4 2 67 Temperature conversion setting Page 147 Section 3 4 2 70 Cooling method setting Page 148 Section 3 4 2 71 Cooling upper limit output limiter Page 108 Section 3 4 2 19 Cooling control output cycle setting Overlap dead band setting Page 112 Section 3 4 2 23 Page 148 Section 3 4 2 72 Process value PV scaling function enable disable setting
405. ors the Q64TCTTN and Q64TCTTBWN only Remove the module before installation confirmation If the installation confirmation is executed without removing the module the module does not start up normally and the RUN LED does not turn on 401 ueJ60ud eouenbes e Buisn peunBiuoo jegu ay ueuM 9p xipueddy XH ueuM ejnpoyy p xipueddy 3 Mounting a new module 1 Mount anew module in the same slot and connect Online Module Change the external cable 2 After the module is mounted click Execution and check that the RUN LED is on Module READY flag Xn0 remains off 1 To check the operation click ces to cancel the control start 2 Click to stop the Online module change MELSOFT Application mode m To the next page 402 APPENDICES From the previous page i E 3 Click Close to close the nm SSCS SSS sme System Monitor window C System Monitor 5 Online Mode Change Main Base Operation to Selected Module Benes loin Base Sot 1 tel cumplen en Main Base Information List Module Information List Main Base Base Slat Parameter Master Type Poit Address StationNo PLC Power Power E Extension Basel CPU Q D Extension Base2 oo Empty Empty 16P
406. oup 2 Example 2 CH3 Not divided CH4 Group 4 The following shows the relationship between groups and the values of CHO Upper limit output limiter Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 Peak current suppression control group setting Un G784 G 1 G 2 G 3 G 4 E le1 4 2 1 H Divided into EP Toup roup roup xample l 0100 0011 0010 0001 25 25 25 2596 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 2 4 0 2 1 H Divided into Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 4 groups v y 0100 0000 0010 0001 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 25 25 25 25 CH1 CH2 CH4 Whether the transistor output is executed or not can be selected by CH3 Unused channel setting Un G125 72 Page 124 Section 3 4 2 35 100 In case of default value applied CH3 In Example 2 the maximum number of groups is four therefore timing is divided into four timing Because no channel is set for Group 3 no channel starts transistor output at the timing for Group 3 231 uonouny uoisseJddng Juano yeed grip b Three timing The following table shows two examples Example Channel Group CH1 Group 1 CH2 Group 2 Example 1 CH3 Group 2 CH4 Group 3 CH1 Group 1 CH2 Group 2 Example 2 CH3 Group 3 CH4 Not divided The following shows the relationship between groups and the values of CHO Upper limit output limiter Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G13
407. output with anotheranalog another analog module module 7 Page 131 Section Manipulated 3 4 2 47 value of B cooling MVc 710 2C6 CH3 System area for output with System area 0 R x x another analog module 8 Manipulated value of cooling MVc 711 2C74 CH4 System area System area 0 R x x for output with another analog module 9 74 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Target Setting contents channel 2 Address he Default Read Automatic ETROM eating writ decimal nent Standard i cci value Write setting ix contr ilabili hexadecimal CORTO cooling e 3 availability sensor control 4 CT Cooling Cooling 712 2C8 CH1 System area transistor transistor 0 R x x output flag output flag Cooling Cooling 713 2C9 CH2 System area transistor transistor 0 R x x output flag output flag 7 Page 90 coli Section Pang 3 4 2 7 714 2CAp CH3 System area transistor System area 0 R x x outpu flag 8 Cooling 715 2CBy CH4 System area transistor System area 0 R x x outpu flag 8 716 2CC4 to System area 718 2 Cooling Cooling Page 148 719 2CFy All CHs System area method setting method setting 0 R W x Section 9 9 3 4 2 71 Cooli Cooli ee gt m Page 105 720 2D0 CH1 System area us prop 30 R W x Section band Pc band Pc
408. ow the relationships of two types of set value SV depending on whether the setting change rate limiter is specified or not When the setting change rate limiter is not specified The two types of set value SV are the same value Set value SV setting Un G34 Un G66 Un G98 Un G130 and Set value SV monitor Un G25 to Un G28 Temperature process value PV A uonounj Haly Lb Set value SV 2 gt pete Me eee eee eee eee change Set value SV 1 Pr 0 Time 191 When the setting change rate limiter is specified The value in CHO Set value SV monitor Un G25 to Un G28 follows the set value SV of after the setting is reflected Temperature process value PV Set value SV setting Un G34 Un G66 UG98 Un G130 Set value SV 2 5 Set value SV monitor Un G25 to Un G28 Setting change rate limiter or setting change rate limiter temperature rise change 2 Un G52 Un G84 Un G116 Un G148 Set value SV 1 gt Time Setting change rate limiter unit time setting Un G735 Un G751 Un G767 Un G783 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 T 1 b Upper limit deviation alert When the deviation E is equal to or greater than the alert set value the system is put in an alert status
409. owing conditions Temperature process value PV Set value SV CHO Manual reset amount setting Un G724 Un G740 Un G756 Un G772 is set to 0 0 0 gt Page 149 Section 3 4 2 73 Manipulated value MV 100 09 Temperature process 7o value PV Set value SV 4 gt Proportional band P 1 The value actually output is within the output limiter range set Output variation limiter setting Un G44 Un G76 Un G108 Un G140 110 Section 3 4 2 20 2 The set value SV is in the center of the proportional band b Heating cooling control The manipulated value for heating MVh and the manipulated value for cooling MVc are both 0 in the gt following conditions 9 Temperature process value PV Set value SV CHO Manual reset amount setting Un G724 Un G740 Un G756 Un G772 is set to 0 0 0 L gt Page 149 Section 3 4 2 73 3 Manipulated value Manipulated value for heating MVh for cooling MVc 100 Temperature process Ute value PV Set value SV 1 gt gt Heating proportional Cooling proportional band Ph band Pc 1 The value actually output is within the output limiter range set in CHO Output variation limiter setting Un G44 Un G76 Un G108 Un G140 gt Page 110 Section 3 4 2 20 c Setting method Among proportional band P integral time 1 and derivative time D set any value
410. p E Yn8 7 EA Execution status of Before write During write to Completion of write to EPROM write E PROM E PROM N E PROM ON E PROM write completion OFF gt gt flag Xn8 Executed in a sequence program sasas gt Executed by the Q64TCN For details on the data writing to the E PROM refer to the following L gt Page 264 Section 4 28 7 Default value write completion flag Xn9 Turning Default setting registration instruction Yn9 on from off starts the writing of the default value of the Q64TCN to the buffer memory After the data writing is completed this flag turns on Turning Default setting registration instruction Yn9 off from on also turns off this flag Default setting registration instruction Yn9 User setting Buffer memory value Default value write completion flag OFF Xn9 During default setting registration sjeubis ndu jo sjiejeq uoJioy peuejsueJ Executed in a sequence program Executed by the Q64TCN a Unused channel For unused channels which temperature sensors are not connected to Unused channel setting Un G61 Un G93 Un G125 Un G157 must be set to Unused 1 after the completion of the writing of the default value If not the ALM LED blinks For details on the unused channel setting refer to the following 5 Page 290 Section 5 5 51 8 E PR
411. point sensor compensation offset range and the offset value is value compensation value is greater than or equal tede gall smaller than the 2 point sensor value the gain value address is compensation gain value stored as the address where the compensation value error occurred An alarm has occurred OOOA Refer to the alarm code list 357 Section 8 7 The set value cannot be changed Set value discrepancy error ui The current control mode and the BA MISES j 001E control mode backed up in the etermined Turn the E PROM backup instruction 2 The buffer memory data reverts to Yn8 OFF 2 ON 5 OFF E PROM are different due to the the default value for the selected change of the control mode selection control mode Values set in the intelligent function The RUN LED turns off the ERR Set the correct values on the intelligent OOOF module switch setting are those LED turns on and the module does function module switch setting outside the setting range not operate 1 The address where the error occurred is stored in 00019 Buffer memory addresses are written in decimal Intelligent function module device UnXGL1 in this manual Read the stored value as a decimal value and refer to the buffer memory list 7 s Page 57 Section 3 4 1 2 The buffer memory areas checked are Un GO to Un G287 No error occurs for writes in the system area in or after Un G288 3 For the wri
412. process value PV 1 Proportional gain In a proportional action the relationship between changes in the deviation E and the manipulated value can be expressed in the following formula MV KP E where Kp is a proportional constant and is called proportional gain The manipulated value MV varies in the range from 5 0 to 105 0 The following table describes the difference of actions depending on the value of Kp proportional gain Condition Proportional action Kp is a small value The control action slows down The control action speeds up though the temperature process value PV tends to Kp is a large value fluctuate around the set value The following figure shows a proportional action of step responses where the deviation E is a fixed value Deviation E E t pi y Time o o oy DS i Og gzz ao Manipulated T S v value MV t _ 39 og 5 9 58 2 Offset S 2 The certain amount of difference generates between the temperature process value PV and the set value SV is called an offset remaining deviation In an proportional action an offset remaining deviation generates Set value t Offset Set value Offset SV K SV X 1 Temperature process value PV emperature process value PV gt Time gt Time 25 1 3 4 26 Integral action l action An integral action is an action which continuously changes the m
413. put L1C CH1 Cooling output 3 OUT3 L3 CH3 Output L3 CH3 Output 4 OUT4 L4 CH4 Output L4 CH4 Output 5 COM Output common COM Output common 6 NC NC Unused NC Unused 7 N1 A1 CH1 A CH1 Resistance CH1 CH1 Resistance thermometer A thermometer A 8 N2 A2 MT2A Monitor 2 resistance CH2A CH2 Resistance thermometer A thermometer A 9 N1 B1 CH1B CH1 Resistance CH1B CH1 Resistance thermometer B thermometer B 40 N2 B2 MT2B Monitor 2 resistance CH2B CH2 Resistance thermometer B thermometer B 11 IN1 b1 CH1b CH1 Resistance CH1b CH1 Resistance thermometer b thermometer b 42 IN2 b2 MT2 b Monitor 2 resistance CH2b CH2 Resistance thermometer b thermometer b 43 N3 A3 CH3 A CH3 Resistance CH3 A CH3 Resistance thermometer A thermometer A 44 N4 A4 CH4 A CH4 Resistance CH4 A CH4 Resistance thermometer A thermometer A 45 N3 B3 CH3B CH3 Resistance CH3B CH3 Resistance thermometer B thermometer B 16 N4 B4 CH4B CH4 Resistance CH4B CH4 Resistance thermometer B thermometer B 47 IN3 b3 CH3b CH3 Resistance CH3b CH3 Resistance thermometer b thermometer b 48 INA b4 CHA b CH4 Resistance CHA b CH4 Resistance thermometer b thermometer b CHAPTER 5 SETTINGS AND THE PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 277 SOWEN Hed E G 4 For the Q64TCRTBWN Terminal block for CT Terminal block for I O Terminal Common to the all control Heating cooling control Standard control
414. put from other analog modules 0 to 4000 digit 1 201 4000 0 0 to 4000 2 96 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Automatic setting when changing Celsius Input range 19098 CEN Resolution p type Fahrenheit Un G64 Un G96 g limiter setting limiter range CF digit Un G128 Un G55 Un G87 Un G56 Un G88 Un G119 Un G120 Un G151 Un G152 Input from other analog modules 0 to 12000 digit 1 202 12000 0 0 to 12000 Input from other analog modules 0 to 16000 digit 1 203 16000 0 0 to 16000 Input from other analog modules 0 to 20000 digit 1 204 20000 0 0 to 20000 Input from other analog modules 0 to 32000 digit 1 205 32000 0 0 to 32000 1 When the input range is changed the set values in some buffer memory areas are initialized automatically and return to the default value 0 gt Page 99 Section 3 4 2 12 d 2 Same as the Q64TCRTN Q64TCRTBWN REESE For the following control mode and channel Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 cannot be set to 201 to 205 If these values are set a write data error error code LILILI4 occurs CH3 and CH4 in heating cooling control normal mode CH2 in mix control normal mode 97 Jejnq ey siiejeq jueuuuBissy yng t b Setting range of Q64TCRTN Q64TCRTBWN The following table
415. put off time current error detection function Buffer memory data backup function O Error history function x O Module error history collection X O function Error clear function x O 2 Comparison of I O signals The same I O signals can be used for the Q64TCN in the standard control and the Q64TC 3 Comparison of buffer memory The same buffer memory areas can be used for the Q64TCN in the standard control and the Q64TC Point Buffer memory addresses are written in hexadecimal in the Q64TC manual while they are written in decimal Intelligent function module device UnXGL1 in this manual Although the addresses are differently written buffer memory areas with the same function have the same address 4 Temperature Control Module User s Manual 362 APPENDICES Appendix 1 1 compatibility between the Q64TC and Q64TCN 1 Restrictions when setting parameters on GX Works2 When the module added to a project on GX Works2 and the mounted module are different the following restrictions apply Module added to a mae Mounted module i Restriction project Q64TC Q64TCN The sequence program cannot be executed The sequence program can be executed Q64TCN Q64TC However only functions supported by the Q64TC can be used 2 Restrictions when online module change is performed When the online module change is performed between the Q64TC and Q64TCN the following r
416. put range Un Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 G32 Item 1 to 99 Thermocouple is used No input from Output temperature unit is Celsius C other analog modules such as an A D 100 to 199 converter module 1 to 199 Output temperature unit is Fahrenheit F 200 to 299 Other analog modules such as an A D Unit is digit converter module are used 200 to 299 Automatic setting when changing 1 CHOU T CREME limit measurement n Resolution ne iud i ing limi type Fahrenheit Un G64 Un G96 g limiter setting limiter range F idigit Un G128 Un G55 Un G87 Un G56 Un G88 Un G119 Un G120 Un G151 Un G152 0 to 1700 C 1 1 1700 0 S 0 to 3000 s 1 105 3000 0 200 0 to 400 0 C 0 1 38 4000 2000 0 0 to 400 0 C 0 1 36 4000 0 0 to 1300 1 valu j 1300 0 0 to 500 C 1 11 500 0 K 0 0 to 500 0 C 0 1 40 5000 0 0 to 800 C 1 12 800 0 0 0 to 800 0 C 0 1 41 8000 0 0 to 1000 F 1 100 1000 0 0 0 to 1000 0 F 0 1 130 10000 0 0 to 2400 oF 1 101 2400 0 0 0 to 400 0 C 0 1 37 4000 0 0 to 500 C 1 13 500 0 0 0 to 500 0 C 0 1 42 5000 0 0 to 800 1 14 800 0 0 0 to 800 0 C 0 1 43 8000 0 J 0 to 1200 1 3 1200 0 0 to 1000 F 1 102 1000 0 0 0 to 1000 0 F 0 1 131 10000 0 0 to 1600 F 1 103 1600 0 0 to 2100 oF 1 104 2100 0 95 Jejnq ey syieleq
417. r flag Xn2 turns on The error code is stored in Write data error code Heating upper limit output limiter If the setting is out of the setting value a write data Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 error error code 00044 occurs When the error occurs the following situations occur CHEI Cooling upper limit output limiter 0 to 1050 0 076 to 105 076 Un G721 Un G737 UniG753 Write error flag Xn2 turns on E DAE The error code is stored in Write data error code rin Un G0 Point Inthe standard control Cooling upper limit output limiter Un G721 Un G737 Un G753 Un G769 is invalid even it is set In the heating cooling control lower limit value is not used When Lower limit output limiter Un G43 Un G75 Un G107 Un1G139 is set to other than 0 a write data error error code 00023 occurs 108 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS b Two position control gt gt Page 163 Section 4 3 1 The following table lists Enable Disable of the setting Enable Disable of the setting in Buffer memo the two position control Upper limit output limiter Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 Lower limit output limiter Un G43 Un G75 Un G107 Un G139 p Heating upper limit output limiter Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 CHO Cooling upper limit output limiter Un G721 Un G737 Un G753
418. r heater disconnection detection 32 Data read from 265 Data write to 2 264 Dead barnd ke aka eect 254 Dead band setting 37 Default setting registration instruction Yn9 56 124 Default value write completion flag Xn9 51 Derivative action D action 27 Derivative action selection 186 Deviation alert 191 Dielectric withstand voltage 38 Differences between auto tuning and self tuning 219 Discontinuation of self tuning 226 During the mode shifting 48 G H E PROM backup instruction Yn8 55 E PROM write completion flag Xn8 51 E PROM write failure flag 52 E PROM s PID constants read write completion flag NGO Waits oath MEM PIN MH bu arene 92 Effect from wiring resistance of lohm 39 ERR LED oder sume O eee 272 348 Erot ceai RA EA 269 Etrot COde vio noue deba ep deest beoe ded 359 Error code list 0000 0c eee eee ee 354 Error code priorities 356 Error history osos redu eee 266 Error history 1 to 16 Un G1280 to Un G1407 158 Error reset instruction 2 55 Expanded 161 External 5
419. r malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before mounting or removing the module Failure to do so may result in damage to the product A module can be replaced online while power is on on any MELSECNET H remote I O station or in the system where a CPU module supporting the online module change function is used Note that there are restrictions on the modules that can be replaced online and each module has its predetermined replacement procedure For details refer to the relevant chapter in this manual Do not directly touch any conductive parts and electronic components of the module Doing so can cause malfunction or failure of the module Wiring Precautions CAUTION Ground the shielded cable to the protective ground conductor dedicated to the programmable controller Failure to do so may result in electric shock or malfunction Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them within the specified torque range If any spade solderless terminal is used it may be disconnected when the terminal screw comes loose resulting in failure Check the rated voltage and terminal layout before wiring to the module and connect the cables correctly Connecting a power supply with a different voltage rating or incorrect wiring may cause a fire or failure Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wir
420. r setting Smoothens extreme noise and absorbs drastic change E PROM for backing up set values The set values in the buffer memory such as the setting related to PID control can be stored into E2PROM for data backup The values do not need to be reset after turning the power on from off or releasing the CPU module from its reset status Using the test function of the programming tool to write data directly to the buffer memory the minimum sequence program required is LD OUT Yn1 19 sejymeej 20 9 Detection of disconnection Heater disconnection can be detected easily by the loop disconnection detection function The Q64TCTTBWN and Q64TCRTBWN can detect the disconnection of a heater accurately 10 Easy setting by GX Works2 Sequence program can be reduced by configuring the default setting or auto refresh setting on the screen Also the setting status or operating status of the module can be checked easily CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1 2 The PID Control System 1 PID control system The following figure shows a system of when performing the PID control Q64TCN Set value SV Set value data storage area Manipulated value MV Manipulated value data storage area Temperature process value PV PID operation Control object Temperature process value data storage area ror pen qu UI Dc NR EU n Ep IE Temperature sensor 2 PID control procedure
421. ration time for output is short The Q64TCN turns Simultaneous temperature rise parameter error status b9 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 to 1 ON ON CHO Auto tuning status d Xn4 to Xn7 or IB 2 Control status pip control Self tuning X PID control CHLI Simultaneous temperature rise gradient data i Un G731 Un G747 Un G763 Un G779 and Simultaneous temperature rise dead time Un G732 Un G748 Un G764 Un G780 Simultaneous temperature rise parameter error status OFF b9 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 Temperature control start set value SV change or oscillation detected gt Executed by the Q64TCN Point To restore Simultaneous temperature rise parameter error status b9 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 to 0 OFF set the following Set CHO Self tuning setting Un G574 Un G606 Un G638 Un G670 to Not performing ST 0 To calculate the simultaneous temperature rise parameter execute self tuning again after the temperature has dropped 242 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS d Stopping of calculation for the simultaneous temperature rise parameter The optimum simultaneous temperature rise parameter may not be able to be calculated depending on the characteristics of a controlled object In addition the Q64TCN stops calculating the simultaneous temperature rise parameter during self tuning under the following conditions
422. re changed with auto tuning Temperature Auto tuning waveform T Maximum gradient Simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation timing by self tuning Dead time Time Simultaneous Self tuning start temperature rise AT start ON NE Setting operation mode status 1 i Xn1 OFF ON E CHO Auto tuning status i Xn4 to Xn7 OFF i CHO Auto tuning instruction Yn4 to Yn7 OFF CHO PID auto correction status b0 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 OFF r i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i o z Simultaneous temperature rise parameter correction status b1 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 OFF CHO Self tuning flag Un G575 Un G607 f Un G639 Un G671 Simultaneous temperature rise parameter error status b9 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 OFF uonouny esr einjejeduie snoseueynwis 6 CHO Self tuning error b10 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 OFF AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation completion b0 of Un G573 Un G605 Un G637 UnGee9 OFF AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation flag Un G573 Un G605 Un G637 Un G669 tie Seah eee E Simultaneous temper
423. re measurement range of the set input range s Page 94 Section 3 4 2 12 b Setting unit The value to be set differs depending on the stored value Decimal point position Un G1 to Un G4 lt Page 84 Section 3 4 2 2 No decimal place 0 Set a value in 1 C F or digit unit One decimal place 1 Set a value in 0 1 C F unit tenfold value c Enablement of setting contents Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction YnB OFF ON OFF during the setting mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 OFF d Default value The default values are set to 0 in all channels 141 Ajowaw Jejynq ey Sed jueuuuBissy yng t 62 2 point sensor compensation offset latch request Un G548 Un G580 Un G612 Un G644 8 This request is for storing temperature process value PV as 2 point sensor compensation offset value to the following buffer memory area 2 point sensor compensation offset value measured value Un G544 Un G576 Un G608 Un G640 Page 140 Section 3 4 2 58 For details on the 2 point sensor compensation function refer to the following s 209 Section 4 13 2 a Setting range 0 No request 1 Latch request b Default value The default values are set to No request 0 in all channels 63 2 point sensor compensation offset latch completion Un G549 Un G581 Un G613 Un
424. rence hexadecimal current ae cooling Mix control D 2 5 availability sensor control CT 288 120 CT1 CT ratio setting 1 289 121 CT2 CT ratio setting 290 122 CT3 CT ratio setting 291 123 CT4 CT ratio setting FRE 139 800 R W x Section 292 124 CT5 CT ratio setting 1 3 4 2 57 293 125 CT6 CT ratio setting 294 126 CT7 CT ratio setting 295 127 CT8 CT ratio setting 296 128 to System area ud 543 21Fy 2 point sensor compensation offset value measured Page PH 544 220 CH1 9 0 R W Section value 3 4 2 58 Page 140 2 point sensor compensation offset value 545 2214 CH1 0 R W Section compensation value 3 4 2 59 r Page 141 2 point sensor compensation gain value measured 546 2224 CH1 9 0 R W Section value 3 4 2 60 F Page 141 2 point sensor compensation gain value 547 2234 CH1 59 0 R W Section compensation value 3 4 2 61 Page 142 548 2244 CH1 2 point sensor compensation offset latch request 0 R W x x Section 3 4 2 62 Page 142 549 2254 CH1 2 point sensor compensation offset latch completion 0 R x x Section 3 4 2 63 Page 142 550 2264 CH1 2 point sensor compensation gain latch request 0 R W x x Section 3 4 2 64 Page 143 551 227 CH1 2 point sensor compensation gain latch completion 0 R x x Section 3 4 2 65 552 228 to Syste
425. ress Default Read Automatic Target write decimal h Setting contents value Write setting Reference channe Br hexadecimal 1 2 3 4 158 1279 4 All CHs Latest address of error history 0 R x x Section 3 4 2 88 1280 500 Error code 1281 501 Upper 2 Lower digits of year digits of year Page 158 1282 5024 All CHs History 1 Error Month Day 0 R x x Section occurrence 1283 503 time Hour Minute SAM 1284 504 Second Payouts week 1285 505 to System area E m m mE 1287 5074 1288 508 Page 158 Error code error occurrence time Data to All CHs History 2 0 R x x Section structure is the same as that of History 1 342 89 1292 50C 20897 1293 50Dy to System area mE EI EE 1295 50F 1296 510 Page 158 Error code error occurrence time Data to All CHs History 0 R x x Section structure is the same as that of History 1 342 89 1300 5144 4 2 89 1301 5154 to System area m mE 1303 517 1304 518 Page 158 Error code error occurrence time Data p to All CHs History 4 0 R x x Section structure is the same as that of History 1 342 89 1308 51C 5289 1309 51Dy to System area 1311 51 1312 520 5204 Page 158 Error code error occurrence time Data to All CHs History 5 f 0 R x x Section structure is the same as that of History 1 342 89 1316 524 2 89
426. rforming the heating cooling control 323 7 3 When Using the Module on the Remote I O 331 CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING 346 8 1 Before Tro bleshooting reas ssas es oe ce tee Reha Ree oti ee EE CS CER NA 346 8 2 Troubleshooting Procedure 0 cece naana aana 346 8 3 Checks Using 1 0 Rh ee rem Dee ek ort 348 8 3 1 When the RUN LED flashes or turns off 348 8 3 2 When the ERR LED turns on 348 8 3 3 When the ALM LED turns on 349 8 4 Checks Using Input Signals 00 eect 350 8 4 4 When Module READY flag Xn0 does not turn on 350 8 4 2 When Write error flag Xn2 is 350 8 43 When Hardware error flag Xn3 iS 350 8 4 4 When the auto tuning does not start Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 does not turn on CD MP LP PEERS UE ET 350 8 4 5 When the auto tuning does not complete Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 stays on Do8s not turno te Oe Oe e t es ed 351 8 4 6 When the self tuning does not start Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 does not turn on NUTUS TUNER a 351 8 444 When E PROM wr
427. ribes the assignment and applications of the Q64TCN input signals When the Q64TCTTBWN or Q64TCRTBWN is used the device numbers of the I O signals increase by 16 points depending on how many empty points the left hand side slots have Therefore I O signals are given as indicated below in this manual Read them according to the module used Ex When 0 is set as the start number Yn1 is assigned as follows When the Q64TCTTN or Q64TCRITN is used Y1 When the Q64TCTTBWN or Q64TCRTBWN is used Y11 1 Input signal list Input signal Signal direction CPU module Q64TCN Device No Standard control Heating cooling control Mix control XnO Module READY flag Module READY flag Module READY flag Xn1 Setting operation mode status Setting operation mode status Setting operation mode status Xn2 Write error flag Write error flag Write error flag Xn3 Hardware error flag Hardware error flag Hardware error flag Xn4 CH1 Auto tuning status CH1 Auto tuning status CH1 Auto tuning status Xn5 2 Auto tuning status CH2 Auto tuning status CH2 Auto tuning status Xn6 CH3 Auto tuning status CH3 Auto tuning status CH3 Auto tuning status Xn7 CH4 Auto tuning status CH4 Auto tuning status CH4 Auto tuning status Xn8 E PROM write completion flag E PROM write completion flag E PROM write completion flag Xn9 Default value write completion flag Default value write completion flag Default value write completi
428. rns on Default operation After mounting the module gt A dur flag Xn0 click Execute on GX Works2 When there are initial setting parameters the module starts to operate based on the initial setting gt gt parameters at this point g8 D oO i 5 5 Check the operation before the control starts 4 Check the operation y BOR Click the Cancel button on e GX Works2 to turn off the online mode ES 2 9 2 oc On Modify Value on GX Works2 test the operation of O x O O the module after replacement v The module operates based 5 on the test operation e 9 v F 3 a 2 Operation check is completed ps oO 5 v o E 5 Restart the control i Module READY flag Xn0 3g Restart the online module change tursan 1 2 using GX Works2 Click the The module o c c perates based on O O O 30 mE 3 button to restart the initial setting sequence 5 E contor program started when Module a Q READY flag Xn0 is started o zs 4 The intelligent function module operates according to the previous setting when the user does not perform an Zo x operation ow 389 Appendix 4 4 Online module change procedures Perform the online module change using GX Works2 connected to a remote I O module This section describes two online module change procedures setting parameters using GX Works2 and the setting parameters using a sequence program 1 Sys
429. rom full scale to full scale The setting range depends on the input range setting lt Page 94 Section 3 4 2 12 Ex When the value of the buffer memory is set as follows CHO Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 38 temperature measurement range 200 0 to 400 0 C resolution 0 1 The setting range is 6000 to 6000 b Setting unit The value to be set differs depending on the stored value in CHO Decimal point position Un G1 to Un G4 CF Page 84 Section 3 4 2 2 No decimal place 0 Set a value in 1 C F or digit unit One decimal place 1 Set a value in 0 1 C F unit tenfold value c Default value The default values are set to 0 in all channels d Precautions For CHLI AT bias setting Un G53 Un G85 Un G117 Un G149 set the range where PID operation fluctuates slightly and the control result get no effect Depending on the controlled object accurate PID constants may not be obtained 118 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 30 CHLI Forward reverse action setting Un G54 Un G86 Un G118 Un G150 Standard Select whether to use channels in the forward action or reverse action Select the forward action for the cooling control Select the reverse action for the heating control For details on the forward action reverse action selection function refer to the following L gt Page 248 Section 4 20 a Setting range 0 Forward action 1 Reverse action b Default value
430. rom temperature sensor Temperature CH1 process i value PV Temperature 0 i process value PV Un G9 to Un G12 4 Manipulated Transistor output po CHA value MV ON OFF pulse CH1 operation Manipulated CHO 1 value MV Manipulated value N i MV i Un G13 to Un G16 CH4 i Set value SV CH1 Current Temperature Initial CHO Set value 9H J setting Set value SV SV setting Device to be To instruction UnG34 Un G66 controlled CH4 1 1 1 CH1 Disconnection Alarm 0 detection CH4 Un G98 Un G130 i i i 18 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW Features Optimum temperature adjustment control PID control The Q64TCN performs temperature adjustment control automatically when the user simply sets PID constants necessary for PID operation proportional band P integral time 1 derivative time D and temperature set value SV No special instruction is necessary to perform PID control Using the auto tuning function or self tuning function enables the PID constants to be set automatically by the Q64TCN Complicated PID operational expressions to determine PID constants are not necessary Combination of control mode A control mode can be selected from the standard control heating or cooling heating cooling control heating and cooling or mix control combination of the standard control and hea
431. rsion completed This flag becomes During conversion or unused CH during temperature conversion or for unused channels When the first temperature conversion is completed and the temperature process value PV is stored in the buffer memory First temperature conversion completed 14 is set The following figure shows the channel assignment of this area b15 to bi2 bii to b8 bz to b4 b3 to bo CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 156 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 87 Function extension bit monitor Un G787 CR The following settings configured on Switch Setting are stored Auto setting at Input Range Change Setting Change Rate Limiter Setting For details on Switch Setting refer to the following s Page 292 Section 6 2 The following figure and table show how the setting is stored b15 to b2 b1 bO o o o o o o o o o o o o o o b Bit data from b15 to b2 are fixed to 0 Flag name Function extension e Bit Description bit monitor When the input range is changed the related buffer memory data is automatically changed to prevent the values in those buffer bO Auto setting at Input Range Change memory areas from being out of the setting range 7 gt Page 99 Section 3 4 2 12 d Select whether the setting change rate limiter to be set in a batch b1 Setting Change Rate Limiter Setting or individually gt Page 187 Section 4 9 b2 to b
432. rt delay Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VDC 20MQ or more Between input channels 500VDC 20MQ or more gt Page 32 Section 2 1 6 Full scale x 1 0 3 to 255 l O occupied points 2 32 points 2 slots I O assignment Vacancy for 16 points 16 intelligent points 16 points slot I O assignment 16 intelligent points Connection terminal 18 point terminal block Two 18 point terminal blocks Applicable wire size Applicable solderless terminal 0 3mm to 0 75mm R1 25 3 Crimping terminal with sleeve is unavailable Internal current consumption 0 29A 0 33A Weight 0 20kg 0 30kg Outline dimensions 27 4 W mm x 98 H mm x 112 D mm 55 2 W mm x 98 H mm x 112 D mm 1 Calculate the accuracy in the following method only when it is not affected by noise Accuracy C full scale x indication accuracy cold junction temperature compensation accuracy Ex Accuracy at the input range of 38 200 0 to 400 0 C the operating ambient temperature of 35 C and the temperature process value PV of 300 C Full scale x indication accuracy cold junction temperature compensation accuracy 400 0 C 200 0 C x 0 007 1 0 C 5 2 2 When the Q64TCTTBWN or Q64TCRTBWN is used the device numbers of the I O signals increase by 16 points 38 depending on how many free points the left hand side slots have Hen
433. s he Default Read Automatic ETROM eating writ decimal Cunent Standard value Write setting IX contr ili hexadecimal NONE cooling e 3 availability sensor control 4 CT Simult Page 182 749 2EDy CH2 AT ia System area System area 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 81 selection Simultaneous Page 153 750 2 CH2 temperature rise System area System area 0 R x x Section status 3 4 2 82 Setting change Setting change Setting change Page 154 751 2EF CH2 rate limiter unit rate limiter unit rate limiter unit 0 R W x Section time setting time setting time setting 9 3 4 2 83 Cooling Page 103 proportional 752 2F04 CH3 System area band Pc System area 30 R W x Section 46 3 4 2 15 setting Cooling upper Page 108 753 2F 14 CH3 System area limit output System area 1000 R W x Section limiter 3 4 2 19 Cooling control Page 112 754 2F2y CH3 System area output cycle System area 30 R W x Section setting 3 4 2 23 Overlap dead Page 148 755 2F34 CH3 System area g System area 0 R W x Section band setting 3 4 2 72 t Manual reset 149 MMC MEM setting 3 4 2 73 Process value Process value Process value PV scaling PV scaling PV scaling Page 149 757 2F5y CH3 function function function 0 R W x Section enable disable enable disable enable disable 3 4 2 74 set
434. s 342 CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING c Program example Write the program to the CPU module on the master station E Hoo K4 Check the baton pass status of the master station H Check the data link status of 1101 the master station aff Ho K4 Check the baton pass status of eri the remote I O station Hs K3 Check the cyclic transmission status of the remote I O station a fi H Check the parameter communication 195 status of the remote I O station SB20 T100 T101 T102 T103 T104 _ Check the status of M EAS At r g AF A NO 100 master module SET M101 NO M100 M101 X1010 l SET Mio2 M101 X1010 i 1 Add the following MCR instruction to the end of the program MCR NO Program that changes the setting operation mode X23 Y101B M102 i 7 DE 1011 Change to the setting mode or operation mode E wo age 3 Initial setting program 2 c 2 X20 M102 PLS J Flag 0 for setting value write ON o MO SET MI 1 Flag 1 for setting value write ON o M M2 X1010 X1013 c Mt NI ME FMOVP Ki DO 1 CH2 to 4 Unused channel D setting Unused Q KO gt z M200 M201 a KI 2 3 o M202 M203 L3 4 gt 5 72 K1 K1 Hi H5D K1 M200 2 MKI gt _ ZP REMTO st Ki Ki Hi H7D D1 Ki M202 K2 ZP REMTO K1 K1 Hi H9D D2 K1 M204 Pro
435. s The set value SV to be referred is either set value SV monitor or set value SV setting depending on the alert mode When a setting change rate limiter is specified set value SV monitor follows the set value SV by the specified change rate For details on the setting change rate limiter setting refer to gt Page 117 Section 3 4 2 28 The following table describes the use of each set value SV of when a setting change rate limiter is specified and can be referred to use a deviation alert Reference area of the set Use when the set value SV is changed value SV This value is used when the temperature process value PV needs to follow the CHO Set value SV monitor changing set value SV within a consistent deviation E If the temperature process Un G25 to Un G28 value PV does not follow the set value SV and strays out of the set deviation range an alert occurs This value is used for the alert occurrence to be determined only by the deviation E from CHO Set value SV setting the set value SV In this case how well the temperature process value PV is following Un G34 Un G66 Un G98 the changing set value SV does not matter Even if the value in Set value SV Un G130 monitor Un G25 to Un G28 is changing an alert can occur depending on the deviation E from the set value SV a Set value SV and the setting change rate limiter setting The following figures sh
436. s Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion authorize use of the PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail safe redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTS are required For details please contact the Mitsubishi representative in your region INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing the Mitsubishi MELSEC Q series programmable controllers This manual describes the operating procedures system configuration parameter settings functions programming and troubleshooting of the Q series temperature control module Q64TCTTN Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTN Q64TCRTBWN hereafter abbreviated as Q64TCN Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and develop familiarity with the functions and performance of the MELSEC Q series programmable controller to handle the product correctly When applying the program examples introduced in this manual to the actual system ensure the applicability and confirm that it will not cause system control problems B Relevant modules Q64TCTTN Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTN Q64TCRTBWN Operating procedures are explained using GX Works2 When using GX Developer or GX Configurator CT refer to the following gt Page 364 Appendix 2 Inthe Temperature Contro
437. s buffer memory area 0 MAN mode shift uncompleted 1 MAN mode shift completed The following figure shows bits of the buffer memory area that correspond to each channel b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi b0 0 0 0 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 o G Bit data from b15 to b4 are fixed to 0 When shift to MAN mode is completed bits corresponding to appropriate channel become MAN mode shift completed 1 a How to shift the mode Shift the mode in the following buffer memory area AUTO MAN mode shift Un G50 Un G82 Un G114 Un G146 s 115 Section 3 4 2 26 b Setting manipulated value MV in MAN mode Set the manipulated value MV in the following buffer memory area MAN output setting Un G51 Un G83 Un G115 Un G147 s 116 Section 3 4 2 27 Set the manipulated value MV after confirming MAN mode shift completion flag Un G30 has become MAN mode shift completed 1 91 Ajowaw Jejnq ey S amp a jueuuuBissy yng t 11 E7PROM s PID constants read write completion flag Un G31 QB This flag is for showing whether the settings of the following buffer memory areas are completed or not E2PROM s PID constants read instruction Un G62 Un G94 Un G126 Un G158 125 Section 3 4 2 36 Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID consta
438. s on the module error history collection function refer to the following 1 QnUCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals 268 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 4 31 Error Clear Function When an error occurs the error can be cleared on the system monitor Clicking the Error Clear button on the system monitor clears the error code stored in Write data error code Un GO and turns off the ERR LED The operation is the same as when an error is cleared using Error reset instruction Yn2 However the error history is not cleared For how to clear an error using Error reset instruction Yn2 refer to the following Error reset instruction Yn2 7 s 55 Section 3 3 3 2 Y Diagnostics gt System Monitor gt The module where an error occurred Module s Detailed Information Module Monitoring Model Name Q64TCTTN Monitor Status I O Address 0010 Mount Position Main Base 1 Slot A Product Information 130410000000000 C Production Number m Module Information Module Access Possible Status of External Power Supply Fuse Blown Status Status of I O Address Verify Agree Clear Hold Setting Noise Filter Setting F Input Type Remote Password Setting Status 2 3 E E s 2 4 3 r3 ui m Error Information Error and Solution Latest
439. s temperature error per Q of wiring resistance of the thermocouple The temperature error be corrected by the sensor compensation function 5 205 Section 4 13 2 While temperature can be measured within less than 400 C 800 F the accuracy cannot be guaranteed 2 Q64TCRTN Q64TCRTBWN The following table lists the types of platinum resistance thermometers that can be used with the Q64TCRTN and Q64TCRTBWN and temperature measurement range F Platinum resistance Temperature Temperature thermometer type P Resolution P Resolution measurement range measurement range 200 0 to 600 0 300 to 1100 1 Pt100 0 1 200 0 to 200 0 300 0 to 300 0 0 1 200 0 to 500 0 300 to 900 1 JPt100 0 1 200 0 to 200 0 300 0 to 300 0 0 1 40 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 1 2 Sampling cycle and control output cycle This section describes the sampling cycle and control output cycle of the Q64TCN 1 Sampling cycle The Q64TCN performs PID operations in the order of CH1 CH2 CH3 CH1 CH2 The time from when PID operation is started on the current channel CHn until PID operation is restarted on the current channel CHn is called a sampling cycle The sampling cycle is 500ms The number of used channels and the settings of unused channels do not affect the sampling cycle CH1 PID CH2 PID CH3 PID CH4 PID CH1 PID CH2 PID operation operation operation operation operation oper
440. s the change in the characteristic of a controlled object and conditions for operation The following table lists the operations of the module with vibration ST The listed operations are those under the state where temperature is being controlled with the PID constants set Operation with vibration ST PID auto correction status b0 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G6771 is turned 0 OFF In addition Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 is turned on 2 PID constants are calculated based on a response waveform PID constants are set in the buffer memory and PID auto correction status b0 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un1G671 is turned 1 ON 4 CHLI Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 is turned off Temperature process value PV Set value SV Oscillation detected PID constants calculated gt Time i Response measured i 4 gt Self tuning in execution i 14 gt ON i i CHO Auto tuning status A T Xn4 to Xn7 OFF NE ON CHO PID auto correction status PNEU E E o bO of Un G575 Un G607 erecta eeu OFF i Un G639 Un G671 i PID constants Before change After change sees gt Executed by the Q64TCN a Conditions for self tuning vibration ST Self tuning is executed when the temperature process value PV goes outside the range that is judged as unstable b Precautions If self tuning vibration ST is executed on the
441. s value PV x Set value SV Temperature rise completion range Temperature rise completion range Temperature rise Set value SV judgment range Temperature rise completion range 777777777777777777777777777777777777777777777777777777777 When CHLI Temperature process value PV Un G9 to Un G12 enters the temperature rise judgment range CHLI Temperature rise judgment flag Un G17 to Un G20 is set to Within temperature rise completion range 1 Set the time from the temperature rise completion to Within temperature rise completion range 1 in Temperature rise completion soak time setting Un G168 a Setting range When the temperature unit of the input range is C 1 to 10 C When the temperature unit of the input range is F 1 to 10 F Other than above 1 to 10 96 of the full scale b Default value The default value is set to 1 128 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 42 Temperature rise completion soak time setting 168 Set the delay time for Temperature rise judgment flag Un G17 to Un G20 s Page 89 Section 3 4 2 6 to be set to Within temperature rise completion range 1 a Setting range The setting range is 0 to 3600 min b Default value The default value is set to O min 43 PID continuation flag Un G169 CE Set the operation status at the time when the mode has shifted from the operation mode to the setting mode Setting operation mode instruction
442. s where a great disturbance uncontrollable Time Heater powered ON disturbance occurs periodically Doing so may cause improper PID constants to be determined by self tuning If the function is used for such objects improper PID constants are set and the response for the set value SV change or disturbance becomes slow Ex Temperature control for an injection mold temperature control for a hot plate for a semiconductor manufacturing equipment 10 To forcibly start up self tuning Self tuning is started up when an error occurs with the control operation therefore the forced start up is not required To forcibly start up self tuning operate the following Set Control response parameter Un G49 Un G81 Un G113 Un G145 to Fast 2 s Page 114 Section 3 4 2 25 Set Integral time 1 setting Un G36 Un G68 UnG 100 Un1G132 to a small value 7 Page 105 Section 3 4 2 16 Set Derivative time D setting Un G37 Un G69 Un G101 Un G133 to a small value gt Page 105 Section 3 4 2 17 228 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 4 18 Peak Current Suppression Function The upper limit output limiter value for each channel is changed automatically and the peak current is suppressed by dividing timing for transistor outputs using this function When the peak current suppression When the peak current suppression control function is not used control function is used 20s 20s
443. sconnection is not detected where the set value SV is at the center Temperature process value PV Loop disconnection detection dead band Un G60 Un G92 Un G124 Un G156 Set value y Non alert area Set one above the other with SV the set value SV in the center gt Time For details on the loop disconnection detection function refer to the following gt Page 249 Section 4 21 a Setting range The setting range is identical to the temperature measurement range of the set input range gt 94 Section 3 4 2 12 When the value of the buffer memory is set as follows CHO Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 38 resolution 0 1 Loop disconnection detection dead band Un G60 Un G92 Un G124 Un G156 50 Loop disconnection detection dead band set value x resolution 50 x 0 1 5 0 C Within the range of the set value SV 5 0 C Loop disconnection is not detected b Setting unit The value to be set differs depending on the stored value Decimal point position Un G1 to Un G4 lt Page 84 Section 3 4 2 2 No decimal place 0 Set a value in 1 C F or digit unit One decimal place 1 Set a value in 0 1 C F unit tenfold value c Default value The default values are set to 0 in all channels 123 Jeynq ey jo S amp a jueuuuBissy yng t 35 CHO Unused channel setting Un
444. scretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been
445. sed for items in the menu bar and Settingparameters Qperatingiprocedure 1 Open th PLC Parameter ialog box Project window gt Parameter gt Select the Assignment tab the project window Select the type of the connected module Page 74 Section 7 12 Select the model name of the connected module Page 74 Section 7 1 3 Set the number of points assigned to each siot Page 74 Section 7 14 Specify a start VO number for each slot Page 74 Section 7 15 Seinstra Configure the switch setting of the buit I O or inteligent function modules Page 74 Section 7 1 6 Set the folowing Error Time Output Mode Page 75 Section 7 1 7 panan Sunes 121 Ex shows setting or operating examples LLLI shows reference manuals lt shows reference pages panew Bumes ITZ Setting Start X Y enables modification on the start O numbers assigned to connected modules Ex 1000 is specified in Start X Y to the slot where a 16 point module is connected the assignment Tange of an input module is changed to 1000 to X100F gr details refer to the following ra IELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals Point Set the type of the connected module in Type Setting a different type results in SPUNIT LAY ERR esihe intelligent functi
446. setting of the Q64TCN must be within the number of parameters which can be set in the CPU module including the number of other intelligent function module parameters For the maximum number of parameters which can be set in a CPU module maximum number of set parameter refer to the following manual QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 1 Number of parameters of the Q64TCN The following table lists the number of parameters that can be set for one Q64TCN Target module Initial setting Auto refresh setting Q64TCTTN 52 103 Max Q64TCRTN 51 Q64TCTTBWN 53 115 Max Q64TCRTBWN 52 2 Checking method The current number and maximum number of the set parameters in the intelligent function module can be checked by the following operation Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Right click gt Intelligent Function Module Parameter List Intelligent Function Module Parameter List Intelligent Function Module Parameter Setting Status Address Module Name 0000 Q64TCTTN 1 2 3 4 No Description 1 Total number of the parameters of the initial setting that is checked on the window 2 Maximum number of parameters of the initial setting 3 Total number of the parameters of the auto refresh setting that is checked on the window 4 Maximum number of parameters of the auto refresh setting 42 3 2 Function List This section
447. setting the above thermocouples Forwardjreverse action setting l Reverse Action 1 Reverse Action 1 Reverse Action 1 Reverse Action Text box type UD remm 1300 C 1300 C 1300 3 0 3 0 3 0 Used to specify as unused the channels where temperature control will not be performed and temperature sensors will not be connected 2 Click Clear value for Gray Cells to set items unnecessary for the mode set on Switch Setting to 0 3 Double click the item to change the setting and enter the set value tems to select from a pull down list Double click the item to set to display the pull down list Select the item tems to enter in a text box fumes c9 Double click the item to set and enter the value If writing is performed without setting unnecessary items for the mode set on Switch Setting to 0 a write data error error code LILILI2 may occur For details on set values refer to the following Setting item Reference Input range Page 94 Section 3 4 2 12 Set value SV setting Page 102 Section 3 4 2 14 Unused channel setting Page 124 Section 3 4 2 35 Proportional band P setting Heating control proportional band setting Ph Page 103 Section 3 4 2 15 Cooling proportional band Pc setting 293 294 Setting item Reference Integral time 1 setting Page 105 Section 3 4 2 16 Derivative time D setting Page 105 Section 3 4 2 17 C
448. sion and product information The Product Information field shows the Q64TCN function version and product information b Checking the error code The Latest Error Code field shows the error code stored in Write data error code Un GO in the Q64TCN Press Update Error History to display the content shown under Latest Error Code as No 1 Module s Detailed Information Monitor Status Module Model Name Q64TCTTN Address 0010 Mount Position Main Base 1 Slot A Product Information 13041000000000 Function version Production Number Monitoring Module Information Module Access Possible Status of External Power Supply Product information Fuse Blown Status Status of I O Address Verify Agree I O Clear Hold Setting Noise Filter Setting Input Type Remote Password Setting Status Error Information Error and Solution Latest Error Code Update Error History 0285 Contents The setting of the upper lower limit value output limiter or the upper lower limit setting limiter is invalid Error Clear Error Code Display Format 0285 Solution Set the value where the upper limit value is greater than the lower limit value smeis H98YD 88 DEC The error history is sequentially displayed from an old error The latest error is displayed at the bottom line Stop Monitor 359 3 Hardware information On the Module s Detailed Inform
449. solution resistance of 10 range C Q range F 19 R 0 to 1700 1 0 030 0 to 3000 1 0 054 0 to 500 0 to 1000 0 to 800 1 1 0 to 2400 0 to 1300 K 200 0 to 400 0 0 005 0 008 0 0 to 400 0 0 1 0 0 to 1000 0 0 1 0 0 to 500 0 0 0 to 800 0 0 to 500 0 to 1000 0 to 800 1 0 to 1600 1 0 to 1200 0 to 2100 J 0 003 0 006 0 0 to 400 0 0 0 to 500 0 0 1 0 0 to 1000 0 0 1 0 0 to 800 0 200 to 400 200 to 200 0 to 700 4 0 to 200 300 to 400 T 0 to 400 0 004 0 008 200 0 to 400 0 0 1 0 0 to 700 0 0 1 0 0 to 400 0 0 to 1700 1 0 030 0 to 3000 1 0 054 0 to 1800 2 1 0 038 0 to 3000 2 1 0 068 0 to 400 1 0 to 1800 1 0 005 E 0 to 1000 0 003 0 0 to 700 0 0 1 N 0 to 1300 1 0 006 0 to 2300 1 0 011 0 to 400 0 to 700 1 1 0 009 U 200 to 200 0 004 300 to 400 0 0 to 600 0 0 1 0 to 400 0 to 800 1 1 0 006 0 to 900 0 to 1600 L 0 003 0 0 to 400 0 0 1 0 0 to 900 0 v v PLII 0 to 1200 1 0 005 0 to 2300 1 0 010 39 UJUO JO eouejsiseJ pue uonnjosei eBueJ eJnyeJeduue sJosues eunjeJjeduie ejqesn Jo ed eoueuuoLeg m Thermocouple Temperature Effect from wiring Temperature Effect from wiring type measurement Resolution resistance of 19 measurement Resolution resistance of 10 range 1 F Q t W5Re W26Re 0 to 2300 1 0 017 0 to 3000 1 0 021 1 Mean
450. ss value PV is abnormal IN 353 WIPE oe aed cde ces te mE ades Me eee ie fie ac 270 WIIG eres few det ead soap 280 281 Within range 194 Write data error code Un GO 84 Write error flag 2 49 350 Temperature rise completion range setting Un G167 413 REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print date July 2011 SH NA 080989ENG A First edition edition Japanese manual version SH 080988 A This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2011 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION 414 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s di
451. ss with the co H the system area smallest number of the buffer cme memory area where an error was Delete the program that is writing 5 data to the system area detected is stored Follow the instructions below for error reset 1 Change the mode to the setting mode lt The data written is retained 2 Set the correct value and turn off When data is written to multiple on and off Setting change Data is being written in the operation instruction YnB 4 System areas the address with the 00034 mode to the area where data be amiallest number bt the Buiter 3 Turn off on and off Error reset written only in the setting mode memory area where an error was instruction Yn2 gt 5 If switching from the operation mode detected is stored to the setting mode check that PID continuation flag Un G169 is set to Stop 0 and turn on and off Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 The data written is retained If temperature time or percentage settings exceed upper limit value lower limit value change the 4 Data outside the settable range is data within those values 00044 Set data within the range 354 being written When data is written to multiple system areas the address with the smallest number of the buffer memory area where an error was detected is stored CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code hexadecimal Cause Operation at error occurrence
452. struction 3 4 2 36 Auk Automatic Automatic backup setting backup setting Page 126 127 7 ae g ater auto after auto 0 RIW x x Section tuning of PID i of PID constants g i tuning of PID 3 4 2 37 constants constants 2 TT Page 94 128 80 CH4 Input range 7 RT R W x Section 5 3 4 2 12 Page 101 St d Stop mode St d 129814 e ipu S 1 RW x Section setting setting setting 3 4 2 13 64 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Target Setting contents channel E PROM Address he Default Read Automatic ik eating gt write decimal Standard i E value Write setting Reference current cooling Mix control availability hexadecimal control 1 2 3 sensor control i CT Page 102 Set value SV 130 82 Pus Set value SV SV Set value SV Socio setting setting setting 3 4 2 14 Heating P ional proportional Proportional Page 103 131 83 e Dus beide band P 30 RIW x Section and P setting d setting 3 4 2 15 setting 105 i Integral time I i 132 84 Hi Integral time 1 g E 1 Integral time 1 TT T setting setting setting 3 4 2 16 Derivative ti Derivative time Derivative ti 105 133 85 erivative time erivative time ea 0 setti
453. t and os Calculated CHO Simultaneous temperature rise dead time H value Un G732 Un G748 Un G764 Un G780 i CHLIAT simultaneous temperature rise parameter OFF calculation completion bO of Un G573 Un G605 Un G637 Un G669 Executed in a sequence program gt Executed by the Q64TCN 238 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS c Condition for the simultaneous temperature rise AT The simultaneous temperature rise parameter is calculated when all the following conditions are satisfied after the procedure described on 238 Section 4 19 5 a is executed When the module is in the PID control all of the proportional band P integral time I and derivative time D are not 0 When the temperature process value PV is within the temperature measurement range before the simultaneous temperature rise AT is executed If the temperature process value PV goes outside the range after the simultaneous temperature rise AT is executed an error occurs with the auto tuning function For the operation of the Q64TCN in that situation refer to 5 Page 183 Section 4 6 8 b When Output variation limiter setting Un G44 Un G76 Un G108 Un G140 is set to 0 3 Page 110 Section 3 4 2 20 If all the conditions described above are not satisfied the simultaneous temperature rise parameter is not calculated Only PID constants are calculated The following shows how the Q64TCN operates wh
454. t and two outputs QCPU Another term for the MELSEC Q series CPU module Redundant CPU A generic term for the Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU External input The abbreviation for input from connectors for external devices External output The abbreviation for output to connectors for external devices Programming tool A generic term for GX Works2 and GX Developer GX Works2 GX Developer GX Configurator TC The product name of the software package for the MELSEC programmable controllers A setting and monitoring tool added in GX Developer for temperature control modules Buffer memory The memory of an intelligent function module used to store data such as setting values and monitored values for communication with a CPU module PACKING LIST The following items are included in the package of this product Model Item name Quantity Q64TCTTN Q64TCTTN temperature control module 1 Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCTTBWN temperature control module with the disconnection detection function 1 Q64TCRTN Q64TCRTN temperature control module 1 Q64TCRTBWN Q64TCRTBWN temperature control module with the disconnection detection function 1 Q64TCTTN RTN U HW Before Using the Product 1 16 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW CHAPTER 1 overview This chapter describes the overview of the Q64TCN 1 The Q64TCTTN and Q64TCRTN The Q64TCTTN and Q64TCRTN perform PID operation to reach the target temperature
455. t Address Station No SOS 16Point 0000 16Point 0010 16Point 0020 16Point 0030 16Point 0040 Extension Base2 Extension Bases Extension Based Extension Bases Extension Bases Extension 7 Online Module Change m Operation Module Change Execution r Target Module Address 0010 Installation Module Name Confirmation Module Control Restart Status Change Module Selection Completed Status Guidance Please turn off signal of the changed module when you change the intelligent Function module press next button when you are ready APPENDICES Open the System Monitor window D Diagnostics Online Module Change Select Online module change in Mode and double click the module to be changed online Click to enable a module change If the following error window appears click and perform the operation described on and after gt Page 402 Appendix 4 6 3 MELSOFT Application The target module didn t respond The task is advanced to the installation confirmation Check that the RUN LED on the module is off disconnect the external cable and remove the module Point f the terminal block is removed the temperature process value PV may vary within the accuracy range due to the individual differences in the cold junction temperature compensation resist
456. t is allowed by using unused x 4 m i channels temperature input terminals Heater disconnection The current which flows in the heater main circuit can be measured 259 detection function and disconnections can be detected Section 4 26 Output off time current Page 263 An error of when the transistor output is off can be detected O O error detection function Section 4 27 Buffer memory data The buffer memory data can be stored and backed up in the Page 264 backup function E PROM Section 4 28 Up to 16 errors and alarms that occur on the Q64TCN are stored in Page 266 Error history function O O the buffer memory as history Section 4 29 44 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Enable or disable S Heating Item Description Standard cooling control control Error contents be notified to the CPU module when errors and Module error history AK Page 268 alarms occur on the Q64TCN Error information is held in the O O collection function P Section 4 30 memory inside of the CPU module as module error history When an error occurs the error can be cleared on the system Page 269 Error clear function O O monitor Section 4 31 45 1511 uonoun4 Z 3 3 This section describes the I O signals of the Q64TCN 3 3 1 I O signal list Signals Transferred to from the CPU Module This section desc
457. t set value 1 1 Upper Limit Input Alert 500 C 0 Not Warning 0 C 0 Not Warning 0 C 0 Not Warning 0 C 6 Setting on the master station 1 Create a project on GX Works2 Select QCPU Q mode for PLC Series and select the CPU module to be used for PLC Type SX Project gt New 332 New Project Project Type Simple Project Use Label PLC Series QCPU mode PLC Type Q10UDH Language Ladder Cancel CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING 2 Display the network parameter setting window and configure the setting as follows x Project window gt gt Parameter gt Network Parameter c Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET Network Parameter MELSECNET CC IE Ethernet Module Configuration Poste Motte __ OOO Necessary Setting No Setting Already Set Set if itis needed No Setting Already Set 7 Start 1 0 No Valid Module During Other Station Access fi Interlink Transmission Parameters Please input 16 point unit HEX to start No in which module is mounted Routing Parameters Assignment Image Check End Cancel Print Window Preview 3 Display the network range assignment setting window and configure the setting as follows Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET gt sesenwen 7 N
458. t value is read Buffer memory address Buffer memory area name Reference CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Proportional band P setting Un 35 Un 67 Un 99 Un 131 CHO Heating proportional band Ph Un 35 Un 67 Un 99 Un 131 setting Page 103 Section 3 4 2 15 CHO Cooling proportional band Pc Un 720 Un 736 Un 752 Un 768 setting Integral time I setting Un 36 Un 68 Un 100 Un 132 Page 105 Section 3 4 2 16 CHO Derivative time D setting Un 37 Un 69 Un 101 Un 133 Page 105 Section 3 4 2 17 CHLI Loop disconnection detection Un 59 Un 91 Un 123 Un G155 Page 122 Section 3 4 2 33 judgment time b Setting range 0 Not requested 1 Requested c Default value The default values are set to Not requested 0 in all channels d Precautions When Requested 1 is set do not perform the following operations An incorrect value may be stored in the E PROM Change of the set value of the buffer memory read from the E2PROM by this instruction lt gt Page 125 Section 3 4 2 36 a 2 back up s Page 264 Section 4 28 Default setting registration Page 56 Section 3 3 3 5 Auto tuning lt gt Page 173 Section 4 6 Ajowaw Jayng ay Seed jueuuuBissy yng t Point When the initial setting by a programming tool is already configured PID constants should be backed up to an E2PROM after the auto tuning Turni
459. t variation limiter setting 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 20 Page 111 45 2Dy CH1 Sensor correction value setting 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 21 Page 111 46 2 CH1 Adjustment sensitivity dead band setting 5 R W x Section 3 4 2 22 Control output Heating control Heating control Page 112 47 2Fy CH1 p output cycle output cycle 30 R W x Section cycle setting A setting setting 3 4 2 23 Page 113 48 304 CH1 Primary delay digital filter setting 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 24 Page 114 49 314 CH1 Control response parameters 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 25 Page 115 50 324 CH1 AUTO MAN mode shift 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 26 Page 116 51 334 CH1 MAN output setting 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 27 Setting change rate limiter Setting change rate Pags ue 52 34 CH1 ns um 0 R W x Section limiter temperature rise 3 4 2 28 Page 118 53 354 CH1 AT bias 0 R W Section 3 4 2 29 Forward reverse 54 36 CH1 System area System area 1 R W x Section action setting 3 4 2 30 1300 T TT 55 374 CH1 Upper limit setting limiter 6000 R W 120 RT 9 Section 3 4 2 31 56 38 CH1 Lower limit setting limiter 2000 R W RD 57 39 CH1 System area nn Page 121 58 3Ay CH1 Heater disconnection alert setting 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 32 L eee Page 125 59 3By CH1 i System area System area 480 R W x O Section detection 3 4 2 33 judgment time
460. ta link the initial settings are not configured 385 Bumes jeu y 40 pesn sem eouenbes e ueuM 9 xipueddy 1edoje eq ueuM eunpeoougd ejnpojy eujuo xipueddy 386 5 Restarting control Online module change Operation Target module Module change execution 1 0 address d PERG Module name 4 Installation confirmation I r Stat Module control restart Say Change module installation completion Status Guidance The controls such as 1 0 FROM TO instruction executions and automatic refresh for the installed module are restarted Please confirm the parameter setting and wiring etc and execute Cancel MELSOFT series GX Developer X e 1 Online module change completed 1 Open the Online module change window again 2 When the window appears click to restart the control Module READY flag Xn0 turns on 3 The online module change is complete APPENDICES Appendix 4 Online Module Change Procedure When Using GX Works2 This section describes the online module change procedure of using GX Works2 The online module change procedure using GX Works2 is only applicable when using the Q64TCN on the MELSECNET H remote I O network When the Q64TCN is not used on the MELSECNET H remote I O network perform the online module change using GX Developer gt 372 Appendix 3 When performing an online m
461. table area in setting mode refer to the buffer memory list gt 57 Section 3 4 1 4 In the operation mode refers to one of the following states When Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 or Setting operation mode status Xn1 is on When Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 turns on and off and PID continuation flag Un G169 is set to Continue 1 5 Ex When an error occurs in CH1 Alert 1 mode setting Un G192 and CH1 Alert 2 mode setting UnXG193 0CO hex in the buffer memory address with the smallest number Un G192 is stored in Error code Un GO 355 ISI 9po2 Jou3 98 356 When a value outside the setting range is written in the following buffer memory areas while in setting mode the error code LILILI4 is stored Switching to operation mode without error reset changes the error code to LILILI3 If this happens take the corrective action for error code O00034 Buffer memory area Buffer memory address Reference name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 Page 94 Section 3 4 2 12 Alert 1 mode setting Un G192 Un G208 Un G224 Un G240 Alert 2 mode setting Un G193 Un G209 Un G225 Un G241 Page 135 Section 3 4 2 52 Alert 3 mode setting Un G194 Un G210 Un G226 Un G242 Alert 4 mode setting Un G195 Un G211 Un G227 Un G243 Error code priorities are as described below Priority I Fe Es 6 3 75 24 When error codes are in t
462. taneous temperature rise Un G732 Un G748 Un G764 Un G780 Page 152 Section 3 4 2 80 dead time Before executing the simultaneous temperature rise function the simultaneous temperature rise parameter needs to be automatically calculated or arbitrarily set a Automatic calculation The simultaneous temperature rise parameter can be automatically calculated using the following two methods Simultaneous temperature rise AT gt Page 238 Section 4 19 5 Simultaneous temperature rise parameter setting using self tuning lt gt Page 241 Section 4 19 6 Point If the setting in Peak current suppression control group setting Un G784 is changed after the simultaneous temperature rise parameter is calculated the intended control may not be performed If so calculate the simultaneous temperature rise parameter again For details on the peak current suppression function refer to the following gt Page 229 Section 4 18 uonouny esr einjejeduie snoeueynwis 6 237 5 Simultaneous temperature rise AT PID constants and the simultaneous temperature rise parameter are calculated The waveform upon execution is the same as that for the auto tuning function For details on the auto tuning function refer to the following Page 173 Section 4 6 a How to execute the simultaneous temperature rise AT function Follow the instructions below 1 During the setting mode Setting op
463. taneous temperature rise dead time Un G732 Un G748 Un G764 Un G780 i ON CHLIAT simultaneous temperature rise parameter OFF calculation error status b1 of Un G573 Un G605 Un G637 Un G669 Executed in a sequence program aia gt Executed by the Q64TCN 240 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 6 The simultaneous temperature rise parameter setting using self tuning The control response at the time of temperature rise is constantly monitored during self tuning and the simultaneous temperature rise parameter is calculated based on the characteristics of a controlled object For details on the self tuning function refer to the following Page 219 Section 4 17 a Operation with the simultaneous temperature rise parameter setting using self tuning The Q64TCN operates as following Operation of the Q64TCN When self tuning is normally started up Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 is turned on and the simultaneous temperature rise parameter is calculated The calculated value is stored in the buffer memory when the simultaneous temperature rise parameter is normally calculated Then Simultaneous temperature rise parameter correction status b1 of Un G575 Un G607 Un G639 Un G671 is turned 1 ON Auto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 is turned off and the module is shifted to the PID control ON CHLIAuto tuning status Xn4 to Xn7 OFF Control status
464. tch Setting For details on the setting method refer to the following L gt Page 292 Section 6 2 For details on the control mode refer to the following s Page 159 Section 4 1 Ajowaw Jeynq ay Jo Sed jueuuuBissy yng t 133 134 51 CHO Auto tuning mode selection Un G184 to Un G187 QAB Select the auto tuning mode from the following two modes according to the controlled object to be used Auto tuning mode Description Standard mode The standard mode is appropriate for most controlled objects This mode is especially suitable for controlled objects that have an extremely slow response speed or can be affected by noise or disturbance However PID constants of slow response low gain may be calculated from controlled objects whose ON time or OFF time in the auto tuning is only around 10s In this case PID constants of fast response can be calculated by selecting the high response mode and performing the auto tuning High response mode This mode is suitable for controlled objects whose ON time or OFF time in the auto tuning is only around 10s PID constants of fast response high gain can be calculated However the temperature process value PV may oscillates near the set value SV because of the too high gain of the PID constants calculated In this case select the normal mode and perform the auto tuning For details on the auto tuning function refer to the following
465. tem configuration The following system configuration is used to explain the online module change procedure Remote master station Station No 0 Remote I O station Station No 1 QCPU QJ71LP21 25 X Y00 to X Y1F QJ72LP25 25 16 empty points Q64TCTTN X Y1010 to X Y101F GX Works2 Network No 1 2 Procedure The following flow shows the online module change procedure Start When parameters are set on GX Works2 Page 391 Appendix 4 5 1 When parameters are set on the sequence program Page 398 Appendix 4 6 1 Stop the operation When parameters are set on GX Works2 Page 393 Appendix 4 5 2 When parameters are set on the sequence program Page 400 Appendix 4 6 2 When parameters are set on GX Works2 Page 395 Appendix 4 5 3 Mount a new module 7 Pag 3 When parameters are set on the sequence program 402 Appendix 4 6 3 Check the operation Remove the module When parameters are set on GX Works2 Page 395 Appendix 4 5 4 When parameters are set on the sequence program Page 402 Appendix 4 6 4 When parameters are set on GX Works2 Page 397 Appendix 4 5 5 When parameters are set on the sequence program Page 405 Appendix 4 6 5 Restart the control End 390 APPENDICES Appendix 4 5 When parameters were configured usi
466. temperature adjustment control automatically by merely setting the PID constants proportional band The Q64TCTT BW allows you to set the temperature measurement ranges which meet the operating temperatures of the ER Set value Item Description CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 2 ThermocoupleK 2 ThermocoupleK 2 ThermocoupleK 2 ThermocoupleK Set the temperature sensor Measured Measured Measured Measured Input range used for the Q64TCN and the Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature measurement range Range 0 to Range 0 to Range 0 to Range 0 to 1300 C 1300 C 1300 C 1300 C Set value SV Set the target temperature 200 250 300 350 setting value of PID control Configure this setting when the channels where the Unused channel temperature control is not 0 Used 0 Used 0 Used 0 Used setting performed and the temperature sensor is not connected are set to be unused Control output cycle tting Heati t th N OFF setting Heating Set the pulse 20s 20s 20s 20s control output cycle cycle of the transistor output setting Simultaneous Set a group to perform the temperature rise simultaneous temperature rise 1 Group 1 1 Group 1 2 Group 2 2 Group 2 group setting function for each channel 314 CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING e Set value Item Description CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Set the target channels for the Peak current peak current suppression suppression co
467. ter A hermometer A 9 N1B4 CH1 Resistance CH1 Resistance CH1 Resistance thermometer thermometer hermometer 40 N2 B2 CH2B CH2 Resistance CH2B CH2 Resistance CH2B CH2 Resistance thermometer B thermometer B hermometer B 11 IN1 b1 CH1b CH1 Resistance CH1b CH1 Resistance CH1b CH1 Resistance thermometer b thermometer b thermometer b 42 IN2 b2 CH2b CH2 Resistance CH2b CH2 Resistance CH2b CH2 Resistance thermometer b thermometer b thermometer b 43 N3 A3 CH3A CH3 Resistance MT3A Monitor 3 resistance CH3A CH3 Resistance thermometer A thermometer A hermometer A 44 N4 A4 CH4 A CH4 Resistance MT4A Monitor 4 resistance CHA A CH4 Resistance thermometer A thermometer A hermometer A 45 N3 B3 CH3B CH3 Resistance MT3B Monitor 3 resistance CH3B CH3 Resistance thermometer B thermometer B hermometer B 46 N4 B4 CH4B CH4 Resistance MT4 B Monitor 4 resistance CH4B CH4 Resistance thermometer B thermometer B hermometer B 17 IN3 b3 CH3 b CH3 Resistance MT3 b Monitor 3 resistance CH3 b CH3 Resistance thermometer b thermometer b thermometer b 48 IN4 b4 CH4 b CH4 Resistance MT4 b Monitor 4 resistance CHA b CH4 Resistance thermometer b thermometer b thermometer b 276 Terminal Mix control normal mode Mix control expanded mode Indication number Symbol Name Symbol Name 1 OUT1 L1H CH1 Heating output L1H CH1 Heating output 2 OUT2 Lic CH1 Cooling out
468. ter Page 121 2 isconnection i 154 9 CH4 disconnection alert disconnection 0 R W x Section alert setting setting alert setting 3 4 2 32 Loop Loop Page 122 155 9 Qui dconnecton ura eg ug 480 RW x Section detection detection 3 4 2 33 judgment time judgment time Loop Loop Page 123 di di fi 156 9Cy CH4 bob System area nd oe 0 R W Section detection dead detection dead 3 42 34 band band equ Unused Page 124 setting i 3 4 2 35 E PROM s PID E PROM sPID E2PROM s PID Page 125 158 9E CH4 constants read constants read constants read 0 R W x x Section instruction instruction 9 instruction 3 4 2 36 m Automatic Automatic Lm backup setting backup setting Page 126 159 9F iid ms after auto after auto 0 RIW x x Section 9 tuning of PID tuning of PID 3 4 2 37 of PID constants constants constants 160 A0 to System area E 163 A3 Page 127 164 4 All CHs Alert dead band setting 5 R W x Section 3 4 2 38 Page 127 165 A54 All CHs Number of alert delay 0 R W x O Section 3 4 2 39 Heater disconnection output off time current error Page 128 166 A6 All CHs detection delay count 3 R W x Section 3 4 2 40 128 167 7 All CHs Temperature rise completion range setting 1 R W x Section 3 4 2 41 Page 129 168 A8 All CHs Temperature rise completion soak time setting 0 R W x Section 3
469. the Parameter window 1 Start up Parameter on the Project window Project window Intelligent Function Module gt Module name gt Parameter 0010 Q64TCTTN Parameter Control Mode Standard Control Clear Value for Gray Cells Det the value of unnecessary items For control mode to 0 Clear Value for Gray Cells button Item CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Basic setting Set the temperature conversion system E 2 ThermocoupleK Measured 2 ThermocoupleK Measured 2 ThermocoupleK Measured 2 Thermocouplek Measured puranga Temperature Range 0 to 1300 C Temperature to 1300 C Temperature Range 0 to 1300 Temperature Range 0 to 1300 C Set value SV setting Oc oc oc oc P T d li tt Unused channel setting O Used _z P Used O Used O Used ull aown 115 ype Control basic parameter settirfy ure adjustment control automatically by merely setting the PID constants Proportional band P setting Heating control proportional band setting Ph Su proportional band Pc 3 095 30 Integral time I setting 2405 2405 Derivative time D setting 60s 60s 60s Control output cycle setting Heating control output 30s 30s 30s 30s cycle setting Control response parameter 0 510 0 510 0 510 0 510 Stop Setting 1 Monitor 1 Monitor 1 Monitor 1 Monitor PID continuation flag O Stop Control detail parameter The Q64TCTT BW allows you to set the temperature measurement ranges which meet the operating temperatures of
470. the PLC parameter Default value will be shown in the dialog if the Switch Setting of the PLC parameter contains an out of range value uo Burst ueuM Set value Item CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Output Setting at CPU Stop Error 0 CLEAR 0 CLEAR 0 CLEAR 0 CLEAR Control Mode Selection 0 Standard Control Auto setti t Input R uto setting at Input Range 0 Disable Change Setting Change Rate Limiter 0 Temperature Rise Temperature Drop Batch Setting 335 4 Display the Q64TCTTN initial setting window click Clear Value For Gray Cells and configure the setting as follows Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Q64TCTTN gt Parameter y 001 0 Q64TCTTN Parameter Control Mode Standard Control Item Basic setting Input range Set value SV setting Unused channel setting Control basic parameter setting Proportional band P setting Heating control proportional band setting Ph Cooling proportional band Pc setting Integral time I setting Derivative time D setting Control output cycle setting Heating control output cycle setting Control response parameter Stop Mode Setting PID continuation Flag Control detail parameter setting Forward reverse action setting Upper limit setting limiter Lower limit setting limiter Setting change rate limiter or Setting change rate limiter Temperature rise
471. ting setting 9 setting Process value Process value Process value PV scalin PV scalin PV scalin 758 2 6 CH3 PV n k ev n a 0 R W x lower limit lower limit lower limit value value value Page 150 Section Process value Process value Process value 3 42 75 PV scalin PV scalin PV scalin 759 2 7 CH3 Pv te 3 PV cs 3 Pv nw 9 0 R W x upper limit upper limit upper limit value value value Process value D ig Process value Page 150 760 2F8 CH3 PV scaling scaling by scaling 0 R x x Section value ue value 3 4 2 76 TA Derivative Derivative Page 150 Derivative action 761 2F9 CH3 action action 0 R W x Section selection 2 6 9 ue selection selection 3 4 2 77 Simultaneous Simultaneous Page 151 temperature d 762 2FAW CH3 temperature rise System area 0 R W x Section ting 3 4 2 78 group setting setting 78 Simult Simultaneous Renney Page 151 763 2FBy CH3 temperature rise System area 0 R W Section gradient data 3 4 2 79 data 7 JSI yu wu isse NOLT9O L Ve jueuuuBissy yng t Target Setting contents channel 2 Address Pe rad Default Read Automatic EPROM eating 3 wri decimal Standard E trol value Write setting
472. ting Un G35 Un G67 Un G99 Un G131 Gia Heating proportional band Ph setting Un G35 Un G67 Un G99 Un G131 2 Cooling proportional band Pc setting Un G720 Un G736 Un G752 Un G768 Set proportional band P heating proportional band Ph cooling proportional band Pc to perform PID control In the heating cooling control set heating proportional band Ph to Un G35 Un G67 Un G99 UnG131 a Setting range Set the value within the following ranges for the full scale of the set input range gt Page 94 Section 3 4 2 12 Proportional band P setting 0 to 10000 0 0 to 1000 0 Heating proportional band Ph setting 0 to 10000 0 0 to 1000 0 Cooling proportional band Pc setting 1 to 10000 0 1 to 1000 0 Ex When the value of the buffer memory is set as follows CHO Input range Un G32 Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 38 temperature measurement range 200 0 to 400 0 C CHO Proportional band P setting Un G35 Un G67 Un G99 Un G131 100 10 0 Full scale x Proportional band P setting 400 0 C 200 0 x 0 1 60 C Set the proportional band P to 60 C b Two position control Set the proportional band P heating proportional band Ph to 0 The auto tuning cannot be performed For details on control methods refer to the following s Page 163 Section 4 3 c Default value The default values are set to 30 3 0 in all channels 103 Jang ey
473. ting can not only be set manually but also be calculated automatically Automatic calculation is performed when the simultaneous temperature rise AT auto tuning or self tuning when the automatic calculation of the temperature rise parameter is set is normally completed 151 Jeynq ey S amp a jueuuuBissy yng t 80 CHO Simultaneous temperature rise dead time Un G732 Un G748 Un G764 Un G780 82 Set Simultaneous temperature rise dead time time taken for the temperature to start rising after the output is turned on For details on the simultaneous temperature rise function refer to the following Page 234 Section 4 19 a Setting range The setting range is 0 to 3600 s b Default value The default values are set to 0 s in all channels Point This setting can not only be set manually but also be calculated automatically Automatic calculation is performed when the simultaneous temperature rise AT auto tuning or self tuning when the automatic calculation of the temperature rise parameter is set is normally completed 81 Simultaneous temperature rise AT mode selection Un G733 Un G749 Un G765 UnG781 8 Select mode of the auto tuning For details on the auto tuning function refer to the following Page 173 Section 4 6 For details on the simultaneous temperature rise function refer to the following Page 234 Section 4 19 a
474. ting change instruction DO to D8 Write data storage device using Z P REMTO instruction for the initial setting D9 Read data storage device using Z P REMFR instruction for E PROM s PID constants read D10 Write data storage device for Z P REMTO instruction for E7PROM s PID constants read D11 Read data storage device for the Z P REMFR instruction for EEPPROM s PID constants read D50 Write data error code D51 CH1 Temperature process value PV MO For writing set value 0 M1 For writing set value 1 M2 For writing set value 2 M10 CH1 Auto tuning completion flag M100 Master module status check device for the MC and MCR instructions M101 M102 Initial setting auxiliary device M200 to M217 Z P REMTO instruction completion result device M224 to M227 Z P REMFR instruction completion result device M300 to M305 CH1 E2PROM s PID constants read flag M310 M311 Z P REMTO instruction completion result device M312 M313 Z P REMFR instruction completion result device M314 M315 Z P REMTO instruction completion result device SB20 Module status SB47 Baton pass status of own station SB49 Data link status own station SW70 0 Baton pass status of each station station number 1 SW74 0 Cyclic transmission status of each station station number 1 SW78 0 Parameter communication status of each station station number 1 T100 to T104 Interlock for own station and other station
475. ting cooling control Four loops on one module The maximum of four loops of temperature adjustment control can be performed simultaneously In addition loop control can be performed using analog modules on the base unit or the network input from an A D converter module or output to a D A converter module can be processed Simultaneous temperature rise of multiple loops Temperatures of multiple loops can be adjusted to simultaneously reach the set value of each temperatures are controlled evenly without any partial heat exaggeration This function saves energy and cost Suppression of peak current Current flows into a heater can be suppressed by controlling output so that each channel s output does not turn on at the same time as other channels This function saves energy and cost RFB limiter function The RFB Reset feed back limiter suppresses overshoot which is liable to occur at a startup or when a temperature process value PV is increased Correction of temperature process value PV The difference between the temperature process value PV and actual temperature can be corrected easily using the following functions 1 point sensor compensation standard function Corrects the difference by setting the rate of correction value to the full scale of the input range 2 point sensor compensation function Corrects the difference based on the inclination of the line on the two points set in advance Primary delay digital filte
476. ting mean is turned on and its cooling mean is turned off To cool down the target subject its heating mean is turned off and its cooling mean is turned on 159 4 uonoejes L p 2 Selectable control mode A control mode can be selected from five modes Select the control mode on Switch Setting For details on the setting method refer to the following Page 292 Section 6 2 Control mode Contents Number of controllable loops Standard control Performs the standard control of four channels Standard control 4 loops Heating cooling control normal mode Performs the heating cooling control CH3 and CH4 cannot be used Heating cooling control 2 loops Heating cooling control expanded mode Performs the heating cooling control The number of loops is expanded using an output module and others in the system Heating cooling control 4 loops Mix control normal mode be used Performs the standard control and the heating cooling control CH2 cannot Standard control 2 loops Heating cooling control 1 loop Mix control expanded mode Performs the standard control and the heating cooling control The number of loops is expanded using an output module and others in the system Standard control 2 loops Heating cooling control 2 loops Control for each channel is as follows Standard Heat
477. tion the difference between the temperature process value PV and the actual temperature between the two points selected in advance a corrected offset value and a corrected gain value is stored Based on this gradient the difference between a sensor and the actual temperature is corrected 2 point sensor compensation is performed in the setting mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 off In addition set Stop mode setting Un G33 Un G65 Un G97 Un G129 to Monitor 1 Temperature CHO 2 point sensor compensation gain value process value PV compensation value Un G547 Un G579 Un G611 Un G643 P CHLI 2 point sensor compensation gain value reuse measured value Un G546 Un G578 Un G610 Un G642 After rrection CHO 2 point sensor compensation offset value compensation value Un G545 Un G577 Un G609 Un G641 I f correction gt Input temperature CHO 2 point sensor compensation offset value measured value Un G544 Un G576 Un G608 Un G640 209 uonouny uonesuedulo2 Josues eir a How to execute 2 point sensor compensation when using GX Works2 Set this function on the Sensor Compensation Function window pe Tool gt Intelligent Function Module Tool gt Temperature Control Module gt Sensor Compensation Function Module Selection Sensor Compensation Function Module Selection art XY Address Module Type 0 OTTN
478. tion 3 4 2 57 3 Set the CT input assigned to each channel CT input channel assignment setting Un G264 to Un G271 gt Page 137 Section 3 4 2 54 4 Monitor Heater current process value Un1G256 to Un G263 and check the current value of when the heater is gt Page 136 Section 3 4 2 53 5 Set the value monitored in Heater current process value Un G256 to Un G263 in CTO Reference heater current value Un G280 to Un G287 Page 139 Section 3 4 2 56 6 Set the judgment value to perform the heater disconnection detection and output off time current error detection at the rate of the reference heater current value Heater disconnection alert setting Un G58 Un G90 Un G122 Un G154 lt gt Page 121 Section 3 4 2 32 7 To monitor only the current value of when the heater is on set CT monitor method switching Un G176 to ON Current 1 To monitor the current values of when the heater is on and off set it to ON OFF Current 0 gt Page 130 Section 3 4 2 46 8 Set how many times heater disconnection is detected successively to regard the heater as 4 uonoejeq uonoeuuoosiq Jej 9eH OZ P disconnected in Heater disconnection output off time current error detection delay count Un G166 7 gt Page 128 Section 3 4 2 40 1 For details on the output off time current error detection function refer to gt Page 263 Section 4 27 259
479. to Un1G16 Manipulated value for cooling MVc Un G704 to Un1G707 Even if an alert occurs before performing an online module change the same alert does not necessarily occur when the control is restarted For example if an upper limit alert with standby is set and an alert occurs before performing an online module change the module goes into the standby status and an alert does not occur when the control is restarted after performing the online module change To check the following items it is recommended to perform the online module change on the actual system eBueuo eujuo uo suonneoaugd p xipueddy XH Burs 1 ueuM ejnpoyy p xipueddy and verify that the operation of modules not to be changed is not affected The method and configuration to disconnect the connection with external devices are correct Turning off on and off the switch has no influence After the first use of the module base and terminal block the number of mounting removing is limited to 50 times in accordance with IEC 61131 2 Exceeding 50 times may cause malfunction 387 Appendix 4 2 Online module change conditions To perform an online module change a MELSECNET H remote I O module the Q64TCN GX Works2 and a base unit as listed below are required The Q64TCN with the first version and later supports the online module change 1 MELSECNE
480. to a Y60 to 2 22 l sET 1012 7 Error reset instruction ON E Yi012 X1012 E Wi150 HO 1 RST 1012 4 Error reset instruction OFF gt gt o 2 3 o o 2 ge 339 8 Program example of when not using the parameter of an intelligent function module a Setting on a remote I O station 1 Create a project on GX Works2 Select QCPU mode for PLC and select QJ72LP25 QJ72BR15 Remotel O for PLC Type X Project gt New New Project Use Label QI72LP25 QI72BR15 Remotel O Language 2 Add the Q64TCTTN to the project on GX Works2 D Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Right click gt New Module New Module Temperature Control Module 340 CHAPTER 7 PROGRAMMING 3 Display the Q64TCTTN Switch Setting window and configure the setting as follows Project window Intelligent Function Module gt Q64TCTTN gt Switch Setting Switch Setting 0010 Q64TCTIN Output Setting at CPU Stop Error D CLEAR D CLEAR D CLEAR Control Mode Selection o standard Control Auto setting at Input Range Change o bisable Setting Change Rate Limiter D Temperature Rise Temperature Drop Batch Setting Caution This dialog setting is linked to the Switch Setting of the PLC parameter Default value will be shown in the
481. topped 167 Pours jonuo 7 Buffer memory areas related to control method The following table shows the buffer memory areas related to control method Buffer memory address Setting range Buffer Two memory area ON P PD Reference CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 position name control control control control control Thermocouple 1 to 4 11 to 28 36 to 48 100 to 117 130 to 132 201 to 205 Input range UnG32 Un G64 UnG96 Un G128 MU Section Platinum resistance thermometer 5 to 8 53 54 140 to 34 2 12 143 201 to 205 aly Page 102 Set value Set a value within the temperature measurement range of UnG34 Un G66 UnG98 Un G130 Section SV setting the set input range 3 4 2 14 CHO Proportional Un G35 Un G67 Un G99_ Un G131 Configure the setting in the range from 0 to band P setting Fix the j 10000 0 0 to 1000 0 toward the full CHO Heating setting to 0 103 scale of the set input range proportional Un G35 Un G67 Un G99_ Un G131 Section band Ph setting 3 4 2 15 CHO Cooling The setting Configure the setting in the range from 1 to proportional Un G720 Un G736 Un G752 Un G768 4 10000 0 1 to 1000 0 toward the full is ignored band Pc setting scale of the set input range Fix the Fix the Page 105 CHO Integral The setting 1 to 1 to time I sett
482. trol 7 gt Page 163 Section 4 3 For details on the operation refer to the following gt Page 24 Section 1 3 2 1 Setting method Set the function in the following buffer memory area Forward reverse action setting Un G54 Un G86 Un G118 Un G150 7 s Page 119 Section 3 4 2 30 248 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 4 21 Loop Disconnection Detection Function Standard Using this function detects an error occurring within a control system control loop due to reasons such as a load heater disconnection an externally operable device such as a magnetic relay failure and input disconnection 1 How an error is detected Since the time a PID operation value becomes 100 or 0 the amount of changes in the temperature process value PV is monitored every unit time set and disconnection of a heater and input is detected 2 Examples of the errors detected The following are the examples of the errors detected a When control output is being performed The Q64TCN detects an error because the temperature does not rise even when control output is being performed under the following conditions When a heater is disconnected When input is disconnected or short circuited When the contact point of an externally operable device does not turn on After control output is output 100 an alert is output if the temperature does not rise by 2 C F or more within the loop disconnection detection judgment time set
483. ts Function version SERIAL 130411000000000 C Relevant regulation standards a MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC IN JAPAN 2 Checking on the front part bottom part of module The function version and serial number on the rating plate are also shown on the front part bottom part of the module Q64TCTTN RUN ALM Is s S eje e oI 9 9 7 3 a laja Function version eee m No 34 CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 3 Checking on the system monitor The function version and serial number can be checked on the Product Information List window X Diagnostics gt System Monitor gt product information List Product Information List Sort Order by Installation Order by Type Name Io Master Base Slot Type Series Model Name Point ir PLC Serial No Ver Production Number Intelli Q Q64TCTTN 16Point 0010 130410000000000 c Empty Empty Empty Create CSV File a Displaying product number For the Q64TCN is displayed since the product number display is not supported Point The serial number displayed on the product information list of a programming tool may differ from that on the rating plate and on the front part of the module The serial number on the rating plate and front part of the module
484. tting for temperature rise and temperature drop Select the value on Switch Setting For details on the setting refer to the following gt Page 292 Section 6 2 b Change rate setting For batch setting and individual setting different buffer memory areas are assigned The following is the buffer memory areas for each option E Buffer memory address Batch individual Buffer memory area name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Batch CHO Setting change rate limiter Un G52 Un G84 Un G116 Un G148 CHO Setting change rate limiter temperature rise Un G52 Un G84 Un G116 Un G148 Individual CHO Setting change rate limiter temperature drop Un G564 Un G596 Un G628 Un G660 For details on the buffer memory areas above refer to the following s Page 117 Section 3 4 2 28 c Time unit setting Set the time unit of the setting change rate limiter in Setting change rate limiter time unit setting Un G735 Un G751 Un G767 UnG783 gt gt Page 154 Section 3 4 2 83 Ex Operation of when individual setting is selected on Switch Setting CHLI Setting change rate limiter temperature rise Temperature process Un G52 Un G84 Un G1 16 Un G148 value PV CHO Setting change rate limiter temperature drop Un G564 Un G596 Un G628 Un G660 Set value SV 2 Set value MEAE SV 3 Set value SV 1 Time 1 minute Default value of Setting change rate limiter unit time setting
485. tuning mode selection Un G184 to Un G187 134 152 Auto tuning status Xn4 to 7 50 350 351 AUTO MAN mode shift UnXG50 Un G82 Un G114 146 115 116 CHLI Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants Un G63 Un G95 Un G127 Un G159 Boag uan Se Mt sae teens At aedes LP D arret 93 126 CHO Control output cycle setting Un G47 Un G79 Un G111 143 112 Control response parameter Un G49 Un G81 Un G113 145 114 Cooling control output cycle setting Un G722 Un G738 Un G754 770 112 CHO Cooling proportional band Pc setting Un G720 Un G736 Un G752 Un G768 103 CHO Cooling transistor output flag Un G712 to UniG715 wo a xke ER x eR 90 Cooling upper limit output limiter Un G721 Un G737 Un G753 769 108 Decimal point position Un G1 to Un G4 84 CHO Derivative action selection Un G729 Un G745 Un G761 7 7 150 CHO Derivative time D setting Un G37 Un G69 Un G101 133 105 CHO E PROM s PID constants read instruction Un G62 Un G94 Un G126 Un G158 92 125 CHO Forward reverse action setting Un G54 Un G86 Un G118 150 119 CHO Heater disconnection alert setting Un G58 Un G90 Un G122
486. ture rise completion soak Un G168 Page 129 Section 3 4 2 42 time setting CHO PID continuation flag Un G169 Page 129 Section 3 4 2 43 CHO Heater disconnection correction Un G170 Page 129 Section 3 4 2 44 function selection CHO Transistor output monitor ON delay Un G175 Page 130 Section 3 4 2 45 time setting CT monitor method switching Un G176 Page 130 Section 3 4 2 46 Resolution of the manipulated value 7 Un G181 Page 132 Section 3 4 2 48 for output with another analog module Cold junction temperature Un G182 Page 133 Section 3 4 2 49 compensation selection Auto tuning mode selection Un G184 Un G185 Un G186 Un G187 Page 134 Section 3 4 2 51 CHO Alert 1 mode setting Un G192 Un G208 Un G224 Un G240 CHO Alert 2 mode setting Un G193 Un G209 Un G225 Un G241 Page 135 Section 3 4 2 52 CHO Alert 3 mode setting Un G194 Un G210 Un G226 Un G242 Alert 4 mode setting Un G195 Un G211 Un G227 Un G243 CTO CT input channel assignment setting 374 Un G264 to Un G271 set for each current sensor CT Page 137 Section 3 4 2 54 APPENDICES Buffer memory area name Buffer memory address CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Reference CTO CT selection Un G272 to Un G279 set for each current sensor CT Page 138 Section 3 4 2 55 CTO Reference heater current value Un G280 to Un G287 set for each current sensor
487. ue of value MV for heating MVh value Mv for B3y CH3 output with for output with output with 0 R x x another analog another analog another analog module 6 module module Manipulated Manipulated Manipulated lue MV for pedi value MV for Mele Nn heating MVh B4y4 CH4 output with for output with output with 0 R x x another analog another analog another analog module 6 module module P 132 181 B5 AICHE ii value for output with 5 i dp 9 3 4 2 48 133 182 B64 CHs Cold junction temperature compensation selection 0 R W x Section 3 4 2 49 Page 133 183 B7 All CHs Control switching monitor 0 R x x Section 3 4 2 50 67 18 jueuuuBisse oww NOLVIO Lre jueuuuBissy yng ye Target Setting contents channel 2 Address Pe rad Default Read Automatic EPROM eating 3 wri decimal Standard Mi trol value Write setting be Reference Ix nitri i ili hexadecimal control cooing coniro T 12 availability sensor control 4 184 8 CH1 Auto tuning mode selection 0 R W x A toturi Auto tuning 185 B9 CH2 uto tuning uto tuning moda 0 RW mode selection mode selection _ 7 selection Page 134 Auto tuning Secti Auto tuning Auto tuning econ 186 BA mode BAH PES mode select
488. ue until the measurement is When the vibration ST starts by vibration completed When the temperature process value PV ycisturbance ofthe processiyaius decreases by 1 C F or more though it should increase after the self tuning is started as the starting ST When temperature process value PV increases by 1 C F or more though it should decrease after the self tuning is started as the starting ST b11tob15 fixed to 0 Unused 146 Indicates the values of Simultaneous temperature rise gradient data Un G731 Un G747 Un G763 Un G779 Simultaneous temperature rise dead time Un G732 Un G748 Un G764 Un G780 For details on the simultaneous temperature rise function refer to the following gt Page 234 Section 4 19 Point This area is enabled only for the following channels channels of the standard control CH1 to CH4 when the standard control is used CH3 when mix control normal mode or mix control expanded mode is used CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 69 CHO Temperature process value PV for input with another analog module Un G689 to Un G692 QAB Digital input value of the current voltage converted in another analog module such as A D conversion module connected to the system can be used as a temperature process value PV Store digital input values of current voltage converted by another analog module such as A
489. ulated based on the hunching cycle and amplitude of the temperature process value PV for the set value SV PID constants are calculated based on an oscillation occurred under situations such as after the control has been just started the set value SV has been changed and when a control response is oscillatory Execution method Control response Turning off and on CHLI Auto tuning instruction Yn4 to Yn7 starts auto tuning and changes PID constants upon completion PID constants are calculated based on the control response of when the manipulated value MV is turned on off therefore the control may become unstable The Q64TCN constantly monitors the control response PID constants are calculated and changed when the control response is slow PID constants are calculated based on the control response during temperature control therefore the control is stable Calculation result The optimum PID constants are calculated by one tuning In the standard control Loop disconnection detection judgment time Un G59 Un G91 Un G123 Un G155 is also calculated The optimum PID constants may not be obtained by one tuning Loop disconnection detection judgment time Un G59 Un G91 Un G123 Un G155 is not calculated PID constants setting when the characteristics of a controlled object fluctuate Users perform auto tuning again to change PID constants The Q64TCN automatically changes PID co
490. uning of PID g j 3 4 2 37 constants constants 7 Z TT Page 94 96 60 CH3 Input range 7 RT R W x Section 5 3 4 2 12 Page 101 St d Stop mode St d 97 61 CH3 Pi Mi Mos 1 R W x Section setting setting setting 3 4 2 13 Page 102 Set value SV Set value SV Set value SV 98 62 CH3 et value ia SV Set value SV 0 R W Section setting setting setting 3 4 2 14 Heating Proportional proportional Proportional Page 103 99 63 CH3 band P settin band Ph band P 30 R W x Section 9 e setting 3 42 15 setting Page 105 i Int It i 100 64 CH3 integral time 1 n oe Integral time 1 240 R W o Section setting setting setting 3 4 2 16 105 ivative ti Derivative time ivative ti 101 65 CH3 Derivative time dc Derivative time 60 R W x Section D setting D setting D setting 3 4 2 17 Alert set value Alert set 102 66 CH3 Alert set value 1 ss f 0 R W Alert set value Alert set 103 674 CH3 Alert set value 2 ys 2 0 R W 106 Section Alert set value 104 684 CH3 Alert set value 3 sg servade 0 R W 3 4 2 18 Alert set value Alert set 105 69 CH3 Alert set value 4 s f MESSI VEU 0 R W Heating upper ins pper limi ue pper limi 106 6Ay CH3 limit output 1000 R W output limiter m Ma output limiter x Page 108 limiter Section me imi 3 4 2 19 107 6Bp CH3 Lower little Systeimarea hoe 0 R W x
491. urrent value Un G280 to Un G287 Set the reference value of CTO Heater current process value Un G256 to Un G263 of when the heater is turned on s Page 136 Section 3 4 2 53 a Supported modules Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN b Setting range The setting range is within the heater current range of the current sensor selected in CT selection Un G272 to Un G279 Page 138 Section 3 4 2 55 Setting range Setting of CTO CT selection Un1G272 to Un G279 When CTL 12 S36 8 is used 0 0 to 100 0A 0 When CT ratio setting is used 0 0 to 100 0A 2 0 to 2000 0 00 to 20 00A When CTL 6 P H is used 0 00 to 20 00A 1 0 to 1000 0 0 to 100 0A c Default value The default values are set to 0 0 0A for all terminals 57 CTO CT ratio setting Un G288 to Un G295 CJ Set the number of second winding turning number of the current sensor CT to be connected This buffer memory area is available only when CT selection Un G272 to Un G279 is set to When CT ratio setting is used 0 0 to 100 0A 2 Ls Page 138 Section 3 4 2 55 a Supported modules Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN Ajowaw Jeynq ay Seed jueuuuBissy yng t b Setting range The setting range is 600 to 9999 c Default value The default values are set to 800 for all terminals 139 58 2 point sensor compensation offset value measured value Un G544 Un
492. used with this function The following table lists the buffer memory areas that can be used with this function the terminals used correspond to the buffer memory areas in the table CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS Buffer memory area name Buffer memory Reference MT2 Monitor CH2 MT3 Monitor CH3 MT4 Monitor CH4 Write data error code Un GO Page 84 Section 3 4 2 1 Decimal point position Un G2 Un G3 Un G4 Page 84 Section 3 4 2 2 CHO Alert definition Un G6 Un G7 Un G8 Page 85 Section 3 4 2 3 Temperature process value PV Un G10 Un G11 Un G12 Page 87 Section 3 4 2 4 Cold junction temperature Un G29 Page 91 Section 3 4 2 9 process value Input range Un G64 Un G96 Un G128 Page 94 Section 3 4 2 12 Sensor correction value Page 111 Section 3 4 2 Un G77 Un G109 Un G141 setting 21 CHO Primary delay digital filter Page 113 Section 3 4 2 Un G80 Un G112 Un G144 setting 24 Cold junction temperature Page 133 Section 3 4 2 1 Un G182 compensation selection 49 Page 133 Section 3 4 2 Control switching monitor Un G183 50 2 point sensor Page 140 Section 3 4 2 compensation offset value Un G576 Un G608 Un G640 58 measured value 2 point sensor Page 140 Section 3 4 2 compensation offset value Un G577 Un G609 Un G641 59 compensation value 2 point sensor Page 141
493. using this function Select one of the following characteristics Air Cooled The cooling characteristic is nonlinear and cooling ability is low Water Cooled The cooling characteristic is nonlinear and cooling ability is high Linear The cooling characteristic is close to the linear shape Cooling characteristics rate of when the manipulated value Cooling System and cooling characteristics for cooling MVc 10096 is 1 1 T T Water cooling Devices such as cooling water piping a Devices such as electron coolers 0 8 4 m P ae ccr a 06 L 3 mE HOD ee Devices such as Ls cooling fans 0 4 F f i xx Ar rcov rcu dena ED ME RICE Linear 0 2 f i re Complete linear characteristics eee Geena ey c peret e NC ed Pao a Se ORE 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 L 1 i 1 1 1 1 i 1 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 Manipulated value for cooling MVc e 100 PID constants calculated and executed based on this setting during auto tuning therefore more appropriate PID constants can be found by setting more applicable cooling characteristics of a device For details on the auto tuning function refer to the following s Page 1
494. ut cycle UnG47 UnG79 Un G111 Un G143 setting Heating The setting 112 control output Un G47 UnG79 Un G111 Un G143 1 to 100 1s to 100s Section cycle setting SSH 3 4 2 23 CHLI Cooling control output Un G722 Un G738 Un G754 Un G770 cycle setting CHO Configure the setting in the range from 100 to 100 Page 148 Overlap dead Un G723 Un G739 Un G755 Un G771 10 0 to 10 0 toward the full scale of the set input Section band setting range 3 4 2 72 Configure the setting in the range Manual The setting from 1000 to 1000 The setting is Page 149 reset amount Un G724 Un G740 Un G756 Un G772 100 0 to 100 0 Section setting IS Ignored toward the full scale 3 4 2 73 of the set input range 1 When outside the setting range a write data error error code 00044 occurs Point The Q64TCN automatically sets optimum PID constants if the following functions are used Auto tuning function 3 gt Page 173 Section 4 6 e Self tuning function gt Page 219 Section 4 17 pours jonuo 169 4 4 170 The position of the stable condition in P control or PD control can be shifted manually using this function Manual Reset Function By shifting the proportional band P an offset remaining deviation is manually reset Common The offset is reset by determining and setting the amount to shift the value of the ma
495. ut cycle setting 20s TO Ul H4F K20 Ki CH2 Control output cycle setting 20s To Ul H6F K20 K CH3 Control output cycle setting 20s TO ul H8F K20 K CH4 Control output cycle setting 20s q 4 MI M2 X10 X13 Yi CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise group NN F M WM 3 ul H2DA K setting Group 1 N CH2S e 8 imultaneous temperature rise group LTO ui H2EA Ki K setting Group 1 3 c CH3 Simultaneous temperature rise group a LTO 2 K2 Ki setting Group 2 S amp Simultaneous temperature rise group 20 LTO ul H30A K2 K setting Group 2 a z CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise AT 5 ER TO Ut H2DD K1 K mode selection Simultaneous temperature _ CH2 Simultaneous temperature rise AT Tw 5 LTO Ui H2ED K1 K1 mode selection Simultaneous temperature rise AT 9 E CH3 Simultaneous temperature rise AT ce LTO Ul H2FD K1 K mode selection Simultaneous temperature 0 rise AT o 2 Simultaneous temperature rise AT 5 0 LTO Ul H30D K1 K mode selection Simultaneous temperature rise AT 9 o lt SET YiB Setting change instruction ON 5 5 M1 Y1B XIB e 3 1 1 RST Y1B Setting change instruction OFF 50 gs A z SET M2 Flag 2 for setting value write ON 2589 29 M2 X10 X13 X1B 2 If PAS TO ui H22 K200 K CH1 Set value SV setting 200 C Beo E 2 0 Ul H42 K250 K CH2 Set value SV sett
496. ut with another analog module Un G689 to Un1G692 147 CHO Temperature rise judgment flag Un G17 to UMG20 cu iux cuc eur esI ides MES 89 CHO Transistor output flag Un G21 to UnG24 90 CHO Unused channel setting Un G61 Un G93 Un G125 157 124 Upper limit output limiter Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 138 108 155 CHO Upper limit setting limiter Un G55 Un G87 Un G119 6151 120 Cold junction temperature compensation accuracy ambient temperature 0 to 55 37 Cold junction temperature compensation resistor ees Oh is tesa ick gE gE a eagle gt Dal OR oe 272 275 Cold junction temperature compensation selection UnYG 182 ib tie Soak et D ee 133 Cold junction temperature process value Un G29 uu aad SG uie AMD REAL PR Raed Paste 91 Comparison of the functions between the Q64TCN and the Q64TG rhe RR Le ERE 361 Compatibility 363 Compensation lead wire 281 282 283 284 Condition for alert judgment 199 Condition to be able to perform PID control 167 Condition where CHLI Alert occurrence flag XnC to XnF turns off coii bre YE ex 199 Conditions for self tuning starting ST 223 Conditions for self tuning vibration ST 224 Conditions for the simultaneous temperature rise function Dx TP RIZ i eee ee 237 Co
497. uto Tuning Monitoring Loop disconnection detection judgment time l To the next page 178 Click the Auto Tuning Execution tab CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS From the previous page i Click stare of the channel where auto tuning is to be executed Auto Tuning Maripulated value MV Heating side manipulated value MVh CCoaling side manipulated value Mvc Proportional band P setting Heating control proportional band setting Ph proportional band Pc setting Integral time 1 setting 10 Click Cisy 11 Check that Status has changed from Executing to Tuned and click Auto Tuning PID control Process value PV Set value SV Maripulated value MV Heating side manipulated value MVh Cooking side manipulated value Mvc PID constant Proportional band P setting Heating control proportional band setting Ph Cooling side proportional band Pc setting Integral time 1 setting time D setting uonounJ 9p MELSOFT Series GX Works2 12 Click Ey 179 b Sequence program The execution procedure of auto tuning is as follows Start 6ATCN d Set the buffer memory Q ata setting Z gt Page 174 Section 4 6 2 y Operation mode setting f Switch Setting operation mode instruction Yn1 from off to on Confirm that Setting operation mode status Xn1 is on y Auto tuning start Switc
498. uuBisse oww NOLPIO Lre jueuuuBissy yng ye 80 10 11 12 13 14 LILIL13 occurs if the setting is changed during the operation mode By using the setting change rate limiter whether to set temperature rise temperature drop in a batch or individually can be selected on Switch Setting In the batch setting the target of setting change rate limiter is only this area In the individual setting this area is the setting target for the temperature rise For details referto gt 187 Section 4 9 Available only when the Q64TCTTBWN or Q64TCRTBWN is used With other models this area is handled as a system area By using the setting change rate limiter whether to set temperature rise temperature drop in a batch or individually can be selected on Switch Setting In the batch setting this area is handled as a system area In the individual setting this area is the setting target for the temperature drop For details refer to gt Page 187 Section 4 9 Available only the when heating cooling control normal mode is set on Switch Setting With other models this area is handled as a system area Available only when the mix control normal mode is set on Switch Setting With other models this area is handled as a System area 2 Buffer memory address for error history CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS _ E PROM Add
499. value The default values are set to 5 0 596 in all channels 111 Jeynq ey S amp a jueuuuBissy yng t 23 CHO Control output cycle setting Un G47 Un G79 Un G111 Un G143 Comm CHO Heating control output cycle setting Un G47 Un G79 Un G111 Un G143 Heating cooling Cooling control output cycle setting Un G722 Un G738 Un G754 Un G770 022 Set the pulse cycle ON OFF cycle of the transistor output In the heating cooling control the output cycle of the heating control and cooling control can be set individually Additionally Un G47 Un G79 Un G111 Un G143 are used for heating in the heating cooling control Manipulated value MV ON x OFF Transistor output Control output cycle l The ON time of the control output cycle is determined by multiplying the control output cycle by the manipulated value MV 96 calculated by PID operation If the manipulated value Mv is constant a pulse of the same cycle is output repeatedly 1 For the heating control output cycle the manipulated value for heating MVh is used For the cooling control output cycle manipulated value for cooling MVc is used Ex When 700 70 is stored in Manipulated value MV Un G13 to Un G16 and the value of the buffer memory is set as follows CHO Control output cycle setting Un G47 Un G79 Un G111 Un G143 100 100s 100s x 0 7 70 70s The
500. value Reference Set whether to hold or clear the transistor output status Output Setting at 0 CLEAR default value Page 162 when a CPU stop error occurs or when a CPU module is CPU Stop Error 1 HOLD Section 4 2 switched from RUN to STOP 0 Standard Control 1 Heating Cooling Control Normal Control Mode Made Page 159 E Set the control mode 2 Heating Cooling Control Expanded Selection Section 4 1 Mode 3 Mix Control Normal Mode 4 Mix Control Expanded Mode Set this item to change data of the related buffer Auto setting at inbut Range memory automatically when the input range is changed 0 Disable Page 216 u P E so that an error which is out of the setting does not 1 Enable Section 4 14 Change occur 0 Temperature Rise Temperature Drop Setting Change Select batch setting or individual setting for the Batch Setting Page 187 Rate Limiter setting change rate limiter at temperature rise and drop 1 Temperature Rise Temperature Drop Section 4 9 Individual Setting 1 Immediately after the control mode selection is changed a set value discrepancy error error code 001E occurs To 292 clear the set value discrepancy error turn off on and off E PROM backup instruction Yn8 CHAPTER 6 VARIOUS SETTINGS 6 3 Parameter Setting Set the parameter for each channel By setting parameters here the parameter setting is not required on a program 1 Setting method Open
501. ve been discontinued For how to select current sensors for heater disconnection detection refer to the following gt Page 138 Section 3 4 2 55 gt Page 139 Section 3 4 2 57 CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 2 Using the Q64TCN with Redundant CPU This section describes the use of the Q64TCN with the redundant CPU 1 GX Configurator TC GX Configurator TC cannot be used when the redundant CPU accessed via an intelligent function module on an extension base unit from GX Developer Consider a communication path which does not go through the intelligent function modules on the extension base unit Connect a personal computer with a redundant CPU using a communication path shown below Main base unit 06911692 JI Je er eere Extension base unit 4 GX Configurator TI cannot be used e Direct connection to use the CPU Connection through an intelligent function module on the main base unit Through Ethernet module MELSECNET H module or CC Link module 33 1uepunpes NOLP9O eui Bus z z 2 3 How to Check the Function Version and Serial Number The function version and serial number of the Q64TCN can be checked on the rating plate front part of a module or system monitor of a programming tool 1 Checking on rating plate The rating plate is on the side of the Q64TCN MITSUBISHI MELS MODEL Serial number first six digi
502. vious page 4 System Monitor p Monitor Status Connection Channel List NE d Mode C System Monitor Onine Module Change Men Base Pn Base LIO Adr 0000 0020 0030 0040 Main Base Information List Extension Basel Empty 16Point Intel Empty Empty Empty Power Base Installed Parameter 1O Network No Master Base m Base Model Nane Tae Slots oe Sees 2 HS 1 Power y 16Point 0000 16 0010 1 0020 16Point 0030 16Point 0040 Online Module Change r Operation r Target Module Module Change Address 0010 Execution Installation Module Name Q64TCTTN Confirmation Status Restart Status Guidance Module Control hange Module Selection Completed hen you change the intelligent Function module lease turn off Y signal of the changed module lease press next button when you are ready 7 Open the System Monitor Window Diagnostics gt Online Module Change Select Online module change under the Mode field and double click the module to be changed online Click to enable a module change When the following error window appears click and perform the operation described on and after Page 395 Appendix 4 5 3 MELSOFT Application The target module didn t respond The task is advanced to
503. vision number depends on this setting The following table lists the upper limit output limiter values which are set when this setting is enabled CHO Upper limit output limiter Un G42 Un G74 Un G106 Un G138 Division Number gt Page 108 Section 3 4 2 19 2 500 50 0 333 33 3 4 250 25 0 jueuuuBissy yng ye Aiowaw Jang ey siiejeq Lower limit output limiter Un G43 Un G75 Un G107 Un G1339 is set to 0 155 85 Sensor compensation function selection Un G785 Select the method of the sensor correction for each channel b15 to bi2 bii to b8 bz to b4 b3 to bo CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 For details on the sensor compensation function refer to the following s Page 205 Section 4 13 a Setting range Op 1 point sensor compensation standard 14 2 point sensor compensation b Enablement of setting contents Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction YnB OFF ON OFF during the setting mode Setting operation mode status Xn1 OFF c Default value The default value is set to 1 point sensor compensation standard 0 86 Temperature conversion completion flag Un G786 9 This flag checks whether the temperature conversion has started properly for each channel The following values are stored in this buffer memory area During conversion or unused CH 1 First temperature conve
504. y where the latest error is stored can be checked in Latest address of error history Un G1279 If the third error occurred The third error is stored in Error history No 3 and 1296 the start address of Error history No 3 is stored in Latest address of error history Un G1279 Latest error code address The start address of the error history Un G1279 where the latest error is stored is stored 266 2 Details of error history An error history consists of the following Address data 1280 Error history No 1 Error code First two digits Last two digits 1st error of the year of the year Error Month Day occurrence 1288 Hour Minute time Error ISIOU No 2 Second Day of the week 2nd error 1296 Error history No 3 Z Empty 1400 Error history No 16 Empty CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS Ex If the 17th error occurred The 17th error is stored in Error history No 1 and 1280 the start address of Error history No 1 is overwritten in Latest address of error history Un G1279 Latest error code address Un G1279 Address gt 1280 Error history No 1 1288 Error history No 2 The 17th error is stored in Error history No 1 and the 1st error history will be erased 2nd error 1296 Error history No 3 3rd error 1400 Error history No 16 16th error

MELSEC-Q Temperature Control Module User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents